Untitled

This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and electric
devices.
* LTVF-Hx2000 is the official name for the Hx2000 series inverters.
Safety Information
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating
conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death.
Safety symbols in this manual
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or
death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or
property damage.
Safety information
• Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate
the inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging area to
the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or
touch the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the
power is on or during operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious
property damage.
• Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has
been turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the
cover may result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.
• The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a
multi-meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or
motor cable.
• Supply earthing system: TT, TN, not suitable for corner-earthed systems
ii Hx2000 AC Drive
Safety Information
• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

• Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty, disconnect the
power supply and have the inverter professionally repaired.
• The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled to
avoid burns.
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get inside
the inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to
malfunction or result in a fire.
• Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty.
• The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to operate a
single phase motor.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and
result in an electric shock.
Note
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined in
IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LTVF-Hx2000 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the selected MCCB.
Hx2000 AC Drive iii

Quick Reference Table
Quick Reference Table

The following table contains situations frequently encountered by users while working with
inverters. Refer to the typical and practical situations in the table to quickly and easily locate
answers to your questions.
Situation Reference
I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power source is
p.13
applied.
I want to configure the motor’s parameters. p.200
Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor. p.327, p.510
What is auto tuning? p.200
What are the recommended wiring lengths? p.35
The motor is too noisy. p.229
I want to apply PID control on my system. p.149
What are the factory default settings for P1–P7 multi-function terminals? p.33
I want to view all of the parameters I have modified. p.239
I want to review recent fault trip and warning histories. p.51
I want to change the inverter’s operation frequency using a potentiometer. p.81
I want to install a frequency meter using an analog terminal. p.33
I want to display the supply current to motor. p.47
I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p.94
The motor runs too hot. p.304
The inverter is too hot. p.316
The cooling fan does not work. p.517
I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad. p.299
I want to display the supply current to motor. p.299
iv Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Contents
Table of Contens
1 Preparing the Installation.................................................................................. 1
1.1 Product Identification................................................................................. 1
1.2 Part Names ................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Installation Considerations........................................................................ 5
1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation ........................................ 6
1.5 Cable Selection ....................................................................................... 10
2 Installing the Inverter ....................................................................................... 13
2.1 Mounting the Inverter .............................................................................. 16
2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery........................................ 19
2.3 Cable Wiring ............................................................................................ 22
2.4 Post-Installation Checklist ....................................................................... 41
2.5 Test Run ................................................................................................... 43
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations ........................................................ 45
3.1 About the Keypad.................................................................................... 45
3.1.1 Operation Keys ........................................................................... 45
3.1.2 About the Display ........................................................................ 47
3.1.3 Display Modes ............................................................................ 51
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad ................................................................... 54
3.2.1 Display Mode Selection .............................................................. 54
3.2.2 Operation Modes ........................................................................ 55
3.2.3 Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode ......... 57
3.2.4 Switching between Groups in User & Macro Mode ................. 58
3.2.5 Navigating through the Codes (Functions) ............................... 59
3.2.6 Navigating Directly to Different Codes....................................... 61
3.2.7 Parameter Settings available in Monitor Mode ......................... 63
3.2.8 Setting the Monitor Display Items .............................................. 64
3.2.9 Selecting the Status Bar Display Items ..................................... 65
3.3 Fault Monitoring ....................................................................................... 67
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation ............................. 67
3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips ................................................... 68
3.4 Parameter Initialization............................................................................ 69
4 Learning Basic Features ................................................................................. 71
4.1 Switching between the Operation Modes (HAND / AUTO / OFF) ....... 74
4.2 Setting Frequency Reference ................................................................ 79
4.2.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)................................ 80
4.2.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)................................ 80
Hx2000 AC Drive v
Table of Contents
4.2.3 V1 Terminal as the Source ......................................................... 81

4.2.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2)
.................................................................................................... 89
4.2.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input ................................... 90
4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication.. 92
4.3 Frequency Hold by Analog Input ............................................................ 93
4.4 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)............................................ 94
4.5 Setting Multi-step Frequency .................................................................. 94
4.6 Command Source Configuration............................................................ 96
4.6.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device ................................ 96
4.6.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run
commands) ................................................................................ 97
4.6.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands) ............................................................... 98
4.6.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device ............ 99
4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention ..................................................... 99
4.8 Power-on Run ....................................................................................... 100
4.9 Reset and Restart ................................................................................. 102
4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times...................................... 103
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency ...................... 103
4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency ...................... 105
4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration ................................... 106
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency......................... 107
4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration ............................................................. 109
4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation .......................................................... 111
4.13 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control.......................................................... 112
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation ................................................... 112
4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation ............................... 113
4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation ..................................................... 114
4.14 Torque Boost ......................................................................................... 116
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost................................................................ 116
4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost .................................................................... 117
4.14.3 Auto Torque Boost 2 (No Motor Parameter Tuning Required)
.................................................................................................. 117
4.15 Output Voltage Setting .......................................................................... 118
4.16 Start Mode Setting................................................................................. 119
4.16.1 Acceleration Start...................................................................... 119
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking .............................................................. 119
4.17 Stop Mode Setting................................................................................. 120
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop ..................................................................... 120
vi Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Contents
4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking .............................................................. 121

4.17.3 Free Run Stop........................................................................... 122
4.17.4 Power Braking........................................................................... 123
4.18 Frequency Limit ..................................................................................... 124
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start
Frequency ................................................................................ 124
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency
Values ....................................................................................... 124
4.18.3 Frequency Jump ....................................................................... 126
4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting .................................................................. 127
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control.................................................... 128
4.21 Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay Control ............................. 130
5 Learning Advanced Features ....................................................................... 132
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References .................................................... 134
5.2 Jog Operation ........................................................................................ 139
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal ...... 139
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog by Multi-function
Terminal .................................................................................... 140
5.3 Up-down Operation ............................................................................... 141
5.4 3- Wire Operation .................................................................................. 143
5.5 Safe Operation Mode ............................................................................ 144
5.6 Dwell Operation ..................................................................................... 145
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation .............................................................. 147
5.8 PID Control ............................................................................................ 149
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation ................................................................. 149
5.8.2 Soft Fill Operation ..................................................................... 163
5.8.3 PID Sleep Mode........................................................................ 165
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) ................................................ 167
5.9 External PID........................................................................................... 168
5.10 Damper Operation................................................................................. 176
5.11 Lubrication Operation............................................................................ 178
5.12 Flow Compensation .............................................................................. 179
5.13 Payback Counter................................................................................... 181
5.14 Pump Clean Operation ......................................................................... 183
5.15 Start & End Ramp Operation................................................................ 187
5.16 Decelerating Valve Ramping ................................................................ 189
5.17 Load Tuning ........................................................................................... 191
5.18 Level Detection ...................................................................................... 193
5.19 Pipe Break Detection ............................................................................ 196
Hx2000 AC Drive vii

Table of Contents
5.20 Pre-heating Function ............................................................................. 198

5.21 Auto Tuning............................................................................................ 200
5.22 Time Event Scheduling ......................................................................... 203
5.23 Kinetic Energy Buffering ....................................................................... 216
5.24 Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention)............................... 218
5.25 Fire Mode Operation ............................................................................. 219
5.26 Energy Saving Operation ..................................................................... 221
5.26.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation ........................................... 221
5.26.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation ....................................... 222
5.27 Speed Search Operation ...................................................................... 222
5.28 Auto Restart Settings ............................................................................ 226
5.29 Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency Settings) .................. 229
5.30 2nd Motor Operation............................................................................... 230
5.31 Supply Power Transition ....................................................................... 232
5.32 Cooling Fan Control .............................................................................. 233
5.33 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings ..................................... 234
5.34 Read, Write, and Save Parameters ..................................................... 235
5.35 Parameter Initialization.......................................................................... 236
5.36 Parameter View Lock ............................................................................ 237
5.37 Parameter Lock ..................................................................................... 238
5.38 Changed Parameter Display ................................................................ 239
5.39 User Group ............................................................................................ 240
5.40 Easy Start On ........................................................................................ 242
5.41 Config (CNF) Mode ............................................................................... 243
5.42 Macro Selection..................................................................................... 244
5.43 Timer Settings........................................................................................ 245
5.44 Multiple Motor Control (MMC) .............................................................. 246
5.44.1 Multiple Motor Control (MMC) Basic Sequence ..................... 253
5.44.2 Standby Motor........................................................................... 257
5.44.3 Auto Change ............................................................................. 258
5.44.4 Interlock ..................................................................................... 267
5.44.5 Aux Motor Time Change .......................................................... 271
5.44.6 Regular Bypass......................................................................... 272
5.44.7 Aux Motor PID Compensation ................................................. 274
5.44.8 Master Follower ........................................................................ 276
5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control.................................................... 283
5.46 Press Regeneration Prevention ........................................................... 284
5.47 Analog Output........................................................................................ 285
5.47.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output......................................... 285
viii Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Contents
5.47.2 Analog Pulse Output................................................................. 289

5.48 Digital Output ......................................................................................... 292
5.48.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings................. 292
5.48.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay.... 297
5.48.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings............... 298
5.49 Operation State Monitor........................................................................ 299
5.50 Operation Time Monitor ........................................................................ 302
5.51 PowerOn Resume Using the Serial Communication ......................... 303
6 Learning Protection Features ...................................................................... 304
6.1 Motor Protection .................................................................................... 304
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH) ..... 304
6.1.2 Motor Over Heat Sensor .......................................................... 306
6.1.3 Overload Early Warning and Trip............................................. 308
6.1.4 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking............................................ 310
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection ....................................................... 314
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection ............................................................ 314
6.2.2 External Trip Signal................................................................... 315
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT) ........................................ 316
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss ............................................................ 316
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration ....................... 320
6.2.6 Low Battery Voltage Warning................................................... 321
6.3 Under load Fault Trip and Warning ...................................................... 322
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection .................................................................. 323
6.3.2 Low Voltage Fault Trip .............................................................. 324
6.3.3 Selecting Low Voltage 2 Fault During Operation.................... 325
6.3.4 Output Block via the Multi-function Terminal ........................... 325
6.3.5 Trip Status Reset ...................................................................... 326
6.3.6 Operation Mode for Option Card Trip ...................................... 326
6.3.7 No Motor Trip ............................................................................ 327
6.3.8 Broken Belt ................................................................................ 327
6.4 Parts Life Expectancy ........................................................................... 329
6.4.1 Main Capacitor Life Estimation ................................................ 329
6.4.2 Fan Life Estimation ................................................................... 330
6.5 Fault/Warning List.................................................................................. 331
7 RS-485 Communication Features ............................................................... 334
7.1 Communication Standards ................................................................... 334
7.2 Communication System Configuration ................................................ 335
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection ............................................ 335
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters ....................................... 336
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ......................... 338
Hx2000 AC Drive ix
Table of Contents
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ..................................... 339

7.3
Modbus-RTU Communication.............................................................. 340
7.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Input ........................................... 340
7.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication .................... 340
7.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication ................................... 341
7.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission ................................ 342
7.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group ................................ 343
7.3.6 Modbus-RTU Protocol .............................................................. 344
7.3.7 Compatible Common Area Parameter .................................... 348
7.3.8 Hx2000 Expansion Common Area Parameter ....................... 352
7.4 BACnet Communication ....................................................................... 367
7.4.1 What is BACnet Communication? ........................................... 367
7.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards ........................................ 367
7.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start ....................................... 368
7.4.4 Protocol Implementation........................................................... 370
7.4.5 Object Map ................................................................................ 371
7.5 Metasys-N2 Communication ................................................................ 379
7.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start ................................ 379
7.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard ................................... 379
7.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map ........................................ 380
8 Table of Functions.......................................................................................... 386
8.1 Drive Group (DRV) ................................................................................ 386
8.2 Basic Function Group (BAS) ................................................................ 389
8.3 Expanded Function Group (ADV) ........................................................ 395
8.4 Control Function Group (CON) ............................................................ 402
8.5 Input Terminal Group (IN) ..................................................................... 405
8.6 Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT) .................................... 413
8.7 Communication Function Group (COM).............................................. 420
8.8 Advanced Function Group(PID Functions) ......................................... 427
8.9 EPID Function Group (EPID) ............................................................... 439
8.10 Application 1 Function Group (AP1) .................................................... 453
8.13 Protection Function Group (PRT)......................................................... 471
8.14 2nd Motor Function Group (M2) ........................................................... 481
8.15 Trip (TRIP Last-x) and Config (CNF) Mode ......................................... 484
8.15.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x) ............................................................ 484
8.15.2 Config Mode (CNF) .................................................................. 485
8.16 Macro Groups........................................................................................ 490
8.16.1 Compressor (MC1) Group ....................................................... 490
x Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Contents
8.16.2 Supply Fan (MC2) Group ......................................................... 492

8.16.3 Exhaust Fan (MC3) Group ....................................................... 494
8.16.4 Cooling Tower (MC4) Group .................................................... 496
8.16.5 Circululation Pump (MC5) Group ............................................ 497
8.16.6 Vacuum Pump (MC6) Group ................................................... 499
8.16.7 Constant Torque (MC7) Group ................................................ 501
9 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 503
9.1
Trip and Warning ................................................................................... 504
9.1.1 Fault Trips .................................................................................. 505
9.1.2 Warning Message ..................................................................... 508
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips .................................................................. 510
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults ............................................................... 512
10 Maintenance .................................................................................................... 518
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists........................................................................ 518
10.1.1 Daily Inspection ......................................................................... 518
10.1.2 Annual Inspection ..................................................................... 519
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspection ................................................................. 521
10.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement .................................... 522
10.3 Storage and Disposal............................................................................ 525
10.3.1 Storage ...................................................................................... 525
10.3.2 Disposal ..................................................................................... 525
11 Technical Specification ................................................................................. 526
11.1 Input and Output Specifications ........................................................... 526
11.2 Product Specification Details ................................................................ 531
11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type)........................................................ 534
11.4 Peripheral Devices ................................................................................ 537
11.5 Fuse and Reactors Specifications ....................................................... 538
11.6 Terminal Screw Specifications.............................................................. 539
11.7 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating....................................... 541
12 Applying Drives to Single-phase Input Application ................................. 544
12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 544
12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current.................................... 545
12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance .............................................. 546
12.4 Wiring ..................................................................................................... 547
12.5 Precautions for 1–phase input to 3-phase drive.................................. 547
UL mark ................................................................................................................... 548
EAC mark ................................................................................................................ 548
Index ........................................................................................................................ 550
Hx2000 AC Drive xi
Table of Contents
xii Hx2000 AC Drive

Preparing the Installation
1 Preparing the Installation

This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, correct installation and
cable specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the
instructions.
1.1 Product Identification

The Hx2000 Inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive capacity
and power source specifications. Product name and specifications are detailed on the rating
plate. Check the rating plate before installing the product and make sure that the product
meets your requirements. For more detailed product specifications, refer to 11.1 Input and
Output Specifications on page 526.
Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from
defects. Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.
Hx2000 AC Drive 1
Table of Contents
Note
The Hx2000 75/90 kW, 400 V inverters satisfy the EMC standard EN61800-3 without installation
of optional EMC filters.
2 Hx2000 AC Drive
1.2 Part Names

The illustration below displays part names. Details may vary between product groups.
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)
Hx2000 AC Drive 3
Table of Contents
37–90 kW (3-Phase)
4 Hx2000 AC Drive
1.3 Installation Considerations

Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the
installation environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product.
The table below details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter.
Items Description
-10 ℃–50 ℃ (40 ℃ and above, 2.5% / ℃ Current Derating search.
Ambient Temperature*
50 ℃ 75% of the rated current of the drive if possible)
Ambient Humidity 90% relative humidity (no condensation)
Storage Temperature - 4–149 F (-20–65 ℃)
An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue
Environmental Factors
or dust
Lower than 3,280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level/less than 0.6 G (5.9
Altitude/Vibration
m/sec2)
Air Pressure 70 –106 kPa
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the
surface of the inverter.
Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the
inverter.
Hx2000 AC Drive 5
Table of Contents
1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation

When selecting an installation location consider the following points:
• The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
• The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of
the inverter.
• The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that
is fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to
allow air to circulate. The illustrations below detail the required installation clearances.
6 Hx2000 AC Drive
• Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the
inverter is to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider
the position of the inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan must
be positioned to efficiently transfer the heat generated by the operation of the inverter.
Hx2000 AC Drive 7
Table of Contents
• If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side and
remove the vent covers. Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the vent covers. Only
the Hx2000 inverters rated for up to 30 kW may be installed side-by-side.
Note
• The vent covers must be removed for side-by-side installations.

• Side-by-side installation cannot be used for the Hx2000 inverters rated for 37 kW and
above.
• For the Hx2000 inverters rated for 37 kW and above, if the installation site satisfies the UL
Open Type requirements and there is no danger of foreign objects getting inside the inverter
and causing trouble, the vent cover may be removed to improve cooling efficiency.
8 Hx2000 AC Drive
• If you are installing multiple inverters of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance to
meet the clearance specifications of the larger inverter.The Hx2000 inverters rated for
up to 30 kW may be installed side-by-side.
Hx2000 AC Drive 9
Table of Contents
1.5 Cable Selection

When you install power and signal cables in the terminal blocks, only use cables that meet
the required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to the
following information to assist you with cable selection.
• Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power wiring,
to ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 75 ℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75 ℃ for control terminal wiring.
• The inverters in the range between 15 and 90 kW must be grounded conveniently with
fixed connections.
• The inverters in the range between 5.5kW and 11kW must be grounded with and
industrial connector according to IEC 60309.
• The minimum size of the protective earthing conductor shall comply with the local safety
regulations for high protective earthing conductor current equipment.
• Only one conductor per terminal should be simultaneously connected
Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications
Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Load (kW) mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
0.75
1.5 1.5 1.5 16 16
3.5 12
2.2
3.7 2.5 2.5 14 14
3-Phase
5.5 4 4 12 12
200V
7.5 10 10 6 6 10 10
11 10 10 8 8
15 16 16 6 6
14 6
18.5 25 22 4 4
10 Hx2000 AC Drive
Load (kW) Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

0.75
1.5
2 14 1.5 1.5 16 16
2.2
3.7
5.5 2.5 2.5 14 14
7.5 4 12 4 2.5 12 14
11 4 4 12 12
15 6 6 10 10
3-Phase 16 9
400V 18.5 16 10 6 8
22 16 10 6 8
14 6
30 25 16 4 6
37 25 25 4 4
45 25 4 25 25 4 4
55 50 50 1/0 1/0
75 70 70 1/0 1/0
38 2
90 70 70 1/0 1/0
Hx2000 AC Drive 11
Table of Contents
Signal (Control) Cable Specifications
Terminals Wire thickness 1)

mm2 AWG
P1–P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/24/TI 0.33–1.25 16–22
AO1/AO2/CM/Q1/EG 0.33–2.0 14–22
A1/B1/C1/A2/C2/A3/C3/A4/C4/A5/C5 0.33–2.0 14–22
S+,S-,SG 0.75 18
Use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cables for signal wiring.
12 Hx2000 AC Drive
Installing the Inverter
2 Installing the Inverter

This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation of the Hx2000 series inverters,
including mounting and wiring of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration
diagram provided below to understand the procedures and installation instructions to be
followed to install the product correctly.
Installation Flowchart
The following flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover
equipment installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is
referenced in the steps.
Product Identification (p.1)
Select the Installation Location (p.5)
Mounting the Inverter (p.16)
Wiring the Ground Connection (p.25)
Power and Signal Wiring (p.26)
Post-Installation Checks (p.41)
Turning on the Inverter
Parameter Configuration (p.53)
Testing (p.43)
Hx2000 AC Drive 13
Table of Contents
Basic configuration diagram
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter
and peripheral devices.
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power
rating, capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices
(resistor brakes, contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral
devices, refer to
Peripheral Devices
Compatible Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models.
Circuit Breaker
Magnetic Contactor
MPCB/MCCB
Product (kW)
Rated Rated
Model Model
Current(A) Current(A)
0.75 MOG-S1/ MOG-H1 20 9
1.5 11 - 16 18
2.2 MOG-H1 14 - 20 18
3.7 24 - 32 25
3-
Phase 5.5 28 - 40 MNX 40
200 V MOG-H2
7.5 35 - 50 45
11 80 70
DN0-100M
15 100 80
18.5 DN1-160M 125 110
0.75 4 – 6.3 9
1.5 MOG-S1/ MOG-H1 6.3 - 10 9
2.2 6.3 - 10 9
3.7 11 - 16 18
3- 5.5 MOG-H1 14 - 20 18
Phase MNX
400 V 7.5 24 - 32 25
11 28 - 40 40
15 MOG-H2 35 - 50 45
18.5 45 - 63 50
22 DN0-100M 80 70
14 Hx2000 AC Drive
Circuit Breaker
Product (kW) Magnetic Contactor
MPCB/MCCB
30 100 80
37 125 110
DN1-160M
45 160 140
55 200 185
DN2-250M
75 250 225
90 DN3-400M 320 265
• Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more
detailed view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before
operating the inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.
• Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor installed on the input power
supply.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous situation.
Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly
rated circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.
• Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be installed
within 32.8 ft (10 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 600 kVA. Refer to
11.5 Fuse and Reactors Specifications on page 538 and carefully select a reactor that
meets the requirements.
Hx2000 AC Drive 15
Table of Contents
2.1 Mounting the Inverter

Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below.
Before installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance specifications,
and that there are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External Dimensions
(IP 20 Type) on page 534 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
1 Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark
the fixing points.
2 Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not fully
tighten the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter has been
mounted.
3 Mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel using the two upper bolts, and then fully
tighten the upper mounting bolts.
16 Hx2000 AC Drive
4 Install the two lower mounting bolts. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the
mounting surface, and that the installation surface can securely support the weight of
the inverter.
Hx2000 AC Drive 17
Table of Contents
• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The
inverter may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always
support the inverter using the metal frames when moving it.
• Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that is
suitable for the weight.
• Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter must
be installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting surface.
18 Hx2000 AC Drive
2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery

The Hx2000 series inverter comes from the factory with a CR2032 lithium-manganese
battery pre-installed on the I/O PCB. The battery powers the inverter’s built-in RTC. The
battery is installed with a protective insulation strip to prevent battery discharge; remove this
protective film before installing and using the inverter.
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic
components on the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the
components on the PCB with bare hands while you work on the I/O PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge
any electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a
metal object.
Follow the instructions below to remove the protective insulation strip and enable the RTC
feature on the Hx2000 series inverters.
1 Turn off the inverter and make sure that DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level.
2 Loosen the screw on the power cover then remove the power cover.
0.75–30 kW Models 37–90 kW Models
Hx2000 AC Drive 19
Table of Contents
3 Remove the keypad from the inverter body.

4 Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The
main PCB is exposed.
20 Hx2000 AC Drive
5 Locate the RTC battery holder on the I/O PCB, and remove the protective insulation
strip by gently pulling it.
0.75–90 kW Models
6 Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body
7 For detailed information on the RTC battery, refer to the battery specifications on page
522.
Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before
opening the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.
Hx2000 AC Drive 21
Table of Contents
2.3 Cable Wiring

Open the terminal cover, remove the cable guides, and then install the ground connection
as specified. Complete the cable connections by connecting an appropriately rated cable to
the terminals on the power and control terminal blocks.
Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring connections to the
inverter. All warning instructions must be followed.
• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

• Ensure that no small metal debris, such as wire clippings, remain inside the inverter. Metal
debris in the inverter may cause inverter failure.
• Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal block screws may allow
the cables to disconnect and cause a short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to page 539.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable
and result in electric shock.
• Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring, to
ensure that voltage drops do not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75 ℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75 ℃ for control terminal wiring.
• If you need to re-wire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter
keypad display is turned off and the charge lamp under the terminal cover is off before
working on wiring connections. The inverter may hold a high voltage electric charge long
after the power supply has been turned off.
• The accessible connections and parts listed below are of protective class 0. It means that the
protection of these circuits relies only upon basic insulation and becomes hazardous in the
event of a failure of the basic insulation. Therefore, devices connected to these circuits must
provide electrical-shock protection as if the device was connected to supply mains voltage.
In addition, during installation these parts must be considered, in relation with electrical-
shock, as supply mains voltage circuits.
[ Class 0 circuits]
➔ MULTI FUNCTION INPUT : P1-P7, CM
➔ ANALOG INPUT : VR, V1, I2, TI
➔ ANALOG OUTPUT : AO1, AO2, TO
• CONTACT : Q1, EG, 24,A1, C1, B1, A2~5, C2~5, S+, S-, SG
22 Hx2000 AC Drive
Step 1 Terminal Cover and Cable Guide

The terminal cover and cable guide must be removed to install cables. Refer to the
following procedures to remove the covers and cable guide. The steps to remove these
parts may vary depending on the inverter model.
0.75–30 kW / 35–90 kW (3-Phase)
1 Loosen the bolt that secures the terminal cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from
the bottom and away from the front.
Hx2000 AC Drive 23
Table of Contents
2 Push and hold the levers on both sides of the cable guide (❶) and then remove the
cable guide by pulling it directly away from the front of the inverter (❷). In some
models where the cable guide is secured by a bolt, remove the bolt first.
3 Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable
specifications, refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 10.
24 Hx2000 AC Drive
Step 2 Ground Connection

Remove the terminal cover(s) and cable guide. Then follow the instructions below to install
the ground connection for the inverter.
1 Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the
terminals. Refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 10 to find the appropriate cable
specification for your installation.
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)
37–90 kW (3-Phase)
2 Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal
Hx2000 AC Drive 25
Table of Contents
Note
• 200 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 100 Ω.

• 400 V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 10 Ω.
Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications to
ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified
grounding connections may result in electric shock.
This product can cause a D.C current in the protective earthing condcutor. If a RCD or
monitoring (RCM) device is used for protection, only RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on
supply side of this product.
Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring

The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to the
detailed descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before making
wiring connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in 1.5
Cable Selection on page 10 before installing them.
• Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short
circuits and malfuctions.
• Use copper wires only with 600 V, 75 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300 V,
75 ℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
• Power supply wirings must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting them to
the U, V, W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter. Motor should be connected
to the U, V, and W Terminals. Arrangement of the phase sequence is not necessary.
26 Hx2000 AC Drive
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)
Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
+ DC voltage terminal.
P1+ + DC link terminal
Used for connecting an external reactor.
Used for DC power inverter DC (+)
connection.
- DC voltage terminal.
N- - DC link terminal Used for a DC power inverter DC (-)
connection.
Hx2000 AC Drive 27
Table of Contents

P2+/B Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.
U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.
Note
Apply a DC input to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to operate the inverter on DC current input.
28 Hx2000 AC Drive
37–90 kW (3-Phase)
Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
+ DC voltage terminal.
Used for connecting an external reactor.
Used for a DC power inverter DC (+)
connection.
- DC voltage terminal.
N- - DC link terminal Used for a DC power inverter DC (-)
connection.
U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.
Hx2000 AC Drive 29
Table of Contents
Note
• Apply a DC input to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to operate the inverter on DC current
input.
• Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables to connect a remotely located motor with the
inverter. Do not use 3 core cables.
• Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 492 ft (150 m). For inverters < = 3.7
kW capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to
voltage drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance
and may trigger over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of equipment
connected to the inverter.
• Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula:
• Voltage Drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] / 1000
• Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is
minimized over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro surge
filter may also help to reduce voltage drop.
Distance < 165 ft (50 m) < 330 ft (100 m) > 330 ft (100 m)
Allowed Carrier Frequency <15 kHz <5 kHz <2.5 kHz
Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter is
ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power
cables to other terminals will damage the inverter.
• Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.
• The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with
other communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the
installation of noise filters or line filters may be required.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-
advanced condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the
inverter.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic
contactors on the output side of the inverter.
30 Hx2000 AC Drive
Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring

The illustrations below show the detailed layout of control wiring terminals and control board
switches. Refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.5 Cable Selection on page
10 before installing control terminal wiring and ensure that the cables used meet the
required specifications.
Switch Symbols and Description
Factory
Switch Description
Default
SW1 Terminating Resistor selection switch (Left: On, Right: Off) Right: OFF
SW2 NPN/PNP mode selection switch (Left: PNP, Right: NPN) Right: NPN
SW3 V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (Left: V1, Right: T1) Left: V1
analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch (Left: I2, Right:
SW4 Left: I2
V2)
analog voltage/current output terminal selection switch
SW5 Left: VO
(Left: VO, Right: IO)
Hx2000 AC Drive 31
Table of Contents
Input and Output Control Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
32 Hx2000 AC Drive
Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Function Label Name Description

Configurable for multi-function input
terminals. Factory default terminals and
setup are as follows :
P1: Fx
P1–
P2: Rx
Multi-function P7 Multi-function Input 1-7
P3: BX
terminal P4: RST
configuration P5: Speed-L
P6: Speed-M
P7: Speed-H
Common Common terminal for analog terminal
CM
Sequence inputs and outputs.
Used to setup or modify a frequency
reference via analog voltage or current
VR Potentiometer power input.
supply Maximum Voltage Output: 12 V
Analog input Maximum Current Output: 12 mA
configuration Potentiometer : 1–10k Ω
Voltage input for
V1 reference via analog voltage input
frequency reference
terminal.
Hx2000 AC Drive 33
Table of Contents

Unipolar: 0–10 V(12 V Max)
Bipolar: -10–10 V(±12 V Max)
reference via analog voltage or current
input terminals.
Voltage/current input for Switch between voltage (V2) and current
V2/I2 frequency reference (I2) modes using a control board switch
input (SW4).
Input current: 0–20 mA
Maximum Input current: 24 mA
Input resistance 249 Ω
Pulse input for frequency Setup or modify frequency references
TI reference input (pulse using pulse inputs from 0 to 32 kHz.
train) Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V
Output/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Used to send inverter output information to
external devices: output frequency, output current,
output voltage, or a DC voltage.
Operate switch (SW5) to select the signal output
type (voltage or current) at the AO terminal.
Analog Voltage/Current
AO Output Signal Specifications:
output Output
Output voltage: 0–10 V
Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V/10 mA
Output current: 0–20 mA
Maximum output current: 24 mA
Factory default output: Frequency
Selects a multi-function output signal or pulse
output, output frequency, output current, output
voltage, DC voltage by selecting one of the
Multi-function
output.
Q1 (Open Collector)
DC 26 V, 50 mA or less
Pulse Output
Pulse output terminal
Terminal
Output frequency: 0–32 kHz
Contacts
Output voltage: 0–12 V
Common ground contact for an open collector
EG Common
(with external power source)
-Maximum output current: 100 mA
24 24 V power supply
-Do not use this terminal for any purpose other
34 Hx2000 AC Drive

than supplying power to a PNP mode circuit
configuration (e.g. supplying power to other
external devices).
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s
safety features are activated.
( N.O.: AC250 V ≤2 A , DC 30 V ≤3 A
N.C.: AC250 V ≤1 A , DC 30 V ≤ 1 A)
Fault relay output
A1/C1/B1 Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are
A,B contact
connected (B1 and C1 open connection)
Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts are
connected (A1 and C1 open connection)
Factory default: Frequency
A2/C2
Multi-function Defined in the inverter signal features such as
A3/C3
relay output A output via the multi-function output terminal.
A4/C4
contact (AC 250 V≤ 5 A, DC 30 V≤ 5 A).
A5/C5
Used to send or receive RS-485 signals. Refer to
S+/S-
RS-485 signal line RS-485 Communication Features on page 92 for
/SG
more details.
Note
• While making wiring connections at the control terminals ensure that the total cable length
does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100 ft (30 m).
• Ensure that the cable length between the keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10 ft
(3.04 m). Cable connections longer than 10 ft (3.04 m) may cause signal errors.
• Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
• Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer than 6
inches from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the terminal cover.
Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection

The Hx2000 inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for sequence
inputs at the terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit requirements using the PNP/NPN
selection switch (SW2) on the control board. Refer to the following information for detailed
applications.
Hx2000 AC Drive 35
Table of Contents
PNP Mode (Source)
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default
setting is NPN mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the
terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source. If you are using an external 24 V source, build a
circuit that connects the external source (-) and the CM terminal.
NPN Mode (Sink)
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default
setting is NPN mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the
terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source.
36 Hx2000 AC Drive
Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical
Grounding
Hx2000, 400 V 0.75–55 kW (3 phase) inverters have EMC filters built-in and activated as a
factory default design. An EMC filter prevents electromagnetic interference by reducing
radio emissions from the inverter. EMC filter use is not always recommended, as it
increases leakage current. If an inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding connection, the EMC filter must be turned off.
Asymmetrical Grounding Connection

One phase of Intermediate
a delta grounding
connection is point on one
grounded phase of a
(TN Systems) delta
connection
(TN
Systems)
The end of a A 3-phase

single phase connection
is grounded without
(TN Systems) grounding
(TN
Systems)
• Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding structure (corner-earthed systems), for example a grounded delta connection.
Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.
• Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections.
Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been
fully discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.
Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the EMC
filter if the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection.
Hx2000 AC Drive 37
Table of Contents
Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter for 0.75–30 kW (3–Phase) Inverters
Refer to the figures below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt
with the plastic bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace
the plastic bolt with the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic bolt with
the metal bolt to enable the EMC filter.
38 Hx2000 AC Drive
Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter for 37–55 kW (3–Phase) Inverters
Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters for the Hx2000 inverters rated
for 37–55 kW.
1 Remove the EMC ground cover located at the bottom of the inverter.
2 Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default),
and connect it to the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with
asymmetrical grounding).
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and connect the EMC ground
cable to the right terminal to enable the EMC filter.
Hx2000 AC Drive 39
Table of Contents
Note
The terminal on the right is used to ENABLE the EMC filter (factory default). The terminal on the
left is used to DISABLE the EMC filter (for power sources with asymmetrical grounding).
Step 7 Re-assembling the Covers and Routing Bracket

Re-assemble the cable routing bracket and the covers after completing the wiring and basic
configurations. Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group
or frame size of the product.
40 Hx2000 AC Drive
2.4 Post-Installation Checklist

After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that the
inverter has been safely and correctly installed.
Resul
Items Check Point Ref.
t
Is the installation location appropriate? p.5
Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating
p.6
conditions?
Installation Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input? p.526
Location/Power
I/O Verification Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the
equipment?
(Degraded performance will result in certain circumstances. p.526
Refer to 11.7 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating
on page 541 for details.
Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the
p.14
inverter?
Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? p. 537
Are the power source cables correctly connected to the
R/S/T terminals of the inverter?
p.26
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W
terminals may damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the correct phase
rotation (U/V/W)?
p.26
(Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if three
phase cables are not wired in the correct rotation.)
Power Terminal Are the cables used in the power terminal connections
Wiring p.10
correctly rated?
Is the inverter grounded correctly? p.25
Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal
p.26
screws tightened to their specified torques?
Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly on
-
the motors (if multiple motors are run using one inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by a
p.14
magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)?
Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection and
electromagnetic interference filters installed correctly? p.26
(These devices MUST not be installed on the output side of
Hx2000 AC Drive 41
Table of Contents
Resul
Items Check Point Ref.
t
the inverter.)
Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control
-
terminal wiring?
Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded? -
If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function input
terminals defined prior to the installation of the control p.31
wiring connections?
Control
Terminal Wiring Are the control cables properly wired? p.31
Are the control terminal screws tightened to their specified
p.18
torques?
Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 165 ft (100
p.35
m)?
Is the total length of safety wiring < 100 ft (30 m)? p.35
Are optional cards connected correctly? -
Is there any debris left inside the inverter? p.18
Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating a
-
potential short circuit risk?
Are the control terminal connections separated from the
-
Miscellaneous power terminal connections?
Have the capacitors been replaced if they have been in
-
use for > 2 years?
Has a fuse been installed for the power source? p.538
Are the connections to the motor separated from other
-
connections?
Note
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted
cable pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.
42 Hx2000 AC Drive
2.5 Test Run

After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below to test
the inverter.
1 Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.
2 Select the command source.
3 Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
• If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change
according to the input voltage at VR?
• If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW4) set to ‘voltage’, and does the reference change according to the input
voltage?
• If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW4) set to ‘current’, and does the reference change according to the input
current?
4 Set the acceleration and deceleration time.
5 Start the motor and check the following:
• Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).
• Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and
that the motor speed reaches the frequency reference.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from
the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U
and V terminals.
Verifying the Motor Rotation

1 On the keypad, set DRV-07 to ‘1 (Keypad)’.
2 Set a frequency reference.
3 If the inverter is in OFF mode, press the [AUTO] key twice on the keypad to operate the
inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.
4 If the inver ter is operating in AUTO mode, press the [AUTO] key once on the keypad to
operate the inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.
5 Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
counterclockwise (forward).
Hx2000 AC Drive 43
Table of Contents
• Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have to
be adjusted depending on the load.
• To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that
exceeds the rated voltage for the equipment.
• Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As
inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor
speeds do not accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.
44 Hx2000 AC Drive
Learning to Perform Basic Operations
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations

This chapter describes the keypad layout and functions. It also introduces parameter
groups and codes required to perform basic operations. The chapter also outlines the
correct operation of the inverter before advancing to more complex applications. Examples
are provided to demonstrate how the inverter actually operates.
3.1 About the Keypad

The keypad is composed of two main components – the display and the operation (input)
keys. Refer to the following illustration to identify part names and functions.
3.1.1 Operation Keys

The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.
LCD
Display
HAND mode
LED indicator
AUTO mode
LED indicator
OFF mode
LED indicator
Hx2000 AC Drive 45
Key Name Description
[MODE] Key Used to switch between modes.
[PROG / Ent]
Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.
Key
[Up] key Switch between codes or increase or decrease parameter
[Down] key values.
[Left] key Switch between groups or move the cursor during parameter
[Right] key setup or modification.
Used to perform special functions, such as user code
[MULTI] Key
registration.
Used to cancel an input during parameter setup.
Pressing the [ESC] key before pressing the [PROG / ENT]
key reverts the parameter value to the previously set value.
Pressing the [ESC] key while editing the codes in any function
[ESC] Key
group makes the keypad display the first code of the function
group.
Pressing the [ESC] key while moving through the modes
makes the keypad display Monitor mode.
[HAND] Key Used to switch to HAND (local/manual) operation mode.
Used to switch to OFF (standby) mode or to reset the inverter

[OFF] Key
faults.
[AUTO] Key Used to switch to AUTO (remote) operation mode.
46 Hx2000 AC Drive
3.1.2 About the Display
Monitor mode display
Status bar
The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.
No. Name Description

Displays one of the the following inverter modes:
Mon: Monitor mode
PAR: Parameter mode
1 Operation mode
U&M: User defined and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Config mode
2 Rotational direction Displays the motor’s rotational direction: - Fx or Rx.
Displays a combination of a command source and a

frequency reference.
Command source
K: Keypad
O: Optional Fieldbus module
A: Application option
E: Time event
R: Built-in RS-485 communication
T: Terminal block
Frequency reference source
Command Source /
3 K: Keypad
Frequency reference
V: V1 terminal
I: I2 terminal
P: Pulse terminal
U: Up operation frequency (Up-down operation)
D: Down operation frequency (Up-down operation)
S: Stop operation frequency (Up-down operation)
O: Optional Fieldbus module
J: Jog frequency
R: Built-in RS-485 frequency
1–7: Multi-step frequency
Hx2000 AC Drive 47

The multi function key (the [MULTI] key) on the keypad is
Multi-function key (UserGrp
4 used to register or delete User group parameters in
SelKey) configuration
Parameter mode.
Displays one of the following operation states:
STP: Stop
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
: Forward command given
: Reverse command given
DC: DC output
WAN: Warning
STL: Stall
5 Operating status SPS: Speed search
OSS: S/W over current protection is on
OSH: H/W overcurrent protection
TUN: Auto tuning
PHT: Pre-heat
FIR: Fire mode operation
SLP: Sleep mode operation
LTS: Load tuning
CAP: Capacity diagnostics
PCL: Pump clean
6 Status display item Status bar display item
7 Monitor mode item 1 Monitor mode display item 1
10 Monitor mode cursor Used to highlight currently selected items.
48 Hx2000 AC Drive
Parameter edit mode display
The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.

Displays one of the the following inverter modes:
Mon: Monitor mode
Operation mode PAR: Parameter mode
1
U&M: User defined and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Config mode
2 Rotational direction Displays the motor’s rotational direction: - Fx or Rx.
Displays one of the following parameter group names:

DRV: Drive group
BAS: Basic group
ADV: Advanced group
CON: Control group
IN: Input terminal group
OUT: Output terminal group
3 Parameter group COM: Communication group
PID: PID group
EPI: External PID group
AP1: Application 1 group
PRT: Protection function group
M2: 2nd motor group
Multi-function key
Used to register or delete User group parameters in
4 (UserGrp
Parameter mode.
SelKey)configuration
Hx2000 AC Drive 49

Displays one of the following operation states:
STP: Stop
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
: Forward command given
: Reverse command given
DC: DC output
WAN: Warning
STL: Stall
5 Operating status SPS: Speed search
OSS: S/W over current protection is on
OSH: H/W overcurrent protection
TUN: Auto tuning
PHT: Pre-heat
FIR: Fire mode operation
SLP: Sleep mode operation
LTS: Load tuning
CAP: Capacity diagnostics
PCL: Pump clean
Displays the value of a monitor display item selected at
6 Display item
CNF-20 (Anytime Para).
7 Parameter value Displays the parameter value of currently selected code.
8 Setting range Displays the value range for the selected parameter.
9 Set value Displays the currently set value for the code.
10 Default Displays the factory default value for the code.
Displays the number and name of the currently selected

11 Code no. and name
code.
50 Hx2000 AC Drive
3.1.3 Display Modes

The Hx2000 inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure different functions. The
parameters in Parameter mode and User & Macro mode are divided into smaller groups of
relevant functions.
Hx2000 AC Drive 51
Table of Display Modes

The following table lists the 5 display modes used to control the inverter functions.
Keypad
Mode Name Description
Display
Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In
this mode, information including the inverter’s frequency
Monitor mode MON
reference, operation frequency, output current, and
voltage may be monitored.
Used to configure the functions required to operate the
Parameter mode PAR inverter. These functions are divided into 14 groups
based on purpose and complexity.
Used to define User groups and Macro groups. These
user-definable groups allow specific functions of the
User & Macro inverter to be grouped and managed in separate groups.
U&M
mode This mode is not displayed when you navigate through
the modes if no user groups or Macro groups have been
defined.
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information,
including the prevous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
Trip mode TRP operation frequency, output current, and output voltage
of the inverter at the time of the fault may be monitored.
This mode is not displayed if the inverter is not at fault
and fault trip history does not exist.
Used to configure the inverter features that are not
directly related to the operation of the inverter. The
settings you can configure in the Config mode include
Config mode CNF
keypad display language options, monitor mode
environment settings, communication module display
settings, and parameter duplication and initialization.
52 Hx2000 AC Drive
Parameter Setting Mode

The following table lists the functions groups under Parameter mode.
Function Group Name Keypad Display Description

Configures basic operation parameters. These
Drive DRV include jog operation, motor capacity evaluation, and
torque boost.
Configures basic operation parameters. These
Basic BAS parameters include motor parameters and multi-step
frequency parameters.
Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns,
Advanced ADV frequency limits, energy saving features, and,
regeneration prevention features.
Configures the features related to speed search and
Control CON
KEB (kinetic energy buffering).
Configures input terminal–related features, including
Input Terminal IN
digital multi–functional inputs and analog inputs.
Configures output terminal–related features,
Output Terminal OUT including digital multi–functional outputs and analog
outputs.
Configures the USB-related features and
communication features for the RS-485, Modbus-
Communication COM RTU, Metasys N2, and BACnet. Optional
communication module related features may be
configured as well, if one is installed.
PID process PID Configures the PID control-related features.
EPID process EPI Configures the external PID control-related features.
Configures the Sleep Boost, SoftFill, and Multiple
Application 1 AP1 motor control (MMC) features related to the PID
control.
Configures the HVAC features by setting the features
Application 2 AP2 such as load tuning, pump cleaning, and pay back
counter.
Application 3 AP3 Configures the time event-related features.
Protection PRT Configures motor and inverter protection features.
Motor 2 (Secondary
M2 Configures the secondary motor-related features.
motor)
Hx2000 AC Drive 53
User & Macro Mode
Function Group
Keypad Display Description
Name
Used to put the frequently accessed function
parameters together into a group. User parameter
User USR
groups can be configured using the multi-function
key on the keypad.
Provides different factory-preset groups of functions
based on the type of load.
Macro MCx Groups MC1, MC2, or MC3 is displayed when the
user selects the type of desired load. Macro groups
can be selected in CNF mode.
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad

The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to select
and configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values to turn specific
functions on or off or decide how the functions will be used. For detaled information on the
codes in each function group, refer to 8 Table of Functions on page 386. Confirm the
correct values (or the correct range of the values), then follow the examples below to
configure the inverter with the keypad.
3.2.1 Display Mode Selection

The following figure illustrates how the display modes change when you press the [Mode]
button on the keypad. You can continue to press the [Mode] key until you get to the desired
mode.
54 Hx2000 AC Drive
User & Macro mode and Trip mode are not displayed when all the inverter settings are set
to the factory default (User & Macro mode must be configured before it is displayed on the
keypad, and Trip mode is displayed only when the inverter is at fault, or has previous trip
fault history).
3.2.2 Operation Modes

The inverter is operable only when it is in HAND or AUTO mode. HAND mode is for local
control using the keypad, while AUTO mode is for remote control via communication. On
the other hand, the inverter stops operating when it is in OFF mode. Select one of the
modes (HAND / AUTO / OFF) to operate the inverter or stop the operation.
Follow the examples below to learn how to switch between operation modes.
Operating the Inverter in HAND mode
1 Turn on the inverter. The inverter enters OFF mode and the OFF LED turns on.
2 Move to Parameter mode and set DRV-07 (frequency reference) to ‘0 (keypad)’.
3 Press the [HAND] key to enter HAND mode (local control mode). HAND mode LED
turns on (the OFF LED turns off) and the inverter begins to operate.
4 Press the [OFF] key to stop the inverter operation. The inverter stops operating and the
OFF LED turns on.
Hx2000 AC Drive 55
Operating the inverter in AUTO Mode
1 In OFF mode (when the OFF LED is on), move to Parameter mode and configure the
command source at DRV-07 (frequecy reference source).
2 Press the [AUTO] key to enter AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, the inverter operates
based on the input from the command source set at DRV-07. For example, if DRV-07
(frequency reference source) is set to ‘0 (Keypad)’, the frequency reference is set, and
the run command is set to ‘ON’, the inverter starts operating as soon as the [AUTO] key
on the keypad is pressed.
3 Press the [Auto] key again to stop the inverter operation using the keypad. In AUTO
mode, the inverter begins or stops operating when the [AUTO] key is pressed.
Note
• You can stop the inverter operation by pressing the [OFF] key when the command source is
set to ‘Keypad.’ In this case, however, the inverter enters OFF mode from AUTO mode.
• If the network communication is set as the command source, the inverter is operable only in
AUTO mode. For example, if the run command is set to ‘ON’ via the network
communication and the inverter is in OFF mode, the [AUTO] key must be pressed to start
the inverter operation.
• The inverter is operable only in HAND and AUTO modes, but the Fire mode functions
operate even when the inverter is in OFF mode.
56 Hx2000 AC Drive
3.2.3 Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode

After entering Parameter mode from Monitor mode, press the [Right] key to move to the
next code. Press the [Left] key to go back to the previous code.
The keypad OFF LED is turned OFF, and the keypad

displays Monitor mode.
• Press the [Mode] key to change the mode.
Parameter mode is displayed.

• The Drive group is currently selected.
• Press the [Right] key.
• The Basic group is selected.

• The Advanced group is selected.

• Press the [Right] key 9 times.
• The Protection group is selected.

Hx2000 AC Drive 57
• The Drive group is selected again.
3.2.4 Switching between Groups in User & Macro Mode

User & Macro mode is accessible only when the user codes are registered or when the
macro features are selected. Refer to
Macro Groups on page 490 for details about user code registration or macro group
selection. After registering the user codes, or selecting a macro group, follow the examples
below to access the User & Macro group.
58 Hx2000 AC Drive
• Monitor mode is displayed on the keypad.

• Press the [MODE] key twice.
• User (USR) group in User & Macro mode is

displayed.
• The Macro (MC2) group in User & Macro mode is

displayed.
• User (USR) group in User & Macro mode is displayed

again.
3.2.5 Navigating through the Codes (Functions)
Code Navigation in Monitor mode

The display items in Monitor mode are available only when the inverter is in AUTO mode. In
Monitor mode, press the [Up] or [Down] key to move the cursor up or down. Different values,
such as the operating frequency, the output current, or voltage are displayed according to
the cursor position. The cursor does not move up or down in HAND mode or in OFF mode.
Hx2000 AC Drive 59
• In AUTO mode, the cursor appears to the left of the

frequency information.
• Press the [Down] key.
• Information about the second item in Monitor mode

(Output Current) is displayed.
• Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.
• Information about the second item in Monitor mode

(Output Current) disappears and the cursor
reappears to the left of the second item.
• Press the [Down] key.
• Information about the third item in Monitor mode

(Output Voltage) is displayed.
disappears.
• Information about the third item in Monitor mode

(Output Voltage) disappears and the cursor appears
to the left of the third item.
• Press the [Up] key twice.
• Information about the first item in Monitor mode

(Frequency) is displayed.
disappears.
60 Hx2000 AC Drive
• Information about the first item in Monitor mode

(Frequency) disappears and the cursor appears to
the left of the first item.
• Press the [Up] or [Down] key to move to a desired
item and view the information.
Code Navigation in Parameter mode

The following examples show you how to move through codes in different function groups
(Drive group and Basic group) in Parameter mode. In Parameter mode, press the [Up] or
[Down] key to move to the desired functions.
• Display turns on when the inverter is powered on.

Monitoring mode is displayed.
• Press the [MODE] key.
• Drive group (DRV) in Parameter mode is displayed.

The first code in the Drive group (DRV 00 Jump
Code) is currently selected.
• If any other group is displayed, press the [MODE] key
until the Drive group is displayed, or press the [ESC]
key.
• Press the [Down] key to move to the second code

(DRV 01) of the Drive group.
• Press the [Right] key to move to the next function
group.
• The Basic group (BAS) is displayed.

• Press the [Up] or [Down] key to move to the desired
codes and configure the inverter functions.
3.2.6 Navigating Directly to Different Codes
Hx2000 AC Drive 61
Parameter mode, User & Macro mode, and Config mode allow direct jumps to specific
codes. The code used for this feature is called the Jump Code. The Jump Code is the first
code of each mode. The Jump Code feature is convenient when navigating for a code in a
function group that has many codes.
The following example shows how to navigate directly to code DRV- 09 from the initial code
(DRV-00 Jump Code) in the Drive group.
• The Drive group (DRV) is displayed in Parameter

mode. Make sure that the fist code in the Drive
group (DRV 00 Jump Code) is currently selected.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The Code input screen is displayed and the cursor

flashes. A flashing cursor indicates that it is waiting
for user input.
• Press the [Up] key to increase the number to 16,
and then press the [PROG/ENT] key to jump to
code DRV-16.
• DRV-16 (Fwd boost) is displayed.

• Press the [MODE] key to view the options available
and use the [Up] or [Down] key to move to a desired
option.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key to save the selection.

• The setting is saved and the code is displayed
again.
• Press the ESC key to go back to the initial code of

the Drive group (DRV-00).
62 Hx2000 AC Drive
3.2.7 Parameter Settings available in Monitor Mode

The Hx2000 inverter allows basic parameters, such as the frequency reference, to be
modified in Monitor mode. When the inverter is in Hand or OFF mode, the frequency
reference can be entered directly from the monitor screen. When the inverter is in AUTO
mode, press the [PROG/ENT] key to access the input screen for a frequency reference.
Parameter setting in HAND/OFF mode
• Ensure that the cursor is at the frequency reference

item. If not, move the cursor to the frequency
reference item.
• When the cursor is at the frequency reference item,
detailed information is displayed and the cursor
flashes at the input line. A flashing cursor indicates
that it is waiting for user input.
• Press the [Left] or [Right] key to change places.
• Press the [Up] or [Down] keys to increase or

decrease the numbers, and then press the
[Prog/ENT] key to save the change.
Parameter setting in AUTO mode
• Ensure that the cursor is at the frequency reference

item. If not, move the cursor to the frequency
reference item.
• While the cursor is at the frequency reference monitor
item, press the [PROG/ENT] key to edit the frequency
reference.
Hx2000 AC Drive 63
• Detailed information is displayed and the cursor

flashes at the input line. A flashing cursor indicates
that it is waiting for user input.
• Press the [Left] or [Right] key to move the cursor.
• Press the [Up] or [Down] key to increase or decrease

the numbers.
• When you are done changing the frequency
reference, press [PROG/ENT] key to finish setting the
parameters.
• The newly entered frequency reference is displayed.
3.2.8 Setting the Monitor Display Items

In Monitor mode, 3 different items may be monitored at once. Certain monitor items, such
as the frequency reference, are selectable. The display items to be displayed on the screen
can be selected by the user in the Config (CNF) mode. However, in HAND mode or in OFF
mode, the first display item is permanently fixed as the frequency reference. On the top-
right corner of the keypad display’s status bar, another frequency item is displayed. This
item refers to the frequency reference when the inverter is not operating and the output
frequency when the inverter is operating.
The following example shows how to configure the display items in HAND mode.
64 Hx2000 AC Drive
• Monitor mode is displayed on the keypad. The output

frequency, output current, and output voltage are
displayed (factory default).
• Go to the Config (CNF) mode. In the Config mode,

codes CNF-21–23 are used to select the three
monitoring display items. The currently selected
display item and its setting are highlighted.
• To view the available display items and change the

setting for the third monitoring display item, press the
[Down] key to move to CNF-23 and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
• The currently selected display item for CNF-23
(Monitor Line–3) is ‘Output Voltage.’
• Press the [Up] or [Down] key to view the available

display items.
• Move to ‘4 Output Power’ and press the [PROG/ENT]
key to change the setting.
• Press the [MODE] key to go back to Monitor mode.

The third display item has been changed to the
inverter output power (kW).
3.2.9 Selecting the Status Bar Display Items

On the top-right corner of the display, there is a monitoring display item. This monitoring
item is displayed as long as the inverter is turned on, regardless of the mode the inverter is
operating in. Configure this monitoring item to display the type of information that suits your
needs.
This item can be configured only when the inverter is operating in AUTO mode. In HAND or
Hx2000 AC Drive 65
OFF mode, this monitoring item displays frequency reference only.
The following example shows how to configure this monitoring item in AUTO mode.
• Monitor mode is displayed.

• On the top-right edge of the display, the frequency
reference is displayed (factory default).
• Enter Config mode and go to CNF-20 to select the

items to display.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key. The currently selected

item is highlighted.
• Press the [Down] key twice to move to ‘2 (Output

Current)’, and then press the [PROG/ENT] key to
select it.
• The currently selected item is highlighted at CNF- 20

(the display item is changed from ‘Frequency’ to
‘Output Current’).
• Press the [MODE] key to return to Monitor mode.
66 Hx2000 AC Drive
3.3 Fault Monitoring
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation

The following example shows how to monitor faults that occurred during inverter operation.
• If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the

inverter enters Trip mode automatically and displays
the type of fault trip that occurred.
• Press the [Down] key to view the information on the

inverter at the time of fault, including the output
frequency, output current, and operation type.
Hx2000 AC Drive 67
• If there were any fault trips that occurred previously,

press the [Right] key to display the fault trip
information at the times of previous fault trips.
• When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is

released, the keypad display returns to the screen it
was at when the fault trip occurred.
3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips

The following example shows how to monitor multiple faults that occur at the same time.
• If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, the

number of fault trips occurred is displayed on the
right side of the fault trip type.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key to view the list of all the
fault trips.
• The list of all the fault trips is displayed.

• Press the [Down] key to view the types of fault trips
that occurred.
• Press the [Right] key to display the fault trip
information.
68 Hx2000 AC Drive
• When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is

released, the keypad display returns to the screen it
was at when the fault trip occurred.
3.4 Parameter Initialization

The following example demonstrates how to revert all the parameter settings back to the
factory default (Parameter Initialization). Parameter initialization may be performed for
separate groups in Parameter mode as well.
• Monitor mode is displayed.
Hx2000 AC Drive 69
• Press the [MODE] key to move to the Config (CNF)

mode.
• Press the [Down] key to go to CNF-40 (Parameter

Init).
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key to configure the
parameter initialization options.
• In the list of options, select ‘1(All Grp),’ and then

press the [PROG/ENT] key to perform parameter
initialization.
• The parameter initialization option is displayed again

when the initialization is complete.
70 Hx2000 AC Drive
Learning Basic Features
4 Learning Basic Features

This chapter describes the basic features of the Hx2000 inverter. Check the reference page
in the table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Basic Tasks Description Ref.

Operation mode selection
Used to select the operation mode. p.74
(HAND / AUTO / OFF)
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow you to setup or modify
source configuration for the p.79
a frequency reference using the Keypad.
keypad
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input voltages at the
source configuration for the p.81
terminal block (V1, V2) and to setup or modify a
terminal block (input p.89
frequency reference.
voltage)
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input currents at the
source configuration for the
terminal block (I2) and to setup or modify a frequency p.87
terminal block (input
reference.
current)
Frequency reference Configures the inverter to allow input pulse at the
source configuration for the terminal block (TI) and to setup or modify a frequency p.90
terminal block (input pulse) reference.
Frequency reference Configures the inverter to allow communication signals
source configuration for from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs, and p.92
RS-485 communication to setup or modify a frequency reference.
Frequency control using Enables the user to hold a frequency using analog
p.93
analog inputs inputs at terminals.
Configures the display of motor operation values.
Motor operation display
Motor operation is displayed either in frequency (Hz) or p.94
options
speed (rpm).
Configures multi-step frequency operations by
Multi-step speed
receiving an input at the terminals defined for each step p.94
(frequency) configuration
frequency.
Command source
configuration for keypad Command source configuration for keypad buttons. p.96
buttons
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the FX/RX
configuration for terminal p.97
terminals.
block inputs
Hx2000 AC Drive 71

Command source Configures the inverter to accept communication
configuration for RS-485 signals from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or p.99
communication PCs.
Configures the inverter to limit a motor’s rotation
Motor rotation control p.99
direction.
Configures the inverter to start operating at power-on.
With this configuration, the inverter begins to run and
Automatic start-up at the motor accelerates as soon as power is supplied to
p.100
power-on the inverter. To use automatic start-up configuration,
the operation command terminals at the terminal block
must be turned on.
Configures the inverter to start operating when the
inverter is reset following a fault trip. In this
configuration, the inverter starts to run and the motor
Automatic restart after reset accelerates as soon as the inverter is reset following a
p.102
of a fault trip condition fault trip condition.
For automatic start-up configuration to work, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block
must be turned on.
Acc/Dec time configuration
Configures the acceleration and deceleration times for
based on the Max. p.103
a motor based on a defined maximum frequency.
Frequency
Acc/Dec time configuration
Configures acceleration and deceleration times for a
based on the frequency p.105
motor based on a defined frequency reference.
reference
Multi-stage Acc/Dec time Configures multi-stage acceleration and deceleration
configuration using the times for a motor based on defined parameters for the p.106
multi-function terminal multi-function terminals.
Acc/Dec time transition Enables modification of acceleration and deceleration
speed (frequency) gradients without configuring the multi-functional p.107
configuration terminals.
Enables modification of the acceleration and
Acc/Dec pattern
deceleration gradient patterns. Basic patterns to p.109
configuration
choose from include linear and S-curve patterns.
Stops the current acceleration or deceleration and
controls motor operation at a constant speed. Multi-
Acc/Dec stop command p.111
function terminals must be configured for this
command.
Linear V/F pattern Configures the inverter to run a motor at a constant
p.112
operation torque. To maintain the required torque, the operating
72 Hx2000 AC Drive

frequency may vary during operation.
Configures the inverter to run the motor at a square
Square reduction V/F
reduction V/F pattern. Fans and pumps are appropriate p.113
pattern operation
loads for square reduction V/F operation.
Enables the user to configure a V/F pattern to match
User V/F pattern the characteristics of a motor. This configuration is for
p.114
configuration special-purpose motor applications to achieve optimal
performance.
Manual configuration of the inverter to produce a
momentary torque boost. This configuration is for loads
Manual torque boost p.116
that require a large amount of starting torque, such as
elevators or lifts.
Automatic configuration of the inverter that provides
“auto tuning” that produces a momentary torque boost.
Automatic torque boost p.117
This configuration is for loads that require a large
amount of starting torque, such as elevators or lifts.
Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the power
Output voltage adjustment supply to the inverter differs from the motor’s rated p.118
input voltage.
Accelerating start is the general way to start motor
operation. The typical application configures the motor
Accelerating start to accelerate to a target frequency in response to a run p.119
command, however there may be other start or
acceleration conditions defined.
Configures the inverter to perform DC braking before
the motor starts rotating again. This configuration is
Start after DC braking p.119
used when the motor will be rotating before the voltage
is supplied from the inverter.
Deceleration stop is the typical method used to stop a
motor. The motor decelerates to 0 Hz and stops on a
Deceleration stop p.120
stop command, however there may be other stop or
deceleration conditions defined.
Configures the inverter to apply DC braking during
motor deceleration. The frequency at which DC braking
Stopping by DC braking occurs must be defined and during deceleration, when p.121
the motor reaches the defined frequency, DC braking is
applied.
Configures the inverter to stop output to the motor
Free-run stop using a stop command. The motor will free-run until it p.122
slows down and stops.
Hx2000 AC Drive 73

Configures the inverter to provide optimal, motor
Power braking p.123
deceleration, without tripping over-voltage protection.
Start/maximum frequency Configures the frequency reference limits by defining a
p.124
configuration start frequency and a maximum frequency.
Upper/lower frequency limit Configures the frequency reference limits by defining
p.124
configuration an upper limit and a lower limit.
Configures the inverter to avoid running a motor in
Frequency jump p.126
mechanically resonating frequencies.
Used to configure the 2nd operation mode and switch
2nd Operation Configuration between operation modes according to your p.127
requirements.
Multi-function input terminal Enables the user to improve the responsiveness of the
p.128
control configuration multi-function input terminals.
4.1 Switching between the Operation Modes (HAND /

AUTO / OFF)
The Hx2000 series inverters have two operation modes–the HAND and AUTO modes.
HAND mode is used for local control using the keypad. AUTO mode is used for remote
control using the terminal inputs or networks commands (the keypad may still be used in
AUTO mode if the command source is set as ‘keypad’).
HAND Mode Operation

Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in HAND mode.
1 On the keypad, use the [Up], [Down], [Left], or [Right] keys to set the frequency
reference.
2 Press the [HAND] key. The HAND LED turns on and the inverter starts operating in
HAND mode.
3 Press the [OFF] key. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.
74 Hx2000 AC Drive
AUTO Mode Operation

Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in AUTO mode.
1 Press the [AUTO] key to switch to AUTO mode.

2 Operate the inverter using the terminal block input, commands via communication, or
keypad input.
3 Press the [OFF] key. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.
Mode Keys and LED Status
Keys / LED Description
Used to enter the HAND operation mode.
Used to enter the OFF mode (standby mode) or to reset fault trips.
Used to enter the AUTO operation mode or to start or stop inverter operation
in AUTO mode.
HAND LED
Turns on green (steady) during HAND mode operation.
Turns on red (steady) while the inverter is in OFF mode (standby), and flashes
OFF LED then a fault trip occurs. The LED turns on red (steady) again when the fault trip
condition is released.
Turns on green (steady) when the inverter operates in Auto mode, and flashes
AUTO LED
green when the inverter is in AUTO mode, but is not operating.
Hx2000 AC Drive 75
Basic HAND/AUTO/OFF Mode Operations
Mode Description
In HAND mode, operation is available only by the keypad input. In Monitor
mode, the currently set frequency reference is displayed at all times.
Also, in HAND mode:
• The first monitoring item is used to adjust the frequency with the
up/down and left/right keys. The set frequency is refelected in DRV-02
(HAND Cmd Freq).
• The motor’s rotation direction can be set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).
• Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
External Trip, and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal
HAND Mode functions).
(Locally • Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
controlled
operation mode) • The following advanced features are not available:
- PID / EPID control
- Flow compensation
- Pump clean
- Load tuning
- Motor preheating
- Time scheduling
- PowerOn resume
- Multiple motor control
• Inverter monitoring and protection features are available in HAND
mode.
In OFF mode, the inverter operation stops. Pressing the OFF key during
HAND/AUTO mode operations will cause the OFF LED to turn on. Then,
the inverter stops operating or decelerates and stops, according to the
deceleration options set by the user.
OFF Mode Also, in AUTO mode:
(Standby)
• Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
External Trip and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal
functions).
• Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
AUTO Mode
In AUTO mode, the inverter operates based on the command from the
(Remotely
command source set at DRV-06 (Cmd Source), with the frequency
controlled
reference from the source set at DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src).
operation mode)
76 Hx2000 AC Drive
Function Codes related to HAND/AUTO/OFF Operation Modes
Codes / Functions Description

DRV-01
Frequency reference in AUTO mode when DRV-07 is set to’ KeyPad’.
Cmd Frequency
DRV-02 Rotation direction of the keypad command in the HAND or AUTO mode.
KeyPad Run Dir Settings Description
0 Forward Fx operation
1 Reverse Rx operation
Frequency displayed at the monitor display item (Monitor Line-1) when the
DRV-25
HAND key is pressed in other modes (default frequency reference for
HAND Cmd Freq
HAND mode).
OUT-31–36
Set AUTO State (36) to ensure that the inverter is in AUTO mode.
Relay 1–5
OUT-31–36
Set HANDState (37) to ensure that the inverter is in HAND mode.
Relay 1–5
Switching between the HAND/AUTO/OFF Modes
Mode Description
Press the HAND key in AUTO mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
operates as follows based on the setting at DRV-26 (Hand Ref Mode).
Settings Description
0 Hand The inverter operates based on the operation direction
Parameter set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir) and the frequency
AUTO→HAND reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
1 Follow The inverter takes over the operation direction and the
Auto frequency reference from the settings for AUTO mode
and keeps performing the same operation. If the
inverter was stopped in AUTO mode, the operation
direction is set as Fx and the frequency reference is
set as 0 (no inverter output).
Hx2000 AC Drive 77
Mode Description
Press the AUTO key in HAND mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings
HAND→AUTO
set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’
press the AUTO key once again to start inverter operation.
Press the OFF key in AUTO mode to stop the inverter operation (the
AUTO→OFF
inverter enters OFF mode).
Press the AUTO key in OFF mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings
OFF→AUTO
set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’
press the AUTO key once again to start inverter operation.
Press the OFF key in HAND mode to stop the inverter operation (the
HAND→OFF
inverter enters OFF mode).
Press the HAND key in OFF mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
OFF→HAND operates based on the operation direction set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir)
and the frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
Operation Mode at Power Recovery

If a power interruption occurs during inverter operation in the OFF or HAND mode, the
inverter halts the operation with low voltage fault trip. Then, when the power is recovered,
the inverter turns on in OFF mode.
If the inverter was operating in AUTO mode at the time of the low voltage trip following the
power interruption, the inverter turns on in AUTO mode, and the operation may vary
depending on the inverter’s ‘PowerOn Resume’ and ‘Power-on run’ settings.
Note
• To operate the inverter using the keypad in AUTO mode, set DRV-06 (CMD Source) to
‘KeyPad’ and press the AUTO key to enter AUTO mode. Then, press the AUTO key on the
keypad once again to start the inverter operation.
• If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can be
reset by pressing the OFF key. After the reset, the fault trip is released and the inverter
enters OFF mode.
• If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can be
reset using the reset signal from the multi-function input terminal as well. In this case, the
inverter turns back on in AUTO mode after the fault trip is released.
78 Hx2000 AC Drive
Use caution when the inverter is set to operate in AUTO mode by commands over
communication, and if COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘yes’, as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up, without additional run commands.
4.2 Setting Frequency Reference

The Hx2000 inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency reference
for an operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1, V2) and current (I2)
signals], or RS-485 (digital signals from higher-level controllers, such as PC or PLC) can be
used.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
Frequency 7 Field Bus
DRV 7 reference Freq Ref Src 9 Pulse 0–11 -
source
10* V3
11 I3
12
V4
**
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
* ‘10(V3) ~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
** ‘12(V4) ~15(I5)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 79
4.2.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)

You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by pressing
the [ENT/PROG] key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to DRV-
07 (Frequency refernce source) and change the parameter value to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’. Input
the frequency reference for an operation at DRV-01 (Frequency reference).
0.00, Low
Frequency
01 Cmd Frequency 0.00 Freq– High Hz
reference
Freq*
DRV
Frequency
KeyPad-
07 reference Freq Ref Src 0 0–11 -
1
source
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured
with DRV-20.
4.2.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)

You can use the [UP] and [DOWN] cursor keys to modify a frequency reference. To use this
as a second option, set the keypad as the source of the frequency reference, by going to
DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to ‘1 (Keypad-2)’.
This allows frequency reference values to be increased or decreased by pressing the [UP]
and [DOWN] cursor keys.
LCD
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Display
Frequency
Freq Ref KeyPad-
07 reference 1 0–11 -
Src 2
DRV source
Frequency 0.00, Low Freq–
01 0.00 Hz
reference High Freq*
*You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured
with DRV-20.
80 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.2.3 V1 Terminal as the Source

You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1
terminal. Use voltage inputs ranging from 0–10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Use
voltage inputs ranging from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative
voltage inputs are used in reverse operations.
4.2.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input

Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (unipolar)’. Use a voltage output from an external source or use
the voltage output from the VR terminal to provide inputs to V1. Refer to the diagrams
below for the wiring required for each application.
[External source application] [Internal source (VR) application]
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source Src
Frequency at 0.00–
Freq at Maximum
01 maximum analog Max. Hz
100% frequency
input Frequency
V1
05 V1 input monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
Monitor[V]
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0–1 -
V1 input filter time
07 V1 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
IN
V1 minimum input
08 V1 volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
V1 output at
09 minimum voltage V1 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
(%)
V1 maximum input
10 V1 Volt x2 10.00 0 .00– 12.00 V
voltage
11 V1 output at V1 Perc y2 100.00 0–100 %
Hx2000 AC Drive 81
Parameter
Setting
maximum voltage
(%)
Rotation direction
16 V1 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
V1 0.00*, 0.04–
17 V1 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set
with code IN-01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in
code IN-11 (or IN-15) is 100 (%).
IN-01 Freq at
• Set code IN-01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes IN-02–IN-
100%
16. Motor will run at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
• Set code IN-11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes IN-01–IN-
16. Motor will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum
frequency–60 Hz) when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
IN-05 V1
Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
Monitor[V]
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations between reference
frequencies. Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant,
but this requires an increased response time.
IN-07
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach
V1 Filter
63% of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple
steps.
82 Hx2000 AC Drive
Code Description
[V1 Filter ]
These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset
values of the Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.
IN-08 V1 volt x1–

IN-11 V1 Perc y2
Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to ‘1 (Yes)’ if you need the
IN-16 V1 Inverting
motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input
(V1 terminal) signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system,
because it suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish
system sensitivity (resultant power of the output frequency will decrease
IN-17 V1 based on the analog input).
Quantizing You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code IN-07 to reduce the
noise, but increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause
pulsations (ripples) in the output frequency.
Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the

maximum input. Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the analog
maximum input (60 Hz), the output frequency will increase or decrease by
Hx2000 AC Drive 83
Code Description
0.6 Hz per 0.1 V difference.
When the analog input is increased, an increase to the input equal to 75%
of the set value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency
will increase according to the set value. Likewise, when the analog input
decreases, a decrease in the input equal to 75% of the set value will make
an initial change to the output frequency.
As a result, the output frequency will be different at acceleration and

deceleration, mitigating the effect of analog input changes over the output
frequency.
(ripple)
[V1 Quantizing]
4.2.3.2 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–+10 V Input

Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘2 (V1)’, and then set IN- 06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘1
(bipolar)’. Use the output voltage from an external source to provide input to V1.
[V1 terminal wiring]
84 Hx2000 AC Drive
[Bipolar input voltage and output frequency]
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
source
Frequency at
Maximum 0– Max
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% Hz
frequency Frequency
input
-12.00–12.00
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 V
V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
V1 minimum input
12 V1- volt x1 0.00 -10.00–0.00 V V
voltage
IN
V1 output at
-100.00–
13 minimum voltage V1- Perc y1 0.00 %
0.00%
(%)
V1 maximum input -12.00 –0.00
14 V1- Volt x2 -10.00 V
voltage V
V1 output at
-100.00–
15 maximum voltage V1- Perc y2 -100.00 %
0.00%
(%)
Hx2000 AC Drive 85
Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs
Command / Input voltage

Voltage Input
0–10 V -10–0 V
FWD Forward Reverse
REV Reverse Forward
-10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in relation
to the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when IN-06 is set to ‘1
(bipolar)’.
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with
10% output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80% output
ratio respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6–48
Hz.
IN-12 V1- volt

x1–
IN-15 V1- Perc
y2
For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions
IN-08 V1 volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2 on page 83.
86 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.2.3.3 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2)

You can set and modify a frequency reference using input current at the I2 terminal after
selecting current input at SW4. Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘5 (I2)’ and
apply 0–20 mA input current to I2.
Parameter
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 5 I2 0–11 -
Frequency at
Freq at Maximum 0–Maximum
01 maximum analog Hz
100% frequency Frequency
input
50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–24.00 mA
I2 input filter time
52 I2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
constant
I2 minimum input
53 I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
current
I2 output at
54 minimum current I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
IN
(%)
I2 maximum input
55 I2 Curr x2 20.00 0.00–24.00 mA
current
I2 output at
56 maximum current I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
(%)
I2 rotation direction
61 I2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
I2 0.00*, 0.04–
62 I2 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
Hx2000 AC Drive 87
Input Current (I2) Setting Details
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current
(when IN-55 is set to 100%).
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00, and default settings are used for IN-53–56, 20
IN-01 Freq at mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency reference of
100% 40.00 Hz.
• If IN-56 is set to 50.00, and default settings are used for IN-01 (60
Hz) and IN-53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a
frequency reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).
IN-50 I2 Monitor Used to monitor input current at I2.
Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
IN-52 I2 Filter
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.
IN-53 I2 Curr x1–

IN-56 I2 Perc y2
[Gradient and off-set configuration based on output frequency]
88 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.2.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal

I2)
Set and modify a frequency reference using input voltage at I2 (V2) terminal by setting SW2
to V2. Set the DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to 4 (V2) and apply 0–12 V input
voltage to I2 (=V2, Analog current/voltage input terminal). Codes IN-35–47 will not be
displayed when I2 is set to receive current input (DRV-07 is set to ‘5’).
Parameter
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 4 V2 0–11 -
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
V2 input filter time
37 V2 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
Minimum V2 input
38 V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output% at
39 minimum V2 V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
IN Maximum V2 input
40 V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output% at
41 maximum V2 V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
Invert V2 rotational
46 V2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
direction
V2 0.00*, 0.04–
47 V2 quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
Hx2000 AC Drive 89
4.2.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input

Set a frequency reference by setting the Frq (Frequency reference source) code (code 07)
in DRV group to 9 (Pulse) and provide 0–32.00 kHz pulse frequency to TI terminal.
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Frequency reference Freq Ref
DRV 07 9 Pulse 0–11 -
source Src
Frequency at 0.00–
Freq at Maximum
01 maximum analog Maximum Hz
100% frequency
input frequency
91 Pulse input display TI Monitor 0.00 0.00–50.00 kHz
TI input filter time mse
92 TI Filter 10 0–9999
constant c
TI input minimum
93 TI Pls x1 0.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
IN 94 TI Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum pulse
TI Input maximum
95 TI Pls x2 32.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
96 TI Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum pulse
Invert TI direction of
97 TI Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
rotation
TI 0.00*, 0.04–
98 TI quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
90 Hx2000 AC Drive
TI Pulse Input Setting Details
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The
frequency reference is based on 100% of the value set with IN-96.
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00 and codes IN-93–96 are set at default, 32
IN-01 Freq at
kHz input to TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.
100%
• If IN-96 is set to 50.00 and codes IN-01, IN-93–95 are set at default,
32 kHz input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference of 30.00
Hz.
IN-91 TI Monitor Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.
Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal
IN-92 TI Filter
frequency (when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.
IN-93 TI Pls x1–

IN-96 TI Perc y2
IN-97 TI Inverting–
Identical to IN-16–17 (refer to IN-16 V1 Inverting/IN-17 V1 Quantizing on
IN-98 TI
page 83)
Quantizing
Hx2000 AC Drive 91
4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication

Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485
communication. Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code (code 07) in the DRV
group to 6 (Int 485) and use the RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-/SG) for
communication. Refer to 7 RS-485 Communication features on page 334.
Frequency reference Freq Ref
DRV 07 6 Int 485 0–11 -
source Src
Integrated RS-485
1–
01 communication Int485 St ID - 1 -
MaxComID*
inverter ID
ModBus
0
RTU
Integrated 4 BACnet
Int485 -
02 communication 0–6
Proto 5 Metasys-N2
protocol
COM Modbus
6**
Master
Integrated Int485
03 3 9600 bps 0–8 -
communication speed BaudR
0 D8/PN/S1
Integrated 1 D8/PN/S2
Int485
04 communication frame 0–3 -
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1
configuration
3 D8/PO/S1
*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
** COM-02 is automatically set to ‘6(Modbus Master)’ when AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.

Otherwise a user can set the parameter value at user’s choice.
92 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.3 Frequency Hold by Analog Input

If you set a frequency reference via analog input at the control terminal block, you can hold
the operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the analog
frequency hold terminal. The operation frequency will be fixed upon an analog input signal.
Setting
Range
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
Frequency 7 Fied Bus

DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0–11 -
reference source 9 Pulse
10* V3
11 I3
12** V4
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
Px
65– Px terminal Analog
IN Define(Px: 23 0–55 -
71 configuration Hold
P1–P7)
*‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
** ‘12(V4) ~15(I5)’ are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 93
4.4 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)

You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting
DRV- 21 (Speed unit selection) to 0 (Hz Display) or 1 (Rpm Display).
Speed unit Hz/Rpm 0 Hz Display

DRV 21 0–1 -
selection Sel 1 Rpm Display
4.5 Setting Multi-step Frequency

Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies) to
the Px terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set at DRV-07. Px terminal
parameter values 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9 (Speed-H) are recognized as binary
commands and work in combination with Fx or Rx run commands. The inverter operates
according to the frequencies set with BAS-50–56 (multi-step frequency 1–7) and the binary
command combinations.
Parameter
Setting
0.00, Low
50– Multi-step
BAS Step Freq - 1–7 - Freq– High Hz
56 frequency 1–7
Freq*
7 Speed-L -
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px:
8 Speed-M 0–55 -
71 configuration P1–P7)
IN 9 Speed-H -
Multi-step
89 command delay InCheck Time 1 1–5000 ms
time
94 Hx2000 AC Drive
Multi-step Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
BAS Group 50–
Configure multi-step frequency 1–7.
56
Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set the
relevant codes (IN-65–71) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), or 9 (Speed-H).
Provided that terminals P5, P6, and P7 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-
M and Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be
available.
IN-65–71 Px
Define
[An example of a multi-step operation]
Speed Fx/Rx P7 P6 P5
0 ✓ - - -
1 ✓ - - ✓
2 ✓ - ✓ -
3 ✓ - ✓ ✓
4 ✓ ✓ - -
5 ✓ ✓ - ✓
6 ✓ ✓ ✓ -
7 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block
inputs after receiving an input signal.
IN-89 InCheck
After adjusting IN-89 to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P6, the
Time
inverter will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before
proceeding to accelerate or decelerate based on the configuration at P6.
Hx2000 AC Drive 95
4.6 Command Source Configuration

Various devices can be selected as command input devices for the Hx2000 inverter. Input
devices available to select include keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485
communication and field bus adapter.
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command Cmd 2 Fx/Rx-2

DRV 06 0–5 -
Source Source 3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
5 Time Event
4.6.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device

To use the keypad as the command source, press the [AUTO] key to enter AUTO mode.
Set DRV-06 to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to select the keypad as the command source and set the
operation direction at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).
Since the keypad is now the command source, operation starts when the AUTO key is
pressed, and it stops when the AUTO key is pressed again.
The OFF key may be used to stop the operation as well, but the inverter operation mode
will be changed to OFF mode.
Command
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 KeyPad 0–5 -
source
96 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.6.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run

commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by
setting DRV-06 (command source) in the Drive group to ‘1 (Fx/Rx)’. Select 2 terminals for
the forward and reverse operations, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 7 multi-
function terminal codes, IN-65–71 for P1–P7) to ‘1 (Fx)’ and ‘2 (Rx)’ respectively. This
application enables both terminals to be turned on or off at the same time, constituting a
stop command that will cause the inverter to stop operation.
Operation 0 Reverse
Keypad Run
IN 02 direction for 0–1 -
Dir 1 Forward
Keypad
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
Px terminal Px Define(Px: 1 Fx
IN 65–71 0–55 -
configuration P1– P7) 2 Rx
Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-06Cmd
Set to 1 (Fx/Rx-1).
Source
IN-65–71 Px Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
Define Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
Hx2000 AC Drive 97
4.6.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and

Rotation Direction Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by

setting DRV-06 (command source) in the Drive group to 2(Fx/Rx-2). Select 2 terminals for
run and rotation direction commands, and then select the relevant codes (2 of the 5 multi-
function terminal codes, IN-65–71 for P1–P7) to 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx) respectively. This
application uses an Fx input as a run command, and an Rx input to change a motor’s
rotation direction (On: Rx, Off: Fx).
Command Cmd
DRV 06 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–5 -
source Source
Px Define 1 Fx
65– Px terminal
IN (Px: P1 – 0–55 -
71 configuration 2 Rx
P7)
Run Command and Fwd/Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal –

Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-06 Cmd Source Set to ‘2 (Fx/Rx-2)'.

Assign a terminal for run command (Fx).
IN-65–71 Px Define
Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx).
98 Hx2000 AC Drive
4.6.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device

Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by setting
DRV-06 (command source) in the Drive group to ‘3 (Int 485)’. This configuration uses upper
level controllers such as PCs or PLCs to control the inverter by transmitting and receiving
signals via the S+, S-, and RS-485 signal input terminals at the terminal block. For more
details, refer to 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 334.
Parameter
Setting
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
Integrated
1–
01 communication Int485 St ID 1 -
MaxComID*
inverter ID
Integrated
ModBus
02 communication Int485 Proto 0 0–6 -
RTU
protocol
COM
Integrated
9600
03 communication Int485 BaudR 3 0–8 -
bps
speed
Integrated
D8 / PN
04 communication Int485 Mode 0 0–3 -
/ S1
frame setup
*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’
4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention

The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors to only run in one
direction. Pressing the [REV] key on the keypad when direction prevention is configured,
will cause the motor to decelerate to 0 Hz and stop. The inverter will remain on.
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
0 None
Forward
Run prevention 1
ADV 09 Run Prevent Prev 0–2 -
options
Reverse
2
Prev
Hx2000 AC Drive 99
Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details
Code Description
Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting Description
ADV-09 Run 0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.
4.8 Power-on Run

A power-on run feature can be setup to start an inverter operation after powering up based
on the run commands by terminal inputs or communication (if they are configured). In
AUTO mode, the inverter starts operating at power-on when the following conditions are
met.
Terminal block input as the command source

(If they have been configured). To enable power-on run, set DRV-06 (command source) to
‘1 (Fx/Rx-1)’ or ‘2 (Fx/Rx-2)’ in the Drive group and ADV-10 to ‘1’ in the Advanced group.
Command Fx/Rx-1 or
DRV 06 Cmd Source 1, 2 0–5 -
source Fx/Rx-2
Power-on
ADV 10 Power-on run 1 Yes 0–1 -
Run
100 Hx2000 AC Drive

Communication as the command source

To enable power-on resume, set COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) to ‘YES’, and set DRV-06 to
‘3 (Int 485)’ or ‘4 (Field Bus).’ If the power input to the inverter is cut off due to a power
interruption, the inverter memorizes the run command, frequency reference, and the
acc/dec time settings at the time of power interruption. If COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set
to ‘Yes’, the inverter starts operating based on these settings as soon as the power supply
resumes.
Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Setting Range Unit
3 Int 485
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 0-5 -
4 Field Bus
PowerOn 0 No
COM 96 Power-on resume 0-1 -
Resume 1 Yes
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 4 the
same as bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F pattern
and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and restart’
enabled, the terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on again to
begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
Hx2000 AC Drive 101

4.9 Reset and Restart

Reset and restart operations can be setup for inverter operation following a fault trip, based
on the terminal block operation command (if it is configured). When a fault trip occurs, the
inverter cuts off the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault trip may be triggered if
the inverter begins its operation while motor load is in a free-run state. In PRT-08, bit 1 sets
the option for all the fault trips, other than low voltage trips, and bit 2 sets the option for low
voltage trips. PRT-10 sets the delay time for restart (the time for the inverter to wait before it
restarts).
The number of auto-restarts (PRT-09) refers to the number of times the inverter will try
restarting its operation. If fault trips occur again after restart, the retry number counts down
each time the inverter restarts until the number becomes ‘0.’ Once the inverter restarts
successfully after the initial fault trip, the inverter does not restart until the next fault trip
occurs. The number of auto-restarts set at PRT-09 that decreased after a restart reverts to
the original setting value if successful operation continues for certain period of time.
LCD Setting
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit
Display Range
Cmd
DRV 06 Command source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
Source
RST
08 Reset restart setup 00 00–11 Bit
Restart
Retry
PRT 09 No. of auto restart 6 0–10 -
Number
Auto restart delay Retry
10 5.0 0.1–600.0 sec
time Delay
102 Hx2000 AC Drive

Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 2 the
same as bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F pattern
and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and restart’
enabled, the terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on again to
begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency

Acc/Dec time values can be set based on maximum frequency, not on inverter operation
frequency. To set Acc/Dec time values based on maximum frequency, set BAS- 08
(Acc/Dec reference) in the Basic group to ‘0 (Max Freq)’.
Acceleration time set at DRV-03 (Acceleration time) refers to the time required for the
inverter to reach the maximum frequency from a stopped (0 Hz) state. Likewise, the value
set at the DRV-04 (Deceleration time) refers to the time required to return to a stopped state
(0 Hz) from the maximum frequency.
Parameter
Setting
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 Sec
DRV
Maximum
20 Max Freq 50.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Acc/Dec reference Ramp T
08 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
BAS frequency Mode
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1 sec 0–2 -
Hx2000 AC Drive 103

Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum
frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating
frequency.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times are
BAS-08 Ramp T set to 5 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz
Mode (half of 60 Hz), the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds
(half of 5 seconds).
Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when
a more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load
characteristics, or when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
BAS-09 Time
scale Configuration Description
0 0.01 sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1 sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1 sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change
from 1 second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.
104 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency

Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency from
the existing operation frequency. To set the Acc/Dec time values based on the existing
operation frequency, set BAS-08 (acc/dec reference) in the Basic group to ‘1 (Delta Freq)’.

03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
DRV
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
Ramp T
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference 1 Delta Freq 0 - 1 -
Mode
Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on
Maximum frequency.
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum
frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation
frequency.
BAS-08 Ramp T If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references
Mode are used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration
stage will take 5 seconds (refer to the graph below).
Hx2000 AC Drive 105

4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration

Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC
(acceleration time) and DEC (deceleration time) codes in the DRV group.
DRV
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step Acc Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
70–
BAS acceleration/Decele
83 Dec Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
ration time1–7
11 XCEL-L
65– Px terminal Px Define
12 XCEL-M 0–55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
IN 13 XCEL-H
Multi-step
In Check
89 command delay 1 1–5000 ms
Time
time
Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-70–82
Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.
Acc Time 1–7
BAS-71–83
Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
Dec Time 1–7
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time
inputs
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
IN-65–71 12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
Px Define (P1– 13 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
P7)
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will control
the acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values set with
BAS-70–82 and BAS-71–83.
If, for example, the P6 and P7 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL-M
respectively, the following operation will be available.
106 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Acc/Dec time P7 P6
0 - -
1 - ✓
2 ✓ -
3 ✓ ✓
[Multi-function terminal P6, P7 configuration]
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If
IN-89 In Check IN-89 is set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the
Time inverter searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the time
expires, the Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input received at P6
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency

You can switch between two different sets of Acc/Dec times (Acc/Dec gradients) by
configuring the switch frequency without configuring the multi-function terminals.
Parameter
Setting
DRV
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step
70 acceleration Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time1
BAS
Multi-step
71 deceleration Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time1
Acc/Dec time Xcel Change 0–Maximum
ADV 60 30.00 Hz
switch frequency Fr frequency
Hx2000 AC Drive 107

Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients
configured at BAS-70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation
frequency is at or below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency
exceeds the switch frequency, the gradient level configured for the
accelerration and deceleration times (set at DRV-03 and DRV-04) will be
used.
If you configure the P1–P7 multi-function input terminals for multi-step
Acc/Dec gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will operate
based on the Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals instead of the Acc/Dec switch
frequency configurations.
ADV-60 The ‘Xcel Change Fr’ parameter is applied only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit
Xcel Change Fr Mode) is set to ‘NO’.
108 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration

Acc/Dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the inverter’s
acceleration and deceleration curves. Linear pattern features a linear increase or decrease
to the output frequency, at a fixed rate. For an S-curve pattern a smoother and more
gradual increase or decrease of output frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator doors,
etc. S-curve gradient level can be adjusted using codes ADV-03–06 in the advanced group.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference Ramp T mode 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear -
0–1
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 1 S-curve -
S-curve Acc start
03 Acc S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
ADV S-curve Acc end

04 Acc S End 40 1–100 %
gradient
S-curve Dec start
05 Dec S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
S-curve Dec end
06 Dec S End 40 1–100 %
gradient
Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve,
Acc/Dec pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage,
up to half of total acceleration.
ADV-03 Acc S If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
Start ADV-03 is set to 50%, ADV-03 configures acceleration up to 30 Hz (half
of 60 Hz). The inverter will operate S-curve acceleration in the 0-15 Hz
frequency range (50% of 30 Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the
remaining acceleration within the 15–30 Hz frequency range.
Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve
Acc/Dec pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage,
above half of total acceleration.
ADV-04 Acc S End If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz
and ADV-04 is set to 50%, setting ADV-04 configures acceleration to
increase from 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz) to 60 Hz (end of acceleration). Linear
acceleration will be applied within the 30-45 Hz frequency range. The
Hx2000 AC Drive 109

Code Description
inverter will perform an S-curve acceleration for the remaining
acceleration in the 45–60 Hz frequency range.
ADV-05 Dec S Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes ADV-05
Start – and ADV-06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes ADV-
ADV-06 Dec S End 03 and ADV-04.
[Acceleration / deceleration pattern configuration]
[Acceleration / deceleration S-curve parrten configuration]
110 Hx2000 AC Drive

Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are in use.
4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation

Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate
the inverter at a fixed frequency.
Px Define
Px terminal
IN 65–71 (Px: P1– 14 XCEL Stop 0–55 -
configuration
P7)
Hx2000 AC Drive 111

4.13 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control

Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels, and output patterns to achieve a
target output frequency with V/F control. The amount of of torque boost used during low
frequency operations can also be adjusted.
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation

A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a
fixed rate for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. A linear V/F
pattern is partcularly useful when a constant torque load is applied.
09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–1 -
DRV 18 Base frequency Base Freq 50.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -
Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output
DRV-18 Base
frequency when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating
Freq
plate to set this parameter value.
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the
inverter starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage
while the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output
voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).
DRV-19 Start
Freq
112 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation

Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides non-
linear acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the whole
frequency range.
Grou Setting
Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
p Range
1 Square
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern Square 0–3 -
3
2
Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation - Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the parameter value to ‘1 (Square)’ or ‘2 (Square2)’ according to the
load’s start characteristics.
Setting Function
BAS-07 V/F 1 Square The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 1.5
Pattern square of the operation frequency.
3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 2
square of the operation frequency. This setup is ideal for
variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.
Hx2000 AC Drive 113

4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation

The Hx2000 inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of special motors.
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0–3 -
User Frequency 0–Maximum
41 User Freq 1 12.50 Hz
1 frequency
42 User Voltage 1 User Volt 1 25 0–100% %
2 frequency
BAS 44 User Voltage 2 User Volt 2 50 0–100% %
3 frequency
4 frequency
User V/F pattern Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-41 User Freq Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq x) for
1 –BAS-48 User start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond
Volt 4 with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt x).
114 Hx2000 AC Drive

The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15
(motor rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to ‘0’ it will be based on the input voltage.
• When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output
pattern away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient motor
torque or motor overheating due to over-excitation.
• When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque boost
(DRV-17) do not operate.
Hx2000 AC Drive 115

4.14 Torque Boost
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost

Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during low speed operation or
motor start. Increase low speed torque or improve motor starting properties by manually
increasing output voltage. Configure manual torque boost while running loads that require
high starting torque, such as lift-type loads.
Torque
15 Torque boost options 0 Manual 0–2 -
Boost
DRV
16 Forward torque boost Fwd Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
17 Reverse torque boost Rev Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-16 Fwd
Set torque boost for forward operation.
Boost
DRV-17 Rev
Set torque boost for reverse operation.
Boost
Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating
116 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost

Set DRV-15 to ‘Auto 1’ or ‘Auto 2’ to select the type of torque boost. While manual torque
boost adjusts the inverter output based on the setting values regardless of the type of load
used in the operation, auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the
amount of output voltage required for torque boost based on the entered motor parameters.
Because auto torque boost requires motor-related parameters such as stator resistance,
inductance, and no-load current, auto tuning (BAS-20) has to be performed before auto
torque boost can be configured. Similarly to manual torque boost, configure auto torque
boost while running a load that requires high starting torque, such as lift-type loads. Refer to
5.21 Auto Tuning on page 200.
torque boost Torque
DRV 15 1 Auto 1 0–2 -
mode Boost
BAS 20 auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Rs+Lsigma 0–3 -
4.14.3 Auto Torque Boost 2 (No Motor Parameter Tuning

Required)
By adjusting the auto torque boost voltage gain set at DRV-15 (ATB Volt Gain), automatic
torque boost may be operated without tuning the motor-related parameter values. The
DRV-15 (ATB Volt Gain) value is used to adjust the amount of compensation required for
each load. It prevents stalls or overcurrent fault trips at start up.

Torque boost Torque
DRV 15 2 Auto 2 0–2 -
mode Boost
Auto torque boost ATB Filt
CON 21 10 1 - 9999 msec
filter gain Gain
Auto torque boost ATB Volt
CON 22 100.0 0 - 300.0 %
voltage gain Gain
Hx2000 AC Drive 117

4.15 Output Voltage Setting

Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input
voltage to the inverter. Set BAS-15 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set
voltage becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter
operates above the base frequency, and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the
input voltage at the inverter, the inverter adjusts the voltage and supplies the motor with the
voltage set at BAS-15 (motor rated voltage). If the motor’s rated voltage is higher than the
input voltage at the inverter, the inverter will supply the inverter input voltage to the motor.
If BAS-15 (motor rated voltage) is set to ‘0’, the inverter corrects the output voltage based
on the input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base
frequency, when the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will
be the inverter output voltage.
200
230
Motor rated Type
BAS 15 Rated Volt 170–480 V
voltage 400
415
Type
118 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.16 Start Mode Setting

Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in the
stopped condition.
4.16.1 Acceleration Start

Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the
motor accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.
ADV 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0–1 -
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking

This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking
before an inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to its
inertia, DC braking will stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a stopped
condition. DC braking can also be used with a mechanical brake connected to a motor shaft
when a constant torque load is applied, if a constant torque is required after the the
mechanical brake is released.
07 Start mode Start Mode 1 DC-Start 0–1 -
Start DC braking DC-Start
12 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
ADV time Time
DC Injection
13 DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %
Level
Hx2000 AC Drive 119

The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC
braking resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the inverter.
If the DC braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be
damaged
4.17 Stop Mode Setting

Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation.
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop

Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
decelerates down to 0 Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
120 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking

When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking
frequency) the inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a stop
command input, the inverter begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency reaches
the DC braking frequency set at ADV-17, the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor and
stops it.
Setting
Range
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 1 DC Brake 0–4 -
Output block time DC-Block
14 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
before braking Time
DC-Brake
15 DC braking time 1.00 0–60 sec
ADV Time
DC-Brake
16 DC braking amount 50 0–200 %
Level
DC braking DC-Brake
17 1.00 0.00–60.00 Hz
frequency Freq
DC Braking After Stop Setting Details
Code Description
Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia of
the load is great, or if DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is set too high, a fault
ADV-14 DC-
trip may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter supplies DC
Block Time
voltage to the motor. Prevent overcurrent fault trips by adjusting the output
block time before DC braking.
ADV-15 DC-
Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Brake Time
ADV-16 DC- Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based on
Brake Level the rated current of the motor.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached, the
ADV-17 DC- inverter starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than the DC
Brake Freq braking frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC braking will start
instead.
Hx2000 AC Drive 121

• Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is
applied to the motor or DC braking time is set too long.
• DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
4.17.3 Free Run Stop

When the Operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops due to
residual inertia.
ADV 08 Stop Method Stop mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -
122 Hx2000 AC Drive

Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high speed,
the load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output is blocked
4.17.4 Power Braking

When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor regenerated
energy a control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level or reaccelerate the
motor in order to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short
deceleration times are needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is
needed without causing an over voltage fault trip.
Setting
Range
Power
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 0–4 -
Braking
• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads that
require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking
takes priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit 3 of PRT-50 (stall
prevention and flux braking) and ADV-08 (braking options) are set, power braking will take
precedence and operate.
• Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage
fault trip may occur.
• Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre-
set deceleration time.
Hx2000 AC Drive 123

4.18 Frequency Limit

Operation frequency can be limited by setting maximum frequency, start frequency, upper
limit frequency, and lower limit frequency.
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start

Frequency
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
DRV Maximum
20 Max Freq 50.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code Description
Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in Hz
DRV-19 Start
or rpm. If an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the
Freq
parameter value will be 0.00.
Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are restricted
DRV-20 Max to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
Freq This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using
the keypad.
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency

Values
Parameter
Setting
24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No 0–1 -
Frequency lower Freq Limit 0.0–maximum
25 0.50 Hz
limit value Lo frequency
ADV
minimum–
Frequency upper Freq Limit Maximum
26 maximum Hz
limit value Hi frequency
frequency
124 Hx2000 AC Drive

Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
Code Description
The initial setting is ‘0 (No)’. Changing the setting to ‘1 (Yes)’ allows the
ADV-24 Freq Limit setting of frequencies between the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and
the upper limit frequency (ADV-26).
ADV-25 Freq Limit
Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are
Lo
expressed in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (DRV-18).
ADV-26 Freq Limit
Frequency cannot be set higher.
Hi
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limt) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) is the
minimum frequency (Low Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-19 (Start Freq) becomes the minimum frequency.
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limt) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi) is the
maximum frequency (High Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-20 (Max Freq) becomes the maximum frequency.
Hx2000 AC Drive 125

4.18.3 Frequency Jump

Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. The inverter will avoid
identified ranges during acceleration and deceleration. Operation frequencies cannot be set
within the pre-set frequency jump band.
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value
(voltage, current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency
band the frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band. Then,
the frequency will increase when the frequency parameter setting exceeds the range of
frequencies used by the frequency jump band.
LCD Parameter
Group Code Name Setting Range Unit
Display Setting
Frequency
27 Jump Freq 0 0–1 0–1 -
jump
Jump 0.00–Jump
28 frequency lower Jump Lo 1 10.00 frequency upper limit Hz
limit1 1
Jump Jump frequency
29 frequency Jump Hi 1 15.00 lower limit 1– Hz
upper limit1 Maximum frequency
Jump 0.00–Jump
ADV
limit 2 2
Jump Jump frequency
upper limit 2 Maximum frequency
Jump 0.00–Jump
limit 3 3
Jump Jump frequency
upper limit 3 Maximum frequency
126 Hx2000 AC Drive

4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting

Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both the first
and second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation commands to the
multi-function input terminal. Mode swiching can be used to stop remote control during an
operation using the communication option and to switch operation mode to operate via the
local panel, or to operate the inverter from another remote control location.
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes IN-65–71 and set the parameter value
to 15 (2nd Source).
06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
DRV Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source
2nd Command
04 Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0–5 -
source
BAS
2nd Frequency
05 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–11 -
reference source
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 17 2nd Source 0–55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
2nd Operation Mode Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-04 Cmd 2nd If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
Src command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using
BAS-05 Freq 2nd the set values from BAS-04-05 instead of the set values from the DRV-
Hx2000 AC Drive 127

Code Description
Src 7 and DRV-01.
The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating
with the 1st command source (Main Source).
• When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and
input (On) the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the
Operation command will be changed to the 2nd command. Before shifting input to the multi-
function terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. Note that if the deceleration
time is too short or inertia of the load is too high, an overvoltage fault trip may occur.
• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch the
command modes.
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control

Filter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured to
improve the response of input terminals.
Multi-function input mse
85 DI On Delay 10 0–10000
terminal On filter c
Multi-function input mse
86 DI Off Delay 3 0–10000
terminal Off filter c
IN
Multi-function input
87 DI NC/NO Sel 000 0000* - -
terminal selection
90 DI Status 000 0000* - -
terminal status
* From the last bit to the first, the bits are for multi-purpose input 1–7 (the last bit is for input
1, and the first bit for input 7).
128 Hx2000 AC Drive

Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details
Code Description
IN-85 DI On
If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the
Delay, IN-86 DI
terminal receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off.
Off Delay
Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table
below. With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is
configured as a A terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment
on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally
IN-87 DI NC/NO
Closed) contact. Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.
Sel
Type B terminal status (Normally A terminal status (Normally
Closed) Open)
Keypad
Display the configuration of each contact. When a segment is configured as

A terminal, using DRV-87, the On condition is indicated by the top segment
turning on. The Off condition is indicated when the bottom segment is
turned on. When contacts are configured as B terminals, the segment lights
IN-90 DI Status behave conversely. Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.
Type A terminal setting (On) A terminal setting (Off)
Keypad
Hx2000 AC Drive 129

4.21 Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay

Control
Availability of using On/Off Delay about Multi-function Input Terminal can be set
Paramet
LCD
Group Code Name er Setting Range Unit
Display
Setting
83 Availability of applying DI DI On 111 1111 000 0000 ~ -
On Delay. DelayEn 111 1111
IN
84 Availability of applying DI DI Off 111 1111 000 0000 ~ -
Off Delay. DealyEn 111 1111
Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay Control Setting Details
Code Description
Every Input Terminal, it is possible to set availability of using On/Off Delay of
Input Terminal.
IN-83 DI On
From right, Availability of using On/Off Delay about Multi-function Input
Delay En
Terminal can be set with a sequence such as P1~P7.
IN-84 DI Off
Delay En
1: Activate D1 On/Off Delay
0: Inactivate D1 On/Off Delay
130 Hx2000 AC Drive

Hx2000 AC Drive 131

Learning Advanced Features
5 Learning Advanced Features

This chapter describes the advanced features of the Hx2000 inverter. Check the reference
page in the table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Advanced Tasks Description Ref.

Use the main and auxiliary frequencies in the predefined
Auxiliary
formulas to create various operating conditions. Auxiliary
frequency p.134
frequency operation is ideal for Draw Operation* as this feature
operation
enables fine-tuning of operation speeds.
Jog operation is a kind of a manual operation. The inverter
Jog operation operates to a set of parameter settings predefined for Jog p.139
operation while the Jog command button is pressed.
Up-down Uses the upper and lower limit value switch output signals (i.e.
p.141
operation signals from a flow meter) as Acc/Dec commands to motors.
3-wire operation is used to latch an input signal. This
3-wire operation p.143
configuration is used to operate the inverter by a push button.
This safety feature allows the inverter’s operation only after a
signal is input to the multi-function terminal designated for the
Safety operation
safety operation mode. This feature is useful when extra care is p.144
mode
needed in operating the inverter using the multi-purpose
terminals.
Use this feature for the lift-type loads such as elevators, when
Dwell operation the torque needs to be maintained while the brakes are applied p.145
or released.
This feature ensures that the motor rotates at a constant speed,
Slip compensation p.147
by compensating for the motor slip as a load increases.
PID control provides constant automated control of flow,
PID control pressure, and temperature by adjusting the output frequency of p.149
the inverter.
When the inverter operation continues below the PID
conditions for a set time period, the PID reference is
Sleep-wakeup
automatically raised to extend the operation standby time. This p.164
operation
keeps the inverter in a standby (sleep) mode when the demand
is very low.
Used to automatically measure the motor control parameters to
Auto-tuning p.200
optimize the inverter’s control mode performance.
Used to maintain the DC link voltage for as long as possible by

Energy buffering
controlling the inverter output frequency during power p.179
operation
interruptions, thus to delay a low voltage fault trip.
132 Hx2000 AC Drive


Energy saving Used to save energy by reducing the voltage supplied to
p.218
operation motors during low-load and no-load conditions.
Speed search Used to prevent fault trips when the inverter voltage is output
p.222
operation while the motor is idling or free-running.
Auto restart configuration is used to automatically restart the
Auto restart inverter when a trip condition is released, after the inverter
p.226
operation stops operating due to activation of protective devices (fault
trips).
Used to switch equipment operation by connecting two motors
Second motor
to one inverter. Configure and operate the second motor using p.230
operation
the terminal input defined for the second motor operation.
Commercial power
Used to switch the power source to the motor from the inverter
source switch p.232
output to a commercial power source, or vice versa.
operation
Cooling fan control Used to control the cooling fan of the inverter. p.233
Multi-function
Set standard values and turn On/Off the output relays or multi-
output On/Off p.276
function output terminals according to the analog input value.
control
Regeneration
Used during a press operation to avoid motor regeneration, by
prevention for p.232
increasing the motor operation speed.
press operation.
Controls the fan motor optimally when a damper is used in the
Damper operation p.175
system.
Lubrication Supplies lubricant to the machinery before starting the inverter
p.178
operation and the mechanical system connected to it.
Flow
Compensates for pressure loss in a system with long pipelines. p.176
compensation
Displays the amount of energy saved by the use of the inverter,
Energy savings
compared to when a commercial power source is used without p.181
display
an inverter.
Pump clean Cleans the pumps by removing the scales or deposits that are
p.183
operation attached to the impeller.
Inclination setting
Sets the initial operating conditions for a pump by adjusting the
for operation and p.187
acceleration and deceleration times.
stop
Valve deceleration Prevents possible pump damage that may be caused by abrupt
p.189
time setting deceleration.
Load tuning Creates load-specific curves for light load operations and the p.191
Hx2000 AC Drive 133


pump clean operation.
Level detection Detects and displays the level set by the user. p.193
Pipe breakage
Detects breakages in the pipeline during a PID operation. p.196
detection
Prevents motors and pumps from freezing when they are not
Motor preheating p.198
operated.
Scheduled Uses the built-in real-time clock (RTC) to operate the inverter
p.203
operation according to the desired time schedule.
Operates the inverter in a way to cope with emergency
Fire mode
situations, such as fire, by controlling the operation of ventilation p.219
operation
(intake and exhaust) fans.
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References

Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the
main and auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency reference is
used as the operating frequency, while auxiliary references are used to modify and fine-tune
the main reference.
Group Code LCD Display LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 06 0 Keypad-1 0–11 -
Auxiliary frequency
01 Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–13 -
reference source
Auxiliary frequency
Aux Calc
BAS 02 reference 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
Type
calculation type
Auxiliary frequency Aux Ref
03 100.0 100.0 -200.0–200.0 %
reference gain Gain
65– Px terminal dis Aux
IN Px Define 36 0–55 -
71 configuration Ref
134 Hx2000 AC Drive

The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary
frequency references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example
where the DRV-06 Frq Src code has been set to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’, and the inverter is
operating at a main reference frequency of 30.00 Hz. Signals at -10 to +10 V are received
at terminal V1, with the reference gain set at 5%. In this example, the resulting frequency
reference is fine-tuned within the range of 27.00–33.00 Hz [Codes IN-01–16 must be set to
the default values, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity), set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’].
Auxiliary Reference Setting Details
Code Description
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled
1 V1 Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
3 V2 Sets the I2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block
BAS-01 Aux Ref
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4
Src
must be set to ‘voltage’).
4 I2 Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4
must be set to ‘current’).
5 Pulse Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
Set the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure
the auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when
calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in
either plus (+) or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even
when unipolar analog inputs are used.
Configuration Formula for frequency reference
0 M+(G*A) Main reference + (BAS-03x BAS-01xIN-01)
1 M*(G*A) Main reference x (BAS-03x BAS-01)
2 M/(G*A) Main reference / (BAS-03x BAS-01)
BAS-02 3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference +{ Main reference x(BAS-03x
Aux Calc Type BAS-01)}
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference + BAS-03x2x (BAS-01–50) xIN-
01
5 M*{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference x {BAS-03x2x (BAS-01–50)}
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference / {BAS-03x2x (BAS-01–50)}
7 M+M*G*2*(A- Main reference + Main reference x BAS-
50) 03x2x(BAS-01–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
Hx2000 AC Drive 135

Code Description
BAS-03 Aux Ref Adjust the size of the input (BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) configured for auxiliary
Gain frequency.
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 36 (dis Aux Ref) and turn it
IN-65–71 Px
on to disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate
Define
using the main frequency reference only.
Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #1

Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency
(Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
• IN-01–32: Factory default
Example: an input voltage of 6 V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10 V

is 60 Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36 Hz [=60 Hz X (6 V/10 V)] or
60% [= 100% X (6 V/10 V)].
Setting * Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36 Hz(A))=48 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=36
Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3 Hz
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300 Hz
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=33 Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
136 Hx2000 AC Drive


Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (Operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (BAS-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): I2 [Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary
frequency (Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20
mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24 Hz (=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/ (20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40 %( =100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/ (20[mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} = -3
Hz( Reverse )
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -300
Hz( Reverse )
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27 Hz
frequency reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
Hx2000 AC Drive 137


V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5 V and is set to 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency (BAS-01): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain (BAS-03): 50%
Example: An input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20
mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency Aas 24 Hz (=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40% (=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3
Hz( Reverse )
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300
Hz( Reverse )
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27 Hz
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to
analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
138 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.2 Jog Operation

The jog operation allows for a temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog
operation command using the multi-function terminals or by using the [ESC] key on the
keypad.
The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog
operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation modes,
the jog operation overrides all other operation modes.
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal

The jog operation is available in either forward or reverse direction, using the keypad or
multi-function terminal inputs. The table below lists parameter setting for a forward jog
operation using the multi-function terminal inputs.
Parameter
Group Code LCD Display LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0.00, Low
JOG
11 Jog frequency 10.00 Freq– High Hz
Frequency
Freq
DRV Jog operation
12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
acceleration time
Jog operation
13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
deceleration time
IN 6 JOG 0-55 -
Forward Jog Description Details
Code Description
Select the jog frequency from P1- P7 and then select 6. Jog from IN-
65-71.
[Terminal settings for jog operation]
Hx2000 AC Drive 139

Code Description
DRV-11 JOG
Set the operation frequency.
Frequency
DRV-12 JOG Acc
Set the acceleration speed.
Time
DRV-13 JOG Dec
Set the deceleration speed.
Time
If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the operation
frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog by Multi-function

Terminal
For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start operation, but while
using jog operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also starts an
operation. The priorities for frequency, Acc/Dec time and terminal block input during
operation in relation to other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical to
jog operation 1. If a different operation command is entered during a jog operation, it is
ignored and the operation maintains the jog frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
JOG 0.00, Low Freq–

11 Jog frequency 10.00 Hz
Frequency High Freq
DRV Jog operation JOG Acc
12 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
acceleration time Time
13 Operation JOG Dec 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
140 Hx2000 AC Drive

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
deceleration Time
time
FWD
38
65– Px terminal Px Define JOG
IN 0-55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7) REV
39
JOG
5.3 Up-down Operation

The Acc/Dec time can be controlled through input at the multi-function terminal block.
Similar to a flowmeter, the up-down operation can be applied easily to a system that uses
the upper-lower limit switch signals for Acc/Dec commands.
Up-down
U/D Save
ADV 65 operation 1 Yes 0–1 -
Mode
frequency save
19 Up
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px: 20 Down
IN 0–55 -
U/D
22
Clear
Hx2000 AC Drive 141

Up-down Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to ‘19 (Up)’ and
‘20 (Down)’, respectively. With the operation command input,
acceleration begins when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration stops
and constant speed operation begins when the signal is off.
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is on.

Deceleration stops and constant speed operation begins when both Up
and Down signals are entered at the same time.
IN-65–71 Px
Define
During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved

automatically in the following conditions: the operation command (Fx or
Rx) is off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.
When the operation command is turned on again, or when the inverter

regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation from a fault
trip, it resumes operation at the saved frequency. To delete the saved
frequency, use the multi-function terminal block. Set one of the multi-
function terminals to 22 (U/D Clear) and apply signals to it during
constant speed operation. The saved frequency and the up-down
ADV-65 U/D Save
operation configuration will be deleted.
Mode
142 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.4 3- Wire Operation

The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is
released), and is used when operating the inverter with a push button.
DRV 07 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx - 1 0-11 -
IN 16 3-Wire 0-55 -
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum
input time (t) for 3-wire operation is 2 ms, and the operation stops when both forward and
reverse operation commands are entered at the same time.
P1 (1):FX
P5 (6):JOG
P7 (16):3-Wire
CM
[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]
Freq.
FX
RX
3-Wire
[3- wire operation]
Hx2000 AC Drive 143

5.5 Safe Operation Mode

When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in safe mode, operation
commands can be entered in the Safe operation mode only. Safe operation mode is used
to safely and carefully control the inverter through the multi-function terminals.
Setting
Range
Safe operation
70 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent 0-1 -
selection
Safe operation
71 Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0–2 -
ADV stop mode
Safe operation
72 deceleration Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time
IN 15 RUN Enable 0-55 -
Safe Operation Mode Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–71 Px From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
Define operation mode and set it to ‘15 (RUN Enable)’.
Setting Function
ADV-70 Run En 0 Always Enable Enables safe operation mode
Mode 1 DI Dependent Recognizes the operation command from a
multi-function input terminal.
Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal in
safe operation mode is off. When the safety operation mode terminal
signal is given, the inverter decelerates based on the settings at the Q-
Stop time. The inverter decelerates and stops based on the deceleration
time (Dec Time) settings if the run command is off.
Setting Function
ADV-71 Run Dis 1 Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-
Stop function terminal is off.
2 Q-Stop The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in
safe operation mode. It stops after deceleration
and then the operation can resume only when
the operation command is entered again. The
operation will not begin if only the multi-function
terminal is on.
144 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
3 Q-Stop The inverter decelerates to the deceleration time
Resume (Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It stops
after deceleration. Then if the multi-function
terminal is on, the operation resumes as soon
as the operation command is entered again.
ADV-72 Q-Stop Sets the deceleration time when ADV-71 Run Dis Stop is set to ‘1 (Q-
Time Stop)’ or ‘2 (Q-Stop Resume)’.
5.6 Dwell Operation

The dwell operation is used to maintain torque during the application and release of the
mechanical brakes on lift-type loads. Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec dwell
frequency and the dwell time set by the user. The following points also affect dwell
operation.
• Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command runs, acceleration

continues until the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within
the acceleration dwell operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has
passed, acceleration is carried out based on the acceleration time and the operation
speed that was originally set.
• Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is run, deceleration continues
until the deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed are reached within the
deceleration dwell operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time has passed,
deceleration is carried out based on the deceleration time that was originally set, then
the operation stops.
Hx2000 AC Drive 145

Parameter
Setting
Dwell frequency Start frequency
Acc Dwell
20 during 5.00 – Maximum Hz
Freq
acceleration frequency
Operation time
Acc Dwell
21 during 0.0 0.0–10.0 sec
Time
acceleration
ADV
Dwell frequency Start frequency
Dec Dwell
22 during 5.00 – Maximum Hz
Freq
deceleration frequency
Operation time
Dec Dwell
23 during 0.0 0 .0– 60.0 sec
Time
deceleration
Note
Dwell operation does not work when:
• Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.
• Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first acceleration
dwell operation command is valid.
[Acceleration dwell operation]
• Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are
entered and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work
during a deceleration by simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a
stop operation), or during external brake control applications.
146 Hx2000 AC Drive

[Deceleration dwell operation]
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation

Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and motor
rotation speed. As the load increases there can be variations between the setting frequency
and motor rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation of
these speed variations.
Control Slip
09 Control Mode 1 - -
Mode Compen
DRV
Motor
14 Motor Capacity 2 5.5 kW 0–20 -
Capacity
Number of Pole
11 4 2–48 -
motor poles Number
Rated slip
12 Rated Slip 40 (5.5 kW based) 0–3000 Rpm
speed
Rated motor
BAS 13 Rated Curr 3.6 (5.5 kW based) 1.0–1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
14 Noload Curr 1.6 (5.5 kW based) 0.5–1000.0 A
current
Motor
16 Efficiency 72 (5.5 kW based) 70–100 %
efficiency
Hx2000 AC Drive 147

Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-09 Control Set DRV-09 to ‘2 (Slip Compen)’ to carry out the slip compensation
Mode operation.
DRV-14 Motor
Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
Capacity
BAS-11 Pole
Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate.
Number
Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
BAS-12 Rated Slip = Rated slip frequency

= Rated frequency
= Number of the rated motor rotations
= Number of motor poles
BAS-13 Rated
Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.
Curr
Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is removed
BAS-14 Noload and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If no-load current
Curr is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30-50% of the rated
motor current.
BAS-16 Efficiency Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place.
148 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.8 PID Control

PID control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) controls that provide more effective control for
automated systems. The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter
operation are as follows:
Purpose Function
Controls speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the
Speed Control equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
Controls pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of
Pressure Control the equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.
Controls flow by monitoring the current amount of flow in the
Flow Control equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Controls temperature by monitoring the current temperature
levels of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
Temperature Control
maintains a consistent temperature or operates at a target
temperature.
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation

PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated system
process control to maintain speed, pressure, flow, temperature or tension.
Parameter
Setting
01 PID Options PID Sel 0 No 0–1 -
PID output
03 PID Output - - -
monitor
PID reference PID Ref

PID 04 - - -
monitor Value
PID feedback PID Fdb

05 - - -
monitor Value
06 PID Error PID Err Value
Hx2000 AC Drive 149

Parameter
Setting
Monitor
PID reference PID Ref1
10 0 Keypad 0–11 -
source Source
PID reference Unit Min–Unit
11 PID Ref Set Unit Default Unit
setting Max
PID reference 1
PID
12 auxiliary source 0 None 0–13 -
Ref1AuxSrc
selection
PID reference 1
PID
13 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G*A) 0–13 -
Ref1AuxMod
selection
PID Ref 1
PID reference
14 Aux G 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain
PID reference 2
15 auxiliary source PID Ref 2 Src 0 Keypad 0–11 -
selection
PID reference 2 Unit Min–Unit
16 PID Ref 2 Set Unit Default Unit
keypad setting Max
PID reference 2
PID
17 auxiliary source 0 None 0–13 -
Ref2AuxSrc
selection
PID reference 2
PID
18 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G*A) 0–12 -
Ref2AuxMod
selection
PID reference 2 PID Ref2 Aux
19 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain G
PID feedback
20 PID Fdb Src 0 V1 0–9
source selection
PID feedback
PID Fdb
21 auxiliary source 0 None 0–11
AuxSrc
selection
PID feedback
PID Fdb
22 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G+A) 0–13
AuxMod
selection
PID feedback PID Fdb Aux
23 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain G
150 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter
Setting
PID feedback PID Fdb
24 0 0–Unit Band Unit
band Band
PID proportional
25 PID P-Gain 1 50.0 0.0–300.00 Unit
gain 1
PID integral time
26 PID I-Time 1 10.0 0.0–200.0 sec
1
PID differential
27 PID D-Time 1 0.00 0–1.00 sec
time 1
PID feed forward
28 PID FF-Gain 0.0 0.0–1000.0 Unit
gain
29 PID output filter PID Out LPF 0.00 0–10.00 sec
PID output upper PID Limit Lo–
30 PID Limit Hi 100.00 Unit
limit 100.00
PID output lower -100.00–PID
31 PID Limit Lo 0.00 Unit
limit Limit Hi
PID proportional
32 PID P-Gain 2 5.0 0.0–300.00 Unit
gain 2
PID integral time
33 PID I-Time 2 10.0 0.0–200.0 sec
2
PID differential
34 PID D-Time 2 0.00 0–1.00 sec
time 2
PID output mode PID Out
35 0 PID Out 0–5
setting Mode
PID output
36 PID Out Inv 0 No 0–1
reverse
PID Out
37 PID output scale 100.0 0.1–1000.0 Unit
Scale
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
40 reference setting Unit Default Unit
1 Max
1
PID multi-step
2 Max
2
PID multi-step
3 Max
3
Hx2000 AC Drive 151

Parameter
Setting
PID multi-step
4 Max
4
PID multi-step
5 Max
5
PID multi-step
6 Max
6
PID multi-step
7 Max
7
PID controller
50 PID Unit Sel 0 % 0–40 -
unit selection
PID control PID Unit
51 2 X1 0–4 -
setting scale Scale
Differ
PID control 0%
52 PID Unit 0% 0.00 depending on
setting figure
PID-50 setting
PID control Differ
PID Unit
53 100% setting 100.00 depending on
100%
figure PID-50 setting
65– Px circuit Px Define(Px:
IN 1 none 0–55 -
71 function setting P1–P7)
Note
• Normal PID output (PID OUT) is bipolar and is limited by PID-46 (PID Limit Hi) and PID-47
(PID Limit Lo) settings. DRV-20 (MaxFreq) value equals a 100% of PID OUT.
• The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
- Unit MAX = PID Unit 100% (PID-68)
- Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0% (PID-67)–PID Unit 100%)
- Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
- Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%
• PID control may be utilized for the following operations:
Soft fill, auxiliary PID reference compensation, MMC, flow compensation, pipe breakage
detection
• During a PID operation, the PID output becomes the frequency reference. The inverter
accelerates or decelerates to the frequency reference based on the Acc/Dec times.
152 Hx2000 AC Drive

PID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code Description
PID-01 PID Sel Sets the code to ‘1 (Yes)’ to select functions for the process PID.
Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID-03 PID Output
and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The
PID-04 PID Ref Value unit, gain, and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the
display.
Displays the latest feedback value of the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID-05 PID Fdb Value
and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
Displays the differences between the existing reference and the
PID-06 PID Err Value feedback (error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the
PID group are applied on the display.
Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set
to a PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot
be set to the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a
reference source, change the feedback source.
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
4 I2 When the analog voltage/current input
terminal selection switch (SW4) at the
terminal block is set to I (current), input 0-
20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage),
input 0–10 V.
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
PID-10 PID Ref 1 Src 7 FieldBus Communication command via a
communication option card
8 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse
input)
9 E-PID1 O/P External PID1 output
10 V3 V3 analoge input terminal of Extension
IO option When the analog
voltage/current input terminal selection
11 I3
switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set
to I3 (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it
is set to V3 (voltage), input 0–10 V.
12 V4 12(V4) ~15(I5)’ are available when
13 I4 Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
14 V5
15 I5
Hx2000 AC Drive 153

Code Description
E-PID3 External PID3 output
16
Output
A reference value can be entered if the PID reference type (PID-10) is
PID-11 PID Ref Set
set to ‘0 (Keypad)’.
Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a
PID control. If an external input source is selected, the reference is
determined using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the
value set at PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting Function
0 None Not used
4 I2 [If the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block
is set to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If
it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10 V]
input)
8 FieldBus Communication command via a
PID-12 PID communication option card
Ref1AuxSrc 10 EPID1 External PID 1 Output
Output
11 EPID1 External PID 1 feedback value
Fdb Val
12 V3 V3 analoge input terminal of Extension IO
option When the analog voltage/current
13 I3 input terminal selection switch (SW2) at the
terminal block is set to I3 (current), input 0-
20 mA current. If it is set to V3 (voltage),
input 0–10 V.
16 V5
17 I5
18 EPID3 External PID 3Output
Output
19 EPID3 External PID 3 feedback value
Fdb Val
PID-13 (PID Ref1) provides formulas to calculate the reference 1
PID-13 PID Ref1
value. If PID-12 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other value than ‘None,’
AuxMod
the final reference 1 value is calculated using the input value at the
154 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
source (set at PID-10) and the input value set at PID-12).
Setting
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*2*(A-50)
5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-10
G= Gain value set at PID-14
A= Value input by the source set at PID-12
PID-14 PID Ref1 Aux
Gain value for the formulas provided by PID-13.
G
Selects feedback input for PID control. If the V1 terminal is set as the
PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set
as the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a
feedback source, change the reference source.
Setting Function
3 I2 [If the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block
PID-20 PID Fdb Src is set to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If
it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10 V]
input)
8 EPID1 External PID 1 output
Output
9 EPID1 External PID 1 feedback
Fdb Val
Hx2000 AC Drive 155

Code Description
11 I3 option When the analog voltage/current
input terminal selection switch (SW2) at the
input 0–10 V.
14 V5
15 I5
Output
Fdb Val
Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a
PID control. When the external input source is selected, the reference
is determined using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and
the value set at PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting Function
0 None Not used
4 I2 [When the analog voltage/current input
terminal selection switch (SW4) at the
terminal block is set to I (current), input 0-20
mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–
10 V]
PID-21 PID Fdb 6 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse
AuxSrc input)

Output
Fdb Val
13 I3 option When the analog voltage/current
input terminal selection switch (SW2) at the
input 0–10 V.
156 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
16 V5
17 I5
Output
Fdb Val
The PID-30 (PID FDB AuxMod) provides formulas to calculate the
final feedback value. If PID-31 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other
value than ‘None,’ the final feedback is calculated using the input
values at the sources (set at PID-31 and PID-32).
Setting
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
PID-22 PID FDB 4 M+G*2*(A-50)
AuxMod 5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-30
G= Gain value set at PID-33
A= Value by the source set at PID-31
PID-23 PID Fdb Aux
Gain value used a formula set at PID-22.
G
Sets the maximum and minimum value by adding or subtracting the
PID-24 PID Fdb Band value (set at PID-24) from the reference value. When
PID Fdb Band the feedback value is between the maximum and minimum value, this
code maintains the PID output.
PID-25
PID P-Gain1 Set the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference and
PID-32 feedback. If the P Gain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output.
PID P-Gain2
Hx2000 AC Drive 157

Code Description
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%,
the time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-
Time) is set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the
error remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be
reduced by PID I Time. When the multi-function terminal block is set to
PID-26
‘24 (I-Term Clear)’ and is turned on, all of the accumulated errors are
PID I- Time 1
deleted.
PID-33
PID I- Time 2
PID output (final frequency reference) is affected by the gains set at
PID-26, PID-33, and the Acc/Dec times to achieve the PID output
change based on the DRV-03 and DRV-04 settings. Therefore,
consider the relationship between these values when configuring the
gains and the Acc/Dec times.
PID-27
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the
PID D-Time 1
differential time (PID D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change in
PID-34
errors per sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
PID D-Time 2
Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this
PID-28 PID FF-Gain
value leads to a faster response.
Used when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
PID-29 (default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some
PID Out LPF cases a higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the
more stable the PID controller output is, but the slower the response
time.
PID-30 PID Limit Hi,
Limit the output of the controller.
PID-31 PID Limit Lo
Selects one of the PID output modes to modify the PID output.
Modifications can be made by adding input values and the main
operation frequency of the PID output to the final PID output value.
The following table lists the 4 modes that are available.
PID-35 Setting
PID Out Mode 0 PID Output
1 PID+Main Freq
2 PID+EPID1 Out
3 PID+EPID1+Main
4 PID+EPID3 Out
5 PID+EPID3+Main
When PID-36 (PID Out Inv) is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error)
PID-36
between the reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–
PID Out Inv
reference value.
158 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
PID-37 PID Out Scale Adjusts the volume of the controller output.
PID-40–46 Step Ref
Sets the PID reference by multi-function input settings at IN 65–71.
1–7
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.
Setting
0 CUST 21 m 3/m(m 3/min)
1 % 22 m 3/h(m 3/h)
2 PSI 23 l/s
3 ˚F 24 l/m
4 ˚C 25 l/h
5 inWC 26 kg/s
6 inM 27 kg/m
7 Bar 28 kg/h
PID-50
8 mBar 29 gl/s
PID Unit Sel
9 Pa 30 gl/m
10 kPa 31 gl/h
11 Hz 32 ft/s
12 Rpm 33 f3/s(ft3/min)
13 V 34 f3/h (ft3/h)
14 I 35 lb/s
15 kW 36 lb/m
16 HP 37 lb/m
17 mpm 38 lb/h
18 ft 39 ppm
19 m/s 40 pps
20 m3/s(m 3/S)
PID-51
Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at PID-50 PID Unit Sel.
PID Unit Scale
PID-52
PID Unit 0 % Sets the Unit 0% and Unit 100% values as the minimum and
PID-53 maximum values set at PID-50.
PID Unit 100%
Hx2000 AC Drive 159

PID Command Block
160 Hx2000 AC Drive

PID Feedback Block
Hx2000 AC Drive 161

PID Output Block
PID
Outpu
t
Mode
Block
162 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.8.2 Soft Fill Operation

A soft fill operation is used to prevent excessive pressure from building in the pipe system at
the initial stage of a pump operation. When the operation command is given, a general
acceleration (without PID control) begins and continues until the output reaches the
frequency set at AP1-21, for the time set at AP1-22. Then, the soft fill PID operation is
performed unless the feedback value has reached the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set
value). The soft fill PID operation continues until the feedback or the soft fill PID reference
value reaches the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set value). When the soft fill operation ends,
a normal PID operation starts.
Parameter
Setting
20 Soft Fill options Soft Fill Sel 0 No 0–1 -
Pr- PID operation Low Freq–

21 Pre-PID Freq 30.00 Hz
frequency High Freq
Pre-PID
22 Pre-PID duration 60.0 600.0 sec
Delay
Soft fill escape Unit Min–Unit
AP1 23 Soft Fill Set 20.00 %
value Max
Soft fill reference
24 Fill Step Set 2.00 0–Unit Band %
increment
Soft fill reference
25 Fill Step Time 20 0–9999 sec
increment cycle
Soft fill feedback
26 Fill Fdb Diff 0.00 0–Unit Band %
difference
Soft Fill Operation Setting Details
Code Description
AP1-20
Enables or disables the soft fill PID.
Soft Fill Sel
Sets the frequency range for a general acceleration without PID control. If
AP1-21 (Pre-PID Freq) is set to 30 Hz, general operation is performed until
AP1-21
the PID feedback reaches the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set). However,
Pre-PID Freq
if the PID reference or feedback exceeds the value set at AP1-23 during
the pre-PID operation, a normal PID operation starts immediately.
Hx2000 AC Drive 163

Code Description
In general, a PID operation starts when the feedback volume (controlled
variables) of PID controller exceeds the value set at AP1-23. However, if
AP1-22 Pre-PID AP1-22 (Pre-PID Delay) is set, the feedback after the set time becomes the
Delay default value for the soft fill PID reference, and the inverter starts the soft fill
AP1-23 operation.
Soft Fill Set When the feedback or the Soft Fill PID Reference exceeds the Soft Fill Set
value, the soft fill operation ends and a normal process PID operation
begins.
AP1-24
The Soft Fill PID Reference increases each time the set time [at AP1-25
Fill Step Set
(Fill Step Time)] is elapsed, by the amount set at AP1-24 (Fill Step Set).
AP1-25
However, note that if the difference between the Soft Fill PID Reference
Fill Step Time
value and the feedback value is greater than the value set at AP1-26 (Fill
AP1-26
Fdb Diff value), the Soft Fill PID Reference value does not increase.
Fill Fdb Diff
When a PID process is performed after the soft fill PID operation, the PID Reference value
becomes the PID-11 PID Ref1 Set value.
164 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.8.3 PID Sleep Mode

If an operation continues at a frequency lower than the PID operation conditions, a boost
operation is performed to extend sleep mode by raising the PID Reference, and then the
inverter enters PID sleep mode. In PID sleep mode, the inverter resumes PID operation
when the PID feedback falls below the PID Wakeup level and maintains the condition for
the time set at AP1-09 (PID WakeUp1 DT) or AP1-13 (PID WakeUp2DT).
Note
PID Wakeup level may be calculated using the following formula:
PID Wakeup Level = PID-04 (PID Ref Value)–AP1-10 (PID WakeUp1Dev) or, PID-04 (PID Ref
Value) - AP1-14 PID (WakeUp2Dev).
Two sets of configurations are available in PID sleep mode for sleep mode frequency, sleep
mode delay time, wakeup variation, and wakeup delay time. One of the two configurations
may be selected depending on the multi-function input terminal configuration and input
conditions.
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Displays Parameter Setting Unit
Range
05 Sleep boost settings Sleep Bst Set 0.00 0–Unit Max Unit
0.00, Low
Sleep Bst
06 Sleep boost speed 50.00 Freq–High Hz
Freq
Freq
PID sleep mode 1 PID Sleep 1
07 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
delay time DT
0.00, Low
PID sleep mode 1 PID
08 0.00 Freq–High Hz
frequency Sleep1Freq
Freq
AP1 PID wakeup 1 delay PID

09 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
time WakeUp1 DT
PID
10 PID wakeup 1 value 20.00 0–Unit Band Unit
WakeUp1Dev
PID sleep mode 2 PID Sleep 2
11 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
delay time DT
0.00, Low
PID sleep mode 2 PID
12 0.00 Freq–High Hz
frequency Sleep2Freq
Freq
PID wakeup 2 delay PID
13 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
time WakeUp2 DT
Hx2000 AC Drive 165

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Displays Parameter Setting Unit
Range
PID
14 PID wakeup 2 value 20.00 0–Unit Band Unit
WakeUp2Dev
20 Soft Fill options Soft Fill Sel 0 No 0–1 -
PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the sleep boost volume. Feedback must reach the boost
AP1-05 Sleep Bst Set level (PID Reference+Sleep Bst Set) for the inverter to enter
the Sleep Mode.
Sets the inverter operation frequency to reach sleep boost

AP1-06 Sleep Bst Freq
level.
AP1-07 PID Sleep1 DT

If the operating frequency stays below the frequencies set at
AP1-11 PID Sleep2 DT
AP1-08 and AP1-12 for the set times at AP1-07 and AP1-11,
AP1-08 PID
the inverter accelerates to the PID sleep boost frequency (PID
Sleep1Freq
Sleep Bst Freq). Then, when the feedback reaches the value
AP1-12 PID
set at the boost level, the inverter enters standby mode.
Sleep2Freq
AP1-09 PID WakeUp1
DT
AP1-13 PID WakeUp2 Sets the reference for PID operation in PID sleep mode. PID
DT operation resumes when PID feedback variation (from the PID
AP1-10 PID reference) exceeds the values set at AP1-10 and AP1-14, and
WakeUp1Dev maintains the condition for times set at AP1-09 or AP1-13.
AP1-14 PID
WakeUp2Dev
When the PID Sleep Wake 2 terminal is set and input, PID
IN-65–71
operation sleep mode is operated based on the parameter
P1–7 Define
settings at AP1-11–14.
166 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)

When one of the multi-function terminals (IN-65–71) is set to ‘25 (PID Openloop)’ and is
turned on, the PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal
turns off, the PID operation starts again.
Hx2000 AC Drive 167

5.9 External PID

External PID refers to the PID features other than the basic PID features required to control
the inverter. The following table shows the areas where external PID controls can be
applied.
Purpose Function
Controls speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the equipment
Speed Control or machinery being controlled. Control maintains consistent speed or
operates at the target speed.
Controls pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of the
Pressure Control equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains consistent
pressure or operates at the target pressure.
Controls flow by monitoring the amount of flow in the equipment or
Flow Control machinery to be controlled. Control maintains consistent flow or
operates at a target flow.
Controls temperature by monitoring the current temperature levels of
Temperature
the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains a
Control
consistent temperature or operates at a target temperature.
Depending on the PID output mode, the EPID output value can be overlapped to the PID
output. External output is also available through the analog output settings at OUT-01 and
OUT-07.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 40 1–99
EPID 1 Mode
01 EPID1 Mode 0 None 0–3
Selection
EPID1output -100.00–
02 EPID1 Output 0.00 Unit
monitor value 100.00%
EPID1 reference EPID1 Ref
03 - - -
monitor value Val
EPI EPID1 feedback EPID1 Fdb
04 - - -
monitor value Val
EPID1error
05 EPID1 Err Val - - -
monitor value
EPID1 command EPID1 Ref
06 0 Keypad 0–10 -
source selection Src
EPID1 keypad EPID1 Ref Unit Min–Unit
07 Unit Min %
command value Set Max
168 Hx2000 AC Drive

EPID1 feedback EPID1 Fdb
08 0 V1 0–9 -
EPID1 EPID1 P-
09 50.0 0.0–300.0% Unit
proportional gain Gain
EPID1 integral
10 EPID1 I-Time 10.0 0.0–200.0 Sec
time
EPID1
EPID1 D-
11 differentiation 0.00 0–0.00 Sec
Time
time
EPID1 feed- EPID1 FF-
12 0.0 0.0–1000.0 Unit
forward gain Gain
EPID1 output EPID1 Out
13 0 0–10.00 Sec
filter LPF
EPID1 output EPID1 Limit EPID1 Limit
14 100.00 -
upper limit Hi Lo–100.00
EPID1 Limit -100.00–
15 EPID1 lower limit 0.00 -
Lo EPID1 Limit Hi
16 0 No 0–1 -
inverse Inv
Refer to EPID
EPID1 Unit
17 EPID1 unit 1: % unit details -
Sel
table
0: X100
1: X10
EEPID1 unit EPID1 Unit
18 2: X1 2: X1 -
scale Scl
3: X0.1
4: X0.01
X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -
3200.0–Unit
100%
X1: -
EPID1 unit 0% EPID1 Differs depending
19 320.00–Unit -
value Unit0% on the unit setting
100%
X0.1: -
32.000–Unit
100%
X0.01: -
3.2000–Unit
Hx2000 AC Drive 169

100%
X100: Unit
0%–32000
X10: Unit
0%–3200.0
EPID1
EPID1 unit 100% Differs depending X1: Unit
20 Unit100% -
value on the unit setting 0%–320.00
X0.1: Unit
0%–32.000
X0.01: Unit
0%–3.2000
EPID2 Mode
31 EPID2 Mode 0 None 0–3 -
selection
EPID2 output -100.00–
32 EPID2 Output 0.00 Unit
monitor value 100.00%
EPID2 reference EPID2 Ref
33 - - -
monitor value Val
34 - - -
monitor value Val
EPID2 error
35 EPID2 Err Val - - -
monitor value
EPID2 command EPID2 Ref
36 0 Keypad 0–10 -
EPID2 keypad EPID2 Ref Unit Min–Unit
37 Unit Min Unit
command value Set Max
38 0 V1 0–9 -
EPID2 EPID2 P-
39 50.0 0.0–300.0 Unit
proportional gain Gain
EPID2 integral
40 EPID2 I-Time 10.0 0.0–200.0 Sec
time
EPID2
EPID2 D-
41 differentiation 0.00 0–1.00 Sec
Time
time
EPID2 feed- EPID2 FF-
42 0.0 0.0–1000.0 Unit
forward gain Gain
43 0 0–10.00 Sec
filter LPF
170 Hx2000 AC Drive

EPID2 output EPID2 Limit EPID2 Limit
44 100.00 -
upper limit Hi Lo–100.00
EPID2 output EPID2 Limit -100.00–
45 0.00 -
lower limit Lo EPID2 Limit Hi
EPID2 output EPID2 Out 0 No

46 0: No -
inverse Inv 1 Yes
Refer to EPID
EPID2 Unit
47 EPID2 unit 0: CUST unit details -
Sel
table
0: X100
1: X10
EPID2 Unit
48 EPID2 unit scale 2: X1 2: X1 -
Scl
3: X0.1
4: X0.01
X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -
3200.0–Unit
100%
X1: -
EPID2 unit 0% EPID2 Differs depending 320.00–Unit
49 -
value Unit0% on the unit setting 100%
X0.1: -
32.000–Unit -
100%
X0.01: -
3.2000–Unit
100%
X100: Unit
0%–32000
X10: Unit
0%–3200.0
EPID2 unit 100%
EPID2 Differs depending X1: Unit
50 value -
Unit100% on the unit setting 0%–320.00
X0.1: Unit
0%–32.000
X0.01: Unit
0%–3.2000
Hx2000 AC Drive 171

Note
• The EPID1–2 output (EPID OUT) is bipolar, and is limited by the EPI-14 (EPID 1 Limit Hi)
and EPI-15 (EPID 1 Limit Lo) settings.
• The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
- Unit MAX = EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100% (PID-68 )
- Unit Min = (2xEPID1 (EPID2) Unit0%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%)
- Unit Default = (EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 0%)/2
EPID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the EPID1 modes.
Setting Function
0 None EPID1 is not used.
EPI-01 EPID1 Mode
1 Always On EPID1 operates at all times.
2 During Run Operates only when the inverter is running.
3 DI Operates when terminal input (EPID1 Run) is
Dependent on.
Displays the existing output value for the EPID controller. The unit,
EPI-02 PID Output gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on the
display.
Displays the existing reference value set for the EPID controller. The
EPI-03 EPID Ref Value unit, gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on
the display.
Displays the existing feedback value set for the EPID controller. The
EPI-04 EPID1 Fdb
unit, gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on
Value
the display.
Displays the difference between the existing reference and the
EPI-05 EPID1 Err
feedback (error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the
Value
PID group are applied on the display.
Selects the reference input for the EPID control. If the V1 terminal is
set to an EPID1 feedback source (EPID1 F/B Source), V1 cannot be
set as the EPID1 reference source (EPID1 Ref Source). To set V1 as
a reference source, change the feedback source.
EPI1-06 EPID1 Ref Src
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal [When analog
172 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
4 I2 voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW2) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage),
input 0–10 V]
7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
8 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
Set the EPI control reference type (EPI-06) to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to enter the
EPI-07 EPID1 Ref Set
reference value.
Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference
EPI-09 EPID1 P-Gain and feedback. If the P-Gain x 2 is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is
output. The setting range for P-Gain is 0.0-1,000%.
Selects the feedback input for the EPID control. When the V1 terminal
is set to an EPID feedback source (PID F/B Source), V1 cannot be set
as the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a
reference source, change the feedback source.
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
EPI-08 EDPID1 Fdb 1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
Src 3 V2 I2 analog input terminal [When analog
4 I2 voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage),
input 0–10 V voltage]
7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%,
the time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (EPID I-
Time) is set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the
EPI-10 EPID1 I- Time error remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be reduced
by EPID I Time.
All the accumulated errors can be deleted by setting the multi-function
terminal block to ‘42 (EPID1 ITerm Clr)’ or ‘48 (EPID2 ITerm Clr)’.
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the
EPI-11
differential time (EPID1 D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change
EPI1 D-Time
in errors per sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
Sets the ratio that adds the target to the EPID output. Adjusting this
EPI-12 EPID1 FF-Gain
value leads to a faster response.
Hx2000 AC Drive 173

Code Description
Used when the output of the EPID controller changes too fast or the
entire system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower
value (default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in
EPI-13EPID1 Out LPF
some cases a higher value increases stability. The higher the value,
the more stable the EPID controller output is, but the slower the
response time.
EPI-14 EPID1 Limit Hi,
Limits the output of the controller.
EPI-15 EPID1 Limit Lo
EPI-16 If EPID Out Inv is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error) value between the
EPID1 Out Inv reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–reference value.
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.
Setting
0 CUST 21 m 3/m(m 3/min)
1 % 22 m 3/h(m 3/h)
2 PSI 23 l/s
3 ˚F 24 l/m
4 ˚C 25 l/h
5 inWC 26 kg/s
6 inM 27 kg/m
7 Bar 28 kg/h
EPI-17 EPID1 Unit Sel 8 mBar 29 gl/s
9 Pa 30 gl/m
10 kPa 31 gl/h
11 Hz 32 ft/s
12 Rpm 33 f3/s(ft3/min)
13 V 34 f3/h (ft3/h)
14 I 35 lb/s
15 kW 36 lb/m
16 HP 37 lb/m
17 mpm 38 lb/h
18 ft 39 ppm
19 m/s 40 pps
20 m3/s(m 3/S)
EPI-18 EPID1 Unit Scl Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at EPI-17 EPI1 Unit Sel.
EPI-19 EPID1 Unit 0 %
Sets the EPID1 Unit 0% value and the EPID1 Unit 100% value as the
EPI-20 EPID1 Unit
minimum and maximum values set at EPI1-17.
100%
174 Hx2000 AC Drive

EPID1 Control block
Hx2000 AC Drive 175

5.10 Damper Operation

A damper is a device that controls the flow in a ventilation system. If a fan and a damper are
used together in a system, the inverter may be configured to operate according to the
damper’s operation status. During a damper operation, one of the relay outputs OUT-31–35
(Relay 1–5) may be set to ‘33 (Damper Control)’ to output a signal based on the damper’s
operation status. One of the multi-function terminal inputs (IN-65–71) may also be set to ‘45
(Damper Open)’ to receive the damper status input. The inverter starts operating when both
the run command and the damper open signal are turned on (relay output setting at OUT-
31–35 is not necessary).
When the time difference between the inverter run command and the damper open signal
exceeds the delay time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT), damper error (Damper Err) occurs. If
the damper open relay output and damper control input are set at the same time, and if the
damper open signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT) is elapsed
(when the inverter is not operating), damper error (Damper Err) occurs.
Damper check (sec
AP2 45 Damper DT - 0.1–600.0
time )
P1–7 Px
P1–P7
IN 65-71 terminal 45 (Damper open) - -
Define
configuration
Multi-function 33 (Damper
OUT 31-35 Relay 1–5 - -
relay 1–5 Control)
176 Hx2000 AC Drive

Damper Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the damper open delay time.
Detects the inverter run command or the damper open signal
AP2-45 Damper DT
(whichever is received first) and outputs a damper error (Damper Err) if
the other signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45 elapses.
IN-65–71 P1–7 Sets one of the multi-functional terminals to ’45 (Damper Open)’ to
define enable damper operation.
OUT-31–35 Relay Sets one of the relay outputs to ’33 (Damper Control)’ to provide a
1–5 relay output when the inverter run command is turned on.
Note
Damper operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both HAND and
AUTO modes.
Hx2000 AC Drive 177

5.11 Lubrication Operation

During a lubrication operation, the inverter outputs the lubrication signal through one of the
output relays when the inverter receives a run command. The inverter does not start
operating until the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time) has elapsed and the Lubrication signal
is turned off.
Lubrication Lub Op
AP2 46 0.1–600.0 (sec)
operation time Time
31- Multi-function relay 33 (Damper

OUT Relay 1–5 - -
35 1–5 Control)
Lubrication Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Outputs the lubrication signal for a set time when the inverter run
AP2-46 Lub Op
command is turned on. The inverter starts operating when the set time
Time
has elapsed.
OUT-31–35 Relay Sets one of the output relays (OUT-31–35) to ‘30 (Lubrication)’ to
1–5 enable the Lubrication function.
Note
178 Hx2000 AC Drive

• The lubrication function can be used to delay inverter operations, depending on the working
environment, since the inverter waits for the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time) each time a
run command is received.
• Lubrication operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both
HAND and AUTO modes.
5.12 Flow Compensation

In a system with a pipeline, longer pipes and higher flow rate cause greater pressure loss. A
flow compensation operation can compensate for pressure loss by increasing the volume of
the PID reference.
Flow Comp Flow Comp 0 No

30 - -
function options Sel 1 Yes
AP1
Max Comp Max Comp
31 - 0–Unit Band -
amount Value
Flow Compensation Setting Details
Code Description
AP1-30
Flow Comp Sets the Flow Compensation function options.
Sel
AP1-31 Max Sets the maximum compensation volume. This function is based on a PID
Comp Value operation. The volume is given the same unit used for the PID reference.
Hx2000 AC Drive 179

Longer pipes cause the actual pressure to decrease, which in turn increases the difference
between the pressure reference and the actual pressure. When the pipe lengths are equal
in two different systems, more pressure loss is caused in the system with greater flow. This
explains the pressure difference between (A) and (B) in the figure (when the flows are
different). To compensate for the pressure loss above, the value of AP1-31 is set to the
maximum volume of compensation when the inverter has the maximum frequency, and
adds to the PID reference after calculating compensation volume based on the output
frequency.
The final PID reference=PID-11+Compensation amount, and compensation amount is

shown below.
PID-53: PID Output Maximum value
180 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.13 Payback Counter

The payback counter displays energy savings information by comparing the average
energy efficiency for operations with and without the inverter. The energy savings
information is displayed as kWh, saved energy cost, and CO2 emission level.
Parameter
Setting
1st MOTOR M1 AVG
87 Inverter capacity 0.1–90.0 kW
average POWER PWR
2nd MOTOR M2 AVG
88 Inverter capacity 0.1–90.0 kW
average POWER PWR
Cost per
89 Cost per kWh 0 0.0–1000.0 kW
kWh
90 Saved kWh Saved kWh 0 -999.9–999.9 kWh
Saved
91 Saved MWh 0 -32000–32000 MWh
MWh
Saved Cost below Saved
92 0 -999.9–999.9 -
1000 unit Cost1
AP2
Saved Cost over Saved
93 0 -32000–32000 -
1000 unit Cost2
Reduced CO2
94 CO2 Factor 0.5 0.1–5.0 -
conversion Factor
Reduced CO2 Saved CO2
95 0 -9999–9999 Ton
(Ton) -1
Reduced CO2 Saved CO2
96 0 -160–160 Ton
(1000 Ton) -2
Reset 0 No
Reset
97 Energy payback 0 -
Energy
parameter 1 Yes
Hx2000 AC Drive 181

Energy Payback Value Function Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the average power value of the #1 motor and calculates the
AP2-87 M1 AVG PWR
energy savings based on the set value.
Sets the average power of the #2 motor and calculates energy
AP2-88 M2 AVG PWR
savings based on the set value.
Sets the cost per 1 kWh. Multiply the energy payback counter value
AP2-89 Cost per kWh with the value set at AP2-89 to calculate the total saved cost. This
value is displayed in AP2-92–93.
Displays the saved energy in kWh (AP2-90) and MWh (AP2-91).
AP2-90 Saved kWh When the value reaches 999.9 (kWh) and continues to increase, AP2-
AP2-91 Saved MWh 91 becomes 1 (MWH), AP2-90 resets to 0.0, and it continues to
increase.
Displays the saved cost to the one-tenth place at AP2-92. When the
AP2-92 Saved Cost1
value reaches 999.9 and continues to increase, AP2-93 becomes 1,
AP2-93 Saved Cost2
AP2-92 resets to 0.0, and it continues to increase.
Sets the CO2 reduction rate per 1 MW (default value=0.5). The value
AP2-94 CO2 Factor is multiplied with AP2-90 and AP2-91, and the resulting values are
displayed at AP2-95 and AP2-96.
AP2-95 Saved CO2-1 Displays the CO2 reduction rate in tons (AP2-95) and kilo-tons (AP2-
AP2-96 Saved CO2-2 96).
AP2-97 Reset Energy Resets all the saved energy parameters.
Note
Note that the actual saved energy may differ from the displayed values, since the resulting
values are affected by user-defined codes sush as AP2-87 and AP2-88.
182 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.14 Pump Clean Operation

The pump clean operation is used to remove the scales and deposits attached on the
impeller inside a pump. This operation keeps the pump clean by performing a repetitive run-
and-stop operation of a pump. This prevents loss in pump performance and premature
pump failures.
Parameter
Setting
0 None
Pump clean Pump Clean 1 DI Defendent

15 0: None -
mode 1 Mode1 2 Output Power
3 Output Current
0 None
Pump clean Pump Clean 1 Start

16 0: None -
mode 2 Mode2 2 Stop
3 Start & Stop
Pump clean PC Curve
17 100.0 100.0–200.0 %
load setting Rate
Pump clean PC Curve
18 5.0 0.0–100.0 %
reference band Band
Pump clean
AP2 19 operation delay PC Curve DT 60.0 0–6000.0 sec
time
Pump clean
20 PC Start DT 10.0 0–6000.0 Sec
start delay time
0 speed
operating time
21 PC Step DT 5.0 1.0–6000.0 Sec
at Fx/Rx
switching
Pump clean Acc
22 PC Acc Time 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
time
Pump clean
23 PC Dec Time 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
Dec time
Forward step Fwd Steady
24 10.0 1.0–6000.0 Sec
run time T
Forward step Fwd 0.00, Low Freq–
25 30 Hz
run frequency SteadyFreq High Freq
Hx2000 AC Drive 183

Parameter
Setting
Reverse step
26 Rev Steady T 10.0 1.0–6000.0 Sec
run time
Reverse step Rev 0.00, Low Freq–
27 30 Hz
run frequency SteadyFreq High Freq
Number of
PC Num of
28 Fx/Rx steps for 5 0–10 -
Steps
pump clean
Pump clean Repeat Num
29 - - -
cycle monitoring Mon
Pump clean Repeat Num
30 5 0–10 -
repeat number Set
Operation after PC End 0 Stop

31 0 -
pump clean Mode 1 Run
Pump clean
PC Limit
32 continuous time 10 6–60 min
Time
limit
Pump clean
PC Limit
33 continuous 3 0–10 -
Num
number limit
<Basic Pump Clean Operation>
When a pump clean start command is given, the inverter waits until the delay time set at
AP2-19 elapses, accelerates by the acceleration time set at AP2-22, and operates at the
frequency set at AP2-25. The pump runs for the time set at AP2-24, decelerates by the time
set at AP2-23, and then stops. This operation repeats in the forward and reverse directions
(one after another) for the number of times set at AP2-28 (PC Num of Step). Each time the
steps (Fx/Rx) switch, the inverter waits at a stop state for the time set at AP2-21 before
184 Hx2000 AC Drive

going on with the next step. One step in the forward direction and another step in the
reverse direction makes one cycle. The number of pump clean cycles is set at AP2-30. In
the figure above, AP2-28 is set to ‘1’, and AP2-30 is set to ‘1’.
Pump Clean Function Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the pump mode.
Setting Function
0 None Pump Clean function is not used.
1 DI Set one of the terminal inputs to ‘46 (Pump
defendant Clean Sel)’ and performs the pump clean
operation by turning on the terminal.
AP2-15 PumpClean
2 Power Performs a pump clean operation when a
Mode
pump consumes more power than it is
supposed to consume in a normal
operation.
3 Current Performs a pump clean operation when a
pump consumes more current than it is
supposed to consume in a normal
operation.
Sets the pump clean start mode.
Setting Function
0 None Pump clean is performed only by the
function set at AP2-20.
AP2-16 PumpClean Sel 1 Start Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter starts operating.
2 Stop Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter stops operating.
3 Start & Pump clean is performed each time the
Stop inverter starts or stops operating.
If AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current,’ multiply the load
characteristic curve set at AP2-2–AP2-10 by the value set at
AP2-17 (100[%]+AP2-17[%]), and reset the load
characteristic curve for the pump clean operation (refer to the
AP2-17 PC Curve Rate load tune features for AP2-2–AP2-10 setting values).
AP2-18 PC Curve Band Apply (rated inverter current x AP2-18 setting value) and
AP2-19 PC Curve DT (rated motor x AP2-18 setting value) to the pump clean load
curve calculated by AP2-17 to calculate the final pump clean
load curve.
The inverter performs pump clean operation when the
inverter continues operating for the time set at AP2-19.
Hx2000 AC Drive 185

Code Description
When AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current’, a pump clean is
performed if the inverter operation power or current stays
AP2-20 Clean Start DT
above the pump clean load characteristic curve (defined by
AP2-17 and AP2-18) for the time set at AP2-19.
Sets the time for the inverter to maintain 0 speed (stop)
AP2-21 Clean Step DT before the inverter switches from forward to reverse operation
during a pump clean.
AP2-22 PumpClean AccT
AP2-23 PumpClean Sets the Acc/Dec times for pump clean operations.
DecT
AP2-24 Fwd Steady Time
Sets the time to maintain forward and reverse operations.
AP2-26 Rev Steady Time
AP2-25 Fwd SteadyFreq
Sets the forward and reverse operation frequencies.
AP2-27 Rev SteadyFreq
Determines the number of steps (acceleration / deceleration /
stop) in one cycle. Each operation, either in the forward or
AP2-28 PC Num of Steps reverse direction, constitutes one step.
If set to ‘2,’ one forward step and one reverse step constitute
one cycle.
Determines the inverter operation after pump clean operation.
Setting Function
0 Stop This stops the inverter after pump cleaning.
AP2-31 PC End Mode 1 Start The inverter operates based on the inverter’s
command status after the pump cleaning. (If
a terminal command is received, the inverter
performs the operation it was performing
before the pump clean operation.)
AP2-29 Repeat Num
Displays the number of the current pump cleaning cycle.
Mon
Sets the number of cycles for one pump clean operation set
AP2-30 Repeat Num Set
at AP2-21–AP2-28.
Frequent pump clean operations may indicate a serious
system problem. To warn the users of potential system
AP2-32 PC Limit Time
problems, an error (CleanRPTErr) occurs if the number of
AP2-33 PC Limit Num
pump clean operation exceeds the number set at AP2-33
within the time period set at AP2-32.
Note
186 Hx2000 AC Drive

• When the run prevent feature is active and an operation in the prevented direction is
required to perform a pump clean operation, the inverter operates at the 0 speed for the
time set at AP2-24 and AP2-26 (Steady Time).
• To stop the pump clean operation, press the OFF key on the keypad or turn it off at the
terminal input.
• If the pump clean operation is configured for terminal input and it is turned on, and if ADV-10
(PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, a pump clean operation is performed when the inverter
is turned on.
• When performing a pump clean operation via terminal input,
- if the terminal input is turned off instantly after it is turned on (the operation is
triggered), 1 pump clean cycle is operated.
- if ADV-10 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, and the terminal input is turned off
instantly after it is turned on (the operation is triggered), and if the inverter is turned
off during a pump clean then is turned back on again, the pump clean operation is
not resumed (because the input terminal is not on when the inverter is turned on).
- if the terminal input is kept on after it is initially turned on, 1 pump clean cycle is
operated.
5.15 Start & End Ramp Operation

This function is used to rapidly accelerate the pump to the normal operating level, or to
rapidly decelerate the pump and stop it. Start & End ramp operation is performed when
ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes).’
Parameter
Setting
Start & End Ramp Start&End 0 No

40 0: No -
Gradient Ramp 1 Yes
AP2
41 StartRampAcc StartRampAcc 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
42 EndRampDec EndRampDec 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
0 No
Frequency limit
24 Freq Limit 0: No -
options
1 Yes
ADV Low Freq minimum Start Freq–
25 Freq Limit Lo 30.00 Hz
value Max Freq
Low Freq Freq Limit Lo–
26 Freq Limit Hi 50.00 Hz
maximum value Max Freq
Hx2000 AC Drive 187

Start & End Ramp Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the pump Start & End Ramp options.
AP2-40 Start&End
Setting Function
Ramp
0 No The Start & End Ramp operation is not used.
1 Yes Use the Start & End Ramp operation.
Refers to the time it takes to reach the minimum pump operation
AP2-41 Start
frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at ADV-25
Ramp Acc
when the inverter starts (it is different from DRV-03 acceleration gradient).
Refers to the time it takes to reach the 0 step (stop) from the minimum
AP2-42 End
pump operation frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit
Ramp Dec
Lo) set at ADV-25 (it is different from DRV-03 deceleration gradient).
< Start&End Ramp Adjustment>
In the figure above, AP2-41 defines the acceleration time to the minimum operation
frequency ADV-25 (Freq Limt Lo). AP2-42 defines the deceleration time from the minimum
operation frequency to a stopped state. Time A (normal acceleration time set at DRV-03)
and Time B (normal deceleration time set at DRV-04) in the figure will change according to
the Acc/Dec gradients defined by AP2-41 and AP2-42.
188 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.16 Decelerating Valve Ramping

This function is used to prevent pump damage due to abrupt deceleration. When the pump
operation frequency reaches the valve ramp frequency (AP2-38 Dec Valve Freq) while
decelerating rapidly based on the deceleration ramp time (set at AP2-42), it begins to slow
down the deceleration based on the deceleration valve ramp time (set at AP2-39 DecValve
Time). Decelerating valve ramp operates when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
Parameter
Setting
Dec valve
Dec Valve Low Freq–
38 ramping start 40.00 Hz
Freq High Freq
AP2 frequency
Dec valve DecValve
39 0.0 0–6000.0 Sec
ramping time Time
0 No
Frequency limit
24 Limit Mode 0: No -
options
1 Yes
ADV Low Freq Start Freq–
25 Freq Limit Lo 30.00 Hz
minimum value Max Freq
Low Freq Freq Limit Lo–
26 Freq Limit Hi 50.00 Hz
maximum value Max Freq
Deceleration Valve Ramping Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the start frequency where the slow deceleration begins in order to
AP2-38 Dec prevent pump damage when the inverter stops. Decelerating valve ramping
Valve Freq is performed from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at
ADV-25 (low frequency limit for pump operation).
AP2-39 Sets the time it takes to decelerate from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the
DecValve Time frequency limit set at ADV-25 (low frequency limit for pump operation).
Hx2000 AC Drive 189

The time set at AP2-39 refers to the absolute time that it takes for the pump to decelerate
from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV-25.
190 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.17 Load Tuning

Load tuning refers to an operation that detects the load applied to a specific section of the
inverter operation (current and voltage) and creates an ideal load curve for the under load
and pump clean operations. The two set points to define the section are user-definable, and
are set at 50% and 85% of the base frequency (DRV-18 Base Freq) by default. The load
tuning result values are saved at codes AP2-2–AP2-10. These values are user definable as
well.
The minimum set point for the load tuning begins at 15% of the base frequency (DRV-18
Base Freq), and the maximum set point can be set up to the base frequency. If the
frequency limit is set to ‘1 (Yes)’ at ADV-24 (Freq Limit), the range is limited within the
frequencies set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) and ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi).
0 No
Load curve
01 Load Tune No -
Tuning
1 Yes
Load curve Low Load Fit Base Freq*15%–

02 25.00 Hz
Freq LFreq Load Fit HFreq
Current for Low Load Fit
03 40.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq LCurr
Power for Low Load Fit
04 30.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq LPwr
AP2 Load curve High Load Fit Load Fit LFreq–
08 42.50 Hz
Freq HFreq High Freq
Current for High Load Fit
09 80.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq HCurr
Power for High Load Fit
10 80.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq HPwr
Load current for Load Curve
11 - - %
frequency Cur
Load power for Load Curve
12 - - %
frequency Pwr
Hx2000 AC Drive 191

Load Tuning Setting Details
Code Description
The inverter performs an automatic tuning to generate an ideal
system load curve.
AP2-01 Load Tune Setting Function
0 None Load tuning is not used.
1 Load Tune Start load tuning.
AP2-02 Load Fit LFreq Defines the first frequency set point for load tuning (user definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at
AP2-03 Load Fit LCurr
AP2-02 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current
AP2-04 Load Fit LPwr
and rated power. Values for AP2-03 and AP2-04 are user definable.
Defines the second frequency set point for load tuning (user
AP2-08 Load fit HFreq
definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at
AP2-09 Load Fit HCurr
AP2-08 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current
AP2-10 Load Fit HPwr
and rated power. Values for AP2-09 and AP2-10 are user definable.
AP2-11 Load Curve Cur
Monitors the load curve value set at AP2-1 (Load Tune) based on
AP2-12 Load Curve
the current output frequency.
PWR
When a load tuning is performed, the inverter measures for 10 seconds the motor current
and power, at the frequencies set at AP2-02 and AP2-09. The motor current and power
values measured here are used to generate an ideal load curve.
192 Hx2000 AC Drive

Note
Load tuning is not available while the inverter is operating.
• If the frequencies for AP2-02 (Low Freq) and AP2-08 (High Freq) are set too close to each
other, the resulting load curve may not reflect the actual (ideal) load curve. Therefore, it is
recommended that you keep the AP2-02 and AP2-08 frequencies as close to the factory
defaults as possible.
• If a secondary motor is in use, note that the existing load curve for the main motor will be
applied to the secondary motor unless a load tuning has been performed for the secondary
motor.
5.18 Level Detection

When the inverter is operating at or above the frequency set at PRT-74 (LDT Level), this
function is used to triggers a fault trip or sets a relay output if the source value is out of the
range of the user-defined values. If the reset restart feature is turned on, the inverter
continues to operate based on the run command after the LDT fault trip is released.
Level detection
None/Warnin
70 mode LDT Sel Warning
g/Trip
Level detection LDT Area

71 1. Above Level 0–1 -
range Sel
Level detection
72 LDT Source 0: Output Current 0–12 -
source
PRT
Level detection LDT Dly
73 2.0 0–9999 Sec
delay time Time
Source
Level detection Source setting is
74 LDT Level setting is -
reference value used
used
Source
Level detection LDT Band Source setting is
75 setting is -
bandwidth width used
used
Hx2000 AC Drive 193

Level detection 0.00–Max
76 LDT Freq 20.00 Hz
frequency Freq (Hz)
Level detection LDT Restart
77 60.0 0.0–3000.0 Min
trip restart time DT
Level Detection Setting Details
Code Description
Determines the inverter operation when a level detection trip occurs.
Setting Functions
PRT-70 LDT Sel 0 None No operation
1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
Sets the level detection range.
Setting Operation
PRT-71 Level
1 Below Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter
Detect
operates below the frequency set by the user.
2 Above Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter
operates above the frequency set by the user.
Selects a source for level detection.
Setting Function
0 Output Current Sets the output current as the source.
1 DC Link Voltage Sets the DC link voltage as the source.
2 Output Voltage Sets the output voltage as the source.
3 kW Sets the output power as the source.
4 hp Sets the output power as the source.
PRT-72 LDT 5 V1 Sets the V1 terminal input as the source.
Source 6 V2 Sets the V2 terminal input as the source.
7 I2 Sets the I2 terminal input as the source.
8 PID Ref Value Sets the PID reference as the source.
9 PID Fdb Val Sets the PID feedback as the source.
10 PID Output Sets the PID output as the source.
11 EPID1 Fdb Val Sets the external PID feedback 1 as the
source.
12 EPID2 Fdb Val Sets the external PID feedback 2 as the
source.
194 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
PRT-73 LDT Dly
Sets the delay time for the operation set at PRT-70.
Time
Sets the level for the level detection.
The following are the setting ranges and default values by the source.
Source Default Value Setting Range
Output Rated current 0–150% of the rated current
Current
DC Link 350 0–450 V (2 Type)
Voltage 700 0–900 V (4 Type)
Output 230 0–250 (2 Type)
Voltage 460 0–500 (4 Type)
kW 90% of the Inverter 0–150% of the Inverter rated
PRT-74 LDT rated power power
Level V1 9.00 V 0.00–12.00
V2 9.00 -12.00–12.00
I2 18.00 0.00–25.00
PID Ref 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
Value
PID Fdb Val 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
PID Output 50 -100.00%–100.00%
EPID1 Fdb 50 EPID1 Unit Min–EPID1 Unit Max
Val
EPID2 Fdb 50 EPID2 Unit Min–EPID2 Unit Max
Val
If the source is detected below the set level, it must be adjusted to be
above the ‘LDT Level + LDT Band Width’ value to release the level
PRT-75 LDT detection fault trip.
Band If the source is detected above the set level, it must be adjusted to be
Width below the ‘LDT Level - LDT Band Width’ value to release the level detection
fault trip.
The level detection trip bandwidth is 10% of the maximum source value.
Sets the start frequency for the level detection. When setting the level
PRT-76 LDT
detection frequency, take into consideration the source type and the LDT
Freq
level.
If PRT-08 (RST restart) is set to ‘YES,’ the inverter restarts after the time set
at PRT-76 elapses when an LDT trip is released. The LDT Restart operates
PRT-77 LDT each time an LDT trip is released.
Restart DT If PRT-77 is set to any other value than ‘0’ and the inverter is operating in
HAND mode, the inverter resets and the LDT trip is released. However, the
inverter stays in OFF mode and does not restart the operation instantly.
OUT-31–35 Sets one of the output relays to ‘40 (LDT)’ to monitor the level detection
Relay 1–5 status.
Hx2000 AC Drive 195

<An example of PRT-71 set to (1: Above Level)>
As shown in the figure above, level detection can be carried out (relay output is ‘on’) as the
output frequency is above PRT-76 and the detection value is greater than the value of PRT-
74. The LDT operation is released if the value is less than the value subtracted from the value of
band of, when the value of the feedback is set from PRT-74 to PRT-75.
• The LDT operation is carried out if the inverter operation is above PRT-74.
• Modify PRT-74 and PRT-75 appropriately when modifying LDT Source of PRT-71.
• PRT-74 and PRT-75 become default value if the LDT Source is modified.
• PRT-77 (Restart DT) and PRT-08 (RST restart) features operate separately.
• The inverter waits until the delay time set at PRT-73 (LDT Dly Time) before it operates
based on the setting in LDT-70 when the level detection time condition is met.
5.19 Pipe Break Detection

This function detects Pipe Breaks while the PID operation is on. The fault trip or a warning
signal will occur if the feedback does not reach the level set by users during the operation
with the maximum output (PID maximum output or the maximum speed set).
0 None
Pipe Break 1 Warning
PipeBroken
PRT 60 Detection 0
Sel 2 Free-Run
setting
3 Dec
196 Hx2000 AC Drive

Pipe Break
PipeBroken
61 Detection 97.5 0–100 %
Dev
variation
Pipe Break PipeBroken
62 10.0 0–6000.0 Sec
Detection time DT
Relay output
OUT 31–36 Relay1–5 28 Pipe Broken -
1–5
Pipe Break Detection Details
Code Description
Select the operation while detecting Pipe Breaks
Setting Function
PRT-60
0 None No operation
PipeBroken Sel
1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
PRT-61 Sets the Pipe Break Detection level. Set the detect level by multiplying the
PipeBroken Dev set value for PRT-61 by PID Reference.
PRT-62 Sets the detect delay time. Pipe Break operates if the Pipe Break situation
PipeBroken DT is maintained for a set amount of time.
OUT31–36 If Pipe Break (28) is set, when a Pipe Break occurs, the inverter sends out
Define output with Relay.
Hx2000 AC Drive 197

In the graph above, Pipe Break occurs if the feedback is smaller than the value caculated
by multiplying the two values set at PID-04 and PRT-61(PID-04 x PRT-61) at the inverter’s
maximum output (when PID output is the maximum set value, or the inverter is running at
the frequency set at DRV-20).
5.20 Pre-heating Function

This function uses current to heat up the motor or pump to avoid the motor or the pump
freezing when they are not in operation.
Initial heating Pre Heat
48 20 1–100 %
output current Level
AP2 Initial heating Pre Heat

49 30 1–100 %
output duty Duty
DC input delay DC Inj Delay
50 60.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time T
Terminal block
65–
IN input P1–7 Define 44 Pre Heat -
71
1–7
Initial Heating Setting Details
Code Description
AP2-48 Pre Heat Sets the current to be used for initial heating. Sets the current to motor
Curr no-load current % value.
AP2-49 Pre Heat Sets the duty (time) for the current to be used for initial heating, from 10
Duty seconds to % value.
AP2-50 DC Inj Delay Sets a certain delay time to prevent from an over current trip that may
T occur when a DC input is performed after the inverter Free-Run stop.
IN-65–71 P1–7
Performs the Pre Heat function if the Pre Heat (44) terminal is set.
Define
The initial heating function continually operates when the set multi-function input terminal is
on and until the inverter command is on. If an inverter command is input while the initial
heating function is operating, the inverter starts operation immediately.
198 Hx2000 AC Drive

The initial heating operation starts to run after an inverter operation stops, when the initial
heating function’s terminal input is on after the inverter operation command is off.
The diagram above shows the operation waveform related to AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T. The
Pre Heat function performs when the inverter stop mode is set to Free Run and the Pre
Heat signal is supplied. Then, if the inverter operation command is on, the inverter
maintains acceleration and a fixed frequency. If the inverter operation command is off, the
motor is in Free Run and the Pre Heat operations starts after the time amount set in AP2-50.
Hx2000 AC Drive 199

• If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is above the rated motor current value, it is limited by
the rated motor current value.
• If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is too high or the DC current output time is too long,
the motor may overheat or be damaged and the Inver IOLT may also malfunction. Reduce
the DC output current amount and DC output time to prevent from such damages.
5.21 Auto Tuning

The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for an auto torque
boost.
Example - Auto Tuning Based on 5.5 kW, 200 V Motor
Motor
DRV 14 Motor capacity 9 5.5 kW 7–20 -
Capacity
Motor pole
11 Pole Number 4 2–48 -
number
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 45 0–3000 Rpm
Rated motor
13 Rated Curr 21.0 1.0–1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
14 Noload curr 7.1 0.5–1000.0 A
current
200V Type
Motor rated inverter : 230V
15 Rated Volt 170–480 V
BAS voltage 400V Type
inverter : 415V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 85 70–100 %
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None - -
Depends on
21 Stator resistance Rs 0.314 the motor Ω
setting
Depends on
Leakage
22 Lsigma 3.19 the motor mH
inductance
setting
200 Hx2000 AC Drive

Auto Tuning Default Parameter Setting
Stator Leakage
Motor Capacity Rated No-load Rated Slip
Resistance Inductance
(kW) Current (A) Current (A) Frequency (Hz)
() (mH)
0.75 3.4 1.7 3.00 2.60 17.94
1.5 6.4 2.6 2.67 1.17 2.29
2.2 8.6 3.3 2.3 0.84 6.63
3.7 13.8 5.0 2.3 0.50 4.48
200 V 5.5 21.0 7.1 1.50 0.314 3.19
7.5 28.2 9.3 1.33 0.169 2.844
11 40.0 12.4 1.00 0.120 1.488
15 53.6 15.5 1.00 0.084 1.118
18.5 65.6 19.0 1.00 0.0676 0.819
0.75 2.0 1.0 3.00 7.81 53.9
1.5 3.7 1.5 2.67 3.52 27.9
2.2 5.0 1.9 2.3 2.52 19.95
3.7 8.0 2.9 2.3 1.50 13.45
5.5 12.1 4.1 1.50 0.940 9.62
7.5 16.3 5.4 1.33 0.520 8.53
11 23.2 7.2 1.00 0.360 4.48
15 31.0 9.0 1.00 0.250 3.38
400 V
18.5 38.0 11.0 1.00 0.168 2.457
22 44.5 12.5 1.00 0.168 2.844
30 60.5 16.9 1.00 0.1266 2.133
37 74.4 20.1 1.00 0.1014 1.704
45 90.3 24.4 1.00 0.0843 1.422
55 106.6 28.8 1.00 0.0693 1.167
75 141.6 35.4 1.00 0.0507 0.852
90 167.6 41.9 1.00 0.0399 0.715
Hx2000 AC Drive 201

Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-14 Motor Sets the motor capacity to be used. The maximum motor capacity is limited
Capacity by the inverter capacity and the keypad only displays the inverter capacity.
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and then
press the [ENT] key to run the auto tuning.
Setting Function
0 None Auto tuning function is disabled. Also, if you select
one of the auto tuning options and run it, the
parameter value will revert back to ‘0’ when the
auto tuning is complete.
1 All (rotating Measures all motor parameters while the motor is
type) rotating, including stator resistance (Rs), no-load
current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant (Tr), etc.
Since the motor is rotating while the parameters
are being measured, if the load is connected to the
BAS-20 Auto
motor spindle, the parameters may not be
Tuning
measured accurately. For accurate measurements,
remove the load attached to the motor spindle.
Note that the rotor time constant (Tr) must be
measured in a stopped position.
2 All (static Measures all parameters while the motor is in the
type) stopped position, including stator resistance (Rs),
no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant
(Tr), etc. Since the motor is not rotating while the
parameters are measured, the measurements are
not affected when the load is connected to the
motor spindle. However, when measuring
parameters, do not rotate the motor spindle on the
load side.
BAS-14 Noload
Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters that
Curr,
are not included in the auto tuning measurement list, the default setting will
BAS-21 Rs–
be displayed.
BAS-24 Tr
• Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
• Auto tuning operates when the inverter’s auto mode is off.
• Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated
voltage, and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default parameter
202 Hx2000 AC Drive

setting is used for values that are not entered.

• When measuring all parameters after selecting 2 ( All-static type) at BAS-20: compared with
rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating,
parameter values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate. Inaccuracy of the
measured parameters may degrade the performance of operations. Therefore, run static-
type auto tuning by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when gearing
and belts cannot be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated mechanically
from the load).
• If auto tunning operates without wiring the motor, ‘Rs Tune Err’ or ‘Lsig Tune Err’ warning
messages are displayed. It can be reset if you press ‘STOP/RESET’ button of the keypad.
5.22 Time Event Scheduling

Time Event function enables the user to operate the inverter using the RTC (Real-Time
Clock) feature at certain times that the user would like to set. An RTC battery is installed on
the I/O board of the Hx2000 inverter, and it lasts approximately 25,800 hours with the
inverter turned off, and 53,300 hours with the inverter turned on.
To use the Time Event, set the current date and time. Three parameters need to be set to
configure the Time event feature: Time Period Module, Time Event, and Exception Date.
Time Period Description

Time Period Used to set the time of operation.
Time Event Used to set the time of operation.
Used to specify the exception date. Exception date has the highest
Exception Date
priority.
4 Time period Module types, 8 Time Event Module types, and 8 Exception day types can be
used to configure time events. The Time Event function works based on a series of
configuration using the modules listed in the table above.
01/01/2000 ~
01 Current date Now Date 01/01/2000 12/31/2099 Hz
(Date)
AP3
02 Current time Now Time 0: 00 0: 00–23: 59 Sec
Current day 0000000–
03 Now Weekday 0000001 -
of the week 1111111
Hx2000 AC Drive 203

Summer
Summer T 01/01 ~ Summer
04 Time Start 04/01 Day
Start T Stop
date
Summer Summer T Start
Summer T
05 Time Finish 11/31 ~ Day
Stop
date 12/31(Date)
Period
10 connection Period Status - - -
status
Time Period 1
11 Period1 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Start time
Time Period 1 Period1 StartT ~
12 Period1 Stop T 24: 00 Min
End time 24:00(Min)
Time Period 1
0000000~111111
13 Day of the Period1 Day 0000000 -
1
week
Time Period 2
Start time
End time 24:00(Min)
Time Period 2
0000000~111111
1
week
Time Period 3
17 Start time Period3 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
configuration
18 End time Period3 Stop T 24: 00 24:00(Min) Min
Time Period 3
0000000~111111
1
week
Time Period 4
Start time
End time 24:00(Min)
Time Period 4
0000000~111111
1
week
204 Hx2000 AC Drive

Except1 Date
30 Except1 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Start time
Except1 Date Except1 StartT ~
31 Except1 Stop T 24: 00 Min
End time 24:00(Min)
32 Except1 Date Except1 Date 01/01 01/01–12/31 Day
Exception Date 2–Exception Date 8 Parameter (The same condition and
33-53
setting as Exception Date 1)
Time Event 0 No
70 Time Event En 0: No
functions 1 Yes
Time Event
71 configuration T-Event Status - -
status
Time Event 1 000000000000
72 T-Event1Period 000000000000
Connection ~111111111111
0 None
1 Fx
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
Time Event 1 9 Xcel-H
73 T-Event1Define 0: None
functions
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold
15 I-Term Clear
PID
16
Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
Hx2000 AC Drive 205

PID Ref
18
Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
Dias Aux
21
Ref
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1 ITerm
23
Clr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 Run
EPID2 iTerm
26
Clr
Sleep Wake
27
Chg
PID Step
28
Ref L
PID Step
29
Ref M
PID Step
30
Ref H
31 EPID3 Run
EPID3
32
ITermClr
Time Event 2–Time Event 8 Parameter (The same setting range and initial
74–
value as Time Event 1)
87
Time Event Function Setting Details
Code Description
AP3-01 Now Date
AP3-02 Now Time Sets the current date, time, and day of the week. The Time Event
AP3-03 Now function is based on the setting.
Weekday
206 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
AP3-04 Summer T
Start
Set the Summer time start and finish date.
AP3-05 Summenr T
Stop
Select the desired date format.
Configuration Function
AP3-06 Date format 0 YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day is displayed.
1 MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year is displayed (USA).
2 DD/MM/YYYY The format of Day/Month/Year is displayed
(Europe).
Bits 0–3 are used to indicate the time module that is currently in use
among the 4 different time modules set at AP3-11–AP3-22.
AP3-10 Period Status
Bits 4–11 are used to indicate the exception day that is set at AP3-30–
AP3-53.
AP3-11–AP3-20
The start time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
Period 1–4 Start T
AP3-12–AP3-21
The end time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
Period 1–4 STop T
The Time period date for the operation can be set up to 4. It can be set
on a weekly basis. If the bit is ‘1 (on)’, it indicates the relevant day is
selected. If the Bit is ‘0 (off)’, it indicates the relevant day is not
AP3-13–AP3-22 selected.
Period 1~4 Day
Bit
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
AP3-30–AP3-51
The operation start time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Start T
AP3-31–AP3-52
The operation end time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Stop T
AP3-32–AP3-53
The date for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Date
Enables or disables the Time Event
AP3-70 Time Event
Setting Function
En
0 No Time Event is not used.
1 Yes Time Event is used.
Hx2000 AC Drive 207

Code Description
It shows which T-Event from 1–8 is being performed.

AP3-71 T-Event
Status 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
T-Event 8 T-Event 7 T-Event 6 T-Event 5 T-Event 4 T-Event 3 T-Event 2 T-Event 1
Select the desired module of the Time Module and Exception Day set
in AP3-11–AP3-53 for the relevant events.
If the bit is 1, it indicates the relevant Time Module or Exception Day is
selected. If the Bit is 0, it indicates the Time Module or Exception Day
is not selected.
AP3-72–86 T-Event1–
8 Period bit
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Period 4
Period 3
Period 2
Period 1
Date 8
Date 7
Date 6
Date 5
Date 4
Date 3
Date 2
Select the desired Event. Date 1

Setting
0 None 17 PID Gain 2

1 Fx 18 PID Ref Change
2 Rx 19 2nd Motor
3 Speed-L 20 Timer In
4 Speed-M 21 Dias Aux Ref
5 Speed-H 22 EPID1 Run
6 Reserved 23 EPID1 Openloop
AP3-73–87 T-Event1–
8 Define 7 Xcel-L 24 Pre Heat
8 Xcel-M 25 EPID2 Run
9 Xcel-H 26 EPID2 Openloop
10 Xcel Stop 27 Sleep Wake Chg
11 Run Enable 28 PID Step Ref L
12 2nd Source 29 PID Step Ref M
13 Exchange 30 PID Step Ref H
14 Analog Hold 31 EPID3 Run
15 I-Term Clear 32 EPID3 ITermClr
16 PID Openloop
208 Hx2000 AC Drive

Time Period Parameter Setting
There are 4 Time Period Sets in the Time Event. Each Time Period Set has: period 1–4
Start (Start time), Period 1–4 Stop T (End time), and Period 1–4 Day (Operation day) for
which they can be set.
The tables below show the parameter values for Time Period 1, Time Period 2, and Time
Period 3. When the parameters are set for the Time Periods 1-3 as shown in the tables
below, this indicates the Time Event function turns on and off on the following days and time.
Time Period Schedule

Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On) and
18: 00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Time Period 1
Code Function Setting
AP3-11 Period1 StartT 06: 00
AP3-12 Period1 StopT 18: 00
AP3-13 Period1 Day 1101110
Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)
Time Schedule
Time Period 2 Code Function Setting
Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Time Period 3 Code Function Setting
Hx2000 AC Drive 209

<Time Period settingTime Chart>
Parameters Setting for Exception Date
There are 8 Exception date modules in the Time Event function. They are used to specify
the operation on particular days (public holidays, etc.). The settings for the start time and the
end time are the same as the settings for the modules and can be set for particular days.
The Exception dates can be set redundantly with the Time periods. If the Time Periods and
the Exception Dates are set redundantly, the inverter operates on the Exception Dates set.
Title Setting Range Description

Except1–8 Start T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes (by the minute)
Except1–8 Stop T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes
Select the particular date (between 1/1 and
Except1–8 Date 1/1–12/31
12/31)

Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On)
and 18: 00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Exception Date 1
AP3-30 Except1 StartT 06: 00
AP3-31 Except1 StopT 18: 00
AP3-32 Except1 Day 12/25
Exception Date 2 Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)
210 Hx2000 AC Drive

Time Schedule
Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00
(Off)
Time Schedule
Exception Date 3
Title Setting Range Remarks

Except1–8 StartT 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes (by the minute)
Except1–8 Stop T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes
Except1–8 Date 1/1–12/31 Select the particular date (between 1/1 and 12/31)
<The Time Chart for the Exception Day>
Hx2000 AC Drive 211

The connection settings for Time Period and Time Event
There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event function. The parameters for T-Events
1–8 are used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception
Date. The parameters for T-Event 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days.
Each Time event module can be set for the connections to 4 Time period modules and 8
Exception days. Time event modules are set as a bit unit in the parameters for Events 1–8.
The diagram below shows the connections between the Time event modules and the time
period modules. The Time Event 1 is connected to Time Period 4. The Time Event 8 is
connected to Time Periods 1–4 and the Exception Dates 2.
Time Event Module Function Settings
The functions to be performed in the Time Event for T-Events 1–8 can be set. 30 functions
can be set (refer to page 208). There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event. The
parameters for T-Events 1–8 are used to set the connections to each module for the Time
Period and the Exception Date. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are used to specify the
operation on particular days.
212 Hx2000 AC Drive

Example of the Time Event operations
If the Time events are set as the parameters below, the inverter operates as illustrated.
Parameter
Setting
Command
06 Cmd Ref Src 5: Time Event 0–9 -
Source
DRV Frequency
07 command Freq Ref Src 0: KeyPad 0–11 -
source
Time Period
11 Period1 StartT 10: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
1 Start time
Time Period
12 Period1 Stop T 20: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
1 End time
Time Period
1 Day of the
13 Period1 Day 0110000 0000000–1111111
week
Time Period
14 Period2 StartT 12: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
2 Start time
Time Period
15 Period2 Stop T 17: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
2 End time
Time Period
16 2 Day of the Period2 Day 00100000 0000000–1111111 -
week
AP3
Time Event 0 No
70 Time Event En 1: YES -
configuration 1 Yes
Time Event 1
000000000001–
72 connection T-Event1Period 00000000001
111111111111
configuration
0 None
1 Fx
2 Rx
Time Event 1
73 T-Event1Define 1: Fx 3 Speed-L
functions
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
Hx2000 AC Drive 213

8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold
15 I-Term Clear
16 PID Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
PID Ref
18
Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
21 Dias Aux Ref
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1 ITerm
23
Clr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 RUn
EPID2 ITerm
26
Clr
Sleep Wake
27
Chg
28 PID Step Ref L
29 PID Step Ref M
30 PID Step Ref H
31 EPID3 Run
32 EPID3 ITermClr
Time Event 2 000000000001–
74 T-Event1Period 00000000010
connection 111111111111
Time Event 2
75 T-Event2Define 3: Speed-L Refer to AP3-73
functions
214 Hx2000 AC Drive

The parameters in the table above shows the frequency command sources for the keypad
and the operation command sources for the Time Event.
The following is an example of an inverter operation utilizing the Time Period modules 1 and
2 with Time Events 1 and 2:
Time Period 1 is used to operate the inverter on Mondays and Tuesdays from 10AM to
8PM. Time Period 2 is used to operate the inverter on Tuesday from 12PM to 5PM.
Time Event 1 triggers forward operations based on the frequency input on the keypad and
continues the operation for the time set at Time Period module 1. Time Event 2 operates
the inverter at Speed-L for the time set at Time Period module 2.
On Mondays, the inverter operates in the forward direction based on the frequency input on
the keypad from 10AM to 8PM (Time Event 1). On Tuesdays, it operates again in the
forward direction based on the keypad frequency input from 10AM to 12PM (Time Event 1),
and then operates at Speed-L from 12PM to 5PM (Time Event 2). When the operation
assigned by Time Event 2 is complete, the inverter resumes its Time Event 1 operation (the
inverter operates based on the keypad frequency input from 5PM to 8PM).
<An example of Time Event>
Hx2000 AC Drive 215

Note
When repetitive frequency commands related to the frequency input command occur while the
Time Event function is performing, Time Event performs its function in the order of the frequency
command sources set in Freq Ref Src for DRV-07 (followed by Jog operation and multi-step
acc/dec).
If a fault trip occurs during a time event operation, the inverter stops the operation and stays in a
trip state. When this happens, there are two options to resume the stopped operation:
• Set PRT-07 (RST Restart) to ‘YES’ to allow the inverter to automatically restart after the trip
condition is released.
• Refresh the setting at AP3-70 (Time Event En). Set AP3-70 to ‘Yes’ from ‘No’. If one of the
input terminals (IN-65–71 Px Define) is assigned to it, turn the swtich off then turn it back on
to resume the time event operation.
5.23 Kinetic Energy Buffering

When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage decreases, and
a low voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic energy buffering operation uses
regenerative energy generated by the motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link
voltage. This extends the time for a low voltage trip to occur, after an instantaneous power
interruption.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Kinetic energy buffering
77 KEB Select 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection
Kinetic energy buffering KEB Start
78 130 110–140 %
start level Lev
79 KEB Stop Lev 135 125–145 %
stop level
CON
Kinetic energy buffering KEB Slip
80 300 1–20000 -
slip gain Gain
81 KEB P Gain 1000 1–20000 -
P-Gain
82 KEB I Gain 500 1–20000 -
I gain
216 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter Setting
Setting range
Kinetic energy buffering KEB Acc
83 10.0 0.0–600.0 Sec
acceleration time Time
Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected.
Setting Function
CON-77
0 No General deceleration is carried out until a low voltage trip
KEB Select
occurs.
1 Yes The inverter power frequency is controlled and the
regeneration energy from the motor is charged by the inverter.
CON-78
Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation. The
KEB Start Lev,
set values must be based on the low voltage trip level at 100%, and the
CON-79
stop level (CON-79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-78).
KEB Stop Lev
CON-80 Used to prevent malfunctions caused by low voltage from initial kinetic
KEB Slip Gain energy buffering occurring due to power interruptions.
Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-81
It operates the inverter by modifying the set value to prevent malfunctions
KEB P Gain
caused by low voltage after power interruptions.
Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-82
Sets the gain value to maintain the operation until the frequency stops
KEB I Gain
during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-83 Sets the acceleration time for the frequency reference when the inverter’s
KEB Acc Time operation becomes normal after the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Note
• The KEB functions may perform differently depending on the size of the loads. The KEB
Gains can be set for a better performance.
• If a low voltage trip occurs after a power interruption, it indicates the load inertia and level
are high. In such cases, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB I
Gain and the KEB Slip Gain.
• If motor vibration or torque variation occurs during the KEB function operation after power
interruptions, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB P Gain or
decreasing the KEB I Gain.
Hx2000 AC Drive 217

Depending on the duration of instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load inertia, a
low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation. Motors may vibrate
during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads, except for variable torque loads (for
example, fan or pump loads).
5.24 Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention)

This function is used to prevent the hunting of a V/F controlled fan or motor caused by
current distortion or oscillation, due to mechanical resonance or other reasons.
Parameter
Setting
Enable or 0 No
disable anti-
hunting
13 AHR Sel 1 Yes -
regulation 1 Yes
(resonance
prevention)
Anti-hunting
14 regulation P- AHR P-Gain 1000 0–32767 -
Gain
CON Anti-hunting
0–AHR High
15 regulation start AHR Low Freq 0 Hz
Freq
frequency
Anti-hunting
AHR High AHR Low
16 regulation end 400.00 Hz
Freq Freq–400.00
frequency
Anti-hunting
regulation
17 AHR Limit 2 0–20 %
compensation
voltage limit
218 Hx2000 AC Drive

Anti-hunting Regulation Setting Details
Code Description
Selects the Anti-hunting regulator operation.
CON-13 AHR Sel Setting Function

0 No Disable anti-hunting regulation.
1 Yes Enable anti-hunting regulation.
Increasing AHR proportional gain improves responsiveness of the
CON-14 AHR P-Gain anti-hunting regulation. However, current oscillation may result if
AHR proportional gain is set too high.
CON-15 AHR Low Freq
Sets the lower limit frequency (CON-15) and the maxim limit
CON-16 AHR High
frequency (CON-16) for anti-hunting regulation.
Freq
5.25 Fire Mode Operation

This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency situations,
such as fire, and provides continuous operation to protect other systems, such as
ventilating fans. In Fire mode, the inverter continues to operate based on the Fire mode run
direction and frequency set at PRT-46 and PRT-47.
Parameter
Setting
Fire mode
44 Fire Mode PW 3473 - -
password
0 None -
45 Fire mode setting Fire Mode Sel 0: None 1 Fire Mode
2 Test Mode
PRT 0 Forward -
Fire mode run
46 Fire Mode Dir 0: Forward
direction 1 Reverse
Fire mode run
47 Fire Mode Freq 50.00 0–max Freq Hz
frequency
Fire mode
48 Fire Mode Cnt 0 - -
operation count
IN 65–75 Digital input Px Define 40: Fire 0-55 -
Hx2000 AC Drive 219

Parameter
Setting
configuration Mode
Digital output 27: Fire
31–35 Relay1-5 0-41 -
configuration Mode
OUT
TR output 27: Fire
36 Q1 define 0-41 -
configuration Mode
When the multi-function terminal configured for Fire mode is turned on, the inverter ignores
all other commands and operates in the direction set at PRT-46 (Fire mode run direction) at
the speed set at PRT-47 (Fire mode run frequency). In Fire mode, the inverter ignores any
faults, other than ‘ASHT,’ ‘Over Current 1,’ ‘Over Voltage,’ ‘Ground F,’ and continues to
operate. If any of the faults that can stop inverter operation occur, the inverter automatically
performs a reset restart to continue the operation.
Fire Mode Function Setting Details
Code Description
Fire mode password is 3473.
PRT-44 Fire
A password must be created to enable Fire mode. PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel)
Mode PW
can be modified only after the password is entered.
Sets the Fire Mode.
Setting Function
PRT-45 Fire 0 None Fire mode is not used.
Mode Sel 1 Fire Mode Normal Fire mode
2 Test Mode Fire mode test mode
In Fire test mode, faults are normally processed.
Using Fire test mode does not increase the count
value at PRT-48 (Fire Mode Cnt).
PRT-46 Fire
Sets the run direction for Fire mode operation.
Mode Dir
PRT-47 Fire
Sets the operation frequency for Fire mode.
Mode Freq
Counts the number of the Fire mode operations. The number increases
PRT-48 Fire
only when PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘Fire Mode’. The count
Mode Cnt
increases up to 99, then it does not increase any more.
220 Hx2000 AC Drive

• If damper or lubrication operations are set for the inverter, Fire mode operation is performed
after the delay times set in the relevant operations.
• Note that Fire mode operation voids the product warranty.
• In Fire mode test mode, the inverter does not ignore the fault trips or perform a reset restart.
All the fault trips will be processed normally. Fire mode test mode does not increase the Fire
mode count (PRT-48).
• When the Fire mode operation is complete, the inverter stops operating and is turned off.
5.26 Energy Saving Operation
5.26.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation

If the inverter output current is lower than the current set at BAS-14 (Noload Curr), the
output voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at ADV-51 (Energy Save). The
voltage before the energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the
percentage. Manual energy saving operation will not be carried out during acceleration and
deceleration.
Parameter
Setting
0 None
Energy saving E-Save
50 1 Manual 1 Manual -
operation Mode
ADV 2 Auto
Energy saving Energy
51 30 0–30 %
amount Save
Hx2000 AC Drive 221

5.26.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation

The inverter finds the optimal energy saving point for the time set at ADV-52 based on the
rated motor current and the voltage output. The Energy saving operation is effective for the
normal duty operations. It does operate when the load level is more than 80% of the rated
motor current.
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Setting Range Unit

Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto 0–2 -
operation
ADV
Energy saving
52 E-Save Det T 20.0 (Sec) 0.0–100.0 Sec
point search time
If the operation frequency is changed, or acceleration or deceleration is carried out during an

energy saving operation, the actual Acc/Dec time may take longer than the set time due to the
time required to return to general operations from the energy saving operation.
5.27 Speed Search Operation

Speed search operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur when the inverter
voltage output is disconnected and the motor is idling. Since this feature estimates the
motor rotation speed based on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact speed.
Speed search
70 SS Mode 0 Flying Start-1 - -
mode selection
Speed search Speed
71 0000 - bit
operation selection Search
Speed search SS Sup-
CON 72 90% 50–120 %
reference current Current
Speed search
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999 -
proportional gain
Speed search
74 SS I-Gain 200 0–9999 -
integral gain
222 Hx2000 AC Drive

Output block time

SS Block
75 before speed 1.0 0–60 sec
Time
search
Multi-function relay
31 Relay 1
1 item Speed
OUT 19 - -
Multi-function Search
33 Q1 Define
output 1 item
Speed Search Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select a speed search type.
Setting Function
0 Flying Start-1 The speed search is carried out as it controls the
inverter output current during idling below the
CON-72 (SS Sup-Current) parameter setting. If the
direction of the idling motor and the direction of
operation command at restart are the same, a
stable speed search function can be performed at
about 10 Hz or lower. However, if the direction of
the idling motor and the direction of operation
command at restart are different, the speed search
does not produce a satisfactory result because the
direction of idling cannot be established.
1 Flying Start-2 The speed search is carried out as it PI controls
CON-70 SS Mode
the ripple current which is generated by the
counter electromotive force during no-load rotation.
Because this mode establishes the direction of the
idling motor (forward/reverse), the speed search
function is stable regardless of the direction of the
idling motor and direction of operation command.
However because the ripple current is used which
is generated by the counter electromotive force at
idle (the counter electromotive force is proportional
to the idle speed), the idle frequency is not
determined accurately and re-acceleration may
start from zero speed when the speed search is
performed for the idling motor at low speed (about
10 - 15 Hz, though it depends on motor
characteristics).
Hx2000 AC Drive 223

Code Description
Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top
display segment is on, it is enabled (On). If the bottom segment is on, it
is disabled (Off).
Item Bit Setting On Status Bit setting Off Status

Keypad
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Setting Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
✓ Speed search for general
acceleration
✓ Initialization after a fault trip
✓ Restart after instantaneous power
interruption
✓ Starting with power-on
Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to ‘1’ and the
CON-71 Speed inverter operation command runs, acceleration starts with the speed
Search search operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a fault trip may
occur if the operation command is run for the inverter to provide voltage
output. The speed search function prevents such fault trips from
occurring.
Initialization after a fault trip other than an LV trip: If bit 2 is set to ‘1’
and PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’, the speed search operation
automatically accelerates the motor to the operation frequency used
before the fault trip when the [Reset] key is pressed (or the terminal
block is initialized) after a fault trip.
Automatic restart after a power interruption: If bit 3 is set to ‘1,’ and if
a low voltage trip occurs due to a power interruption but the power is
restored before the internal power shuts down, the speed search
operation accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference before
the low voltage trip.
If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power is

disconnected, the inverter generates a low voltage trip and blocks the
output. When the input power returns, the operation frequency before
the low voltage trip and the voltage is increased by the inverter’s inner PI
control.
If the current increases above the value set at CON-72, the voltage
stops increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current
224 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
decreases below the value set at CON-27, the voltage increases again
and the frequency stops decelerating (t2 zone). When the normal
frequency and voltage are resumed, the speed search operation
accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference before the fault
trip.
Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to ‘1’ and ADV-10 (Power-on Run) to
‘1 (Yes)’. If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter operation
command is on, the speed search operation will accelerate the motor up
to the frequency reference.
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation
CON-72 SS Sup-
based on the motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is set to ‘1
Current
(Flying Start-2)’, this code is not visible.
CON-73 SS P- The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70
Gain, (SS Mode) is set to ‘1(Flying Start-2)’, different factory defaults, based on
CON-74 SS I-Gain motor capacity, are used and defined in DRV-14 (Motor Capacity).
CON-75 SS Block The block time parameter prevents overvoltage trips due to counter
Time electromotive force.
Note
If operated within the rated output, the Hx2000 series inverter is designed to withstand
instantaneous power interruptions within 8 ms and maintain normal operation. The DC voltage
inside the inverter may vary depending on the output load. If the power interruption time is longer
than 8 ms, a low voltage trip may occur.
Hx2000 AC Drive 225

Select the Speed search function (normal acceleration) for a proper re-operation during a free-
run.
If the speed search function (normal acceleration) is not selected during the acceleration, an
over current trip or an overload trip may occur.
5.28 Auto Restart Settings

When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter
automatically restarts based on the parameter settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
08 Select start at trip reset RST Restart 11 - -

PRT
09 Auto restart count Retry Number 6 0–10 -
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0.1–60.0 sec
Select speed search Speed
71 - 0000–1111 bit
operation Search
Speed search startup SS Sup-
72 90 70–120 %
current Current
CON Speed search proportional
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999
gain
74 Speed search integral gain SS I-Gain 200 0–9999
Output block time before SS Block
75 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
speed search Time
226 Hx2000 AC Drive

Auto Restart Setting Details
Code Description
The Reset restart function can be performed by one of the two different
types.
If the top segment is turned on, it indicates the function is on. If the bottom
segment is turned on, it indicates the function is off.
Type Bit On Bit Off

LCD Display
PRT-08
RST Restart Reset Restart function
Setting Function
Bit1 Bit 0
✓ For fault trips other than LV
✓ For LV fault trips
For fault trips other than LV: If the Bit 0 is turned on, the inverter
restarts after a trip occurs and triggers a reset.
For LV fault trips: If the Bit 1 is turned on, the inverter restarts after a trip
occurs and triggers a reset.
The number of available auto restarts can be set at PRT-09. If a fault trip
occurs during an operation, the inverter restarts after the time set at PRT-
10 (Retry Delay). At each restart, the inverter counts the number of tries
and subtracts it from the number set at PRT-09 until the retry number
count reaches 0. After an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within
PRT-09
60 sec, it will increase the restart count number. The maximum count
Retry Number,
number is limited by the number set at PRT-09.
PRT-10
Retry Delay
If the inverter stops due to over current or hardware diagnosis, an auto
restart is not activated. At auto restart, the acceleration options are
identical to those of speed search operation. Codes CON-72–75 can be
set based on the load. Information about the speed search function can
be found at 5.27 Speed Search Operation on page 222.
Hx2000 AC Drive 227

[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]
• If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The
motor may automatically start to rotate.
• In HAND mode, auto restart resets the trip condition but it does not restart the inverter
operation.
• In AUTO mode,
- if the auto restart is configured, the inverter restarts after a trip condition is released
(command via digital input is used to restart the operation).
- if the auto restart is not configured and the trip condition is released using the OFF
key, or the switches at the terminal input, the inverter stays in the OFF state.
Because the command information is reset along with the trip condition, a new
command is required to operate the inverter.
228 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.29 Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency

Settings)
Setting
Range
Carrier
04 Carrier Freq 3.0 1.0–15.0 kHz
Frequency
CON
Normal
05 Switching Mode PWM* Mode 0 0–1 -
PWM
* PWM: Pulse width modulation
Operational Noise Setting Details
Code Description
Adjusts motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings.
Power transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high
CON-04 frequency switching voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this
Carrier Freq process refers to the carrier frequency. If the carrier frequency is set high, it
reduces operational noise from the motor. If the carrier frequency is set low,
it increases operational noise from the motor.
The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by
changing the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting ‘1
(LowLeakage PWM)’ reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to
when ‘0 (Normal PWM)’ is selected. However, it increases the motor noise.
Low leakage PWM uses a 2 phase PWM modulation mode, which helps
minimize degradation and reduces switching loss by approximately 30%.
Item Carrier Frequency

CON-05 PWM
Mode 1.0 kHz 15 kHz
LowLeakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Heat generation ↓ ↑
Leakage current ↓ ↑
Leakage current ↓ ↑
Hx2000 AC Drive 229

Note
• Carrier Frequency at Factory Default Settings: 3 kHz

• Hx2000 Series Inverter Derating Standard (Derating): The over load rate represents an
acceptable load amount that exceeds rated load, and is expressed as a ratio based on the
rated load and the duration. The overload capacity on the Hx2000 series inverter is 120%/1
min for normal loads. The current rating differs from the load rating, as it also has an
ambient temperature limit. For derating specifications refer to 11.7 Inverter Continuous
Rated Current Derating on page 541.
• Current rating for ambient temperature at normal load operation.
5.30 2nd Motor Operation

The 2nd motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors. Using
the 2nd motor operation, a parameter for the 2nd motor is set. The 2nd motor is operated
when a multi-function terminal input, defined as a 2nd motor function, is turned on.
Setting
Range
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1–
IN 28 2nd Motor 0-55 -
71 configuration P7)
2nd Motor Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Set one of the multi-function input terminals (P1–P5) to 26 (2nd Motor) to
display the M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function
terminal set to 2nd motor will operate the motor according to the code
IN-65–71 Px settings listed below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input signals to
Define the multi-function terminals will not read as a 2nd motor parameter.
PRT-50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2-28 (M2-Stall Lev)
settings can be used. Also, PRT-40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before
M2-29 (M2-ETH 1 min) and M2-30 (M2-ETH Cont) settings.
230 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2nd Motor
Code Description Code Description

M2-15 M2-
M2-04 Acc Time Acceleration time Motor efficiency
Efficiency
M2-05 M2-Dec
Deceleration time M2-17 M2-Rs Stator resistance
Time
M2-06 M2-
Motor capacity M2-18 M2-Lsigma Leakage inductance
Capacity
M2-07 M2-Base
Motor base frequency M2-25 M2-V/F Patt V/F pattern
Freq
M2-08 M2-Ctrl M2-26 M2-Fwd
Control mode Forward torque boost
Mode Boost
M2-10 M2-Pole M2-27 M2-Rev
Pole number Reverse torque boost
Num Boost
M2-11 M2-Rate
Rated slip M2-28 M2-Stall Lev Stall prevention level
Slip
M2-12 M2-Rated M2-29 M2-ETH 1 Motor heat protection 1
Rated current
Curr min min rating
M2-13 M2-Noload M2-30 M2-ETH Motor heat protection
No-load current
Curr Cont continuous rating
M2-14 M2-Rated
Motor rated voltage
Volt
Hx2000 AC Drive 231

Example - 2nd Motor Operation

Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operation between a 7.5 kW motor and a
secondary 3.7 kW motor connected to terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
2nd
IN 67 Terminal P3 configuration P3 Define 26 - -
Motor
06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity - 3.7 kW - -

M2
08 Control mode M2-Ctrl Mode 0 V/F - -
5.31 Supply Power Transition

A supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to the
inverter from the inverter output power to the main supply power source (commercial power
source), or vice versa.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
IN 18 Exchange 0-55 -
71 configuration P7)
Multi-function relay Inverter
31 Relay1 17 0-41 -
1 items Line
OUT
Multi-function output
33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line 0-41 -
1 items
232 Hx2000 AC Drive

Supply Power Transition Setting Details
Code Description
When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main supply
IN-65–71 power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to ‘18 (Exchange)’.
Px Define Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To reverse the
transition, switch off the terminal.
Set multi-function relay or multi-function output to ‘17 (Inverter Line)’ or ‘18
(Comm Line)’. The relay operation sequence is as follows.
OUT-31 Relay
1–
OUT-36 Q1
Define
5.32 Cooling Fan Control

This function turns the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan on and off. It is used in situations
where the load stops and starts frequently or a noise-free environment is required. The
correct use of cooling fan controls can extend the cooling fan’s life.
Setting
Range
ADV 64 Cooling fan control Fan Control 0 During Run 0–2 -
Hx2000 AC Drive 233

Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings
Code Description
Settings Description
0 During Run The cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to
the inverter and the operation command is on. The
cooling fan stops when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is off. When the
inverter heat sink temperature is higher than its set
ADV-64 Fan value, the cooling fan operates automatically
Control regardless of its operation status.
1 Always On Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to
the inverter.
2 Temp With power connected and the run operation
Control command on: if the setting is in Temp Control, the
cooling fan will not operate unless the temperature in
the heat sink reaches the set temperature.
Note
Despite setting ADV-64 to ‘0 (During Run)’, if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by
current input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protective function.
5.33 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings

Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 60 Hz to 50 Hz,
all other frequency (or RPM) settings, including the maximum frequency, base frequency,
etc., will change to 50 Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting from 50 Hz
to 60 Hz will change all related function item settings from 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
LCD Parameter
Group Code Name Setting Range Unit
Display Setting
Input power 60/50 Hz
BAS 10 0 50 Hz 0–1 -
frequency Sel
234 Hx2000 AC Drive

Set Inverter input power voltage. Low voltage fault trip level changes automatically to the
set voltage standard.
LCD Setting
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit
Display Range
200
230 170–264
Input power AC Input Type
BAS 19 V
voltage Volt 400
415 320–528
Type
5.34 Read, Write, and Save Parameters

Use read, write, and save function parameters on the inverter to copy parameters from the
inverter to the keypad or from the keypad to the inverter.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
46 Parameter read Parameter Read 1 Yes - -
CNF 47 Parameter write Parameter Write 1 Yes - -
48 Parameter save Parameter Save 1 Yes - -
Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved
CNF-46 Parameter
parameters on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with the copied
Read
parameters.
Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with the copied
CNF-47 Parameter
parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, the previously
Write
saved data will be used. If there is no saved data on the Keypad, ‘EEP
Rom Empty’ will be displayed.
As parameters set during communication transmission are saved to
CNF-48 Parameter RAM, the setting values will be lost if the power goes off and on. When
Save setting parameters during communication transmission, select ‘1 (Yes)’
at CNF-48 to save the set parameter.
Hx2000 AC Drive 235

5.35 Parameter Initialization

User changes to parameters can be initialized (reset) to factory default settings on all or
selected groups. However, during a fault trip situation or operation, parameters cannot be
reset.
Setting
Range
Parameter
CNF 40 Parameter Init 0 No 0–15
initialization
Parameter Initialization Setting Details
Code Description
Setting LCD Function
Display
0 No No -
Initialize all data. Select ‘1 (All
Grp)’ and press the
Initialize all
1 All Grp [PROG/ENT] key to start
groups
initialization. On completion,
‘0 (No)’ will be displayed.
Initialize DRV Initialize data by groups.
2 DRV Grp
group Select initialize group and
Initialize BAS press the [PROG/ENT] key to
3 BAS Grp
group start initialization. On
Initialize ADV completion, ‘0 (No)’ will be
4 ADV Grp displayed.
CNF-40 group
Parameter Init Initialize CON
5 CON Grp
group
Initialize IN
6 IN Grp
group
Initialize OUT
7 OUT Grp
group
Initialize COM
8 COM Grp
group
Initialize PID
9 PID Grp
group
1 Initialize EPI
EPI Grp
0 group
Initialize AP1
11 AP1 Grp
group
1 Initialize AP2 AP2 Grp
236 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
2 group
1 Initialize AP3
AP3 Grp
3 group
1 Initialize PRT
PRT Grp
4 group
1 Initialize M2
M2 Grp
5 group
5.36 Parameter View Lock

Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user password.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter view View Lock
50 Un-locked 0–9999
lock Set
CNF
Parameter view View Lock
51 Password 0–9999
lock password Pw
Parameter View Lock Setting Details
Code Description
Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow the
steps below to register a password.
No Procedure
1 [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-51 code will show the previous
password input window. If registration is made for the first time,
CNF-51 View Lock enter ‘0.’ It is the factory default.
Pw 2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, a new
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until
the user enters a valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, code CNF-51 will be displayed.
Hx2000 AC Drive 237

Code Description
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. The

CNF-50 View Lock [Locked] sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter
Set view lock is enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the
password. The [locked] sign will disappear.
5.37 Parameter Lock

Use parameter lock to prevent unauthorized modification of parameter settings. To enable
parameter lock, register and enter a user password first.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
52 Parameter lock Key Lock Set Un-locked 0–9999 -
CNF
53 Parameter lock password Key Lock Pw Password 0–9999 -
Parameter Lock Setting Details
Code Description
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No Procedures
1 Press the [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-53 code and the saved
password input window will be displayed. If password registration
CNF-53 Key Lock is being made for the first time, enter ‘0’. It is the factory default.
PW 2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, then a
new window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The
process will not move to next stage until the user enters a valid
password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, Code CNF-53 will be displayed.
238 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. The [Locked]
sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled.
CNF-52 Key Lock
Once enabled, pressing the [PROG/ENT] key aton function code will not
Set
allow the display edit mode to run. To disable parameter modification
prohibition, re-enter the password. The [Locked] sign will disappear.
If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.
5.38 Changed Parameter Display

This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this
feature to track changed parameters.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Changed parameter
CNF 41 Changed Para 0 View All - -
display
Changed Parameter Display Setting Details
Code Description
Setting Function
CNF-41 0 View All Display all parameters
Changed Para
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only
Hx2000 AC Drive 239

5.39 User Group

Create a user defined group and register user-selected parameters from the existing
function groups. The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64 parameter registrations.
Setting
Range
UserGrp
42 Multi-function key settings Multi Key Sel 3 - -
SelKey
CNF
Delete all user registered UserGrp
45 0 No - -
codes AllDel
User Group Setting Details
Code Description
Select 3 (UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key setting options. If
user group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function key
to the user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display user
group (USR Grp) items on the Keypad.
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
No Procedure
1 Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter
you need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example,
if the [MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in
CNF-42 Multi Key DRV-01 (Cmd Frequency), the screen below will be
Sel displayed.
❶ Group name and code number of the parameter

❷ Name of the parameter
❸ Code number to be used in the user group. Pressing the
[PROG/ENT] key on the code number (40 Code) will register
DRV-01 as code 40 in the user group.
240 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40
❺ Setting range of the user group code. Entering ‘0’ cancels
the settings.
3 ❸ Set a code number to use to register the parameter in the
user group. Select the code number and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
4 Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If
no code is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed.
Entering ‘0’ cancels the settings.
5 The registered parameters are listed in the user group in
U&M mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if
necessary. For example, a parameter can be registered as
code 2, code 11, and more in the user group.
Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group.
No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the code
that is to be deleted.
3 Press the [MULTI] key.
4 Move to ‘YES’ on the deletion confirmation screen, and press
the [PROG/ENT] key.
5 Deletion completed.
CNF-25 UserGrp
Set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
AllDel
Hx2000 AC Drive 241

5.40 Easy Start On

Run Easy Start On to easily setup the basic motor parameters required to operate a motor
in a batch. Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to ‘1 (Yes)’ to activate the feature, initialize all
parameters by setting CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to ‘1 (All Grp)’, and restart the inverter to
activate Easy Start On.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Parameter easy start
CNF 61 Easy Start On 1 Yes - -
settings
Easy Start On Setting Details
Code Description
Follow the procedures listed below to set the easy start on parameters.
No Procedures
1 Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to ‘1(Yes)’.
2 Select ‘1 (All Grp)’ in CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to initialize all
parameters in the inverter.
3 Restarting the inverter will activate Easy Start On. Set the
values in the following screens on the Keypad. To escape from
Easy Start On, press the [ESC] key.
Start Easy Set: Select ‘Yes’.
CNF-99: Select a macro.
BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel: Set motor rated frequency.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.
BAS-13 Rated Curr: Set motor rated current.
BAS-15 Rated Volt: Set motor rated voltage.
CNF-61 Easy Start BAS-11 Pole Number: Set motor pole number.
On BAS-19 AC Input Volt: Set input voltage.
PRT-08 Reset Restart: Sets the restart voltage when
performing a trip reset.
PRT-09 Retry Number: Sets the number of restart trial when
performing a trip reset.
COM-96 PowerOn Resume: Sets the serial communication
restart function.
CON-71 SpeedSearch: Set SpeedSearch.
DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set command source.
DRV-07 Freq Ref Src: Set Frequency Reference source.
When the settings are complete, the minimum parameter

settings on the motor have been made. The Keypad will return
to a monitoring display. Now the motor can be operated with the
command source set at DRV-06.
242 Hx2000 AC Drive

Use caution when turning on the inverter after Easy Start On configuration. If codes such as
PRT-08 (Reset Restart), COM-96 (PowerOn Resume), or CON-71 (SpeedSearch) are
configured in Easy Start On, the inverter may start operating as soon as it is powered on.
5.41 Config (CNF) Mode

The config mode parameters are used to configure keypad related features.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
LCD brightness/contrast
2 LCD Contrast - -
adjustment
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver x.xx -
11 Keypad S/W version Keypad S/W Ver x.xx - -
12 Keypad title version KPD Title Ver x.xx - -
CNF*
30–32 Power slot type Option-x Type None - -
44 Erase trip history Erase All Trip No - -
60 Add title update Add Title Up No - -
Initialize accumulated
62 WH Count Reset No - -
electric energy
Hx2000 AC Drive 243

Config Mode Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-2 LCD Contrast Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the keypad.
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver,
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Checks the OS version in the inverter and on the keypad.
Ver
CNF-12 KPD Title Ver Checks the title version on the keypad.
Checks the type of option board installed in the option slot.

CNF-30–32 Option-x
The Hx2000 inverters use type-1 option boards only (CNF-30
Type
Option-1 Type). CNF-31 and CNF-32 are not used.
CNF-44 Erase All Trip Deletes the stored trip history.
When inverter SW version is updated and more code is added,
CNF-60 settings will add, display, and operate the added codes. Set
CNF-60 Add Title Up
CNF-60 to ‘1 (Yes)’ and disconnect the keypad from the inverter.
Reconnecting the keypad to the inverter updates titles.
CNF-62 WH Count
Initialize the accumulated electric energy consumption count.
Reset
5.42 Macro Selection

The Macro selection function is used to put various application functions together in a group.
For applications with the Hx2000 series inverters, 7 basic Macro configurations are
currently available. Macro functions cannot be added by the user, but the data can be
modified.
Setting
Range
0 Basic
1 Compressor
2 Supply Fan
CNF 43 Macro selection Macro Select 0–7 -
Exhaust
3
Fan
Cooling
4
Tower
244 Hx2000 AC Drive

Setting
Range
Circul.
5
Pump
Vacuum
6
Pump
Constant
7
Torq
Macro Selection Details
Code Description
A list of Macro settings is displayed for user selection. When a Macro
function is selected, all the related parameters are automatically changed
based on the inverter’s Macro settings.
CNF-43 Macro
If ‘0 (Basic)’ is selected, all the inverter parameters, including the
Select
parameters controlled by the Macro function, are initialized.
For other macro application settings (settings 1–7), refer to 5.42 Macro
Selection on page 244.
5.43 Timer Settings

Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer. Sets the On/Off controls to the multi-function
outputs and relays according to the timer settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Px terminal Px Define (Px:
IN 65–71 35 Timer In 0-55 -
configuration P1–P7)
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1
Timer
Multi-function output 22 0-41 -
33 Q1 Define Out
1
OUT 0.00–
55 Timer on delay TimerOn Delay 3.00 sec
100.00
0.00–
56 Timer off delay TimerOff Delay 1.00 sec
100.00
Hx2000 AC Drive 245

Timer Setting Details
Code Description
Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a

timer terminal by setting it to ‘35(Timer In)’.
OUT-31 Relay 1, Set the multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer
OUT-36 Q1 Define to ’22 (Timer out)’.
OUT-55 Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output
TimerOn Delay, (Timer out) after the time set at OUT-55 has passed. When the multi-
OUT-56 function input terminal is off, the multi-function output or relay turns off
TimerOff Delay after the time set at OUT-56.
5.44 Multiple Motor Control (MMC)

The MMC (Multiple Motor Control) function is used to control multiple motors for a pump
system. The main motor connected with the inverter output is controlled by the PID
controller. The auxiliary motors are connected with the supply power and turned on and off
by the relay within the inverter.

0 None
1 Single Ctrl
Multi
MMC function 2
40 MMC Sel 0: None Follower -
AP1 selection
Multi
3
Master
41 Serve Drv
41 Bypass selection Regul Bypass 0: No 0 No -
1
AP1-47~87 and AP1-91~98 are not displayed when AP1-40 is set to ’4(Serve Drv)’.
246 Hx2000 AC Drive


1 Yes
Number of auxiliary 1–
42 Num of Aux 5 -
motors AuxMaxMotor2
Auxiliary starting
433 Starting Aux 1 1–5 -
motor selection
Number of operating Aux Motor
44 - - -
auxiliary motors Run
Auxiliary motor (#1– 4)
45 Aux Priority 1 - - -
priority
Auxiliary motor (#5– 8)
46 Aux Priority 2 - - -
priority
Auxiliary motor 0 No
48 Aux All Stop 0: No -
operation at stop 1 Yes
0 FILO
Stop order for auxiliary 1 FIFO
49 FIFO/FILO 0: FILO -
motors Op Time
2
Order
Auxiliary motor Actual Start
50 2 0–100 Unit
pressure difference Diff
Main motor
acceleration time
51 Aux Acc Time 2 0–600.0 Sec
when auxiliary motor #
is reduced
Main motor
deceleration time Aux Dec
52 2 0–600.0 Sec
when auxiliary motor Time
is added
Auxiliary motor start
53 Aux Start DT 5 0.0–999.9 Sec
delay time
Auxiliary motor stop
54 Aux Stop DT 5 0.0–999.9 Sec
delay time
55 Auto change mode Auto Ch 0: None 0 None -
2
If Extension IO option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’, AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘8’.
Otherwise AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘5’.
3
If AP1-49 is set to ‘2(Op Time Order)’, the parameter cannot be set by a user and it is
automatically changed as the operation time of aux motors.
Hx2000 AC Drive 247


selection Mode AUX
1
Exchange
MAIN
2
Exchange
56 Auto change time Auto Ch Time 72: 00 00: 00–99: 00 Min
Auto change Auto Ch Low Freq–High
57 20.00 Hz
frequency Level Freq
Auto change
58 Auto Op Time - - -
operation time
Auxiliary motor
59 Aux Stop Diff 2 0~100 Unit
pressure difference
Target frequency of Follower Low Freq~
60 Aux Motor while Multi 4 50.00 Hz
Freq High Freq
Master is operating
#1 auxiliary motor Low Freq–High
61 Start Freq 1 45 Hz
start frequency Freq
65 #5 auxiliary motor Start Freq 5 45 Low Freq–High Hz
70 #1 auxiliary motor stop Stop Freq 1 20 Low Freq–High Hz
frequency Freq
4
AP1-60 is displayed when AP1-40 is set to ‘3’.
5
AP1-66~68 , AP1-75~77 and AP1-85~87 are displayed when Extension IO option is
equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
248 Hx2000 AC Drive


frequency Freq
#3 auxiliary motor stop Low Freq–High
72 Stop Freq 3 20 Hz
frequency Freq
#4 auxiliary motor stop Low Freq–High
73 Stop Freq 4 20 Hz
frequency Freq
frequency Freq
frequency Freq
frequency Freq
frequency Freq
80 #1 auxiliary motor Aux1 Ref 0 0–Unit Band Unit
reference Comp
compensation
#2 auxiliary motor
Aux2 Ref
81 reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#3 auxiliary motor
Aux3 Ref
Comp
compensation
#4 auxiliary motor
Aux4 Ref
Comp
compensation
reference Comp
compensation
reference Comp
compensation
reference Comp
compensation
reference Comp
compensation
90 Interlock selection Interlock 0: No 0 No -
1 Yes
Hx2000 AC Drive 249


Delay time before an
operation for the next
motor when an
91 Interlock DT 5.0 0–360.0 Sec
interlock or an auto
change on the main
motor occur.
0 Aux 1
1 Aux 2
2 Aux 3
Selecting auxiliary 3 Aux 4
AuxRunTime
956 motor to indicate in
Sel 4 Aux 5
[AP1-96] [AP1-97].
57 Aux 6
6 Aux 7
7 Aux 8
96 Operating time(Day) AuxRunTime 0 0~65535
of auxiliary motor Day
chosen in [AP1-95].
Operating time of
AuxRunTime
97 auxiliary motor chosed 00:00 00:00 ~ 23:59
Min
in [AP1-95].
0 None
1 All
2 Aux 1
3 Aux 2
Deleting operating AuxRunTime 4 Aux 3
98
time of auxiliary motor. Clr 5 Aux 4
6 Aux 5
7 Aux 6
8 Aux 7
9 Aux 8
6
AP1-95~98 are available when MMC and Master Follower functions are performed.
7
‘5(Aux6) ~7(Aux8)’ of AP1-95 and ‘7(Aux6) ~9(Aux8)’ of AP1-98 and displayed when
Extension IO option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
250 Hx2000 AC Drive

MMC Setting Details
Code Description
Selects the MMC operation settings.
-None : Deactivates MMC function
-Single Ctrl : Activates general MMC function
AP1-40 MMC Sel -Multi Follower : Activates Master Follower as Multi Follower
mode
-Multi Master: Activates Master Follower as Multi Master mode
-Serve Drv: Sets Serve Drv used at Master Follower.
AP1-42 Num of Aux Decides the number of auxiliary motors to use.
AP1-43 Starting Aux Sets the start auxiliary motor.
AP1-44 Aux Motor Run Indicates the number of the operating auxiliary motors.
Indicates the operating priority of auxiliary motors.

According to setting by users, it can be influenced by Interlock,
AutoChange and operating time
Each four-digit numbers for the parameter mean the auxiliary
motor numbers and indicate the priority of auxiliary motors. In
other words, the most right number of [AP1-45 Aux Priority1]
indicates the priority of Auxiliary motor 1 and the second number
from the right of [AP1-45 Aux Priority1] indicates the priority of
AP1-45–46 Aux Priority1–2 Auxiliary motor 2.
[AP1-45 Aux Priority1] [AP1-46 Aux Priority2]
x x x x x x x x
The Priority of The Priority of The Priority of The Priority of

the Aux motor4 the Aux motor1 the Aux motor8 the Aux motor5
When [AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “No” during input to stop
operating, auxiliary motors are turned off at the same time. When
AP1-48 Aux All Stop
[AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “YES”, auxiliary motors are turned
off gradually based on time of [AP1-54 Aux Stop DT].
Sets the operating priority of MMC.

AP1-49 FIFO/FILO
FIFO: Same as On/Off order of auxiliary motors.
Hx2000 AC Drive 251

Code Description
FILO: Opposite to On/Off order auxiliary motors.
Op Time Order: setting automatically according to operating time
of auxiliary motors.
One of the conditions to turn on and off the next auxiliary motors.
AP1-50 Aux Start Diff
Parameters to set the difference when the difference between
AP1-59 Aux Stop Diff
the reference and feedback is more than regular value
Parameters used when AP1-40 is set to ‘Single Ctrl’
When an auxiliary motor starts or stops, the main motor stops the
PID control, and performs general acceleration and deceleration.
When an auxiliary motor starts, the main motor decelerates to
the auxiliary motor deceleration frequency set at AP1-70–74
AP1-51 Acc Time (Stop Freq 1–5) based on the deceleration time set at AP1-52
AP1-52 Dec Time (Dec Time).
When the auxiliary motor stops, the main motor accelerates up to

the auxiliary motor restart frequency set at AP1-61–65 (Start Freq
1–5) based on the acceleration time set at AP1-51 (Acc Time).
The auxiliary motors turns on or off after the auxiliary motor stop
AP1-53 Aux Start DT delay time or the auxiliary motor restart delay time elapses, or if
AP1-54 Aux Stop DT the difference between the current reference and the feedback is
greater than the value set at AP1-50 (Actual Pr Diff).
AP1-61–65 Start Freq1–5 Sets the auxiliary motor start frequency.
AP1-70–74 Stop Freq 1–5 Sets the auxiliary motor stop frequency.
AP1-95 AuxRunTime Sel Selects auxiliary motor to be used in AP1-96 and AP1-97.
AP1-96 AuxRunTime Day Indicates operating time (day) selected in AP1-95.
AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min Indicates operating time of auxiliary motors selected in AP1-95.
AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr Deletes operating time of auxiliary motors.
252 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Configure the output terminals to ’21 (MMC)’ to use the terminals
OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5 to control the auxiliary motors. The number of the configured
OUT-36 Q1 Define output terminals determines the total number of auxiliary motors
to be used.
5.44.1 Multiple Motor Control (MMC) Basic Sequence

Multiple motor control (MMC) is an operation based on PID control. During an MMC
operation, the main and auxiliary motors organically operate together.
During a PID operation, the auxiliary motors are turned on when the inverter frequency
reaches the start frequencies set at AP1-61–65 (Start freq), and the difference between the
PID reference and feedback is bigger than the value set at AP1-50. Then, the auxiliary
motors stop operating when the operation frequency reach the stop frequency set at AP1-
70–74 (Stop Freq 1–5) and the difference between the PID feedback and reference
becomes greater than the value set at AP1-50.
#1–5 auxiliary
61– Start Freq 1– Frequency value Low Freq–
motor start Hz
65 5 within the range High Freq
frequency
Auxiliary
AP1 motors Percentage value
50 Actual Pr Diff 0–100 (%) %
pressure within the range
difference
#1–5 auxiliary
70– Stop Freq 1– Frequency value Low Freq–
motor stop Hz
74 5 within the range High Freq
frequency
Hx2000 AC Drive 253

The following diagram describes the MMC basic sequence based on FILO and FIFO
settings.
Frequency
Max Freq Output

frequency
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63 AP1-74 AP1-74
AP1-62 AP1-73 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70 AP1-70
Time
On
Aux Motor 1
Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
PID Reference AP1-59
AP1-50
PID Feedback
MMC Basic operation(FILO)
254 Hx2000 AC Drive

Frequency
Output
AP1-65 frequency AP1-65
AP1-64 AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63 AP1-74 AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-62 AP1-73 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72 AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70 AP1-70
On
Aux Motor 1
Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
AP1-59
PID Reference
AP1-50
PID Feedback
MMC Basic operation(FIFO)
Hx2000 AC Drive 255

Priority at the moment

M3 → M2 → M1 / Priority at the moment
M4 → M5 M3 → M2 → M1 /
M4 → M5
M2 → M1 → M3 /
M4 → M5
Frequency
M1 → M2 → M3 /
M4 → M5 Output
Max Freq frequency
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63
AP1-62
AP1-62
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-71
AP1-71
AP1-70
5min
10min Supposing its operating in
less than 1 minute
30min Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
MMC Basic operation(OP Time Order)
The following diagram is an operation graph based on the start and stop delay times set at
AP1-53 (Aux start DT) and AP1-54 (Aux stop DT). When the start or stop frequencies are
reached, the auxiliary motor waits for the time set at AP1-53 (Aux start DT) or AP1-54 (Aux
stop DT) before it starts or stops.
256 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.44.2 Standby Motor

In case that the number set to MMC in [Relay 1~5] of OUT group is lower than the number
of [Num of Aux], auxiliary motor becomes Standby motor state as much as the difference.
Ex) In case that Replay1, 2, 3 and 4, and 5 are set to MMC and the number of [Num of Aux]
is 3.
Relay1 Relay2 Relay3 Relay4 Relay5
Operable Operable Operable Standby Standby
In this case, though only Relay1, 2, 3 operate MMC function and the output of Relay is set
to MMC, it doesn’t work as long as the order is not changed by Interlock and Auto Change.
Standby auxiliary motor becomes operable when there is Interlock or Auto change in
Operable auxiliary motor.
Hx2000 AC Drive 257

5.44.3 Auto Change

The auto change function enables the inverter to automatically switch operations between
main and auxiliary motors. Prolonged continuous operation of a motor deteriorates motor
capabilities. The auto change function switches the motors automatically when certain
conditions are met to avoid biased use of certain motors and protect them from
deterioration.
0 None 0 None
Auto change AUX
1 Aux motor 1
55 mode Auto Ch Mode Exchange -
selection
Main
2 Main motor 2
Exchange
AP1 Auto change Time value within the

56 Auto Ch Mode 00: 00–99: 00 Sec.
time range
Auto change Frequency value Low Freq–
57 Auto Ch Level Hz
frequency within the range High Freq
Auto change
Time value within the
58 operation Auto Op Time - Sec.
range
time
Auto Change Setting Details
Code Description
Select the motors to apply the auto change function.
Setting Description
0 None
AP1-55 Auto Ch Mode
1 Aux Exchange
2 Main Exchange
Refer to Examples of Auto Change Sequences below for details.
AP1-56 Auto Ch Time Sets the auto change intervals.
The parameter is for Main Exchange. In case that [AP1-55 Auto Ch

Mode] is set to Main Exchange, all the conditions for Auto Change
AP1-57 Auto Ch Level are met under the frequency in which output frequency of Main
motors are set in AP1-57. AP1-57 is the frequency to activate Auto
Change.
258 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Indicates time to activate Auto Change. In case that other conditions
for Auto Change are not met in spite of meeting the condition of
AP1-58 Auto Op Time AP1-56, the value of time in AP1-58 might be bigger than the value
set at Auto Ch Time of AP1-56 because of the failure of Auto
Change.
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘0 (None),’ the auxiliary motors operates based on
the order (sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change functionality is disabled.
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘1 (Aux Exchange)’, the auxiliary motors operate
based on the order (sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change is activated
when auxiliary motors are in the operating state over time of AP1-56 and then every
auxiliary motor is stopped.
Once the auto change is operated, the auxiliary motor that started first is given the lowest
priority and all the other auxiliary motors’ priority level increases by 1. Then, general MMC
operation continues.
NOTE
Auto change does not work while the auxiliary motors are operating. Auto change is operated
only when all the auxiliary motors are stopped and if all the conditions set for the auto change
are met. When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the
highest priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor. If the inverter power is turned off then
turned back on, the auxiliary motor set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux) becomes the starting auxiliary
motor.
Start order and stop order of the auxiliary motors are based on the order set at AP1-49
(FIFO/FILO).
The following diagrams depict the auxiliary motor start and stop sequence, based on a FIFO
configuration, when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58.
Hx2000 AC Drive 259

If all the auxiliary motors are turned off and the inverter operation frequency is below the
frequency set at AP1-58 (Auto Op Time), auto change is operated. Then, when the inverter
frequency increases due to decrease in the feedback, auxiliary motor #2 starts instead of
auxiliary motor #1 due to this auto change (auxiliary motor #1 starts last, for it has the lowest
priority).
Later on during the operation, when the feedback increases and the auxiliary motors begin to
stop, the FILO setting is applied to control the order for the auxiliary motors to stop.
Output Option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]

frequency
[Aux Start DT] [Aux Stop DT]
Max Freq
AP1-65 AP1-65 AP1-65

Perform Aux_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time] AP1-64 AP1-64
AP1-64
AP1-63 AP1-63 AP1-74 AP1-63
AP1-62 AP1-73 AP1-62

AP1-62
AP1-61
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-57 AP1-70 AP1-70 AP1-70
On
Fx
Off Option 2: All auxiliary motors are off.
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Aux Auto Change operation(FILO)
260 Hx2000 AC Drive

Output option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]

frequency
Max Freq Perform Aux_Exch

Reset the [Auto Op Time]
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63 AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-61
AP1-57
On
Fx
Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Aux Auto Change operation(FIFO)
Hx2000 AC Drive 261

Priority of the moment

M3 → M2 → M1 /
M4 → M5
M4 → M5 → M3 /
M2 → M1
M3 → M2 → M1 /
M4 → M5
M2 → M1 → M3 /
Inverter M4 → M5
Out Freq Priority of the moment
M1 → M2 → M3 /
M4 → M5
Option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65
Perform Aux_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time] AP1-64
AP1-64
AP1-63 AP1-63 AP1-74

AP1-62 Priority of the moment
AP1-62 M4 → M5 → M3 / AP1-73
M2 → M1
AP1-61
AP1-61 AP1-72 AP1-72 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70
AP1-70
5min
10min Supposing its operation in
less than 1 minute
30min Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
On M3(20min)
Fx Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3 Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M4, M5 Standby motor : M1, M2
Aux Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when operable motor and standby motor are set to 3 and 2 each
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘2 (Main Exchange),’ the system uses all the motors
(main and auxiliary motors) regardless of the types. The auxiliary motor with the highest
priority is operated first and used as the main motor. Then, when the auto change
conditions are met, this motor is stopped and the motor priorities are re-arranged. This way,
the system always operates the motor with the highest priority and uses it as the main
motor of the MMC operation. In this case, before auto change is operated for the main
motor, the interlock delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT) is applied.
262 Hx2000 AC Drive

NOTE
Auto change does not work while the auxiliary motors are operating. Auto change is operated
only when all the auxiliary motors are stopped and if all the conditions set for the auto change
are met. When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the
highest priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor. If the inverter power is turned off then
turned back on, the auxiliary motor set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux) becomes the starting auxiliary
motor.
The following diagrams depict the auto change operation when AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to
‘2 (Main),’ when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58. If
the inverter operation frequency is below the frequency set at AP1-57, all the auxiliary motors
including the start auxiliary motor are turned off. After the delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT)
elapses, the ‘Main’ auto change is operated. After the ‘Main’ auto change, the auxiliary motor
that was turned on after the starting auxiliary motor becomes the main motor.
In the following diagrams, because auxiliary motor #1 is the starting auxiliary motor. Auxiliary
motor #2 becomes the main motor after the auto change. The auxiliary motor on/off operation is
identical to that of Aux Exchange, and the ‘off’ conditions differ based on the FIFO/FILO
configuration.
Hx2000 AC Drive 263

Freqency
Max Freq Output
frequency
Main_Exch occurs
AP1-70 AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Run Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]
Inv State Stop
Main Motor
Main Auto Change operation(FILO)
264 Hx2000 AC Drive

Frequency
Max Freq Output
frequency
Main_Exch occurs
AP1-70
AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Run
Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]
Inv State
Stop
Main Motor
Main Auto Change operation(FIFO)
Hx2000 AC Drive 265

Priority at the moment Priority at the moment

M1 → M3 → M2 / M4 → M5 → M3 /
M4 → M5 M2 → M1

M1 → M2 → M3 /
Frequency M4 → M5
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65 Perform Main_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time]
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63 AP1-
74
AP1-62
AP1-62
AP1-72
AP1-72
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
5min
Supposing its operation in
10min less than 1minute
30min
Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)
On
Fx Off
Run
Inv State Stop

Main Motor
Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4 Main Motor
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3 Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M4, M5 Standby motor : M1, M2
Main Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each
266 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.44.4 Interlock
When there is motor trouble, the interlock feature is used to stop the affected motor and
replace it with another that is not currently operating (off state). To activate the interlock
feature, connect the cables for abnormal motor signal to the inverter input terminal and
configure the terminals as interlock 1–5 inputs. Then, the inverter decides the motor’s
availability based on the signal inputs. The order in which the alternative motor is selected is
decided based on the auto change mode selection options set at AP1-55.
Interlock 0 NO
AP1 90 Interlock 1 -
selection 1 YES
After configuring the IN-65–71 multi-purpose input terminals as Interlock input 1–5, if an
interlock signal is received from an auxiliary motor, the output contacts are turned off for the
motor and the motor is excluded from the MMC operation. This causes the priority level of
the auxiliary motors with lower priority level than the interlocked motor to be increased by 1.
The interlock is released when the input terminals (IN-65–71) are turned off, and the
relevant auxiliary motor is included in the MMC operation again, with lowest priority.
When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the highest
priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor.
When the multi-purpose input terminals (IN-65–71, P1–7 Define) are set for the interlock
feature, an interlock is ‘Off’ when the contacts are valid, and ‘On’ when they are invalid.
InterLock Setting Details
Code Description
AP1-90 InterLock Enables or disables the Interlock.
AP1-91 Interlock DT Sets the delay time before the Interlock occurs.
Hx2000 AC Drive 267

Note
IN-65–71 PxDefine: Select the terminal from the input terminal function group (IN-65–71) and
set Interlock 1-5 respectively with the correct motor order. When auto change mode selection
(AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5 motors are operated, including the main motor,
the interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer to the montors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock
numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
However, if auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and auxiliary
motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock 1,2,3,4 are the
monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4.
The figure below shows the motor operating as a sequence by FILO. The motor turns on
from the starting auxiliary motor (Starting Aux) by order, and turns off depending on the rise
of PID feedback. At this point, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #2 by multi-function
input, the auxiliary motor turns off. The output frequency falls to the frequency set at AP1-71,
and rises again. Then, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #1. The auxiliary motor stops
and falls to the frequency set at AP1-71, and then rises again. Interlock #2 should be
released first, then release interlock #1 to let the auxiliary motor operate (When interlocks
are released, they will have the lowest priority of the operating motors). If the auxiliary motor
turns off by a rise of Feedback, the auxiliary motors turns off in order from 1 to 5, because
auxiliary motor #1 turned on last. The interlocked auxiliary motor will have the lowest priority.
268 Hx2000 AC Drive

Frequency
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-62 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Interlock 1
Interlock 3
100%
Feedback
0%
Interlock operation(Op time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each
Hx2000 AC Drive 269

When interlock is released, the auxiliary motor’s priority becomes different. When Interlock
occurs at auxiliary motor #2, the priority is number 1>3>4>5>2. When it occurs at auxiliary
motor #1, the priority is number 3>4>5>2>1. The figure below shows the order of the
auxiliary motors activating depending on the priority (of Interlock occurring and releasing). In
the figure, the order is the same for FILO/FIFO, because the auxiliary motor turns on.
Max
Freq
AP1-74
AP1-62 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-70
On
Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Feedback
Interlock 1
Interlock 2
Interlock operation
In case that Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each, it operates in the
order of “Aux Motor 2 → Aux Motor 4 → Aux Motor 5”.
270 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.44.5 Aux Motor Time Change

It is used to set a motor to the smallest number among Drives not inter-locked by [AP1-43
Starting Aux] and place others in order based on it when operating time of every motor is
deleted through <1:All> of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr].
In case that operating time of each motor is deleted through <2: Aux1> ~ <6: Aux5> of
[AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr] or changed by combining [AP1-96 AuxRunTime Day] and [AP1-
97 AuxRunTime Min], motor stopped changes the priority with motor stopped as operating
motor does with operating motor.
The table below shows the case to change the operating time of Aux Motor2 running on the
same condition of Sequence1.
Aux Priority 1 Aux Priority 2 Aux Priority 3 Aux Priority 4 Aux Priority 5
Sequences (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating
time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min)
Aux Motor3 Aux Motor2 Aux Motor1 Aux Motor4 Aux Motor 5
1 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (01:30) (01:50)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Operating>
Set <3 Aux2of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr]
2 (00:00) (00:30) (00:50) (01:30) (01:50)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Operating>
Set time of Aux2to 2:00 through [AP1-97 AuxRunTime

Min]
(00:30) (00:50) (02:00) (01:30) (01:50)
3
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Stopping> <정지상태>
The table below shows the case to change the operating time of Aux Motor5 stopped on the
same condition of Sequence1
Hx2000 AC Drive 271

Aux Priority 1 Aux Priority 2 Aux Priority 3 Aux Priority 4 Aux Priority 5
Sequences (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating
time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min)
1 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (01:30) (01:50)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Stopping> <Stopping>
Set <6: Aux5> of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr]
Aux Motor3 Aux Motor2 Aux Motor1 Aux Motor 5 Aux Motor 4
2 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (0) (01:30)
Set time of Aux5 to 2:00 through [AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min]
3 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (01:30) (02:00)
5.44.6 Regular Bypass

This function controls the motor speed based on the feedback amount instead of using the
PID. Auxiliary motors may be controlled with this feature based on the feedback amount.
Setting
Range
0 No
41 Bypass selection Regul Bypass 1 - -
1 Yes
Freq Low
61– #1–5 auxiliary motor Start Freq 1– Frequency value
Limit–Freq Hz
AP1 65 start frequency 5 within the range
High limit
70– #1–5 auxiliary motor Stop Freq 1– Frequency value Low Freq–
Hz
74 stop frequency 5 within the range High Freq
31– Multi-function Multiple motor

OUT Relay 1–5 21 - -
35 relay1–5 control (MMC)
272 Hx2000 AC Drive

Setting
Range
KEB
36 Multi-function 1 item Q1 Define 40 - -
Operation
Regular Bypass Detail Settings
Code Description
Sets the regular bypass mode.
AP1-41 Regular Bypass Mode Setting

0 No
1 Yes
AP1-61–65 Start Freq 1–

Sets the auxiliary motor start frequency.
5
AP1-70–74 Stop Freq 1–

Sets the auxiliary motor stop frequency.
5
Set OUT31–35 to ’21 (MMC)’ to use the out terminal for auxiliary
OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5
motor operation. The number of configured output terminals
OUT-36 Q1 Define
determines the total number of auxiliary motors to be used.
When an input set by the PID feedback of the analog input terminal (I or V1 or Pulse) is
100%, divide the area by the number of motors being used (including the main motor).
Each auxiliary motor turns on when feedback reaches the relevant level and turns off when
feedback goes below the relevant level. The primary motor increases its speed based on
the feedback and when it reaches the start frequency of the relevant auxiliary motor and
decelerates to the stop frequency. The primary motor reaccelerates when the frequency
increases, depending on the feedback increase. If the relevant auxiliary motor is turned off
because of the feedback decrease, the primary motor accelerates from the stop frequency
to the start frequency.
To use the regular bypass function, ‘1 (Yes)’ has to be selected in the MMC and PID
functions. Only FILO operates between the AP1-49 (FIFO/FILO) in a regular bypass
function.
Hx2000 AC Drive 273

Out Freq
area(1) area(2) area(3) area(4) area(5) area(6)

Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-62 AP1-74
AP1-61 AP1-73
AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-70
16.6% 33.3% 49.9% 66.6% 83.3%
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
On
Aux Motor 1 Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Regular ByPass
5.44.7 Aux Motor PID Compensation

When the number of operating auxiliary motors increases, the flow rate of the pipe also
increases and the pressure of the pipe line decreases. Aux motor PID compensation
compensates for this pressure when the number of the auxiliary motor increases. By adding
the additional PID reference value (relevant to the auxiliary motor) to the current reference,
the loss of pressure can be compensated for.
Auxiliary PID Compensation Detailed Settings
Code Description
Set the relevant PID reference compensation rate whenever the auxiliary
AP1-80–84
motor is turned on. The PID reference can be set over 100%, but when it
Aux 1–5 Ref
exceeds 100%, the maximum value of the PID reference is limited to
Comp
100%. Unit band value is the value between unit 100%–0%.
274 Hx2000 AC Drive

< Auxiliary motor PID compensation>
NOTE
When the aux reference value is set to 100%, the final PID reference becomes 100%. In this
case, output frequency of the inverter does not decelerate because the PID output does not
decelerate even if the input feedback value is 100%.
Hx2000 AC Drive 275

5.44.8 Master Follower

It is used to control multiple inverters with an inverter. When [AP1-40 MMC Sel] is set to <2 :
Multi Follower> or <3 : Multi Master>, it is called as {Leader Drive}. The rest inverters set
to <4: Serve Drv> are called as {Serve Drive}.
Leader Drive
It is an inverter to execute PID control with PID Feedback from sensor, control Multi Motor
and function as Master of communication.
In addition, if it is set to Leader Drive, Drive turned on at first performs functions of Soft
Fill(Pre-PID), Sleep/WakeUp and Aux Motor PID Compensation).
Serve Drive
It is an inverter to operate motors with Leader Drive.
Each inverter and motor has the same number (ID), [COM-01 Int485 St ID].
Among the operating motors, the motor with the lowest priority is called Main Motor and the
rest of motors are called as Aux Motor.
※In case that every motor is stopped, the motor with the highest priority is called as Main
Motor.
This is, Main Motor and Aux Motor are changed according to the situation and Leader Drive
and Serve Drive are fixed.
The picture below represents foundational composition.
276 Hx2000 AC Drive

Leader Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Inverter
ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 8 Setting
Communication
Line
Sensor
M1 M2 M3 M4 M8
Main Aux Aux Aux Aux

Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor
5.44.8.1 Multi Motor Mode

Only Main Motor can be controlled by PID and Aux Motor performs the operating mode with
Follower Freq.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1) →Motor2 (M2) →Motor3
(M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time)
Hx2000 AC Drive 277

Out Freq
PID Limit High M1, M2 M1, M2, M3 M1, M2

Follower Freq
M3 M2 M1
Start Freq 3
Stop Freq 3
Start Freq 2
PID Output
Stop Freq 2
Start Freq 1
M1 OutFreq M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq
Run Cmd
FeedBack PID Reference
Follower Freq
M1 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
M3 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor

Aux Motor
.
PID Ctrl
A condition that extra Aux Motor is turned on.
After a real operating frequency reaches the frequency set in Start Freq belonging to the
next priority number and the time set in AP1-53(Aux Start DT) passes, AP1-44(Aux Motor
Run) increases (+1) and it becomes Aux Motor, accelerating based on time of [DRV-03
Acc Time]/[DRV-04 Dec Time] until [AP1-60 Follower Freq].
At the same time, as an inverter corresponding to the next priority is turned on, the motor
becomes Main Motor(available PID control). It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46
Aux Priority].
A condition that Aux Motor is turned off.
If the real operating frequency of Main Motor is lower than the frequency set in Stop Freq,
AP1-44(Aux Motor Run) decreases(-1) after the time set in AP1-54(Aux Stop DT) and the
present Main Motor becomes Aux Motor, decelerating based on time of [DRV-04 Dec Time]
until 0Hz.
At the same time, the motor corresponding to the previous priority becomes Main Motor
(available PID control). It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].
278 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.44.8.2 Multi Follower Mode

It is a mode to control motors turned on with the same PID output frequency.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1)→Motor2 (M2)→Motor3 (M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time).

Out Freq
PID Limit High

High Freq
Start Freq 3 Stop Freq 3

M1, M2
M1, M2
Start Freq 2
M3 Stop Freq 2
PID Output
Start Freq 1
M2 M1
M1 OutFreq
M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq
t
Run Cmd

PID Ctrl
Main
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl
M3 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor

PID Ctrl
A condition that extra Aux Motor is turned on.

After a real operating frequency reaches the frequency set in Start Freq belonging to the
next priority number and the time set in AP1-53(Aux Start DT) passes, AP1-44(Aux Motor
Run) increases (+1). In addition, Aux Motor with the next priority of Main Motor is turned on
and the new operating Aux Motor becomes Main Motor. Operating motors can be controlled
together by PID. It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].
A condition that Aux Motor is turned off.

If the real operating frequency of Main Motor is lower than the frequency set in Stop Freq,
AP1-44(Aux Motor Run) decreases(-1) after the time set in AP1-54(Aux Stop DT) and the
present Main Motor becomes Aux Motor, decelerating based on time of [DRV-04 Dec Time]
until 0Hz.
At the same time, the rest of operating motors last PID control. It is possible to check the
priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].
Hx2000 AC Drive 279

5.44.8.3 Re-arrangement of priority based on operating time.

The priority of each Motor is arranged automatically based on operating time.
Among operating Motors, Motor with the longest operating time is placed at the last.
The moment for the priority arrangement is the time when the number of motor is changed.
M2 → M3 → M1
Out Freq

M2 → M1 → M3
PID Limit High M2, M3, M1 M2, M3

Follower Freq
M3
M2 M1 M3 M2
Start Freq 3
Stop Freq 3
Start Freq 2
Start Freq 1 PID Output
Stop Freq 1
M1 OutFreq M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq
Initial Priority
M1 → M2 → M3 More than 1min Less than 1min
t
Run Cmd

PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor
PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
Aux Motor PID Ctrl
280 Hx2000 AC Drive

The picture below shows the operating time of M1 is the longest during Multi Follower Mode.
M2 → M3 → M1
Out Freq
M2 → M1 → M3
PID Limit High

High Freq
M2, M3, M1 M2, M3, M1
PID Output
Start Freq 3 Stop Freq 3
M2, M1
Start Freq 2
M2, M3, M1
Start Freq 1
Stop Freq 1 M2, M3
Initial Priority M1 OutFreq M2
M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq M1 M3
M1 → M2 → M3
More than 1min Less than 1min [Aux Stop DT] t
Run Cmd
Main Motor Aux Motor

M1 Cmd Freq
PID Ctrl
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor

PID Ctrl
Main Motor
M3 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl
The conditions that Aux Motor is turned on and off are same as the description of Multi
Master Mode and Multi Follower Mode.
5.44.8.4 Master Follower Interlock

As Interlock signals are sent from Serve Drive, Leader Drive puts together through
Communication Line. Every Trip such as HAND State or OFF State of Serve Drive is
processed by Interlock in Leader Drive.
This is, other Server Drives keep performing Master Follower function except the cases that
it is in HAND/OFF State or there are trips
If Leader Drive is HAND State or OFF state, Master Follower system is not activated.
In case that Pipe Broken and Interlock Trip are caused in Leader Drive, every drive
operating is stopped and Master Follower keeps performing the function except Leader
Drive if there is another Trip.
(Leader Drive executes PID control and overall system control consistently.)
Hx2000 AC Drive 281

In this operating priority (M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔ M8), if interlock3 or

any trip and HAND/OFF State are caused, the motor is activated in this order (M1 ↔ M2 ↔
M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔ M8).
Leader Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Inverter
ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 8 Setting
Interlock1 Communication
Interlock2 Interlock3 Interlock4 Interlock8
Line
Sensor
M1 M2 M3 M4 M8
Main Aux Aux Aux Aux

Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor
The picture below shows the function in case that M3 becomes HAND/OFF State or
interlock and Trip are caused.(supposing that the priority is not changed),(interlock is the
function corresponding to B terminal(Normal close)).
Time to sort the priority
Out Freq according to the operation
time.
PID Limit High M1, M2 M1, M2, M3 M1, M2 M1, M2, M3 M1, M2
Follower Freq
M3 M2 M1
Start Freq 3
M3 Stop Freq 3
M3
Start Freq 2
PID Output
Stop Freq 2
Start Freq 1
M1 OutFreq M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq FreeRun

t
Run Cmd
Follower Freq
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
M3 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
M3
State
ChangeInterlock
or Trip
282 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control

Set reference values (on/off level) for analog input and control output relay or multi-function
output terminal on/off status accordingly.
Parameter
Setting
Output terminal on/off On/Off Ctrl
66 1 V1 0–8 -
control mode Src
Output terminal on Output terminal off
ADV 67 On-C Level 90.00 %
level level–100.00%
Output terminal off 0.00–Output terminal
68 Off-C Level 10.00 %
level on level
Multi-function relay 1
31 Relay 1
item
OUT 26 On/Off - -
Multi-function output 1
33 Q1 Define
item
Multi-function Output On/Off Control Setting Details
Code Description
ADV-66 OnOff Ctrl
Select analog input On/Off control.
Src
ADV-67 On Ctrl
Level ,
Set On/Off level at the output terminal.
ADV-68 Off Ctrl
Level
Hx2000 AC Drive 283

5.46 Press Regeneration Prevention

Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, motor
operation speed automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration zone.
Paramete
r Setting
Select press
74 regeneration prevention RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0–1 -
for press
200 V class:
Press regeneration 350 V
RegenAvd 300–400 V
75 prevention operation V
Level 400 V class:
voltage level 700 V
600–800 V
ADV Press regeneration
prevention CompFreq
76 1.00 (Hz) 0.00–10.00 Hz Hz
compensation Limit
frequency limit
Press regeneration RegenAvd
77 50.0 (%) 0 .0–100.0% %
prevention P-Gain Pgain
Press regeneration RegenAvd
78 500 (ms) 20–30000 ms ms
prevention I gain Igain
Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details
Code Description
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during a constant
speed motor operation may force excessive stress on the brake unit,
ADV-74 RegenAvd
which may damage or shorten brake life. To prevent this, select ADV-74
Sel
(RegenAvd Sel) to control DC link voltage and disable the brake unit
operation.
ADV-75 RegenAvd Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage
Level goes up due to regeneration.
ADV-76 CompFreq Set an alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation
Limit frequency during regeneration prevention.
ADV-77 RegenAvd
To prevent regeneration zone, set P-Gain/I gain in the DC link voltage
Pgain, ADV-78
suppress PI controller.
RegenAvd Igain
284 Hx2000 AC Drive

Note
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations; it only
operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is activated,
output frequency may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).
5.47 Analog Output

An analog output terminal provides an output of 0–10 V voltage, 4–20 mA current, or 0–32
kHz pulse.
5.47.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output

An output size can be adjusted by selecting an output option at the AO (Analog Output)
terminal. Set the analog voltage/current output terminal setting switch (SW5) to change the
output type (voltage/current).
Parameter
Setting
01 Analog output1 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0–25 -
-1000.0–
02 Analog output1 gain AO1 Gain 100.0 %
1000.0
OUT 03 Analog output1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
04 Analog output1 filter AO1 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
Analog constant AO1
05 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
output1 Const %
Hx2000 AC Drive 285

Parameter
Setting
Analog output1 AO1
06 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
monitor Monitor
Voltage and Current Analog Output Setting Details
Code Description
Select a constant value for output. The following example for output
voltage setting.
Setting Function
0 Frequency Outputs operation frequency as a standard.
10 V output is made from the frequency set
at DRV-20 (Max Freq).
1 Output 10 V output is made from 150% of inverter
Current rated current.
2 Output Sets the outputs based on the inverter
Voltage output voltage. 10 V output is made from a
set voltage in BAS-15 (Rated V).
If 0 V is set in BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models
output
10 V based on the actual input voltages
(240 V and
480 V respectively).
3 DC Link Volt Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a
OUT-01 AO1
standard.
Mode
Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is
410 V DC for 200 V models, and 820 V DC
for 400 V models.
4 Output Power Monitors output wattage. 150% of rated
output is the maximum display voltage (10
V).
7 Target Freq Outputs set frequency as a standard.
Outputs 10 V at the maximum frequency
(DRV-20).
8 Ramp Freq Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec
function as a standard. May vary with actual
output frequency. Outputs 10 V.
9 PID Ref Outputs command value of a PID controller
Value as a standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V
at 100%.
10 PID Fdk Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller
Value as a standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V
at 100%.
286 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
11 PID Output Outputs output value of a PID controller as a
standard. Outputs approximately 10 V at
100%.
12 Constant Outputs OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a
standard.
13 EPID1 Output is based on the output value of the
Output external PID1 controller. Outputs 10 V in
100%.
14 EPID1 Ref Output is based on the reference value of
Val the external PID1 controller. Outputs 6.6 V in
100%.
15 EPID1 Fdb Output is based on the feedback amount of
100%.
100%.
100%.
100%.
19 Comm Analogue output is based on the
Output 1 communication setting value. (AO1)
Output 4 8 communication setting value. (AO4)
100%.
100%.
100%.
8
Available when Extension IO option.
Hx2000 AC Drive 287

Code Description
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item,
it will operate as shown below.
The graph below illustrates how the analog voltage output (AO1) changes
depending on OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) and OUT-3 (AO1 Bias) values. The Y-
axis is analog output voltage (0–10 V), and the X-axis is a % value of the
output item.
Example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz

and the present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the
next graph is 50%.
OUT-02 AO1
Gain,
OUT-03 AO1
Bias
OUT-04 AO1
Set filter time constant on analog output.
Filter
If the analog output at OUT-01 (AO1 Mode) is set to ’12 (Constant)’, the
OUT-05 A01
analog voltage output is dependent on the set parameter values (0–
Const %
100%).
OUT-06 AO1 Monitors the analog output value. Displays the maximum output voltage as
Monitor a percentage (%) with 10 V as the standard.
288 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.47.2 Analog Pulse Output

Output item selection and pulse size adjustment can be made for the TO (Pulse Output)
terminal.
Parameter
Setting
61 Pulse output setting TO Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
-1000.0–
62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100.0 -
1000.0
63 Pulse output bias TO Bias 1000.0 -100.0–100.0 -
OUT
64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0–10000 -
Pulse output constant
65 TO Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
output2
66 Pulse output monitor TO Monitor 0.0 0–1000.0 %
Analog Pulse Output Setting Details
Code Description
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output, it will
operate as shown below.
OUT-62 TO
The following graph illustrates that the pulse output (TO) changes depend
Gain, OUT-63
TO Bias on OUT-62 (TO Gain) and OUT-63 (TO Bias) values. The Y-axis is an
analog output current (0–32 kHz), and X-axis is a % value of the output
item.
For example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz

and present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next
graph is 50%.
Hx2000 AC Drive 289

Code Description
OUT-64 TO
Sets filter time constant on analog output.
Filter
OUT-65 TO If the analog output item is set to constant, the analog pulse output is
Const % dependent on the set parameter values.
OUT-66 TO Monitors the analog output value. It displays the maximum output pulse (32
Monitor kHz). as a percentage (%) of the standard.
290 Hx2000 AC Drive

NOTE
OUT-08 AO2 Gain and OUT-09 AO2 Bias Tuning Mode on 0–20 mA output
1 Set OUT-07 (AO2 Mode) to ‘constant’ and set OUT-11 (AO2 Const %) to 0.0 %.
2 Set OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) to 20.0% and then check the current output. 4 mA output
should be displayed.
• If the value is less than 4 mA, gradually increase OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is
measured.
• If the value is more than 4 mA, gradually decrease OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is
measured.
3 Set OUT-11 (AO2 Const %) to 100.0%.
4 Set OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) to 80.0% and measure the current output at 20 mA.
• If the value is less than 20 mA, gradually increase OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA is
measured.
• If the value is more than 20 mA, gradually decrease OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA
is measured.
The functions for each code are identical to the descriptions for the 0–10 V voltage outputs with
an output range 4–20 mA.
Hx2000 AC Drive 291

5.48 Digital Output
5.48.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings

Parameter
Setting
31 Relay 1 23 Trip - -
1 setting
32 Relay 2 14 Run - -
2 setting
33 Relay 3 0 None - -
3 setting
34 Relay 4 0 None - -
4 setting
OUT 35 Relay 5 0 None - -
5 setting
Multi-function
36 Q1 define 0 None - -
output setting
Multi-function
41 DO Status - 00–11 bit
output monitor
Detection FDT
57 30.00
frequency Frequency 0.00–Maximum
Hz
Detection frequency
58 FDT Band 10.00
frequency band
65– Px terminal
IN Px Define 18 Exchange 0-55 -
71 configuration
Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Setting Details
Code Description
Set relay (Relay 1–5) output options.
Setting Function
OUT-31–35 0 None No output signal
Relay1–5 1 FDT-1 Detects inverter output frequency reaching the user set
frequency. Outputs a signal when the absolute value
(set frequency–output frequency) < detected frequency
width/2.
292 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
When the detected frequency width is 10 Hz, FDT-1
output is as shown in the graph below.
2 FDT-2 Outputs a signal when the user-set frequency and

detected frequency (FDT Frequency) are equal, and
fulfills FDT-1 condition at the same time.
[Absolute value (set frequency-detected frequency) <
detected frequency width/2 & FDT-1]
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the detected

frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-2 output is as shown in
the graph below.
3 FDT-3 Outputs a signal when the Absolute value (output

frequency–operation frequency) < detected frequency
width/2.

the graph below.
Hx2000 AC Drive 293

Code Description
4 FDT-4 The output signal can be separately set for acceleration
and deceleration conditions.
• In acceleration: Operation frequency ≧ Detected
frequency
• In deceleration: Operation frequency > (Detected
frequency–Detected frequency width/2)

the graph below.
5 Over Load Outputs a signal at motor overload.

6 IOL Outputs a signal when the inverter input current
exceeds the rated current and a protective function is
activated to prevent damage to the inverter, based on
inverse proportional characteristics.
7 Under Load Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
8 Fan Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
Warning
9 Stall Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded and
stalled.
10 Over Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage rises
Voltage above the protective operation voltage.
11 Low Voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
drops below the low voltage protective level.
12 Over Heat Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
13 Lost Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog input
Command terminal and RS-485 communication command at the
terminal block.
Outputs a signal when communication power is present
and an I/O expansion card is installed. It also outputs a
signal when losing analog input and communication
power commands.
14 RUN Outputs a signal when an operation command is
entered and the inverter outputs voltage.
No signal output during DC braking.
294 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
15 Stop Outputs a signal at operation command off, and when

there is no inverter output voltage.
16 Steady Outputs a signal in steady operation.
17 Inverter Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the
Line inverter line.
18 Comm Line Outputs a signal when multi-function input terminal
(switching) is entered. For details, refer to 5.31Supply
Power Transition page on 232.
19 Speed Outputs a signal during inverter speed search
Search operation.
For details, refer to 5.27Speed Search Operation on
page 222.
20 Ready Outputs a signal when the inverter is in stand by mode
and ready to receive external operation commands.
21 MMC Used as a multi-motor control function. By configuring
the relay output and the multi-function output to MMC
and configuring the AP1-40–AP1-92, it can conduct the
necessary operations for multi-motor control function.
22 Timer Out A timer function to operate terminal output after a
certain time by using multi-function terminal block input.
For details, refer to 5.43Timer Settings on page 245.
23 Trip Outputs a signal after a fault trip.
Refer to 5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control on
page 259 .
25 DB Refer to 0
Warn %ED Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration on page
295.
26 On/Off Outputs a signal using an analog input value as a
Control standard.
Refer to 5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control on
page 259 .
27 Fire Mode Outputs a signal when Fire mode is in operation.
28 Pipe Break Outputs a signal when a pipe is broken.
29 Damper Err Outputs a signal when damper open signal is not
entered. For more details, refer to 0
Damper Operation on page 175.
30 Lubrication Outputs a signal when a lubrication function is in
operation.
Hx2000 AC Drive 295

Code Description
31 PumpClean Outputs a signal when a pump cleaning function is in
Sel operation.
32 LDT Trip Outputs a signal when an LDT trip occurs.
33 Damper Outputs a signal when a damper open signal is set at
Control IN-65–71 multi-function terminals and run command is
on.
34 CAP.Warnin Outputs a signal when value of the PRT-85 is lower
g than the value of the PRT-86 (CAP life cycle
examination do not operate properly).
35 Fan Outputs a signal when fan needs to be replaced.
Exchange
36 AUTO State Outputs a signal in AUTO mode.
37 HAND Outputs a signal in HAND mode.
State
38 TO Outputs a signal at pulse output.
39 Except Date Outputs a signal when operating the exception day
schedule.
40 KEB Outputs a signal at KEB operation.
Operating
41 BrokenBelt Outputs a signal when a Broken belt is in operation.
OUT-36 Q1 Select an output item for the multi-function output terminal (Q1) of the terminal
Define block. Q1 stands for the open collector TR output.
OUT-41
Used to check On/Off state of the D0 by each bit.
DO State
• FDT-1 and FDT-2 functions are related to the frequency setting of the inverter. If the inverter
enters standby mode by pressing the off key during auto mode operation, FDT-1 and FDT-2
function operation may be different because the set frequency of the inverter is different
compared to the set frequency of the auto mode.
• If monitoring signals such as ‘Under load’ or’ LDT’ are configured at multi-function output
terminals, signal outpouts are maintained unless certain conditions defined for signal cutoff
are met.
296 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.48.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay
The inverter can output a fault trip state using the multi-function output terminal (Q1) and
relay (Relay 1).
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
30 Fault trip output mode Trip Out Mode 010 - bit
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 23 Trip - -
32 Multi-function relay 2 Relay 2 14 Run - -
33 Multi-function relay 3 Relay 3 0 none -

OUT
36 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define 0 none - -
Fault trip output on
53 TripOut OnDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
delay
Fault trip output off
54 TripOut OffDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
delay
Fault Trip Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details
Code Description
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Item bit on bit off

Keypad
display
Select a fault trip output terminal/relay and select ‘29’ (Trip Mode) at
codes OUT- 31–33. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant
OUT-30 Trip Out terminal and relay will operate. Depending on the fault trip type, terminal
Mode and relay operation can be configured as shown in the table below.
Setting Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
✓ Operates when low voltage fault trips occur
✓ Operates when fault trips other than low
voltage occur
✓ Operates when auto restart fails (PRT-08–
09)
Hx2000 AC Drive 297

Code Description
OUT-31–35 Relay1–
Set relay output (Relay 1–5).
5
Select output for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open
OUT-36 Q1 Define
collector TR output.
5.48.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings

Set on-delay and off-delay times separately to control the output terminal and relay
operation times. The delay time set at codes OUT-50–51 applies to multi-function output
terminal (Q1) and relay, except when the multi-function output function is in fault trip mode.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Multi-function output 0.00–
50 DO On Delay 0.00 sec
On delay 100.00
Multi-function output 0.00–
OUT 51 DO Off Delay 0.00 sec
Off delay 100.00
Select multi-function
52 DO NC/NO Sel 000000* 00–11 bit
output terminal
*Multi-function output terminals are numbered. Starting from the right (number 1), the
number increases to the left.
Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details
Code Description
When a relay operation signal (operation set in OUT 31–35, 36) occurs,
OUT-50 DO On
the relay turns on or the multi-function output operates after the time
Delay
delay set at OUT-50.
When relay or multi-function output is initialized (off signal occurs), the

OUT-51 DO Off
relay turns off or multi-function output turns off after the time delay set at
Delay
OUT-54.
Select the terminal type for the relay and multi-function output terminal.
OUT-52 DO By setting the relevant bit to ‘0,’ it will operate A terminal (Normally Open).
NC/NO Sel Setting it to ‘1’ will operate B terminal (Normally Closed). Shown below in
the table are Relay 1–5 and Q1 settings starting from the right bit.
298 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Item B terminal A terminal
(Normal close) (Normal open)
Keypad
display
5.49 Operation State Monitor

The inverter’s operation condition can be monitored using the keypad. If the monitoring
option is selected in config (CNF) mode, a maximum of four items can be monitored
simultaneously. Monitoring mode displays three different items on the keypad, but only one
item can be displayed in the status window at a time.
Display item
AnyTime
20 condition display 0 Frequency - -
Para
window
Monitor mode Monitor Line-
21 0 Frequency - Hz
display 1 1
CNF Monitor mode Monitor Line- Output
22 2 - A
display 2 2 Current
Monitor mode Monitor Line- Output
23 3 - V
display 3 3 Voltage
Monitor mode Mon Mode
24 0 No - -
initialize Init
Hx2000 AC Drive 299

Operation State Monitor Setting Details
Code Description
Select items to display on the top-right side of the keypad screen.
Choose the parameter settings based on the information to be
displayed. Codes CNF-20–23 share the same setting options as listed
below.
Setting Function
0 Frequency On stop, displays the set frequency. During
operation, displays the actual output
frequency (Hz).
1 Speed On stop, displays the set speed (rpm). During
operation, displays the actual operating speed
(rpm).
2 Output Displays output current.
Current
3 Output Displays output voltage.
Voltage
4 Output Power Displays output power.
5 WHour Displays inverter power consumption.
Counter
6 DCLink Displays DC link voltage within the inverter.
CNF-20 AnyTime Voltage
Para 7 DI Status Displays input terminal status of the terminal
block. Starting from the right, displays P1–P8.
8 DO Status Displays output terminal status of the terminal
block. Starting from the right: Relay1, Relay2,
and Q1.
9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal V1
(V).
10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as a
percentage. If -10 V, 0 V, +10 V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value (V).
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as a

percentage.
15 I2 Monitor[mA] Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).
16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays input current terminal I2 value as a

percentage.
300 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
17 PID Output Displays the PID controller output.
18 PID Ref Value Displays the scale of the reference value and
sets the value of PID reference.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays the PID controller feedback volume.
20 EPID1 Output Displays the External PID1output value.
21 EPID1 Ref Val Displays the External PID1 reference value.
22 EPID1 Fdb Displays the External PID1 feedback volume.
Value
23 EPID2 Output Displays the External PID2 output value.

Value
26 EPID3 Output Displays the External PID3output value.

Value
29 Temperature Displays the Heat Sink Temperature
Select the items to be displayed in monitor mode. Monitor mode is the

CNF-21–23 Monitor first mode displayed when the inverter is powered on. A total of three
Line-x items, from monitor line-1 to monitor line- 3, can be displayed
simultaneously.
CNF-24 Mon Mode
Selecting ‘1 (Yes)’ initializes CNF-20–23.
Init
Note
Inverter power consumption
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and
the results are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to ‘1 (Yes)’ will reset
cumulated electric energy consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below:
• Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.
• 1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format.
• 100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.
• More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be
displayed up to 65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535 MW will reset the value to 0, and
units will return to kW. It will be displayed in 999.9 kW format).
Hx2000 AC Drive 301

5.50 Operation Time Monitor

This feature is used to monitor the inverter and fan operation times.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Cumulated inverter 0/00/00 00:
70 On-time - min
power-on time 00
Cumulated inverter 0/00/00 00:
71 Run-time - min
operation time 00
Inverter operation
72 accumulated time Time Reset 0 No 0–1 -
CNF
initialization
Cooling fan operation 0/00/00 00:
74 Fan time - min
accumulated time 00
Cooling fan operation
Fan Time
75 accumulated time 0 No 0–1 -
Reset
initialization
Operation Time Monitor Setting Details
Code Description
Displays accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in

CNF-70 On-time
[YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
CNF-71 Run- Displays accumulated time of voltage output by operation command input.
time Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the power supply accumulated time (On-time)
CNF-72 Time
and operation accumulated time (Run-time) and is displayed as 0/00/00 00:
Reset
00 format.
Displays accumulated time of the inverter cooling fan operation. Information
CNF-74 Fan time
will be displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the cooling fan operation accumulated time (on-
CNF-75
time) and operation accumulated time (Run-time) and will display it in
Fan Time Reset
0/00/00 00: 00 format.
302 Hx2000 AC Drive

5.51 PowerOn Resume Using the Serial

Communication
If there is a run command when recovering the power after instantaneous power
interruption using serial communication (Serial Communication [BAC net, LonWorks,
Modbus RTU]), the inverter carries out the run command which was set before the
instantaneous power interruption.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Automatic restart of the PowerOn

COM 96 0 No 0–1 -
communication restart Resume
• If proper communication is unavailable after the instantaneous power interruption, even

if the COM-96 PowerOn Resume function is set to ‘Yes,’ do not operate the inverter.
• The Power-on Run function operates separately (Power-on Run function and PowerOn
Resume function is set to ‘Yes’ and power turns off and turns on, inverter maintains for
the time set in Power-on run function and then, by the Power On Resume function, if
the inverter is in operation by the communication command before the power
interruptions, the inverter is in operation after the power recovery.)
Hx2000 AC Drive 303

Learning Protection Features
6 Learning Protection Features

Protection features provided by the Hx2000 series inverter are categorized into two types:
protection from overheating damage to the motor and protection against the inverter
malfunction.
6.1 Motor Protection
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)

ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of the inverter, without a separate
temperature sensor, to predict a rise in motor temperature to protect the motor based on its
heat characteristics.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Electronic thermal
40 prevention fault trip ETH Trip Sel 0 None 0–2 -
selection
41 Motor cooling fan type Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
PRT Electronic thermal one
42 ETH 1 min 120 100–150 %
minute rating
Electronic thermal
43 prevention continuous ETH Cont 100 50–150 %
rating
Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details
Code Description
ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD
screen displays”E-Thermal.”
PRT-40 ETH Trip Setting Function

Sel 0 None The ETH function is not activated.
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to
a halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
PRT-41 Motor Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
Cooling
304 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Setting Function
0 Self-cool As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis, the
cooling effect varies based on motor speed. Most
universal induction motors have this design.
1 Forced-cool Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling fan.
This provides extended operation at low speeds.
Motors designed for inverters typically have this
design.
The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the

PRT-42 ETH 1 min
motor for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (BAS-13).
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range
below details the set values that can be used during continuous operation
without the protection function.
PRT-43 ETH Cont
Hx2000 AC Drive 305

6.1.2 Motor Over Heat Sensor

To operate the motor overheat protection, connect the overheat protection temperature
sensor (PT 100, PTC) installed in the motor to the inverter’s analog input terminal.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Selecting the operation
after the detection of the
34 Thermal-T Sel 0 None 0–1 -
motor overheat
detection sensor
Selecting the input of
Thermal
35 the motor overheat Thermal In Src 0 0–1
In
PRT detection sensor
Fault level of the motor
0.0–
36 overheat detection Thermal-T Lev 50.0 %
100.0
sensor
Fault area of the motor
Thermal-T
37 overheat detection 0 Low 0–1
Area
sensor
07 Analog output 2 item AO2 Mode 14 Constant 0–18
OUT Analog output 2 gain
08 AO2 Gain 100 0–100 %
Motor Overheat Protect Sensor Input Detail Settings
Code Description
Sets the inverter operation state when motor is overheated.
Setting Function
PRT-34 0 None Do not operate when motor overheating is detected.
Thermal-T Sel When the motor is overheated, the inverter output is
1 Free-Run blocked and the motor will free-run by inertia.
When the motor is over heated, the motor
3 Dec
decelerates and stops.
Selects the type of the terminal when the motor overheat protect sensor is
connected to the volt (V1) or current (I2) input terminal of the terminal
PRT-35 block in the inverter.
Thermal In Src Setting Function
Configure the motor overheat protect sensor
0 Thermal In
connection to terminal block V1.
306 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Configure the motor overheat protect sensor
1 V2
connection to terminal block I2.
PRT-36
Configure the fault level of the motor overheat detect sensor.
Thermal-T Lev
Setting Function
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
PRT-37 0 Low
smaller than PRT-36.
Thermal-T Area
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
1 High
bigger that PRT-36.
OUT-07 AO2 Used when supplying the constant current to the temperature sensor and
Mode, receives input through the I2 or V1 terminal block by using the analog
OUT-08 AO2 Gain output terminal.
Using the temperature sensor (PTC) by connecting it to the analog input terminal
Wnen the AO 2 (analog current outout) terminal is connected to the temperature sensor
installed on a motor, the inverter supplies constant current to the temperature sensor. Then,
connecting the motor signal wire to one of the the inverter’s analog input terminals allows
the inverter to detect the changes in the PTC resistance and translates it into voltage.
If the I2 terminal is used to receive the signal, set the selection switch on the I/O board to V2.
If the V1 terminal is used, set the switch to T1. The sensor does not operate if SW3 is set to’
V1’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 307

To receive PTC signal at V1 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘0 (Thermal In)’
and set the Analog1 input selection switch (SW3) to T1.
To receive PTC signal at I2 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘1 (V2)’ and set
SW 4 (Analog2 input selection switch) to V2. The sensor does not operate if SW4 is set to
‘I2’.
When the inverter detects a motor overheat, motor overheat trip occurs with internal delay
time. The trip delay time is not reset instantly when the trip condition is released, but it only
decreases as time passes.
6.1.3 Overload Early Warning and Trip

A warning or fault trip (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state, based on
the motor’s rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can be set
separately.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Overload warning OL Warn
17 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection Select
18 Overload warning level OL Warn Level 110 30–150 %
PRT 19 Overload warning time OL Warn Time 10.0 0–30 sec

20 Motion at overload trip OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 120 30–150 %
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 60.0 0–60.0 sec
OUT 31– Multi-function relay 1–5 Relay 1–5 5 Over - -
308 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter Setting
Setting range
35 item Load
Multi-function output 1
36 Q1 Define
item
Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details
Code Description
If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function
PRT-17
output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If ‘1 (Yes)’ is
OL Warn Select
selected, it will operate. If ‘0 (No)’ is selected, it will not operate.
When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning
PRT-18 level (OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload
OL Warn Level, warning time (OL Warn Time), the multi-function output (Relay 1, Q1)
PRT-19 sends a warning signal. When Over Load is selected at OUT-31, OUT-33,
OL Warn Time the multi-function output terminal or relay outputs a signal. The signal
output does not block the inverter output.
Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault trip.
Setting Function
PRT-20
0 None No protective action is taken.
OL Trip Select
1 Free-Run In the event of an overload fault, inverter output is
blocked and the motor will free-run due to inertia.
3 Dec If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and stops.
When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset value of
PRT-21 OL Trip
the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be supplied during
Level,
the overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked
PRT-22 OL Trip
according to the preset mode from PRT-17 or slows to a stop after
Time
deceleration.
Hx2000 AC Drive 309

Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload
warning signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warning level (OL
Warn Level) and the overload warning time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip
level (OL Trip Level) and the overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
6.1.4 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking

The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motors from stalling due
to overloads. If a motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation frequency is
adjusted automatically. When a stall is caused by overload, high currents induced in the
motor may cause motor overheating or damage the motor and interrupt operation of the
motor-driven devices.
In this case, the motor decelerates with optimum deceleration without a braking resistor by
using flux braking. If the deceleration time is too short, an over voltage fault trip may occur
because of regenerative energy from the motor. The flux braking makes the motor use
regenerate energy, therefore optimum deceleration is available without over voltage fault
trip.
To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted
automatically, based on the size of load.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting range Unit
Setting
Stall prevention
50 Stall Prevent 0100 - bit
and flux braking
Start Freq–Stall
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 50.00 Hz
Freq 1
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 1–Stall
PRT Freq 3
Stall Freq 2–Stall
Freq 4
Stall Freq 3–
Maximum Freq
310 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter
Setting
Flux Brake
59 Flux Braking Gain 0 0–150 -
kp
31 Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
–35 1–5 item
OUT 9 Stall - -
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define
output 1 item
Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details
Code Description
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed.When the LCD segment is on, the
corresponding bit is off.
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)

Keypad display
Setting Function
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
✓ Stall protection during acceleration
PRT-50
Stall ✓ Stall protection while operating at a
Prevent constant speed
✓ Stall protection during deceleration
✓ Flux braking during deceleration
Setting Function
0001 Stall protection If inverter output current exceeds the preset stall
during level (PRT- 52, 54, 56, 58) during acceleration,
acceleration the motor stops accelerating and starts
decelerating. If current level stays above the
stall level, the motor decelerates to the start
frequency (DRV-19). If the current level causes
deceleration below the preset level while
operating the stall protection function, the motor
resumes acceleration.
Hx2000 AC Drive 311

Code Description
0010 Stall protection Similar to stall protection function during
while operating at acceleration, the output frequency automatically
constant speed decelerates when the current level exceeds the
preset stall level while operating at constant
speed. When the load current decelerates
below the preset level, it resumes acceleration.
0100 Stall protection The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link
during voltage below a certain level to prevent an over
deceleration voltage fault trip during deceleration. As a result,
deceleration times can be longer than the set
time depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking When using flux braking, deceleration time may
during be reduced because regenerative energy is
deceleration expended at the motor.
1100 Stall protection Stall protection and flux braking operate
and flux braking together during deceleration to achieve the
during shortest and most stable deceleration
deceleration performance.
PRT-51 Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies, based
Stall Freq on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be set above the
312 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
1– PRT-58 base frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using numbers that
Stall Leve correspond in ascending order. For example, the range for Stall Frequency 2
l4 (Stall Freq 2) becomes the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the
upper limit for Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).
PRT-59 A gain used to decelerate without over voltage fault trip. It compensates for
Flux Brake the inverter output voltage.
Kp
Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and
fourth bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an over voltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required,
as the motor can overheat and be easily damaged.
• Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection since the deceleration time can
take longer than the time set, depending on the load. Acceleration stops when stall
protection operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer
than the preset acceleration time.
• When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
• If the input voltage exceeds the nominal voltage, there is a possibility that the deceleration
stall does not work properly.
Hx2000 AC Drive 313

6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection

Open-phase protection is used to prevent over current levels induced by the inverter inputs
due to an open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output protection is also
available. An open-phase at the connection between the motor and the inverter output may
cause the motor to stall, due to a lack of torque.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Input/output open-
05 Phase Loss Chk 00 - bit
phase protection
PRT
Open-phase input
06 IPO V Band 40 1–100 V V
voltage band
Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details
Code Description
When open-phase protection is operating, input and output configurations
are displayed differently. When the LCD segment is On, the corresponding
bit is set to ‘Off’.
Item Bit status (On) Bit status (Off)

PRT-05 Phase
Keypad
Loss Chk
display
PRT-06 IPO V
Band
Setting Function
Bit 2 Bit 1
✓ Output open-phase protection
✓ Input open-phase protection
314 Hx2000 AC Drive

6.2.2 External Trip Signal

Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 4 (External Trip) to allow the inverter to stop
operation when abnormal operating conditions arise.
Setting
range
65– Px terminal setting Px Define(Px: P1–
4 External Trip 0-55 -
71 options P7)
IN
87 DI NC/NO Sel - bit
contact selection
External Trip Signal Setting Details
Code Description
Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom
(0), it operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top (1),
it operates as a B contact (Normally Closed).
IN-87 DI NC/NO
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Sel
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Terminal P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
Hx2000 AC Drive 315

6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT)

When the inverter input current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is activated
to prevent damage to the inverter, based on inverse proportional characteristics.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
31– Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
35 1–5
OUT 6 IOL - -
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define
output 1
Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal before
the inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time reaches
60% of the allowed overcurrent (120%, 1 min; 140%, 5 sec), a warning signal output is provided
(signal output at 120%, 36 sec).
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss

When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication
options, or the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter
operation for situations when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal
cables.
0 None
Keypad command 1 Warning

Lost KPD
11 loss operation 0 None Free- -
Mode 2
mode Run
3 Dec
PRT Speed command
Lost Cmd
12 loss operation 1 Free-Run - -
Mode
mode
Time to determine
Lost Cmd
13 speed command 1.0 0.1–120.0 sec
Time
loss
14 Operation Lost Preset F 0.00 Start Hz
316 Hx2000 AC Drive

frequency at speed frequency–
command loss Max.
frequency
Analog input loss
15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 -
decision level
31 Multi-function
Relay 1–5
–35 Relay 1–5 Lost
OUT 13 - -
Multi-function Command
36 Q1 Define
output 1
Speed Command Loss Setting Details
Code Description
Set the operation command source to keypad. If there is a
communication error with the keypad or connection problem between
the keypad and the inverter, select the inverter’s operation.
Setting Function
The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None
operation frequency without any protection function.
PRT-11 Lost KPD
Select 24: Lost keypad from OUT-31–36, one of the
Mode
multi function terminal blocks, outputs a relevant
1 Warning
warning signal when abnormal operating conditions
arise.
The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
2 Free-Run
free-run condition.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time
3 Dec
set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be
configured to operate in a specific mode:
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
PRT-12 Lost Cmd
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
Mode
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the time
set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
The inverter calculates the average input value for
3 Hold Input 10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
and uses it as the speed reference.
Hx2000 AC Drive 317

Code Description
The inverter calculates the average output value for
Hold
4 10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
Output
Lost The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-
5
Preset 14 (Lost Preset F).
Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when
using analog input.
Setting Function
Based on the values set at IN-08 and IN-12, a
protective operation starts when the input signal is
reduced to half of the initial value of the analog input
set using the speed command (DRV-01) and it
continues for the time (speed loss decision time) set
0 Half of x1
PRT-15 AI Lost at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time). For example, set the
Level, speed command to ‘2 (V1)’ at DRV-07, and set IN-
PRT-13 Lst Cmd 06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (Unipolar)’. When the voltage
Time input drops to less than half of the value set at IN-08
(V1 Volt x 1), the protective function is activated.
The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the analog
Below of input set by the speed command and it continues for
1
x1 the speed loss decision time set at PRT-13 (Lost
Cmd Time). Codes IN-08 and IN-12 are used to set
the standard values.
If the set value of the IN-08 and IN-12 is ‘0,’ the LostCmd function does
not operate.
In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode
PRT-14 Lost Preset (PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘5 (Lost Preset)’. This operates the
F protection function and sets the frequency so that the operation can
continue.
318 Hx2000 AC Drive

Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘Unipolar’ and IN-08 to ‘5 (V)’. Set PRT-15 (AI Lost Level) to ‘1
(Below x1)’ and PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘2 (Dec)’ and then set PRT-13 (Lost Cmd
Time) to 5 seconds. Then the inverter operates as follows:
Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at
PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time) is elapsed.
Hx2000 AC Drive 319

6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration

For Hx2000 series, the braking resistor circuit is integrated inside the inverter.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Braking resistor
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED 0 0–30 %
configuration
Multi-function
31–35 Relay 1–5
relay 1–5 item DB
OUT 25 - -
Multi-function Warn %ED
36 Q1 Define
output 1 item
Dynamic Breaking Resistor Setting Details
Code Description
Set the braking resistor configuration (%ED: Duty cycle). The braking
resistor configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates
for one operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15
sec and the braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the
15 sec period elapses. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
PRT-66 DB
Warn %ED
[Example 1]
320 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
[Example 2]
• T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency

• T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency
• T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency
• T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded; it can
overheat and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be
used as an external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.
6.2.6 Low Battery Voltage Warning

The Hx2000 series has a battery low voltage warning feature. If the low battery voltage
warning function is set to ‘Yes,’ a low battery voltage warning occurs when the battery
voltage is lower than 2 V (normal voltage is 3 V). Replace the battery when the low battery
warning is displayed.
Parameter
Setting
Low battery 0 No
PRT 90 voltage Low Battery 0 No -
detection 1 Yes
Hx2000 AC Drive 321

Low Battery Voltage Warning Detail Settings
Code Description
The low battery voltage warning for RTC function installed in the inverter
PRT-90 Low
can be enabled or disabled. The low battery voltage warning occurs when
Battery
the battery voltage is lower than 2 V.
• Be careful when replacing the battery. Remaining voltage in the battery may cause electric
shock.
• Make sure that the battery doesn’t fall inside of the inverter.
6.3 Under load Fault Trip and Warning

The following table lists the under load fault trip and warning features of the Hx2000 series
inverter.
Under load
Output
23 detection UL Source 0 0–1 -
Current
Source
Under load
24 UL Band 10.0 0.0–100.0 %
detection Band
Under load
UL Warn
25 warning 1 Yes 0–1 -
PRT Sel
selection
Under load UL Warn
26 10.0 0–600.0 sec
warning time Time
Under load trip
27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run - -
selection
Under load trip UL Trip
28 30.0 0–600.0 sec
timer Time
322 Hx2000 AC Drive

Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-23 Select a source to detect the under load trip. An under load trip can be
UL Source detected using output current or output power.
Make a standard value for the under load fault occurrence using
PRT-24
system load%-UL Band value set in each frequency of the load
UL Band
characteristics curve made by the AP2-01 Load Tune.
Select the under load warning options. Set the multi-function output
PRT-25 UL Warn Sel terminals (at OUT-31–35 and 36) to ‘7’ (Under load). The warning
signals are output when under load conditions occur.
PRT-26 UL Warn A protect function operates when under load level condition explained
Time above maintains for the warning time set.
Sets the inverter operation mode for situations when an under load
trip occurs. If set to ‘1 (Free-Run)’, the output is blocked in an under
PRT-27 UL Trip Sel
load fault trip event. If set to ‘2 (Dec)’, the motor decelerates and stops
when an under load trip occurs.
A protect function operates when under load level conditions
PRT-28 UL Trip Time
explained above maintain for the trip time set.
To operate under load trip properly, a load tuning (AP2-01 Load Tune) must be performed in
advance. If you cannot perform a load tuning, manually set the load fit frequencies (AP2-02
Load Fit Lfreq–AP2-10 Load Fit Hfreq). The Under Load protection does not operate while the
Energy Save function is in operation.
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection

Cooling fan fault Fan Trip
PRT 79 0 Trip
selection Mode
Multi-function
OUT 31–35 Relay 1–5
relay 1–5
8 Fan Warning -
Multi-function
OUT 36 Q1 Define
output 1
Hx2000 AC Drive 323

Fan Fault Detection Setting Details
Code Description
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
Setting Function
0 Trip The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is
PRT-79 Fan Trip
displayed when a cooling fan error is detected.
Mode
1 Warning When OUT-36 (Q1 Define) and OUT-31–35
(Relay1–5) are set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan
error signal is output and the operation
continues.
When the code value is set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan error signal is
OUT-36 Q1 Define,
output and operation continues. However, when the inverter’s inside
OUT-31–35 Relay1–
temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to
5
activation of overheat protection.
6.3.2 Low Voltage Fault Trip

When inverter input power is lost and the internal DC link voltage drops below a certain
voltage level, the inverter stops output and a low voltage trip occurs.
Setting
range
Low voltage trip
PRT 81 decision delay LVT Delay 0.0 0–60.0 sec
time
31–35 Relay 1–5
1–5 Low
OUT 11 -
Multi-function Voltage
36 Q1 Define
output 1
Low Voltage Fault Trip Setting Details
Code Description
If the code value is set to ‘11 (Low Voltage)’, the inverter stops the output
first when a low voltage trip condition occurs, then a fault trip occurs after the
PRT-81 LVT low voltage trip decision time elapses. The warning signal for a low voltage
Delay fault trip can be provided using the multi-function output or a relay. However,
the low voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay time) does not apply to warning
signals.
324 Hx2000 AC Drive

6.3.3 Selecting Low Voltage 2 Fault During Operation

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Unit
range
Low voltage trip 0 No
PRT 82 decision during Low Voltage2 0–1
operation 1 Yes
If input power is disconnected during inverter operation and internal DC voltage decreases
lower than a certain voltage, the inverter disconnects the output and displays low voltage ‘2
(Low Voltage 2)'.
Even if the voltage increases and goes back to the normal state, unlike a low voltage fault, it
remains in a fault state until the user unlocks the fault state.
6.3.4 Output Block via the Multi-function Terminal

When the multi-function input terminal is set as the output block signal terminal and the
signal is input to the terminal, then the operation stops.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
IN 5 BX 0-55 -
71 setting options P7)
Output Block by Multi-function Terminal Setting Details
Code Description
When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to ‘5 (BX)’ and
is turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and ‘BX’ is
displayed on the keypad display. While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad
IN-65–71 Px
screen, the inverter’s operation information including the operation
Define
frequency and current at the time of the BX signal can be monitored. The
inverter resumes operation when the BX terminal turns off and operation
command is input.
Hx2000 AC Drive 325

6.3.5 Trip Status Reset

Restart the inverter, using the keypad or analog input terminal, to reset the trip status.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Px terminal setting Px Define(Px: P1–
IN 65–71 3 RST 0-55 -
options P7)
Trip Status Reset Setting Details
Code Description
Press the [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input
IN-65–71 Px
terminal to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to ‘3’
Define
(RST) and turn on the terminal to reset the trip status.
6.3.6 Operation Mode for Option Card Trip

Option card trips may occur when an option card is used with the inverter. Set the operation
mode for the inverter when a communication error occurs between the option card and the
inverter body, or when the option card is detached during operation.
Parameter
Setting
0 None
Operation mode Opt Trip
PRT 80 1 Free-Run 0–3 -
for option card trip Mode
2 Dec
Operation Mode on Option Trip Setting Details
Code Description
Setting Function
0 None No operation
PRT-80 Opt Trip Free- The inverter output is blocked and fault trip
1
Mode Run information is shown on the keypad.
The motor decelerates to the value set at PRT-07
2 Dec
(Trip Dec Time).
326 Hx2000 AC Drive

6.3.7 No Motor Trip

If an operation command is run when the motor is disconnected from the inverter output
terminal, a ‘no motor trip’ occurs and a protective operation is performed by the system.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Operation for no motor
31 No Motor Trip 0 None - -
trip
PRT
32 No motor trip current level No Motor Level 5 1–100 %
33 No motor detection time No Motor Time 3.0 0.1–10 sec
No Motor Trip Setting Details
Code Description
If the output current value [based on the rated current (BAS-13)] is
PRT-32 No Motor
lower than the value set at PRT-32 (No Motor Level), and if this
Level,
continues for the time set at PRT-33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor
PRT-33 No Motor Time
trip’ occurs.
If BAS-07 (V/F Pattern) is set to ‘1 (Square)’, set PRT-32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than
the factory default. Otherwise, a ‘no motor trip,’ due to a lack of output current, will occur when
the ‘no motor trip’ operation is set.
6.3.8 Broken Belt

It is a function to detect a problem in case that a Belt or Coupling is broken while a pump is
used.
Parameter
Setting
0 None
Set broken belt
91 BrokenBelt Sel 0 : None 1 Warning -
function
2 Free Run
PRT
Function frequency of BrokenBelt
92 15.00 15.00~MaxFreq Hz
broken belt Freq
93 Motor torque current Current Trq - 0~100.0 %
Hx2000 AC Drive 327

Parameter
Setting
Function torque
94 BrokenBelt Trq 10.0 0~100.0 %
current of broken belt
Function Delay time
95 BrokenBelt Dly 10.0 10.0 S
of broken belt
After inverter is operating in the frequency over PRT-92 and current torque reaches the limit
set at PRT-94 and then it meets the conditions at the time above set PRT-95, Broken Belt is
activated.
Torque Current
[A]
[Current Trq %]
at [BrokenBelt Freq]
[BrokenBelt Trq %]
Time count
[BrokenBelt Dly]
Broken Belt
Warning or Trip
No action
t
328 Hx2000 AC Drive

6.4 Parts Life Expectancy

Examine the life cycle of the parts (fan and main capacitor) of the inverter. By examining
these parts you can use inverter more safely.
6.4.1 Main Capacitor Life Estimation

The life of the main capacitor in the inverter can be predicted by looking at the changes in
the capacitance value.
Parameter
Setting
Estimated current
CAP.Diag
83 level of the 0.0 10.0–100.0 %
Perc
capacitance
0 None
CAP. Diag
1
CAP estimating 1
PRT 84 CAP.Diag 0: None %
mode CAP. Diag
2
2
3 CAP. Init
CAP. deterioration
85 CAP.Level1 0 0.0–100.0 %
level
86 CAP. detected level CAP.Level2 0 0.0–100.0 %
31–
OUT Output relay 1–5 Relay 1–5 34 CAP. Warning -
35
Main Capacitor Life Estimation Detail Settings
Code Description
Configure the current level of the inverter’s output when capacitance life
PRT-83 CAP. Diag
examination is in operation. For life examination, the value must be set
Perc
higher than 0%.
Configure the capacitance life examination mode. This mode is
separated into installing the inverter mode and maintenance mode. To
use the capacitance life examination function, proper setting is required.
PRT-84 CAP. Diag
Setting Function
0 None Do not use capacitance life examination
Hx2000 AC Drive 329

Code Description
function.
1 CAP. Diag 1 When installing the inverter for the first time,
estimate initial capacitance.
2 CAP. Diag 2 Estimate the capacitance while maintaining the
inverter.
3 CAP. Init Initialize the estimated value of the
capacitance to 0.
PRT-85 CAP. Level
Set the standard level for the capacitance replacement.
1
Display estimated capacitance value according to the mode in PRT-84. If
PRT-86 CAP. Level
this value is lower than the value set in PRT-85, the warning
2
message”CAP Warning” appears on the display.
shock.
• The main capacitor life examination is only for reference and cannot be used as an
absolute value.
• The main capacitor life examination only operates in AUTO mode and when inverter is
stopped.
6.4.2 Fan Life Estimation

The inverter records the amount of time the fan is used and sets off the alarm to replace the
fan if the fan is used longer than the certain period of time.
Parameter
Setting
Fan accumulated Fan Time
87 0.0 0.0–6553.5 %
time percentage Perc
PRT
Fan replacement Fan
88 90.0 0.0–100.0 %
alarm level Exchange
Initializing the 0 No
Fan Time
CNF 75 accumulation 0: No
Rst
time of the fan 1 Yes
330 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter
Setting
operation
OUT 31–35 Relay 1–5 output Relay 1–5 35 Fan Exchange -
Fan Life Estimation Setting Details
Code Description
Displays the time the fan is used in percentage based on 50,000 hours.
PRT-87 Fan Time
If this value is bigger than the value in PRT-88, the warning
Perc
message”Fan Exchange” appears on the display.
PRT-88 Fan
Displays the life replacement standard of the fan in percentage.
Exchange
Initializes the accumulation time of the fan operation.
CNF-75 Fan Time Setting Function

Rst 0 No Do not initialize the accumulated operation time of the
fan.
1 Yes Initialize the accumulated operation time of the fan.
shock.
• Fan life examination is only for the reference and cannot be used as an absolute value.
6.5 Fault/Warning List

The following list shows the types of faults and warnings that can occur while using the
Hx2000 inverter. For details, refer to 6 Learning Protection Features on page 304.
Category LCD Display Details

Major fault Latch type Over Current1 Over current trip
Over Voltage Over voltage trip
External Trip Trip due to an external signal
Hx2000 AC Drive 331


NTC Open Temperature sensor fault trip
Over Current2 ARM short current fault trip
Option Trip-x* Option fault trip*
Over Heat Over heat fault trip
Out Phase Open Output open-phase fault trip
In Phase Open Input open-phase fault trip
Ground Trip Ground fault trip
Fan Trip Fan fault trip
E-Thermal Motor overheat fault trip
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault trip
No Motor Trip No motor fault trip
Low Voltage2 Low voltage fault trip during operation
ParaWrite Trip Write parameter fault trip
Pipe Broken Pipe Break fault trip
Damper Err Damper Err trip
Over Load Motor overload fault trip
Under Load Motor under load fault trip
CleanRPTErr Pump clean trip
Level Detect Level detect trip
MMC Interlock MMC Interlock trip
Inverter OLT Inverter overheating trip
Termal Trip Motor overheating trip
Lost Keypad Lost keypad trip
Broken Belt Broken belt trip
Pipe Broken Pipe Broken trip
Level type Low Voltage Low voltage fault trip
BX Emergency stop fault trip
Lost Command Command loss trip
Lost Keypad Lost keypad trip
Hardware EEP Err External memory error
332 Hx2000 AC Drive


damage (Fatal) ADC Off Set Analog input error
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault trip
Watch Dog-1 CPU Watch Dog fault trip
Watch Dog-2
Lost Command Command loss fault trip warning
Over Load Overload warning
Under Load Under load warning
Inv Over Load Inverter overload warning
Fan Warning Fan operation warning
DB Warn %ED Braking resistor braking rate warning
Low Battery Low battery warning
Fire Mode Fire mode warning
Pipe Broken Pipe Break warning
Warning
Level Detect Level detect warning
CAP. Warning Capacitor lifetime warning
Fan Exchange Fan replacement warning
Lost Keypad Lost keypad warning
Load Tune Load curve tunning warning
Broken Belt Broken belt warning
ParaWrite Fail Smart copier error warning
Rs Tune Err Auto tunning warning(Rs)
Lsig Tune Err Auto tunning warning(Lsigma)
Note
• In a latch type trip, the inverter cannot unlock the fault if the user does not reset the inverter,
even if the trip state is released after the trip occurs.
• In level type trip, the inverter can unlock the fault by itself if the trip state is unlocked after
the trip occurs.
• In a fetal type trip, there is no way to unlock the fault other than turning the inverter off then
back on after the trip occurs.
Hx2000 AC Drive 333

RS-485 Communication Features
7 RS-485 Communication Features

This section in the user manual explains how to control the inverter with a PLC or a
computer over a long distance using the RS-485 communication features. To use the RS-
485 communication features, connect the communication cables and set the
communication parameters on the inverter. Refer to the communication protocols and
parameters to configure and use the RS-485 communication features.
7.1 Communication Standards

Following the RS-485 communication standards, Hx2000 products exchange data with a
PLC and computer. The RS-485 communication standards support the Multi-drop Link
System and offer an interface that is strongly resistant to noise. Please refer to the following
table for details about the communication standards.
Item Standard
Communication method/
RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
Transmission type
Inverter type name Hx2000
Number of connected
Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200 m (recommended
inverters/ Transmission
distance: within 700 m)
distance
Recommended cable size 0.75 mm², (18 AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
Supplied by the inverter - insulated power source from the
Power supply
inverter’s internal circuit
1,200/2,400/4800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Communication speed
BACNET: 9600/19200/38400/76800 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary
Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Frame error check 2 bytes
Parity check None/Even/Odd
334 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.2 Communication System Configuration

In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and the
inverter is the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the RS-232 converter
must be integrated with the computer, so that it can communicate with the inverter through
the RS-232/RS-485 converter. Specifications and performance of converters may vary
depending on the manufacturer, but the basic functions are identical. Please refer to the
converter manufacturer’s user manual for details about features and specifications.
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring
to the following illustration of the communication system configuration.
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection

Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the RS-485
communication line to the S+/S-/SG terminals of the terminal block. The maximum number
of inverters you can connect is 16. For communication lines, use shielded twisted pair
(STP) cables.
The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is recommended to
use no more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure stable communication.
Please use a repeater to enhance the communication speed when using a communication
line longer than 1,200 meters or when using a large number of devices. A repeater is
effective when smooth communication is not available due to noise interference.
When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG terminals on the PLC and
inverter are connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise
interference.
Hx2000 AC Drive 335

7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters

Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the
communication lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the
communication parameters.
Parameter
Setting
Built-in communication Int485 St 1–
01 1 -
inverter ID ID MaxComID9
Built-in communication Int485 ModBus
02 0 0-6 -
protocol Proto RTU
Built-in communication Int485
COM 03 3 9600 bps 0–8 -
speed BaudR
Built-in communication Int485
04 0 D8/PN/S1 0–3 -
frame setting Mode
Transmission delay after Resp
05 5 0–1000 msec
reception Delay
Communication Parameters Setting Details

Code Description
COM-01 Int485
Sets the inverter station ID between 1 and MaxComID.
St ID
Select one of the four built-in protocols: Modbus-RTU, BACnet or Metasys-

N2.
COM-02 Int485 Setting Function

Proto 0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
4 BACnet BAC net protocol
5 Metasys-N2 Metasys-N2 protocol
6 ModBus Master Dedicated protocol for ModBus Master
Set a communication setting speed up to 115,200 bps.

COM-03 Int485
The maximum setting range changes depending on the protocol.
BaudR
9
If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
336 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code Description
Setting Communication Speed
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps (57,600 bps)
7 76.8 Kbps (76,800 bps)
8 115 Kbps (115,200 bps)
If the COM-02 Int485 Prtoto setting is BACnet, the available

communication speed settings are 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 76.8 kbps.
If the COM-02 Int485 Prtoto setting is Metasys-N2, the communication
speed is fixed to 9600 bps and COM-03 Int485 BaudR is not shown.
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check
method, and the number of stop bits.
Setting Function
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
COM-04 Int485 1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
If the COM-02 Int485 Prtoto setting is Metasys-N2, the communication

frame composition is fixed to D8/PN/S1 and COM-04 Int485 Mode is not
visible.
Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request from the
master. Response time is used in a system where the slave device
COM-05 Resp
response is too fast for the master device to process. Set this code to an
Delay appropriate value for smooth master-slave communication.
Hx2000 AC Drive 337

Code Description
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency

After setting the DRV-06 Cmd Source code to ‘3 (Int 485)’ and DRV-07 Freq Ref Src code
to ‘6 (Int 485)’, you can set common area parameters for the operation command and
frequency via communication. For details about the operation command, refer to 4.6.4 RS-
485 Communication as a Command Input Device on page 99 and about the frequency
command, refer to 4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication on
page 92.
To select the built-in RS485 communication as the source of command, set DRV-07 to ‘6
(Int485)’ on the keypad. Then, set common area parameters for the operation command
and frequency via communication.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
DRV Frequency setting
07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–11 -
method
338 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation

Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Speed command
Lost Cmd
12 loss operation 0 None 0–5 -
Mode
mode
PRT
Time to determine
Lost Cmd
13 speed command 6 1.0 0.1–120.0 Sec
Time
loss
Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select the operation to run when a communication error has occurred and
lasted exceeding the time set at PRT-13.
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection
function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
PRT-12 Lost 3 Hold Input Operates continuously with the speed of the
Cmd Mode, inputted speed command until the loss of the
PRT-13 Lost speed command.
Cmd Time The inverter calculates the average input value
for 10 seconds before the loss of the speed
command and uses it as the speed reference.
4 Hold Operates continuously with the operate
Output frequency before the speed loss. The inverter
calculates the average output value for 10
seconds before the loss of the speed command
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at
PRT-14 (Lost Preset F).
Hx2000 AC Drive 339

7.3 Modbus-RTU Communication
7.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Input

Multi-function input can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set codes
COM-70–77 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the function to 1 at
0h0385 to operate it. Virtual multi-function operates independently from IN-65–71 analog
multi-function inputs and cannot be set redundantly. Virtual multi-function input can be
monitored using COM-86 (Virt Dl Status). Before you configure the virtual multi-function
inputs, set the DRV code according to the command source.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Communication multi-
70–77 Virtual DI x(x: 1–8) 0 None 0–55 -
function input x
COM
Communication multi-
86 Virt DI Status - - - -
function input monitoring
Example: When sending an Fx command by controlling virtual multi-function input in the

common area via Int485, set COM-70 to ‘FX’ and set address 0h0385 to ‘0h0001’.
7.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication

If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad parameters
via communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the values changed
via communication revert to the previous setting values when you turn on the inverter.
Set CNF-48 to ‘1 (Yes)’ to allow all the changes over comunication to be saved, so that the
inverter retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.
Setting address 0h03E0 to ‘0’ and then setting it again to ‘1’ via communication allows the
existing parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to ‘1’ and then
setting it to ‘0’ does not carry out the same function.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter 0 No
CNF 48 Save parameters 0–1 -
Save 1 Yes
340 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication

Communication Area Memory Map Details
Communication common Ex2000, Lx2000, Sx2000, Hx2000
0h0000–0h00FF
compatible area compatible area
Areas registered at COM-31–38 and
0h0100–0h01FF
COM-51–58
Parameter registration type area 0h0200–0h023F Area registered for User Group
0h0240–0h027F Area registered for Macro Group
0h0280–0h02FF Reserved
0h0300–0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0380–0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0–0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400–0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 DRV Group
0h1200 BAS Group
0h1300 ADVGroup
0h1400 CON Group
0h1500 IN Group
communication common area
0h1600 OUT Group
0h1700 COM Group
0h1800 PID Group
0h1900 EPI Group
0h1A00 AP1 Group
0h1B00 AP2 Group
0h1C00 AP3 Group
0h1D00 PRT Group
0h1E00 M2 Group
Hx2000 AC Drive 341

7.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission

By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses
registered in the communication function group (COM) can be used in communication.
Parameter group for data transmission may be defined to transmit multiple parameters at
once, into the communication frame.
Parameter Setting
Setting range
Output
0000–
31–38 communication Para Status-x - Hex
FFFF
COM address x
Input communication Para Control- 0000–
51–58 - Hex
address x x FFFF
Currently Registered CM Group Parameter
Address Parameter Assigned content by bit

Status Parameter-1– Parameter communication code value registered at
0h0100–0h0107
Status Parameter-8 COM-31–38 (Read-only)
Control Parameter-1– Parameter communication code value registered at
0h0110–0h0117
Control Parameter-8 COM-51–58 (Read/Write access)
Note
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381)
and operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control
frame. For example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para
Control - x), register the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to
Para Control-5.
342 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group

By defining user/macro parameter groups, communication can be carried out using the user
defined group (USR Grp) and macro group (MAC Grp) addresses that are registered at the
U&M mode. Parameter groups can only be defined when using the keypad.
Currently Registered User Group Parameters
Address Parameter Assigned Content by Bit

0h0200 User Grp. Parameter value registered at U&M > USR → 1 (Read/Write
Code 1 access)
0h0201 User Grp. Parameter value registered at U&M > USR → 2 (Read/Write
Code 2 access)
. . .
. . .
. . .
0h023E User Grp. Parameter value registered at U&M > USR → 63 (Read/Write
Code 63 access)
0h023F User Grp. Parameter value registered at U&M > USR → 64 (Read/Write
Code 64 access)
Currently Registered Macro Group Parameters
Address Parameter Assigned Content by Bit
0h0240 Macro Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC → 1

0h0241 Macro Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC → 1
. . .
. . .
. . .
0h02A2 Macro Grp. Code 98 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC → 98
0h02A3 Macro Grp. Code 99 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC → 99
Hx2000 AC Drive 343

7.3.6 Modbus-RTU Protocol
7.3.6.1 Function Code and Protocol

In the following section, station ID is the value set at COM-01 (Int485 St ID), and the starting
address is the communication address (starting address size is in bytes). For more
information about communication addresses, refer to 7.3.7 Compatible Common Area
Parameter on page 348.
Reading up to 8 Consecutive Inverter Parameters Based on the Set Number - Read

Holding Register (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Register (Func. Code: 0x04)
Read Holding Registers (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Registers (Func. Code: 0x04)
are processed identically by the inverter.
Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be read from.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be read.
Byte number of normal response values based on the number of registers
Byte Count
(No. of Reg).
Except. Code Error codes
Request
Slave Func. Start Addr Start Addr No of Reg No of Reg CRC CRC
Station ID Code (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Lo) (Hi)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Normal Response
Slave Func. Byte Value Value Value Value CRC CRC

…
Station ID Code Count (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Lo) (Hi)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte … 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

* The number of Value(Hi) and Value(Lo) is changed by the [Request No. of Reg].
344 Hx2000 AC Drive

Error Response
Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.
Writing One Inverter Parameter Value (Func. Code: 0x06)
Codes Description
Address 1 of the inverter parameter (common area or keypad) to be written
Addr.
to.
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) value to write with.
Request
Slave
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
Station ID
Normal Response
Slave
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
Station ID
Error Response
Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC (Hi)

Hx2000 AC Drive 345

Writing Multiple Registers (Func. Code: 0x10)
Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be written to.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be written.
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) values to write with.
Request
Slave Start Start No of No of Reg. Reg.

Func. Byte CRC CRC
Station Addr. Addr. Reg. Reg. Value Value
Code Count (Lo) (Hi)
ID (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
1 byte 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
Normal Response
Slave Func. Start Addr Start Addr No of No of CRC CRC

Station ID Code (Hi) (Lo) Reg. (Hi) Reg. (Lo) (Lo) (Hi)
Error Response
Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)

Exception Code
Code
01: ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02: ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
346 Hx2000 AC Drive

Code
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
14: Write-Protection
Example of Modbus-RTU Communication In Use

When the Acc time (Communication address 0x1103) is changed to 5.0 sec and the Dec
time
(Communication address 0x1104) is changed to 10.0 sec.
Frame Transmission from Master to Slave

Byte
Station Functio Starting # of
Item Cou Data 1 Data 2 CRC
ID n Address Register
nt
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064 0x1202
Start
Preset
Des COM-01 Address- 50 100
Multiple
cript Int485 St 1 - - (ACC time (DEC time -
Registe
ion ID (0x1103- 5.0 sec) 10.0 sec)
r
1)
Frame Transmission from Slave to Master

Item Staition Id Function Starting Address # of Register CRC
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0xE534

Preset
COM-01 Int485 Starting Address-1
Description Multiple - -
St ID (0x1103-1)
Register
Hx2000 AC Drive 347

7.3.7 Compatible Common Area Parameter

The following are common area parameters partly compatible with the Ex2000, Lx2000,
Sx2000 series inverters. (Addresses 0h0000-0h0011 are for compatible common area
parameters. Addresses 0h0012-0h001B are for Hx2000 series inverter parameters.)
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0000 Inverter model - - R F: Hx2000
4: 5.5 kW, 5: 7.5 kW
6: 11 kW, 7: 15 kW, 8: 18.5 kW
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R 9: 22 kW 10: 30 kW 11: 37 kW
12: 45 kW 13: 55 kW,14: 75 kW
15: 90 kW
Inverter input 0: 220 V product
0h0002 - - R
voltage 1: 440 V product
(Example) 0h0064: Version
1.00
0h0003 Version - - R
(Example) 0h0065: Version
1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R -
Command
0h0005 0.01 Hz R/W -
frequency
B15 Reserved
B14 0: Keypad Freq,
2-8: Terminal block multi-
B13
step speed
B12 17: Up, 18: Down
19: STEADY
B11
22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2,
B10 26: PULSE
27: Built-in 485
Operation command
0h0006 - - R 28: Communication
(option) B9 option
30: JOG, 31: PID
B8 0: Keypad
1: Fx/Rx-1
B7
2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
4: Communication
B6
option
5: Time Event
348 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
B5 Reserved
B4 Emergency stop
W: Trip initialization
B3 (0→1),
R/W R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R)
B1 Forward operation (F)
B0 Stop (S)
0h0007 Acceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0008 Deceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
0h000A Output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
B15 0: HAND, 1: AUTO
1: Frequency command
B14 source by communication
(built-in, option)
1: Operation command
B13 source by communication
(built-in, option)
Reverse operation
B12
command
0h000E Operation status - - R
Forward operation
B11
command
B10 Reserved
B9 Jog mode
B8 Drive stopping
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
Hx2000 AC Drive 349

Comm.
Address
B4 Accelerating
Fault Trip - operates
B3 according to OUT-30
setting
Operating in reverse
B2
direction
Operating in forward
B1
direction
B0 Stopped
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
0h000F Fault trip information - - R
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Level Type trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Latch Type trip
B15
Reserved
–B7
B6 P7
Input terminal
0h0010 - - R
information B5 P6
B4 P5
B3 P4
350 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
B2 P3
B1 P2
B0 P1
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Q1
B9 Reserved
Output terminal B8 Reserved

0h0011 - - R
information B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.1 % R V1 input voltage
0h0013 Thermal 0.1 % R Input Thermal
0h0014 V2 0.1 % R V2 input voltage
0h0015 I2 0.1 % R I2 input Current
Displays existing motor rotation
0h0016 Motor rotation speed 1 Rpm R
speed
0h0017
Reserved - - - -
–0h0019
0h001A Select Hz/rpm - - R 0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit
Display the number
Display the number of poles for
0h001B of poles for the - - R
the selected motor
selected motor
Hx2000 AC Drive 351

7.3.8 Hx2000 Expansion Common Area Parameter
7.3.8.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0300 Inverter model - - Hx2000: 000Fh
5.5 kW: 4055h, 7.5 kW: 4075h

11 kW: 40B0h, 15 kW: 40F0h
18.5 kW: 4125h, 22 kW: 4160h
0h0301 Inverter capacity - -
30 kW: 41E0h, 37 kW: 4250h,
45 kW: 42D0h,55 kW: 4370h,
75 kW: 44B0h,90 kW: 45A0h,
Inverter input
200 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
voltage/power (Single
0h0302 - -
phase, 3-phase)/cooling
method 400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
(ex) 0h0064: Version 1.00

0h0303 Inverter S/W version - -
0h0065: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
B15
B14 0: Normal state

4: Warning occurred
B13 8: Fault occurred
B12
0h0305 Inverter operation state - - B11–

-
B8
B7 1: Speed searching
2: Accelerating
B6 3: Operating at constant rate
4: Decelerating
B5 5: Decelerating to stop
352 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
6: H/W OCS
B4 7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operating
B3 0: Stopped
1: Operating in forward
B2
direction
2: Operating in reverse
B1
direction
B0 3: DC operating
B15
B14
B13 Operation command source
B12 0: Keypad
1: Communication option
B11 3: Built-in RS 485
B10 4: Terminal block
B9
B8
Inverter operation
0h0306 frequency command - - B7 Frequency command source
source 0: Keypad speed
B6
1: Keypad torque
B5 2-4: Up/Down operation
speed
B4
5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
B3 9: Pulse
10: Built-in RS 485
B2 11: Communication option
B1 13: Jog
14: PID
B0 25-31: Multi-step speed
frequency
0h0307 Keypad S/W version - - (Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0308 Keypad title version - - (Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01
(Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0309 IO Board Version - -
(Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01
0h030A–
Reserved - - -
0h30F
Hx2000 AC Drive 353

Comm.
Address
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
0h0312 Output rpm 0 Rpm -
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
0h0315 DC Link voltage 1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference value
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % PID feedback value
Display the number of Displays the number of poles for the first
0h031A - -
poles for the 1st motor motor
Display the number of Displays the number of poles for the 2nd
0h031B - -
poles for the 2nd motor motor
Display the number of
Displays the number of poles for the
0h031C poles for the selected - -
selected motor
motor
0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: rpm
0h031E
Reserved - - -
–0h031F
B15–B7 Reserved
B6 P7 (I/O board)
B5 P6 (I/O board)
B4 P5 (I/O board)
0h0320 Digital input information
B3 P4 (I/O board)
B2 P3 (I/O board)
B1 P2 (I/O board)
B0 P1 (I/O board)
B15–
Reserved
B11
Digital output
0h0321 - -
information B10 Q1
B9–B5 Reserved
354 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
B15–B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)
Virtual digital input
0h0322 - - B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
information
Display the selected
0h0323 - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
motor
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input V1 or Thermal (I/O board)
0h0325 AI2 0.01 % Analog input V2 or I2 (I/O board)
0h0326 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board)
0h032A Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032B Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032C Reserved - - Reserved
0h032D Temperature 1 ℃ Heat Sink Termperature
Consumption energy
0h032E 0.1 kWh Consumption energy (kWh)
(kWh)
Consumption energy
0h032F 1 MWh Consumption energy (MWh)
(MWh)
Hx2000 AC Drive 355

Comm.
Address
B15 PC Repeat Err
B14 Over Heat Trip
B13 Reserved
B12 External Trip
B11 Damper Err
B10 Pipe Break
B9 NTC Open
Latch type trip B8 Reserved

0h0330 - -
information - 1 B7 Reserved
B6 In Phase Open
B5 Out Phase Open
B4 Low Voltage2
B3 E-Thermal
B2 Inverter OLT
B1 Under Load
B0 Over Load
B15 Reserved
B14 MMC Interlock
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Option Trip-1
Latch type trip
0h0331 - - B9 No Motor Trip
information - 2
B8 Reserved
B7 IO Board Trip
B6 Reserved
B5 ParaWrite Trip
B4 TB Trip
B3 Fan Trip
356 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
B2 Thermal Trip
B1 Level Detect
B0 Reserved
B15–
Reserved
B4
B3 Lost Keypad
Level type trip
0h0332 - -
information B2 Lost Command
B1 Low Voltage
B0 BX
B15–
Reserved
B3
H/W Diagnosis Trip B2 Watchdog-1 error
0h0333 - -
information
B1 EEP Err
B0 ADC Offset
B15 Reserved
B14 Low Battery
B13 Load Tune
B12 Fan Exchange
B11 CAP. Warning

B10 Level Detect
B9 Reserved
0h0334 Warning information-1 - -
B8 Lost Keypad
B7 Pipe Break
B6 Fire Mode
B5 DB Warn %ED
B4 Fan Warning
B3 Lost Command
B2 Inv Over Load
Hx2000 AC Drive 357

Comm.
Address
B1 Under Load
B0 Over Load
B15 Reserved
– Reserved
B4 Reserved
Latch type trip
0h0335 - - B3 Overcurrent2 Trip
information -3
B2 Overvoltage Trip
B1 Overcurrent1 Trip
B0 Ground Fault Trip
B15 Reserved
~ Reserved
B3 Reserved
-
0h0336 Warning information-2 -
B2 Lsig Tune Err
B1 Rs Tune Err
B0 ParaWrite Fail
0h0337–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h0339
0h033A Proc PID Output 0.01 % Process PID Output (%)
Proc Proc Unit Scaled Process PID reference

0h033B Proc PID UnitScale Ref
Unit Unit value
Proc Proc Unit Scaled Process PID feedback

0h033C Proc PID UnitScale Fdb
Unit Unit value
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day
been powered on
Total number of minutes excluding the
0h0341 On Time Minute 0 Min
total number of On Time days
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day
driven the motor
358 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min
total number of Run Time days
Total number of days the heat sink fan
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day
has been running
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min
total number of Fan Time days
0h0346
–0h0348
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 5: LonWorks
0h034B Reserved - - Reserved
0h034C Reserved Reserved
0h034D–
0h034F
0h0350 E-PID 1 Output 0.01 % External PID 1 output
0h0351 E-PID 1 Ref 0.1 % External PID 1 Reference
0h0352 E-PID 1 Fdb 0.1 % External PID 1 feedback
Proc Proc
0h0353 E-PID 1 Unit Scale Ref Unit Scale External PID 1 Reference
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h0354 E-PID 1 Unit Scale Fdb Unit Scale External PID 1 feedback
Unit Unit
0h0359 E-PID 2 Fdb 0.1 % External PID 2 feedback
Hx2000 AC Drive 359

Comm.
Address
Proc Proc
0h035A E-PID 2 Unit Scale Ref Unit Scale External PID 2 Reference
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h035B E-PID 2 Unit Scale Fdb Unit Scale External PID 2 feedback
Unit Unit
B15
Reserved
–B2
0h035C Applicaion Status - - B1 Fire Mode
B0 Pump Clean
0h035D Inv Temperature 0 ℃ Heatsink Temperature
0h035E Power Factor 0.1 - Output power factor
0h035F Inv Fan Time - % INV Fan running time(%)
B15 Reserved
– Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 5th motor running

Multi motor control
0h0360 - -
terminal output B3 4th motor running
B2 3rd motor running
B1 2nd motor running
B0 1st motor running
0h0361 -
0h0363
0h0366 E-PID 3Fdb 0.1 % External PID 3 feedback
360 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
Proc Proc
0h0367 E-PID 3 Unit Scale Ref Unit Scale External PID 3 Reference
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h0368 E-PID 3 Unit Scale Fdb Unit Scale External PID 3 feedback
Unit Unit
0h0369 Saved kWH 0.1 KW Saved kWH
0h0370 Saved MWH 0.1 MW Saved MWH
Hx2000 AC Drive 361

7.3.8.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/Write)
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
0h0381 RPM command 1 Rpm Command rpm setting
B15–B4 Reserved
B3 0 → 1: Free-run stop
B2 0 → 1: Trip initialization
0: Reverse command, 1:
B1
0h0382 Operation command - - Forward command
0: Stop command, 1: Run
B0
command
Example: Forward operation command
0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h
0h0383 Acceleration time 0.1 sec Acceleration time setting
0h0384 Deceleration time 0.1 sec Deceleration time setting
B15–B8 Reserved
Virtual digital input
0h0385 - - B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
control (0: Off, 1: On)
B15–B11 Reserved
B10 Q1
B9–
Digital output control Reserved
0h0386 - - B5
(0: Off, 1: On)
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
362 Hx2000 AC Drive

Comm.
Address
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % Process PID reference
0h0389 PID feedback value 0.1 % Process PID feedback
0h038A Motor rated current 0.1 A -
0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V -
0h038C–
0h038D
Proc PID Unit Proc Proc
0h038E Unit Scale Process PID reference
Reference Unit Unit
Proc PID Unit Proc Proc
0h038F Unit Scale Process PID feedback
Feedback Unit Unit
0h0391 AO1 Output 0.1 % AO1 Output
0h0395–
0h0399
Set the CNF-20 value (refer to
0h039A Anytime Para - -
5.49Operation State Monitor on page 299)
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - -
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - -
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - -
0h039E–
Reserved Reserved
0h039F
0h03A0 PID Ref 1 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 1 reference
0h03A1 PID Ref 2 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 2 reference
0h03A2 PID Feedback Aux 0.1 % PID Aux feedback
Hx2000 AC Drive 363

Comm.
Address
Value
Proc PID Aux 1 Unit Proc Proc
0h03A3 Unit Scale PID Aux 1 reference
Scale Unit Unit
Proc PID Aux 2 Unit Proc Proc
0h03A4 Unit Scale PID Aux 2 reference
Scale Unit Unit
Proc PID Fdb Aux Proc Proc
0h03A5 Unit Scale PID Aux feedback
Unit Scale Unit Unit
0h03A6–
Reserved Reserved
0h03AF
0h03B0 E-PID 1 Ref 0.1 % External PID 1 reference
0h03B1 E-PID 1 Fdb 0.1 % External PID 1 reference
E-PID 1 Unit Scale Proc Proc
0h03B2 Unit Scale External PID 1 reference
Ref Unit Unit
0h03B3 Unit Scale External PID 1 feedback
Fdb Unit Unit
0h03B4 Reserved Reserved
0h03B6 E-PID 2 Fdb 0.1 % External PID 2 feedback
0h03B7 Unit Scale External PID 2 reference
Ref Unit Unit
0h03B8 Unit Scale External PID 2 feedback
Fdb Unit Unit
0h03BA E-PID 3 Fdb 0.1 % External PID 3 feedback
0h03BB Unit Scale External PID 3 reference
Ref Unit Unit
0h03BC Unit Scale External PID 3 feedback
Fdb Unit Unit
Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed
frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
364 Hx2000 AC Drive

1 Set DRV-07 to ‘Keypad-1’ and select a target frequency.

2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address
(0h1101).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the power
cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.
7.3.8.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)
Changeable
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit During Function
Address
Running
0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1: Yes
Monitor mode
0h03E1 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
initialization
10: EPID
Grp
0: No, 11: AP1 Grp
1: All Grp 12: AP2 Grp
2: DRV Grp 13: AP3 Grp
3: BAS Grp 14: PRT
4: ADV Grp Grp
0h03E2 Parameter initialization - - X
5: CON Grp 15: M2 Grp
6: IN Grp Setting is
7: OUT Grp prohibited
8: COM Grp during fault
9: PID Grp trip
interruptions
.
0h03E3 Display changed - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0: BASIC
1: Compressor
2: Supply Fan
Macro Function 3: Exhaust Fan
0h03E4 - - X
Setting 4: Cooling Tower
5: Circul. Pump
6: Vacuum Pump
7: Constant Torq
0h03E5 Delete all fault history - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Hx2000 AC Drive 365

Changeable
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit During Function
Address
Running
Delete user-
0h03E6 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
registrated codes
Write: 0–9999
0h03E7 Hide parameter mode 0 Hex O
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Write: 0–9999
0h03E8 Lock parameter mode 0 Hex O
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Easy start on (easy
0h03E9 parameter setup - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
mode)
Initializing power
0h03EA - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
consumption
Initialize inverter
0h03EB operation - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
accumulative time
Initialize cooling fan
0h03EC accumulated - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
operation time
Note
• When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to
the inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are
reflected to the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared following an
inverter power cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting parameters via
communication, ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to shutting the inverter
down.
• Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to ‘0’ via communication, set it to
another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than ‘0’ and a non-zero value is
entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be identified by
reading the parameter when operating the inverter via communication.
• The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa. When
the same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed just once.
Therefore, if the same value is entered again, change it to another value first and then re-
enter the previous value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the
following order: 244 → 0 → 244.
• If the communication parameter settings are initialized by setting the address 0h03E2 to [1:
All Grp] or [8: COM Grp], or if any Macro function item is modified by setting the address
0h03E4, all the communication parameter settings are reverted to the factory default. If this
366 Hx2000 AC Drive

happens, the inverter may not be able to properly receive responces from the upper-level
devices due to the changes in the settings.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for reading multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, the undefined address returns0xFFFF while all the others
return normal response. If all the consecutive addresses are undefined, one return code is
received from the first undefined address only.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for writing into multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, or if the value that is being written is not a valid one, no error
response about the wring operation is returned. If all the consecutive addresses are
undefined, or if all the date is invalid, one return code is received from the first undefined
address only.
It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all
data is saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if
parameter setup is continues for an extended period of time.
7.4 BACnet Communication
7.4.1 What is BACnet Communication?

BACnet (Building Automation and Control network) is a communication network frequently
used in building automation. BACnet introduces the concept of object-oriented systems,
and defines standardized objects. By exchanging data, this function makes communication
possible between products from different companies. It also stadardizes some of the
general services carried out by using these standard objects.
7.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards

Application Items Specification
Interface 5 Pin Pluggable connector
Connection Data transmission RS-485 MS/TP, Half-duplex
Cable Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)
BACnet MS/TP Stated in ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 135-2004
Baud Rate Supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 bps
Communication MAC Address 1–127
Start/Stop bit Start 1 bit, Stop ½ bit
Parity check None/Even/Odd
Hx2000 AC Drive 367

7.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start

Follow the instructions below to configure the BACnet network for a quick start.
1 Set five multi-function input terminals (IN-65–71 PxDefine) to ‘Interlock 1’ – ‘Interlock 5’

respectively, in the correct motor order.
Note
• When auto change mode selection (AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’,

and if 5 motors are operated, including the main motor, the interlock numbers
1,2,3,4,5 refer to the monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock
numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output
terminal).
• If auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and
auxiliary motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4,
Interlock 1,2,3,4 are the monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4. Set COM-04
Int485 Mode.
2 Set the Device Object Instances for COM-21 and 22 and dfine the values. The device
object instances must have unique values.
3 Set COM-01 (Int485 St ID) by entering a value (for BACnet, the Int485 station ID must
be set within a range of 0–127). The station ID value set at COM-01 must be within the
value range defined by the Max Master Property of different Master for MS/TP token
passing.
4 Test the network and make sure the BACnet communication is working properly.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0 12001)
1 24001)
2 48001)
3 9600
Communication
03 Baudrate 9600 bps 4 19200
Speed
COM 5 38400
6 576001)
7 76800
8 1152001)
Communication 0 D8/PN/S1
04 Int485 Mode D8/PN/S1
Mode 1 D8/PN/S2
368 Hx2000 AC Drive

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD display Setting Range Unit
Setting
2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
Maximum number
BAC Max
20 of BACnet 0 0–127 -
Master
Masters
BACnet device BAC Dev
21 237 0–4149 -
number 1 Inst1
BACnet device BAC Dev
22 0 0–999 -
number 2 Inst1
BACnet device BAC
23 0 0–32767 -
password PassWord
1) 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps cannot be set in communication
speed setting in case of BACnet communication.
BACnet Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
Refers to MACID setting parameter used in BACnet. All MACIDs of the
inverter using BACnet must be set before connecting to BUS. MACID must
COM-01 Int485
have the unique value from the Network to be connected to MACID. If
ST ID(MAC ID)
BACnet is used, the value must be within 0–127. Communication is not
available if the value is not included in the range.
COM-03 Baud
Sets the communication speed to use in the network.
Rate
COM-20 BAC Range for Max Master that is the number of devices currently connected to
Mas Master the communication Line is 1–127, and the default value is 127.
BACnet Device Instance is used to identify BACnet Device, and must be
set as the unique value in the BACnet network. It is used efficiently when
finding BACnet Device of other Devices while installing.
The following formula is used to calculate the Device Instance value:
COM-21–22
(COM-21 X 1000) + COM-22
BAC Dev Inst 1–
Therefore, in the Device Instance value, COM-21 takes the thousands and
2
higher places (fourth digit and over) and COM-22 takes the hundreds and
lower places (third digit and below).
COM-21 and COM-22 have the ranges of 0–4194 and 0–999 respectively,
because Device Instance can have the value within 0–4,194,302.
COM-23 BAC Refers to the password used for Warm/Cold Start. COM-23 Password
Hx2000 AC Drive 369

Code Description
Password parameter can be set within 0–32767, and the default value is 0. If the
parameter setting range is set to 1–32768, the Password value set at
BACnet Master and the value set at COM-23 must be the same to operate
Warm/Cold Start.
If COM-23 Password is set to ‘0’, the password of BACnet Master is
ignored and Warm/Cold Start is operated.
Note
MaxMaster and MACID affect performing Network communication. It is recommended to set as
small value as possible, and to set the continuous value for MACID. If the values are set as
explained above, efficient Token Passing Configuration is possible because each Master tries to
give Token to Device set as its own (MACD+1).
7.4.4 Protocol Implementation

The following table sums the information required to implement a BACnet system. Refer to
each section of the table to implement a BACnet system properly.
Category Items Remarks

I-Am (Answer to Who-Is, when
broadcast or reset after power-up)
I-Have (Answer to Who-Has)
Read Property
Write Property
BACnet Services Ignores Password in Device
Device Communication Control
Communication Control
Warm/Cold Starts (Supports
Password) Start Backup, End
Reinitialize Device Backup, Start Restore, End
Restore, or Abort Restore services
are NOT available.
BACnet communication card Supported Standards: MS/TP
Data Link Layer supports an MS/TP Master Data Link Available speed: 9600, 19200,
Layer 38400, and 76800 bps
MAC ID/Device Set at COM-01 Int485 ST ID (MAC
Object Instance ID). The Device Object Instances are
configuration set at COM-21 and COM-22.
MAX Master
Set at COM-20 (MAX Master Value).
Property
370 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.4.5 Object Map

Property Object Type
Device BI BV AI AO MSI MVI
Object Identifier O O O O O O O
Object Name O O O O O O O
Object Type O O O O O O O
System Status O
Vendor Name O
Vendor Identifier O
Model Name O
Firmware Revision O
Appl Software Revision O
Location O
Protocol Version O
Protocol Revision O
Services Supported O
Object Types Supported O
Object List O
Max APDU Length O
APDU Timeout O
Number APDU Retries O
Max Master O
Max Info Frames O
Device Address Binding O
Database Revision O
Preset Value O O O O O O
Description O O O O O O O
Status Flags O O O O O O
Event State O O O O O O
Reliability O O O O O O
Out-of-Service O O O O O O
Hx2000 AC Drive 371

Property Object Type

Number of states O O
State text O O
Units O O
Polarity O
Active Text O O
Inactive Text O O
* BI–Binary Input / BV–Binary Value / AI–Analog Input / AV–Analog Value / MSI–Multistate
Input / MSV–Multistate Value
You can read/write in Location and Description only if it is the device object. You can write a
maximum of 29 words.
7.4.5.1 Analog Value Object Instance
Instance ID Object Name Description Setting Range Units R/W

Command timeout
AV1 CommTimeoutSet 0.1–120.0 Secs R/W
setting
AV2 AccelTimeSet Accelerate time setting 0.0–600.0 Secs R/W
AV3 DecelTimeSet Decelerate time setting 0.0–600.0 Secs R/W

Command frequency
AV4 CommandFreqSet 0.00–DRV-20 Hz R/W
setting**
AV5 PIDReferenceSet PID reference setting 0–100.0 % R/W
AV6 PIDFeedbackSet PID feedback setting 0–100.0 % R/W

EPid1ReferenceS EPID1 Reference
AV7 0–100.0 % R/W
et setting
AV8 0–100.0 % R/W
et setting
AV9 0–100.0 % R/W
et setting
CommunicationA
AV10 Analog Output1 setting 0–100.0 % R/W
O1
CommunicationA
O2
372 Hx2000 AC Drive


CommunicationA
O310
CommunicationA
O410
• When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not
saved if the power of the inverter is disconnected.
• A value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20) cannot be used. The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src
(DRV-07) is set to ‘Int 485’.
• AV2, AV3 and AV4 are used to provide acceleration/deceleration rate and frequency
reference commands. These can be written in AUTO mode only.
7.4.5.2 Multi-state Value Object Instance

0: None
1: FreeRun
Command lost 2: Dec
MSV1 LostCommand MSG R/W
operation setting 3: HoldInput
4: HoldOutput
5: LostPreset
7.4.5.3 Binary Value Object Instance
Instance ID Object Name Description Active /Inactive Text R/W

BV1 StopCmd Stop command False/True R/W
BV2 RunForwardCmd Run forward command False/True R/W
10
Can be used when connecting L&T E&A exclusive I/O Card.
Hx2000 AC Drive 373

Instance ID Object Name Description Active /Inactive Text R/W

BV3 RunReverseCmd Run reverse command False/True R/W
BV4 ResetFaultCmd Fault reset command False/True R/W
Free run stop
BV5 FreeRunStopCmd False/True R/W
command
Relay 1 On/Off
BV6 Relay1Cmd False/True R/W
command
Relay 2 On/Off
command
Relay 3 On/Off
command
Relay 4 On/Off
command
Relay 5 On/Off
command
BV11 Q1Cmd Q 1 On/Off command False/True R/W
7.4.5.4 Analog Input Object Instance
Instance ID Object Name Description Units R/W
AI1 InvCap (kW) Inverter capacity kW R
AI2 InvCap (HP) Inverter capacity HP R
AI3 InvVoltageClass Inverter voltage type Volts R
AI4 OutputCurrent Output current Amps R
AI5 OutputFreq Output frequency Hz R
AI6 OutputVolgate Output voltage Volts R
AI7 DCLinkVoltage DC Link voltage Volts R
AI8 OutputPower Output power kW R
AI9 AI1 Value of Analog 1 % R
AI10 AI2 Values of Analog 2 % R
374 Hx2000 AC Drive

AI11 OutputRPM Output speed RPM R
AI12 Pole Pole number of the motor - R

Information of the inverter state
AI13 InvStatus (Refer to address 0h0305 in the - R
common area)(Note1)
Latch type trip information1
AI14 LatchTripInfo1 (Refer to address 0h0330 in the - R
common area)(Note1)
common area)(Note1)
common area)(Note1)
Level type trip information
AI17 LevelTripInfo (Refer to address 0h0332 in the - R
common area)(Note1)
H/W Diagnosis trip information
AI18 HWDIagInfo (Refer to address 0h0333 in the - R
common area)*
Warning information
AI19 WarningInfo (Refer to address 0h0334 in the - R
common area)*
AI20 KiloWattHour Output power by kW/h kW/h R
AI21 MegaWattHour Output power by MW/h MW/h R
AI22 PowerFactor Power factor - R
AI23 RunTimeDay Run time by day Day R
AI24 RunTimeMin Run time by minute Day R
AI25 PidOutValue PID Output Value % R

PidReferenceValu
AI26 PID Reference Value % R
e
AI27 PidFeedbackValue PID Feedback Value % R
AI28 EPid1RefValue EPID1 Reference Value % R
Hx2000 AC Drive 375

AI31 EPid1FdbValue EPID1 Feedback Value % R
*Refer to the relevant addresses in 7.3.8 communication compatible common area

parameters.
7.4.5.5 Binary Input Object Instance
Instance ID Object Name Description R/W
BI1 Stopped Stop state R
BI2 RunningForward Running forward R
BI3 RunningReverse Running reverse R
BI4 Tripped Trip occurred R
BI5 Accelerating Accelerating R
BI6 Decelerating Decelerating R
BI7 SteadySpeed Operating at steady speed R
BI8 RunningDC Operating at a 0 step speed R
BI9 Stopping Stopping R
11
Can be used when connecting L&T E&A exclusive I/O Card.
376 Hx2000 AC Drive

Instance ID Object Name Description R/W
BI10 FwdRunCommandState Fowarad run command state R
BI11 RevRunCommandState Reverse run command state R
BI12 P1 P1 state R
BI13 P2 P2 state R
BI14 P3 P3 state R
BI15 P4 P4 state R
BI16 P5 P5 state R
BI17 P6 P6 state R
BI18 P7 P7 state R
BI19 Relay1 Relay1 state* R
BI24 Q1 Q1 state R
BI25 SpeedSearch Speed search operating R
BI26 HWOCS H/W OCS occurred R
BI27 SWOCS S/W OCS occurred R
BI28 RunningDwell Dwell operating state R
BI29 SteadyState Steady state R
BI30 Warning Warning state R
OUT-31–35 (Relay1–5) must be set to ‘0 (none)’ to control outputs via communication.
Hx2000 AC Drive 377

7.4.5.6 MultiState Input Object Instance

1 Hz
MSI1 UnitsDisplay Displays Unit setting R
2 RPM
7.4.5.7 Error Message
Display Description
serviceserror+7 Inconsistent parameters
propertyerror+9 Invalid data type
serviceserror+10 Invalid access method
serviceserror+11 Invalid file start
serviceserror+29 Service request denied
objecterror+31 Unknown object
propertyerror+0 Property other
propertyerror+27 Read access denied
propertyerror+32 Unknown property
propertyerror+37 Value out of range
propertyerror+40 Write access denied
propertyerror+42 Invalid array index
clienterror+31 Unknown device
resourceserror+0 Resources other
clienterror+30 Time out
abortreason+4 Segmentation not supported
rejectreason+4 Invalid tag
clienterror+0xFF No invoke id
securityerror+26 Password failure
378 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.5 Metasys-N2 Communication
7.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start

Follow the instructions below to configure the Metasys-N2 network for a quick start.
1 Set COM-02 (Int485 Prtoto) to ‘5 (Metasys-N2)’.

2 Set the network communication speed to ‘9600 bps.’
3 Configure the communication modes and make sure that they are fixed to Data Bit 8 /
No Parity Bit/ Start Bit 1 / Stop Bit 1.
4 Test the network and make sure Metasys-N2 communication is working properly.
7.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard
Item Standards
Communication speed 9600 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Cable Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)
Modbus-RTU: Binary (7/8 bit)

Character system
Metasys-N2: ASCII (8bit)
Start/Stop bit Start 1bit, Stop 1bit

RS485: Checksum (2byte)
Error check Modbus-RTU: CRC16 (2byte)
Metastys-N2: CRC16 (2byte)
Parity check None
Hx2000 AC Drive 379

7.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map
7.5.3.1 Analog Output

The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.
No. Name Range Unit Description

Command
AO1 0.0–Max Freq Hz Command frequency setting**
Frequency
AO2 Accel Time 0.0–600.0 Sec ACC time setting*
AO3 Decel Time 0.0–600.0 Sec DEC time setting*
0 KeyPad
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 : Fx/Rx-2
AO4 Drive mode - Drive mode setting
3 Int. 485
4 FieldBus
5 Time Event
0 –KeyPad-1
1 –KeyPad-2
2 V1
3 –Reversed
4 V2
AO5 Freq mode - Frequency mode setting
5 I2
6 Int485
7 FieldBus
8 Reversed
9 Pulse
380 Hx2000 AC Drive

• When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. If PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not saved
when the power of the inverter is disconnected.
• Cannot set the value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20). The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src
(DRV-07) is set to ‘Int 485’.
7.5.3.2 Binary Output

The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.
No. Name Range Description

BO1 Stop Command 1: Stop Stop command
Run Forward
BO2 1: Forward Run Forward run command
Command
Run Reverse
BO3 1: Reverse Run Reverse run command
Command
BO4 Reset Fault 1: Reset Fault reset command
BO5 Free-Run Stop 1: Bx Free-run stop command
7.5.3.3 Analog Input

Metasys-N2 master monitors inverter state.
No. Name Unit Description

AI1 Output Current Amps Output current
AI2 Output Frequency Hz Output frequency
AI3 Output Speed RPM Output speed
Trip code information
AI4 Trip Code - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h000F)*
‘Latch’ type fault trip information 1
AI5 Latch Trip Info1 - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0330)*
AI6 Latch Trip Info2 - ‘Latch’ type fault trip information 2
Hx2000 AC Drive 381

No. Name Unit Description

(Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0331)*
‘Latch’ type fault trip information 3
AI7 Latch Trip Info3 - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0335)*
‘Level’ type fault trip information
AI8 Level Trip Info - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0332)(1)
H/W Diagnosis fault trip information
H/W Diagnosis Trip
AI9 - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
Info
0h0333)(1)
Warning information
AI10 Warning Info - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0334)(1)
AI11 Output Power KW -
Consumption
AI12 KW Consumption energy (kWh)
energy (kWh)
Consumption
AI13 MW Consumption energy (MWh)
energy (MWh)
AI14 Saved kWH kW Saved kWH
AI15 Saved MWH MW Saved MWH
AI16 Output voltage V -
Total number of minutes excluding the total number
AI17 Run Time minute Min
of Run Time days
Total number of days the inverter has driven the
AI18 Run Time date day
motor
AI19 Keypad state - 0 : OFF state, 1 : AUTO state, 2 : HAND state
Inverter operation
Refer to 0h0333 in monitoring common area
AI20 frequency command -
parameter
source
* Refer to 7.3.7Compatible Common Area Parameteron page 348.
382 Hx2000 AC Drive

7.5.3.4 Binary Input

Metasys-N2 master unit monitors the inverter input and output status in binary codes. The
following table lists the binary codes used and their meanings.
BI1 Stopped 1 – Stopped
BI2 Running Forward 1 – Forward operation is running.
BI3 Running Reverse 1 – Reverse operation is running.
BI4 Tripped 1 – Fualt trip occurred.
BI5 Accelerating 1 –Accelerating
BI6 Decelerating 1 –Decelerating

1 –Running at a steady speed (frequency
BI7 Reached Full Speed
refernece)
BI8 DC Braking 1 – Running on DC power source
BI9 Stopping 1–Stopping is in progress.
BI10 P1 Input 1–True / 0 - False
BI11 P2 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI17 Relay1 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI22 Q1 (OC1) State 1–On / 0 - Off
Hx2000 AC Drive 383

7.5.3.5 Error Code
Defined Codes Description

The device has been reset. Currently waiting for the ‘Identity Yourself’
00
command.
01 Undefined command
02 Checksum error has occurred.
Data size exceeded the input buffer (meaasage is bigger than the
03
device buffer size).
05 Data field error (input message size does not fit the command type)
10 Invalid data (message value is out of the range)
Invalid command for data type (command does not fit the message
11
frame)
Command is not accepted (device has ignored a command due to a
12
fault. The master device sends a ‘Status Update Request’).
384 Hx2000 AC Drive

Hx2000 AC Drive 385

Table of Functions
8 Table of Functions
This chapter lists all the function settings for the Hx2000 series inverter. Use the references
listed in this document to set the parameters. If an entered set value is out of range, the
messages that will be displayed on the keypad are also provided in this chapter. In these
situations, the [ENT] key will not operate to program the inverter.
8.1 Drive Group (DRV)

Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-

disabled
Code Comm. LCD Initial
Name Setting Range Property* Ref.
DRV Address Display value
Jump Jump
00 - 1–99 9 O p.61
Code Code
Target Cmd 0.00, Low Freq– High
01 0h1101 0.00 O p.79
frequency Frequency Freq
Keypad 0 Reverse
Keypad
02 0h1102 run 1 O p.77
Run Dir 1 Forward
direction
Accelerat-
03 0h1103 Acc Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.103
ion time
Decelera-
04 0h1104 Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.103
tion time
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2 1:
Command Cmd
06 0h1106 Fx/Rx Δ p.96
source Source 3 Int 485 -1
4 Field Bus
5 Time Event
0 Keypad-1
Frequency 0:
Freq Ref
07 0h1107 reference 1 Keypad-2 Keyp Δ p.79
Src
source ad-1
2 V1
386 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
1012 V3
11 I3
1213 V4
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
09 0h1109 Control Control 0 V/F 0: V/F Δ p.112,
mode Mode p.147
1 Slip Compen ,
Jog Jog 0.00, Low Freq–High
11 0h110B 10.00 O p.139
frequency Frequency Freq
Jog run
Jog Acc
12 0h110C accelerat- 0.0–600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.139
Time
ion time
Jog run
Jog Dec
13 0h110D decelerat- 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.139
Time
ion time
0 0.2 kW(0.3HP)
1 0.4kW((0.5HP) Depe-
ndent
Motor Motor 0.75 on
14 0h110E 2 Δ p.200
capacity Capacity kW(1.0HP) motor
settin
3 1.1 kW(1.5HP) g
4 1.5 kW(2.0HP)
12
‘10(V3) ~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
13
‘12(V4) ~15(I5)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 387

Table of Functions
5 2.2 kW(3.0HP)
6 3.0 kW(4.0HP)
7 3.7 kW(5.0HP)
8 4.0 kW(5.5HP)
9 5.5 kW(7.5HP)
7.5
10
kW(10.0HP)
11.0
11
kW(15.0HP)
15.0
12
kW(20.0HP)
18.5
13
kW(25.0HP)
22.0
14
kW(30.0HP)
30.0
15
kW(40.0HP)
16 37.0
kW(50.0HP)
17 45.0
kW(60.0HP)
18 55.0
kW(75.0HP)
19 75.0kW(100.0
HP)
20 90.0kW(120.0
HP)
Torque 0 Manual
0:
boost Torque
15 0h110F 1 Auto 1 Manu Δ p.116
options Boost
al
2 Auto 2
1614 0h1110 Forward Fwd Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) 2.0 Δ p.116
14
DRV-16–17 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘0 (Manual)’.
388 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions
Torque
boost
Reverse
17 0h1111 Torque Rev Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) 2.0 Δ p.116
boost
Base
18 0h1112 Base Freq 30.00–400.00 (Hz) 50.00 Δ p.112
frequency
Start
19 0h1113 Start Freq 0.01–10.00 (Hz) 0.50 Δ p.112
frequency
Maximum
20 0h1114 Max Freq 40.00-400.00 (Hz) 50.00 Δ p.124
frequency
Select 0 Hz Display 0: Hz
Hz/Rpm
21 0h1115 speed Displa O p.94
Sel 1 RPM Display
unit y
Hand
mode HAND 0.00, Low Freq- High
25 0h1119 0.00 O p.74
operation Cmd Freq Freq
frequency
Hand HAND
0 0:
mode Parameter
HAN
operation HAND Ref
26 0h111A D Δ p.74
Frequency Mode
1 Follow AUTO Para-
reference
meter
source
kW/HP 0 kW
kW/HP
30 0h111E unit 0:kW O -
Unit Sel 1 HP
selection
0 None
Smart SmartDownl- 0:Non
91 0h115B SmartCopy 1 Δ
Copy oad e
3 SmartUpload
Display
I/O S/W
98 0h1162 I/O,S/W - - - X -
Ver
Version
8.2 Basic Function Group (BAS)

Hx2000 AC Drive 389
Table of Functions

disabled
Code Comm. Initial
Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* Ref.
BAS Address value
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O p.61
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
6 Pulse
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
EPID1
10
Output
Auxiliary 11 EPID1
01 0h1201 reference Aux Ref Src Fdb Val 0: None Δ p.134
source 12 15
V3
13 I3
1416 V4
15 I4
16 V5
17 I5
18 EPID3
Output
19 EPID3
Fdb Val
0217 0h1202 Auxiliary Aux Calc 0 M+(G*A) 0: Δ p.134
command Type M+(G*A)
Mx
calculation 1
(G*A)
type
2 M/(G*A)
15
‘12(V3) ~13(I3)’ of BAS-01 are available when Extension IO option.
16
‘14(V4) ~17(I5)’ of BAS-01 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
17
BAS-02–03 are displayed when BAS-01 is not ‘0 (None)’.
390 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

BAS Address value
M+[M*(G
3
*A)]
M+G*2
4
(A-50%)
M*[G*2
5
(A-50%)
M/[G*2
6
(A-50%)]
M+M*G*
7 2 (A-
50%)
Auxiliary
Aux Ref -200.0-200.0
03 0h1203 command 100.0 O p.134
Gain (%)
gain
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Second 2 Fx/Rx-2
Cmd 2nd 1: Fx/Rx-
04 0h1204 command 3 Int 485 Δ p.127
Src 1
source
4 FieldBus
Tme
5
Event
Keypad-
0
1
Keypad-
1
2
2 V1
Second
Freq 2nd 4 V2 0:
05 0h1205 frequency O p.127
Src Keypad-1
source 5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
18
10 V3
18
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of BAS-05 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 391

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

BAS Address value
11 I3
1219 V4
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
07 0h1207 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0: Linear Δ p.112
options
1 Square
2 User V/F
3 Square 2
Max
Acc/Dec 0
Ramp T Freq 0: Max
08 0h1208 standard Δ p.103
Mode Delta Freq
frequency 1
Freq
0 0.01 sec
Time scale
09 0h1209 Time Scale 1 0.1 sec 1: 0.1 sec Δ p.103
settings
2 1 sec
Input power 60/50 Hz 0 60 Hz
10 0h120A 1: 50 Hz Δ p.234
frequency Sel 1 50 Hz
Number of Pole
11 0h120B 2-48 Δ p.147
motor poles Number
Rated slip Depend-
12 0h120C Rated Slip 0-3000 (RPM) Δ p.147
speed ent on
Motor rated motor
13 0h120D Rated Curr 1.0-1000.0 (A) setting Δ p.147
current
Motor no-
14 0h120E NoloadCurr 0.0-1000.0 (A) Δ p.147
load current
Motor rated
15 0h120F Rated Volt 170-480 (V) 230/415V Δ p.118
voltage
Depend-
Motor
16 0h1210 Efficiency 70-100 (%) ent on Δ p.200
efficiency
motor
19
‘12(V4) ~15(I5)’ of BAS-05 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
392 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

BAS Address value
setting
Trim power Trim
18 0h1212 70-130 (%) 100 O -
display Power %
Input power AC Input
19 0h1213 170-528V 230/415V O p.234
voltage Volt
0 None
All
1 (Rotation
type)
Auto Auto All (Static
20 - 2 0: None Δ p.200
Tuning Tuning type)
Rs+
Lsigma
3
(Rotation
type)
Stator Depend-
21 - Rs 0.0-999.9 (mΩ) Δ p.200
resistor ent on
Leakage 0.000-9.999 motor
22 - Lsigma setting Δ p.200
inductance (mH)
User 0.00 - Maximum
4120 0h1229 User Freq 1 12.50 Δ p.114
frequency1 frequency (Hz)
User
42 0h122A User Volt 1 0–100 (%) 25 Δ p.114
voltage1
User 0.00-Maximum
43 0h122B User Freq 2 25.00 Δ p.114
User
44 0h122C User Volt 2 0-100 (%) 50 Δ p.114
voltage2
User 0.00 - Maximum
45 0h122D User Freq 3 37.50 Δ p.114
User
46 0h122E User Volt 3 0-100 (%) 75 Δ p.114
voltage3
User 0.00 - Maximum
47 0h122F User Freq 4 50.00 Δ p.114
User
48 0h1230 User Volt 4 0-100 (%) 100 Δ p.114
voltage4
BAS-41–48 are displayed when BAS-07 or M2-25 is set to ‘2 (User V/F)’.

20
Hx2000 AC Drive 393

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

BAS Address value
Multi-step
Low Freq- High
5021 0h1232 speed Step Freq-1 10.00 O p.94
Freq
frequency1
Multi-step
Low Freq- High
Freq
frequency2
Multi-step
Low Freq-
High Freq
frequency3
Multi-step
Low Freq- High
Freq
frequency4
Multi-step
Low Freq- High
Freq
frequency5
Multi-step
Low Freq- High
Freq
frequency6
Multi-step
Low Freq-High
Freq
frequency7
Multi-step
70 0h1246 deceleration Acc Time-1 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.106
time1
Multi-step
71 0h1247 deceleration Dec Time-1 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.106
time1
Multi-step
7222 0h1248 deceleration Acc Time-2 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.106
time2
Multi-step
73 0h1249 deceleration Dec Time-2 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.106
time2
Multi-step
74 0h124A Acc Time-3 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O p.106
decelerati-
BAS-50–56 are displayed whenIN-65-71 is set to ‘Speed–L/M/H’.

21
22
BAS-72–83 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Xcel-L/M/H’
394 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

BAS Address value
on time3
Multi-step
75 0h124B decelerat- Dec Time-3 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O p.106
ion time3
Multi-step
76 0h124C accelerati- Acc Time-4 0.0-600.0 (sec) 50.0 O p.106
on time4
Multi-step
77 0h124D accelerati- Dec Time-4 0.0-600.0 (sec) 50.0 O p.106
on time4
Multi-step
78 0h124E accelerati- Acc Time-5 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O p.106
on time5
Multi-step
79 0h124F accelerati- Dec Time-5 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O p.106
on time5
Multi-step
80 0h1250 accelerati- Acc Time-6 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.106
on time6
Multi-step
81 0h1251 decelerati- Dec Time-6 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.106
on time6
Multi-step
82 0h1252 accelerati- Acc Time-7 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.106
on time7
Multi-step
83 0h1253 accelerati- Dec Time-7 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.106
on time7
8.3 Expanded Function Group (ADV)

disabled
Hx2000 AC Drive 395

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 24 O p.61
Code
Accelerat-
01 0h1301 Acc Pattern 0 Linear Δ p.109
ion pattern
0: Linear
Decelerat-
02 0h1302 Dec Pattern 1 S-curve Δ p.109
ion pattern
S-curve
accelerat-
0323 0h1303 ion start Acc S Start 1–100 (%) 40 Δ p.109
point
gradient
S-curve
accelerat-
04 0h1304 ion end Acc S End 1–100 (%) 40 Δ p.109
point
gradient
S-curve
decelerat-
0524 0h1305 ion start Dec S Start 1–100 (%) 40 Δ p.109
point
gradient
S-curve
decelerat-
06 0h1306 ion end Dec S End 1–100 (%) 40 Δ p.109
point
gradient
0 Acc
Start
07 0h1307 Start Mode DC- 0: Acc Δ p.119
Mode 1
Start
0 Dec
DC-
Stop 1
08 0h1308 Stop Mode Brake 0: Dec Δ p.120
Mode
Free-
2
Run
ADV-03–04 are displayed when ADV-01 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.

23
ADV-05–06 are displayed when ADV-02 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.

24
396 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
Power
4
Braking
0 None
Selection
of Forward
Run 1
09 0h1309 prohibited Prev 0: None Δ p.99
Prevent
rotation
Reverse
direction 2
Prev
Starting 0 No
Power-on
10 0h130A with 0: No O p.100
Run 1 Yes
power on
Power-on
Power-On 0.0 -6000.0
1125 0h130B run delay 0.0 O p.100
Delay (sec)
time
DC
braking DC-Start
1226 0h130C 0.00-60.00 (sec) 0.00 Δ p.119
time at Time
startup
Amount
13 0h130D of applied DC Inj Level 0–200 (%) 50 Δ p.119
DC
Output
blocking
time DC-Block 0.00- 60.00
1427 0h130E 0.00 Δ p.120
before Time (sec)
DC
braking
DC
DC-Brake 0.00- 60.00
15 0h130F braking 1.00 Δ p.120
Time (sec)
time
DC
DC-Brake
16 0h1310 braking 0–200 (%) 50 Δ p.120
Level
rate
DC DC-Brake Start frequency-
17 0h1311 1.00 Δ p.120
braking Freq 60 Hz
25
ADV-11 is displayed when ADV-10 is set to ‘1 (YES)’.
26
ADV-12 is displayed when ADV-07 is set to ‘1 (DC-Start)’.
27
ADV-14 is displayed when ADV-08 is set to ‘1 (DC-Brake)’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 397

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
frequency
Dwell
frequency Start frequency-
Acc Dwell
20 0h1314 on Maximum 5.00 Δ p.145
Freq
accelerat- frequency (Hz)
ion
Dwell
operation
Acc Dwell
21 0h1315 time on 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.145
Time
accelerat-
ion
Dwell
frequency Start frequency-
Dec Dwell
22 0h1316 on Maximum 5.00 Δ p.145
Freq
decelerat- frequency (Hz)
ion
Dwell
operation
Dec Dwell
23 0h1317 time on 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.145
Time
decelerat-
ion
Frequency 0 No
24 0h1318 Freq Limit 0: No Δ p.124
limit 1 Yes
Frequency
Freq Limit 0.00-Upper limit
25 0h1319 lower limit 0.50 Δ p.124
Lo frequency (Hz)
value
Lower limit
Frequency
Freq Limit frequency-
26 0h131A upper limit Max freq Δ p.124
Hi Maximum
value
frequency (Hz)
Frequency 0 No
27 0h131B Jump Freq 0: No Δ p.126
jump 1 Yes
Jump
0.00-Jump
frequency
2828 0h131C Jump Lo 1 frequency upper 10.00 O p.126
lower
limit1 (Hz)
limit1
ADV-28–33 are displayed when ADV-27 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

28
398 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
Jump Jump frequency
frequency lower limit1-
29 0h131D Jump Hi 1 15.00 O p.126
upper Maximum
limit1 frequency (Hz)
Jump
0.00-Jump
frequency
30 0h131E Jump Lo 2 frequency upper 20.00 O p.126
lower
limit2 (Hz)
limit2
Jump Jump frequency
31 0h131F Jump Hi 2 25.00 O p.126
upper Maximum
Jump
0.00-Jump
frequency
32 0h1320 Jump Lo 3 frequency upper 30.00 O p.126
lower
limit3 (Hz)
limit3
Jump Jump frequency
33 0h1321 Jump Hi 3 35.00 O p.126
upper Maximum
0 None
Energy
E-Save
50 0h1332 saving 1 Manual 0: None Δ p.221
Mode
operation
2 Auto
Energy
Energy
5129 0h1333 saving 0–30 (%) 0 O p.221
Save
level
Energy
saving
E-Save Det
52 0h1334 point 0.0-100.0 (sec) 20.0 Δ p.221
T
search
time
Acc/Dec
Xcel 0.00-Maximum
60 0h133C time 0.00 Δ p.107
Change Fr frequency (Hz)
transition
ADV-51 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘1 (Manual)’.

29
ADV-52 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘2 (Auto)’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 399

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
frequency
During
0
Run
Cooling
Always 0: During
64 0h1340 fan Fan Control 1 O p.233
ON Run
control
Temp
2
Control
Up/Down 0 No
operation U/D Save
65 0h1341 0: No O p.141
frequency Mode
save 1 Yes
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
Output 6 Pulse
contact
On/Off 730 V3
66 0h1342 On/Off 0: None O p.276
Ctrl Src
control 8 I3
options
931 V4
10 I4
11 V5
12 I5
67 0h1343 Output On-Ctrl Output contact 90.00 Δ p.276
contact Level off level-
On level 100.00%
Output -100.00-
Off-Ctrl
68 0h1344 contact outputcontact 10.00 Δ p.276
Level
Off level on level (%)
30
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
31
‘9(V4) ~12(I5)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
400 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
Always
0
Safe Enable 0:
Run En
70 0h1346 operation Always Δ p.144
Mode
selection DI Enable
1 Depend
ent
Free-
0
Safe Run
operation Run Dis 0: Free-
7132 0h1347 1 Q-Stop Δ p.144
stop Stop Run
options Q-Stop
2
Resume
Safe
operation Q-Stop
72 0h1348 0.0-600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.144
decelerat- Time
ion time
Selection
of 0 No
regenerat
Regen Avd
74 0h134A -ion 0: No Δ p.284
Sel
evasion
1 Yes
function
for press
Voltage 200 V: 300-400
350
level of V
regenerat
RegenAvd
75 0h134B -ion Δ p.284
Level 400 V: 600-800
evasion 700
motion for V
press
Compen-
sation
frequency
CompFreq
7633 0h134C limit of 0.00-10.00 Hz 1.00 Δ p.284
Limit
regenerat
-ion
evasion
ADV-71–72 are displayed when ADV-70 is set to ‘1 (DI Dependent)’.

32
ADV-76–78 are displayed when ADV-74 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

33
Hx2000 AC Drive 401

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

ADV Address Value
for press
Regener-
ation
RegenAvdP
77 0h134D evasion 0.0-100.0% 50.0 O p.284
gain
for press
P-Gain
Regener-
ation
RegenAvdI 20–30000
78 0h134E evasion 500 O p.284
gain (msec)
for press I
gain
8.4 Control Function Group (CON)


disabled
402 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

CON Address Value
Carrier 1.0- 15.0
04 0h1404 Carrier Freq 3.0 O p.229
frequency (kHz)
Normal
0
PWM 0:
Switching
05 0h1405 PWM Mode Low Normal Δ p.229
mode
1 leakage PWM
PWM
Anti-hunting 0 No
13 0h140D regulator AHR Sel 1 : Yes Δ p.218
mode 1 Yes
Anti-hunting
14 0h140E regulator P- AHR P-Gain 0-32767 1000 O p.218
Gain
Anti-hunting
regulator AHR Low 0.00-AHR
15 0h140F 0.50 O p.218
start Freq High Freq
frequency
Anti-hunting
AHR High AHR Low
16 0h1410 regulator end 400.00 O p.218
Freq Freq-400.00
frequency
Anti-hunting
regulator
17 0h1411 compensate- AHR limit 0-20 2 O p.218
on voltage
limit rate
Auto torque
ATB Filt 1 – 9999
2134 0h1415 boost filter 10 O p.117
Gain (msec)
gain
Auto torque ATB Volt
22 0h1416 0.0-300.0% 100.0 O p.117
boost voltage Gain
Flying
Speed 0 0:
Start-1
70 0h1446 search mode SS Mode Flying Δ p.222
selection Flying Start-1
1
Start-2
71 0h1447 Speed Speed Bit 0000- 0000 Δ p.222
CON-21–22 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘Auto 2’.

34
Hx2000 AC Drive 403

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

CON Address Value
search Search 1111
operation
Speed
selection
search
Bit
on
0
accelera-
tion
Restart
after
Bit trips
1 (other
than LV
trip)
Restart
after
Bit instant-
2 neous
interrupt-
ion
Bit Power-
3 on run
Speed
35 search SS Sup-
72 0h1448 50–120 (%) 90% O p.222
reference Current
current
Flying
Start-1
: 100
Speed
search Flying
7336 0h1449 SS P-Gain 0-9999 Start-2: O p.222
proportional
gain Depen-
dent on
motor
setting
Flying
Speed Start-1
74 0h144A search SS I-Gain 0-9999 : 200 O p.222
integral gain
Flying
CON-72 is displayed after Flying Start-1 and when any CON-71 bit is set to ‘1’.
35
CON-73–75 are displayed when any CON-71bit is set to ‘1’.

36
404 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Comm. Initial

CON Address Value
Start-2:
Depen-
dent on
motor
setting
Output block
SS Block
75 0h144B time before 0.0-60.0 (sec) 1.0 Δ p.222
Time
speed search
Energy 0 No
77 0h144D buffering KEB Select 0: No Δ p.179
selection 1 Yes
Energy
KEB Start 110.0-140.0
78 37
0h144E buffering 125.0 Δ p.179
Lev (%)
start level
Energy
KEB Stop 125.0-145.0
79 0h144F buffering 130.0 Δ p.179
Lev (%)
stop level
KEB Slip
Energy
Gain
80 0h1450 buffering slip 0-20000 300 O p.179
buffering
gain
slip gain
Energy
81 0h1451 buffering P- KEB P Gain 0-20000 1000 O p.179
Gain
Energy
82 0h1452 buffering I KEB I Gain 1-20000 500 O p.179
gain
Energy
buffering KEB Acc
83 0h1453 0.0-600.0 10.0 O p.179
acceleration Time
time
8.5 Input Terminal Group (IN)

Data In the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
CON-78–83 are displayed when CON-77 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

37
Hx2000 AC Drive 405

Table of Functions

disabled
Code Comm. Initial Propert
Name LCD Display Setting Range Ref.
IN Address Value y*
Frequency at Start frequency- Maximum
01 0h1501 maximum Freq at 100% Maximum frequency O p.81
analog input frequency (Hz)
V1 input
0~12.00(V) or
0538 0h1505 voltage V1 Monitor(V) 0.00 X p.81
-12.00~12.00 (V)
display
V1 input 0 Unipolar
0:
06 0h1506 polarity V1 Polarity Δ p.81
1 Bipolar Unipolar
selection
Time constant
07 0h1507 of V1 input V1 Filter 0–10000 (ms) 10 O p.81
filter
V1 minimum
08 0h1508 V1 Volt x1 0.00-10.00 (V) 0.00 O p.81
input voltage
Output at V1
09 0h1509 minimum V1 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O p.81
voltage (%)
V1 maximum
10 0h150A input voltage V1 Volt x2 0.00-12.00 (V) 10.00 O p.81
(%)
Output at V1
11 0h150B maximum V1 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.81
voltage (%)
V1 input at
1239 0h150C minimum V1 –Volt x1’ -10.00- 0.00 (V) 0.00 O p.84
voltage (%)
Output at V1
13 0h150D minimum V1 –Perc y1’ -100.00-0.00 (%) 0.00 O p.84
voltage (%)
V1 maximum
14 0h150E V1 –Volt x2’ -12.00- 0.00 (V) -10.00 O p.84
input voltage
‘IN-05’ setting range can be changed according to the ‘IN-06’ settings.

38
IN-12–17 are displayed when IN-06 is set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’.

39
406 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
(%)
Output at V1
15 0h150F maximum V1 –Perc y2’ -100.00-0.00 (%) -100.00 O p.84
voltage (%)
V2 rotation 0 No
16 0h1510 direction V1 Inverting 0: No O p.81
change 1 Yes
V1
V1 0.0040, 0.04-
17 0h1511 quantization 0.04 O p.81
Quantizing 10.00 (%)
change
Temperature 0.00 - 100.00
2041 0h1514 T1 Monitor - X p.306
monitor (%)
V2 input rate V2 Monitor
3542 0h1523 0.00-12.00 (V) 0.00 O p.89
monitor (V)
V2 input filter
37 0h1525 V2 Filter 0-10000 (msec) 10 O p.89
time
V2 minimum
38 0h1526 V2 Volt x1 0.00-10.00 (V) 0.00 O p.89
input voltage
Output at V2
39 0h1527 minimum V2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O p.89
voltage (%)
V2 maximum
40 0h1528 V2 Volt x2 0.00-10.00 (V) 10.00 O p.89
input voltage
Output at V2
41 0h1529 maximum V2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.89
voltage (%)
V2 Rotation 0 No
46 0h152E direction V2 Inverting 0: No O p.89
options 1 Yes
47 0h152F V2 Quantizing V2 0.0043, 0.04 O p.89
40
41
IN-20 is displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW3) is
selected on T1.
42
IN-35–47 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch
(SW4) is selected on V2.
Hx2000 AC Drive 407

Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
level Quantizing 0.04- 10.00 (%)
I2 input I2 Monitor
5044 0h1532 0–24 (mA) 0 O p.86
monitor (mA)
I2 input filter
52 0h1534 I2 Filter 0–10000 (msec) 10 O p.86
time
I2 minimum
53 0h1535 input power I2 Curr x1 0.00-20.00 (mA) 4.00 O p.86
supply
Output at I2
54 0h1536 maximum I2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O p.86
current (%)
I2 maximum
55 0h1537 I2 Curr x2 0.00-24.00 (mA) 20.00 O p.86
input current
Output at I2
56 0h1538 maximum I2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.86
current (%)
I2 rotation 0 No
61 0h153D direction I2 Inverting 0: No O p.86
options 1 Yes
I2 Quantizing 0.0045
62 0h153E I2 Quantizing 0.04 O p.86
level 0.04-10.00 (%)
P1 Px terminal 0 None
65 0h1541 P1 Define 1: Fx Δ p.96
configuration 1 Fx
P2 Px terminal
66 0h1542 P2 Define 2 Rx 2: Rx Δ p.96
configuration
P3 Px terminal
67 0h1543 P3 Define 3 RST 5: BX Δ p.326
configuration
P4 Px terminal External
68 0h1544 P4 Define 4 3: RST Δ p.325
configuration Trip
P5 Px terminal
69 0h1545 P5 Define 5 BX 7: Sp-L Δ p.325
configuration
43
44
IN-50–62 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch
(SW5) is selected on I2.
45
408 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
P6 Px terminal
70 0h1546 P6 Define 6 JOG 8: Sp-M Δ p.139
configuration
P7 Px terminal
71 0h1547 P7 Define 7 Speed-L 9: Sp-H Δ p.94
configuration
8 Speed-M p.94
9 Speed-H p.94
11 XCEL-L p.106
12 XCEL-M p.106
13 XCEL-H p.106
XCEL
14 p.111
Stop
RUN
15 p.144
Enable
16 3-Wire p.143
2nd
17 p.127
Source
18 Exchange p.232
19 Up p.141
20 Down p.141
U/D
22 p.141
Clear
Analog
23 p.92
Hold
I-Term
24 p.149
Clear
PID
25 Open p.149
loop
PID
26 p.149
Gain2
PID Ref
27 p.111
Change
2nd
28 p.230
Motor
Hx2000 AC Drive 409

Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
Interlock
29 p.267
1
Interlock
30 p.267
2
Interlock
31 p.267
3
Interlock
32 p.267
4
Interlock
33 p.267
5
Pre
34 -
Excite
35 Timer In p.245
dis Aux
37 p.134
Ref
FWD
38 p.140
JOG
REV
39 p.140
JOG
Fire
40 p.219
Mode
EPID1
41 p.168
Run
EPID1
42 p.168
ItermClr
Time
43 p.203
Event En
44 Pre Heat p.198
Damper
45 p.175
Open
PumpCl
46 p.183
ean
EPID2
47 p.168
Run
48 EPID2 p.168
410 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
ItermClr
Sleep
49 Wake p.168
Chg
PID Step
50 p.149
Ref L
PID Step
51 p.149
Ref M
52 PID Step p.149
Ref H
5346 Interlock
6
54 Interlock
7
55 Interlock
8
56 EPID3
Run
57 EPID3
ITermClr
83 0h1553 DI On Delay DI On 000 0000 ~ 111 1111 Δ
Selection DelayEn 111 1111
DI Off Delay DI Off 000 0000 ~

84 0h1554 111 1111 Δ
Selection DelayEn 111 1111
Multi-function
input terminal
85 0h1555 DI On Delay 0–10000 (msec) 10 O p.128
On filter
Multi-function
86 0h1556 input terminal DI Off Delay 0–10000 (msec) 3 O p.128
Off filter
87 0h1557 Multi-function DI NC/NO P7 – P1 000 Δ p.128
46
‘53(Interlock6)~55(Interlock8)’ of IN-65~71 are available when Extension IO option is
equipped. Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information
Hx2000 AC Drive 411

Table of Functions

IN Address Value y*
input terminal Sel A Terminal 0000
0
selection (NO)
B Terminal
1
(NC)
Multi-step
89 0h1559 command InCheck Time 1–5000 (msec) 1 Δ p.94
delay time
P7 – P1
Multi-function Contact
0 000
90 0h155A input terminal DI Status (Off) O p.128
0000
status
Contact
1
(On)
Pulse input
91 0h155B amount TI Monitor 0.00-50.00 (kHz) 0.00 X p.90
display
TI minimum
92 0h155C TI Filter 0–9999 (msec) 10 O p.90
input pulse
TI minimum
93 0h155D TI Pls x1 0 - TI Pls x2 0.00 O p.90
input pulse
Output at TI
94 0h153E minimum TI Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O p.90
pulse (%)
TI maximum
95 0h155F TI Pls x2 TI Pls x1-32.00 32.00 O p.90
input pulse
Output at TI
96 0h1560 maximum TI Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.90
pulse (%)
TI rotation 0 No
97 0h1561 direction TI Inverting 0: No O p.90
change 1 Yes
TI quantization 0.0047,
98 0h1562 TI Quantizing 0.04 O p.90
level 0.04-10.00 (%)
47
Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
412 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
8.6 Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT)

*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled
Code Comm. LCD Initial Property
Name Parameter Setting Ref.
OUT Address Display Value *
Jump
00 - JumpCode 1-99 30 O p.61
Code
0 Frequency
Output
1
Current
Output
2
Voltage
DCLink
3
Voltage
Output
4
Power
7 Target Freq
8 Ramp Freq
PID Ref
9
Value
Analog AO1 PID Fdb 0:
01 0h1601 10 O p.285
output1 Mode Value Frequency
11 PID Output
12 Constant
EPID1
13
Output
EPID1
14
RefVal
EPID1
15
FdbVal
EPID2
16
Output
EPID2
17
RefVal
18 EPID2
Hx2000 AC Drive 413

Table of Functions

FdbVal
Comm
19
Output 1
Comm
20
Output 2
Comm
21
Output 348
Comm
22
Output 448
EPID3
23
Output
EPID3
24
RefVal
EPID3
25
FdbVal
Analog
AO1 -1000.0-1000.0
02 0h1602 output1 100.0 O p.285
Gain (%)
gain
Analog
03 0h1603 output1 AO1 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.285
bias
Analog
AO1
04 0h1604 output1 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.285
Filter
filter
Analog
AO1
05 0h1605 constant 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.285
Const %
output1
Analog
AO1
06 0h1606 output1 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.285
Monitor
monitor
Identical to the
Analog AO2 0:
07 0h1607 OUT-02 AO1 O p.285
output2 Mode Frequency
Mode selected
48
‘21~22 ’ of OUT-01are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
414 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

range
Analog
AO2 -1000.0-1000.0
08 0h1608 output2 100.0 O p.285
Gain (%)
gain
Analog
09 0h1609 output2 AO2 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.285
bias
Analog
AO2
10 0h160A output2 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.285
Filter
filter
Analog
AO2
11 0h160B constant 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.285
Const %
output2
Analog
AO2
12 0h160C output2 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.285
Monitor
monitor
bit 000-111
Bit
Low voltage
0
Fault Any faults
Trip Bit
30 0h161E output other than 010 O p.297
OutMode 1
item low voltage
Automatic
Bit
restart final
2
failure
0 None
1 FDT-1
2 FDT-2
3 FDT-3
Multi-
4 FDT-4
31 0h161F function Relay 1 23:Trip O p.291
relay1 5 Over Load
6 IOL
7 Under Load
Fan
8
Warning
Hx2000 AC Drive 415

Table of Functions

9 Stall
Over
10
Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
Lost
13
Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
Speed
19
Search
20 Ready
21 MMC
22 Timer Out
23 Trip
Lost
24
Keypad
DB
25
Warn%ED
On/Off
26
Control
27 Fire Mode
28 Pipe Broken
29 Damper Err
30 Lubrication
31 Pump Clean
32 Level Detect
Damper
33
Control
416 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

CAP.
34
Warning
Fan
35
Exchange
Multi-
32 0h1620 function Relay 2 36 AUTO State 14: RUN O p.291
relay2
Multi-
33 0h1621 function Relay 3 37 Hand State 0: None O p.291
relay3
Multi-
34 0h1622 function Relay 4 38 TO 0: None O p.291
relay4
Multi-
35 0h1623 function Relay 5 39 Except Date 0: None O p.291
relay5
KEB
Multi- 40
Q1 Operating
36 0h1624 function 1 0: None O p.291
Define
item 41 BrokenBelt
Multi-
function DO
41 0h1629 DO Status 00 0000 X p.291
output Status
monitor
Multi-
function DO On
50 0h1632 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.298
output On Delay
delay
Multi-
function DO Off
51 0h1633 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.298
output Off Delay
delay
Q1,Relay5-
Multi- Relay1
function DO
A contact
52 0h1634 output NC/NO 0 00 0000 Δ p.298
(NO)
contact Sel
selection B contact
1
(NC)
Hx2000 AC Drive 417

Table of Functions

Fault
TripOutO
53 0h1635 output On 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.297
nDly
delay
Fault
TripOutOf
54 0h1636 output Off 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.297
fDly
delay
Timer On TimerOn
55 0h1637 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.244
delay Delay
Timer Off TimerOff
56 0h1638 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.244
delay Delay
FDT
Detected 0.00-Maximum
57 0h1639 Frequenc 30.00 O p.291
frequency frequency (Hz)
y
Detected
FDT 0.00-Maximum
58 0h163A frequency 10.00 O p.291
Band frequency (Hz)
band
0 Frequency
Output
1
Current
Output
2
Voltage
DCLink
3
Voltage
Output
4
Power
Pulse
0:
61 0h163D output TO Mode 7 Target Freq O p.289
Frequency
item 8 Ramp Freq
PID Ref
9
Value
PID Fdb
10
Value
11 PID Output
12 Constant
EPID1
13
Output
418 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

EPID1
14
RefVal
EPID1
15
FdbVal
EPID2
16
Output
EPID2
17
RefVal
EPID2
18
FdbVal
Comm
19
Output 1
Comm
20
Output 2
Comm
21
Output 349
Comm
22
Output 448
EPID3
23
Output
EPID3
24
RefVal
EPID3
25
FdbVal
Pulse
-1000.0-1000.0
62 0h163E output TO Gain 100.0 O p.289
(%)
gain
Pulse
63 0h163F output TO Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.289
bias
Pulse
64 0h1640 TO Filter 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.289
output
49
‘21~22 ’ of OUT-61 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 419

Table of Functions

filter
Pulse
output TO
65 0h1641 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.289
constant Const %
output 2
Pulse
TO
66 0h1642 output 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.289
Monitor
monitor
8.7 Communication Function Group (COM)


disabled
COM Address Display Value *
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 20 O p.61
Code
Built-in
communica Int485 St
01 0h1701 1-MaxComID50 1 O p.336
-tion ID
inverter ID
ModBus
0
RTU
Built-in 4 BACnet 0:
communica Int485
02 0h1702 ModBus O p.336
-tion Proto Metasys-
5 RTU
protocol N2
ModBus
651
Master
50
If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
51
COM-02 is automatically set to ‘6(Modbus Master)’ when AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
Otherwise a user can set the parameter value at user’s choice.
420 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
Built-in
Int485 4 19200 bps 3: 9600
03 0h1703 communica O p.336
BaudR bps
-tion speed 5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps
7 76.8 kbps
115.2
8
Kbps52
0 D8/PN/S1
Built-in
1 D8/PN/S2 0:
communica Int485
04 0h1704 D8/PN/S O p.336
-tion frame Mode 2 D8/PE/S1 1
setting
3 D8/PO/S1
Transmissi-
on delay Resp
05 0h1705 0-1000 (msec) 5 O p.336
after Delay
reception
FBus S/W
Communic-
53 Ver
06 0h1706 ation option - - O -
S/W version
Communic-
07 0h1707 ation option FBus ID 0-255 1 O -
inverter ID
FIELD BUS
FBUS
08 0h1708 communica - 12 Mbps O -
BaudRate
-tion speed
Communic-
FieldBus
09 0h1709 ation option - - O -
LED
LED status
52
115,200 bps
53
COM-06–09 are displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
Hx2000 AC Drive 421

Table of Functions

BACnet
maximum BAC Max
20 0h1714 1~127 127 O p.367
master Master
number
BACnet
BAC Dev
21 0h1715 device 0~4194 237 O p.367
Inst1
number1
BACnet
BAC Dev
22 0h1716 device 0-999 0 O p.367
Inst2
number2
BACnet BAC
23 0h1717 0-32767 0 O p.367
password PassWord
USB USB Modbus 0:Modb-
28 0h171C 0 O -
Protocol Protocol RTU us RTU
Number of Para
30 0h171E output Status 0-8 3 O p.343
parameters Num
Output
Communic- Para
31 0h171F 0000-FFFF Hex 000A O p.343
ation Status-1
address1
Output
Communic- Para
32 0h1720 0000-FFFF Hex 000E O p.343
ation Status-2
address2
Output
Communic- Para
33 0h1721 0000-FFFF Hex 000F O p.343
ation Statuss-3
address3
Output
Communic- Para
34 0h1722 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Status-4
address4
Output
Communic- Para
35 0h1723 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Status-5
address5
Output Para
36 0h1724 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
Communic- Status-6
422 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

ation
address6
Output
Communic- Para
37 0h1725 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Status-7
address7
Output
Communic- Para
38 0h1726 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Status-8
address8
Number of
Para Ctrl
50 0h1732 input 0-8 2 O p.343
Num
parameters
Input
Communic- Para
51 0h1733 0000-FFFF Hex 0005 O p.343
ation Control-1
address1
Input
Communic- Para
52 0h1734 0000-FFFF Hex 0006 O p.343
ation Control-2
address2
Input
Communic- Para
53 0h1735 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Control-3
address3
Input
Communic- Para
54 0h1736 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Control-4
address 4
Input
Communic- Para
55 0h1737 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Control-5
address 5
Input
Communic- Para
56 0h1738 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Control-6
address 6
Input Para
57 0h1739 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
Communic- Control-7
Hx2000 AC Drive 423

Table of Functions

ation
address 7
Input
Communic- Para
58 0h173A 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.343
ation Control-8
address 8
Communic-
ation multi-
70 0h1746 Virtual DI 1 0 None 0: None O p.362
function
input 1
Communica
tion multi-
71 0h1747 Virtual DI 2 1 Fx 0: None O p.362
function
input 2
Communic-
ation multi-
72 0h1748 Virtual DI 3 2 Rx 0: None O p.362
function
input 3
Communic-
ation multi-
73 0h1749 Virtual DI 4 3 RST 0: None O p.362
function
input 4
Communic-
ation multi- External
74 0h174A Virtual DI 5 4 0: None O p.362
function Trip
input 5
Communic-
ation multi-
75 0h174B Virtual DI 6 5 BX 0: None O p.362
function
input 6
Communic-
ation multi-
76 0h174C Virtual DI 7 6 JOG 0: None O p.362
function
input 7
Communic- 7 Speed-L
ation multi-
77 0h174D Virtual DI 8 8 Speed-M 0: None O p.362
function
input 8 9 Speed-H
424 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

11 XCEL-L
12 XCEL-M
13 XCEL-H
14 XCEL-Stop
15 Run Enable
16 3-wire
17 2nd source
18 Exchange
19 Up
20 Down
22 U/D Clear
Analog
23
Hold
I-Term
24
Clear
PID
25
Openloop
26 PID Gain 2
PID Ref
27
Change
28 2nd Motor
29 Interlock1
30 Interlock2
31 Interlock3
32 Interlock4
33 Interlock5
34 Pre Excite
35 Timer In
Hx2000 AC Drive 425

Table of Functions

37 dis Aux Ref
38 FWD JOG
39 REV JOG
40 Fire Mode
41 EPID1 Run
EPID1
42
ItermClr
Time Event
43
En
44 Pre Heat
Damper
45
Open
Pump
46
Clean
47 EPID2 Run
EPID2
48
ItermClr
Sleep Wake
49
Chg
PID Step
50
Ref L
PID Step
51
Ref M
52 PID Step
Ref H
5354 Interlock6
54 Interlock7
54
‘53 (Interlock6) ~55(Interlock8)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is
equipped. Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
426 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

55 Interlock8
56 EPID3 Run
57 EPID3
ITermClr
86 0h1756 Communic- Virt DI 0000 0000 – 1111 0000 Δ p.340
ation multi- Status 1111 0000
function
input
monitoring
Communic-
ation
PowerOn
96 0h173C operation 0 No 0: No Δ p.303
Resume
auto
resume
8.8 Advanced Function Group (PID Functions)

Unit MAX = PID Unit100%(PID-68)
Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0%(PID-67)-PID Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%
*O /X: Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops

Name Parameter Setting Property* Ref.
PID Address Display Value
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1–99 50 O p.61
Code
01 0h1801 PID mode PID Sel 0 No 0: No Δ p.149
Hx2000 AC Drive 427

Table of Functions

selection 1 Yes
E-PID 0 No
02 0h1802 E-PID Sel 0: No O p.168
selection 1 Yes
PID output
03 0h1803 PID Output - - X p.149
monitor
PID
PID Ref
04 0h1804 reference - - X p.149
Value
monitor
PID
PID Fdb
05 0h1805 feedback - - X p.149
Value
monitor
PID error
PID Err
06 0h1806 monitor - - X p.149
Value
value
0 KeyPad
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
5 Int485
6 Fieldbus
PID
8 Pulse 0:
reference 1 PID Ref 1
10 0h180A Keypa Δ p.149
source Src 9 EPID1 d
selection Output
1055 V3
11 I3
1256 V4
13 I4
14 V5
55
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-10 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
56
‘12(V4) ~15(I5)’ of PID-10 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
428 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

15 I5
16 EPID1
Output
11 0h180B PID PID Ref 1 Unit Min–Unit Unit O p.149
reference 1 Set Max Default
keypad value
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
6 Pulse
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
EPID1
10
Output
PID
reference 1 11 E-PID Fdb
PIDRef1Au Val 0:
12 0h180C auxiliary Δ p.149
xSrc None
source 12 57 V3
selection
13 I3
1458 V4
15 I4
16 V5
17 I5
18 EPID1
Output
19 E-PID Fdb
Val
57
58
‘14(V4) ~17(I5)’ of PID-12 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped
Hx2000 AC Drive 429

Table of Functions

13 0h180D PID PID 0 M+(G*A) 0: O p.149
reference 1 Ref1AuxM M+(G*
1 M*(G*A)
auxiliary od A)
mode 2 M/(G*A)
selection
M+(M*(G*
3
A))
M+G*2*(A
4
-50)
M*(G*2*(A
5
-50))
M/(G*2*(A
6
-50))
M+M*G*2*
7
(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M + A)/2
Root(M+A
13
)
PID
PID Ref1 -200.0–200.0
14 0h180E reference 0.0 O p.149
Aux G (%)
auxiliary gain
0 Keypad
1 V1
3 V2
PID
reference 2 4 I2
PID Ref 2 0:
15 0h180F auxiliary 5 Int 485 Δ p.149
Src KeyPad
source
selection 6 Fieldbus
8 Pulse
9 E-PID1
Output
430 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

1059 V3
11 I3
1260 V4
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
16 E-PID3
Output
16 0h1810 PID PID Ref 2 Unit Min–Unit Unit O p.149
reference 2 Set Max Default
keypad
setting
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
6 Pulse
PID 7 Int 485
reference 2 PID
8 FieldBus 0:
17 0h1811 auxiliary Ref2AuxSr Δ p.149
None
source c EPID1
10
selection Output
11 EPID1
Fdb Val
1261 V3
13 I3
1462 V4
59
60
‘12(V4)~15(I5)’ of PID-15 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
61
Hx2000 AC Drive 431

Table of Functions

15 I4
16 V5
17 I5
18 EPID3
Output
19 EPID3
Fdb Val
18 0h1812 PID PID 0 M+(G*A) 0: O p.149
reference 2 Ref2AuxM M+(G*
1 M*(G*A)
auxiliary od A)
mode 2 M/(G*A)
selection
M+(M*(G*
3
A))
M+G*2*(A
4
-50)
M*(G*2*(A
5
-50))
M/(G*2*(A
6
-50))
M+M*G*2*
7
(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M + A)/2
13 Root(M+A)
PID
PID Ref2 -200.0–200.0
19 0h1813 reference 2 0.0 O p.149
Aux G (%)
auxiliary gain
62
432 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
4 Int 485
5 FieldBus
7 Pulse
EPID1
8
Output
9 EPID1
PID Fdb Val
PIDFdb
20 0h1814 feedback 0: V1 Δ p.149
Source 1063 V3
selection
11 I3
1264 V4
13 I4
14 V5
15 I5
16 EPID3
Output
17 EPID3
Fdb Val
21 0h1815 PID PID Fdb 0 None 0: Δ p.149
feedback Aux Src None
1 V1
auxiliary
source 3 V2
selection
4 I2
6 Pulse
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
63
64
Hx2000 AC Drive 433

Table of Functions

EPID1
10
Output
11 EPID1
Fdb Val
1265 V3
13 I3
1466 V4
15 I4
16 V5
17 I5
18 EPID3
Output
19 EPID3
Fdb Val
22 0h1816 PID PID 0 M+(G*A) 0: O p.149
feedback FdbAuxMo M+(G*
1 M*(G*A)
auxiliary d A)
mode 2 M/(G*A)
selection
M+(M*(G*
3
A))
M+G*2*(A
4
-50)
M*(G*2*(A
5
-50))
M/(G*2*(A
6
-50))
M+M*G*2*
7
(A-50)
65
66
‘14(V4)~17(I5)’’ of PID-21 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
434 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Root(M+A)
PID
PID Fdb -200.0–200.0
23 0h1817 feedback 0.0 O p.149
Aux G (%)
auxiliary gain
PID
PID Fdb
24 0h1818 feedback 0.00 – Unit Band 0.00 O p.149
Band
band
PID
controller
25 0h1819 PID P-Gain1 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.00 O p.149
proportional
gain 1
PID
controller PID I-Time
26 0h181A 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.149
integral time 1
1
PID
controller PID D-
27 0h181B 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.149
differential Time 1
time 1
PID
controller PID FF-
28 0h181C 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 O p.149
feed forward Gain
gain
PID output PID Out
29 0h181D 0.00–10.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.149
filter LPF
PID output PID Limit PID Limit Lo–
30 0h181E 100.00 O p.149
upper limit Hi 100.00
PID output PID Limit -100.00–PID
31 0h181F 0.00 O p.149
lower limit Lo Limit Hi
PID PID P-Gain
32 0h1820 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.0 O p.149
controller 2
Hx2000 AC Drive 435

Table of Functions

proportional
gain 2
PID
controller PID I-Time
33 0h1821 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.149
integral time 2
2
PID
controller PID D-
34 0h1822 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.149
differential Time 2
time 2
0 PID Output
PID+ Main
1
Freq
PID+EPID1
2
Out
PID output PID Out 0: PID
35 0h1823 PID+EPID1 O p.149
mode Mode 3 Output
+Main
PID+EPID3
4
Out
PID+EPID3
5
+Main
PID output PID Out 0 No

36 0h1824 0: No Δ p.149
inverse Inv 1 Yes
PID output PID Out
37 0h1825 0.1–1000.0 (%) 100.0 Δ p.149
scale Scale
PID multi-
step PID Step Unit Min–Unit Unit
40 0h1828 O p.149
reference Ref 1 Max Default
setting 1
PID multi-
41 0h1829 O p.149
setting 2
PID multi-
42 0h182A O p.149
setting 3
436 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

PID multi-
43 0h182B O p.149
setting 4
PID multi-
44 0h182C O p.149
setting 5
PID multi-
45 0h182D O p.149
setting 6
PID multi-
46 0h182E O p.149
setting 7
Refer to the Unit
List
0 CUST
1 %
2 PSI
3 ˚F
4 ˚C
PID 5 inWC
PID Unit
50 0h1832 controller 6 inM 1: % O p.149
Sel
unit selection
7 mBar
8 Bar
9 Pa
10 kPa
11 Hz
12 rpm
13 V
14 A
Hx2000 AC Drive 437

Table of Functions

15 kW
16 HP
17 mpm
18 ft
19 m/s
20 m3/s
21 m3/m
22 m 3/h
23 l/s
24 l/m
25 l/h
26 kg/s
27 kg/m
28 kg/h
29 gl/s
30 gl/m
31 gl/h
32 ft/s
33 f3/s
34 f3/m
35 f3/h
36 lb/s
37 lb/m
38 lb/h
39 ppm
40 pps
0 x100
PID unit PID Unit
51 0h1833 1 x10 2: x 1 O p.149
scale Scale
2 x1
438 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

3 x 0.1
4 x0.01
-30000–
X100
Unit Max
-
X10 3000.0–
Range
Unit Max
varies
PID control
PID Unit -300.00– depen-
52 0h1834 0% setting X1 O p.149
0% Unit Max ding on
figure
PID-50
-
setting
X0.1 30.000–
Unit Max
-3.0000–
X0.01
Unit Max
Unit
X100 Min–
30000
Unit
X10 Min–
3000.0 Range
differs
PID control Unit
PID Unit depen-
53 0h1835 100% setting X1 Min– O p.149
100% ding on
figure 300.00
PID-50
Unit setting
X0.1 Min–
30.000
Unit
X0.01 Min–
3.0000
8.9 EPID Function Group (EPID)67

67
EPID Group is displayed when PID-02 code is set to 'Yes'.
Hx2000 AC Drive 439

Table of Functions
Unit MAX = EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%
Unit Min = (2xEPID1 (EPID2) Unit0%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit100%)
Unit Default = (EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 0%)/2

*O/X: Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops
EPID Address Display Value
Jump Jump
00 - 1–99 1 O p.61
Code Code
0 None
Always
1
ON
EPID 1
EPID1 During 0:
01 0h1901 Mode 2 O p.168
Mode Run None
Selection
DI
3 depende
nt
EPID1out
68 put EPID1 -100.00–
02 0h1902 0.00 X p.168
monitor Output 100.00%
value
EPID1
standard EPID1 Ref
03 0h1903 - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID1
feedback EPID1
04 0h1904 - - X p.168
monitor Fdb Val
value
EPID1
error EPID1 Err
05 0h1905 - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID1 0 Keypa
0:
command EPID1 Ref d
06 0h1906 1 V1 KeyPa Δ p.168
source Src
d
selection 3 V2
EPID-02–20 are displayed when EPID-01 code is not ‘0 (None)’.

68
440 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

4 I2
5 Int 485
6 FieldB
us
8 Pulse
969 V3
10 I3
1170 V4
12 I4
13 V5
14 I5
07 0h1907 EPID1 EPID1 Ref Unit Min–Unit Unit O p.168

keypad Set Max Min
command
value
0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
EPID1 4 Int485
feedback EPID1 5 FieldB
08 0h1908 0: V1 O p.168
source FdbSrc us
selection 7 Pulse
871 V3
9 I3
1072 V4
69
‘9(V3) ~10(I3)’ of EPID-06 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
70
‘11(V4) ~14(I5)’ of EPID-06 are available when Extension IO 2 option is equipped.
71
72
Hx2000 AC Drive 441

Table of Functions

11 I4
12 V5
13 I5
09 0h1909 EPID1 EPID1 P- 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.00 O p.168
proportion Gain
al gain
EPID1
EPID1 I-
10 0h190A integral 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.168
Time
time
EPID1
EPID1 D-
11 0h190B differentiat 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
Time
-ion time
EPID1
feed- EPID1 FF-
12 0h190C 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 O p.168
forward Gain
gain
EPID1
EPID1 Out
13 0h190D output 0.00–10.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
LPF
filter
EPID1
EPID1 EPID1 Limit Lo–
14 0h190E output 100.00 O p.168
Limit Hi 100.00
upper limit
EPID1 EPID1 -100.00–EPID1
15 0h190F 0.00 O p.168
lower limit Limit Lo Limit Hi
EPID1 0 No
EPID1 Out
16 0h1910 output 0: No O p.168
Inv
inverse 1 Yes
Refer to the
EPID1
17 0h1911 EPID1 unit EPID Unit details 1: % O p.168
Unit Sel
table (p.168)
0 X100
1 X10
EPID1 unit EPID1
18 0h1912 2 X1 2: X1 O p.168
scale Unit Scl
3 X0.1
4 X0.01
442 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

-30000
X100 –Unit
Max
-3000.0
X10 –Unit
Max
Values
-300.00 vary
EPID1 unit EPID1 X1 –Unit depen-
19 0h1913 O p.168
0% value Unit0% Max ding on
the unit
setting
-30.000
X0.1 –Unit
Max
-3.0000
X0.01 –Unit
Max
Unit
X100 Min–
30000
Values
EPID1 unit vary
EPID1 Unit
100% depen-
20 0h1914 Unit100% X10 Min– O p.168
value ding on
3000.0
the unit
setting
Unit
X1 Min–
300.00
Hx2000 AC Drive 443

Table of Functions

Unit
X0.1 Min–
30.000
Unit
X0.01 Min–
3.0000
0 None
Always
1
ON
EPID2
EPID2 During 0:
31 0h191F Mode 2 O p.168
Mode Run None
selection
DI
3 depen-
dent
EPID2
73 output EPID2 -100.00–
32 0h1920 0.00 X p.168
value
EPID2
reference EPID2 Ref
33 0h1921 - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID2
feedback EPID2
34 0h1922 - - X p.168
monitor Fdb Val
value
EPID2
error EPID2 Err
35 0h1923 - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID2 EPID2 Ref 0 Keypad 0:

36 0h1924 Δ p.168
command Src 1 V1 Keypa
EPID-32–50 are displayed when EPID-31 code is not ‘0 (None)’.

73
444 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

source 3 V2 d
selection
4 I2
5 Int 485
6 FieldB
us
8 Pulse
974 V3
10 I3
1175 V4
12 I4
13 V5
14 I5
keypad Set Max Min
command
value
0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
EPID2 4 Int 485

feedback EPID2 5 FieldB
38 0h1926 0: V1 O p.168
source FdbSrc us
selection 7 Pulse
876 V3
9 I3
1077 V4
74
‘9(V3)~10(I3)’ of EPID-36 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
75
76
‘8(V3)~9(I3)’ of EPID-38 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
Hx2000 AC Drive 445

Table of Functions

11 I4
12 V5
13 I5
39 0h1927 EPID2 EPID2 P- 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.0 O p.168
proportion Gain
al gain
EPID2
EPID2 I-
40 0h1928 integral 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.168
Time
time
EPID2
EPID2 D-
41 0h1929 differentiat 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
Time
-ion time
EPID2
feed- EPID2 FF-
42 0h192A 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 O p.168
forward Gain
gain
EPID2
EPID2 Out
43 0h192B output 0.00–10.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
LPF
filter
EPID2
44 0h192C output 100.00 O p.168
Limit Hi 100.00
upper limit
EPID2
EPID2 -100.00–EPID2
45 0h192D output 0.00 O p.168
Limit Lo Limit Hi
lower limit
EPID2 0 No
EPID2 Out
46 0h192E output 0: No O p.168
Inv 1 Yes
inverse
Refer to EPID
EPID2 0:
47 0h192F EPID2 unit Unit details table O p.168
Unit Sel CUST
(p.168)
EPID2 unit EPID2 0 X100

48 0h1930 2: X1 O p.168
scale Unit Scl 1 X10
77
446 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

2 X1
3 X0.1
4 X0.01
-30000
X100 –Unit
Max
-3000.0
X10 –Unit
Max
Values
-300.00 vary
49 0h1931 O p.168
the unit
setting
-30.000
X0.1 –Unit
Max
-3.0000
X0.01 –Unit
Max
Unit
Values
X100 Min–
vary
EPID2 30000
EPID2 unit depen-
50 0h1932 Unit100% O p.168
0% value ding on
Unit the unit
X10 Min– setting
3000.0
Hx2000 AC Drive 447

Table of Functions

Unit
X1 Min–
300.00
Unit
X0.1 Min–
30.000
Unit
X0.01 Min–
3.0000
0 None
Always
1
ON
EPID 3
EPID3 During 0:
61 0h193D Mode 2 O p.168
Mode Run None
Selection
DI
3 depende
nt
EPID3out
put EPID3 -100.00–
6278 0h193E 0.00 X p.168
value
EPID3
standard EPID3 Ref
63 0h193F - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID3
feedback EPID3
64 0h1940 - - X p.168
monitor Fdb Val
value
EPID3
error EPID3 Err
65 0h1941 - - X p.168
monitor Val
value
EPID-02–42 are displayed when PID-02 code and EPI-061 is not ‘0 (None)’.
78
448 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

0 Keypa
d
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
5 Int 485
6 FieldB
EPID3 us
8 Pulse 0:
command EPID3 Ref
66 0h1942 KeyPa Δ p.168
source Src 979 V3
d
selection
10 I3
1180 V4
12 I4
13 V5
14 I5

keypad Set Max Min
command
value
0 V1
2 V2
EPID3 3 I2
feedback EPID3
68 0h1944 4 Int485 0: V1 O p.168
source FdbSrc
selection 5 FieldB
us
7 Pulse
881 V3
79
80
81
Hx2000 AC Drive 449

Table of Functions

9 I3
1082 V4
11 I4
12 V5
13 I5
69 0h1945 EPID3 EPID3 P- 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.00 O p.168
proportion Gain
al gain
EPID3
EPID3 I-
70 0h1946 integral 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.168
Time
time
EPID3
EPID3 D-
71 0h1947 differentiat 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
Time
-ion time
EPID3
feed- EPID3 FF-
72 0h1948 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 O p.168
forward Gain
gain
EPID3
EPID3 Out
73 0h1949 output 0.00–10.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.168
LPF
filter
EPID3
74 0h194A output 100.00 O p.168
Limit Hi 100.00
upper limit
EPID3 EPID3 -100.00–EPID3
75 0h194B 0.00 O p.168
lower limit Limit Lo Limit Hi
EPID3 0 No
EPID3 Out
76 0h194C output 0: No O p.168
Inv
inverse 1 Yes
Refer to the
EPID3
77 0h194D EPID3 unit EPID Unit details 1: % O p.168
Unit Sel
table (p.168)
82
450 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

0 X100
1 X10
EPID3 unit EPID3
78 0h194E 2 X1 2: X1 O p.168
scale Unit Scl
3 X0.1
4 X0.01
-30000
X100 –Unit
Max
-3000.0
X10 –Unit
Max
Values
-300.00 vary
79 0h194F O p.168
the unit
setting
-30.000
X0.1 –Unit
Max
-3.0000
X0.01 –Unit
Max
Unit
Values
X100 Min–
EPID3 unit vary
EPID3 30000
100% depen-
80 0h1950 Unit100% O p.168
value ding on
Unit the unit
X10 Min– setting
3000.0
Hx2000 AC Drive 451

Table of Functions

Unit
X1 Min–
300.00
Unit
X0.1 Min–
30.000
Unit
X0.01 Min–
3.0000
452 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
8.10 Application 1 Function Group (AP1)

Unit MAX = PID Unit 100%
Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0%-PID Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%

Name Setting Range Ref.
AP1 Address Display Value *
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1–99 20 O p.61
Code
Sleep boost Sleep
05 0h1A05 0.00–Unit Max 0.00 O p.164
amount Bst Set
0.00, Low
Sleep boost Sleep
06 0h1A06 Freq– High 50.00 O p.164
speed BstFreq
Freq
PID
PID sleep mode 1 0.0–6000.0
07 0h1A07 Sleep 1 20.0 O p.164
delay time (sec)
DT
PID 0.00, Low
PID sleep mode 1
08 0h1A08 Sleep1 Freq– High 0.00 O p.164
frequency
Freq Freq
PID
PID wakeup 1 0.0–6000.0
09 0h1A09 WakeUp 20.0 O p.164
delay time (sec)
1 DT
PID
PID wakeup 1
10 0h1A0A WakeUp 0.00–Unit Band 20.00 O p.164
value
1Dev
PID
PID sleep mode 2 0.0–6000.0
11 0h1A0B Sleep 2 20.0 O p.164
delay time (sec)
DT
PID sleep mode 2 PID 0.00, Low
12 0h1A0C 0.00 O p.164
frequency Sleep2 Freq– High
Hx2000 AC Drive 453

Table of Functions

Freq Freq
PID
PID wakeup 2 0.0–6000.0
13 0h1A0D WakeUp 20.0 O p.164
delay time (sec)
2 DT
PID
PID wakeup 2
14 0h1A0E WakeUp 0.00–Unit Band 20.00 O p.164
value
2Dev
0 No
Soft Fill function Soft Fill
20 0h1A14 0: No O p.163
options Sel
1 Yes
Pre- PID
Pre-PID Low Freq– High
21 0h1A15 operation 30.00 O p.163
Freq Freq
frequency
Pre- PID delay Pre-PID
22 0h1A16 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.163
time Delay
Soft Fill escape Soft Fill Unit Min–Unit
23 0h1A17 20.00 O p.163
value Set Max
Soft Fill reference Fill Step

24 0h1A18 0.00–Unit Band 2.00 O p.163
increasing value Set
Soft Fill reference Fill Step

25 0h1A19 0–9999 (sec) 20 O p.163
increasing cycle Time
Soft Fill changing Fill Fdb
26 0h1A1A 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.163
amount Diff
Flow 0 No
Flow Comp
30 0h1A1E Comp 0: No O p.176
function options 1 Yes
Sel
Max
Max Comp
31 0h1A1F Comp 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.176
amount
Value
MMC option MMC

4083 0h1A28 0 None 0: None Δ p.246
selection Sel
83
Set PID-1 to 'YES' to configure AP1-40.
454 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions

Single
1
Ctrl
Multi
2
Follower
Multi
3
Master
Serve
4
Drv
0 No
Regul
4184 0h1A29 Bypass selection 0: No Δ p.33
Bypass 1 Yes
Number of Num of
42 0h1A2A 1–5 5 Δ p.246
auxiliary motors Aux
Select starting Starting
43 0h1A2B 1–5 1 Δ p.246
auxiliary motor Aux
Display the Aux
44 0h1A2C number of running Motor - - X p.246
auxiliary motors Run
Display auxiliary
Aux
45 0h1A2D motors 1– 4 - - X p.246
Priority 1
priority
Display auxiliary
Aux
46 0h1A2E motors 5– 8 - - X p.246
Priority 2
priority
Auxiliary motor 0 No
Aux All
48 0h1A30 options for 1: Yes O p.246
Stop 1 Yes
inverter stop
0 FILO
Aux 1 FIFO
Auxiliary motor
49 0h1A31 On/Off 0: FILO Δ p.246
stop order.
Seq Op time
2
Order
Auxiliary motors Aux Start

50 0h1A32 0–100 (%) 2 O p.246
pressure Diff
84
Set AP1-40 to 'YES' to configure AP1-41.
Hx2000 AC Drive 455

Table of Functions

difference
Main motor
acceleration time
Aux Acc
51 0h1A33 when the number 0.0–600.0 (sec) 2.0 O p.246
Time
of auxiliary motors
is reduced
Main motor
acceleration time
Aux Dec
52 0h1A34 when the number 0.0–600.0 (sec) 2.0 O p.246
Time
of auxiliary motors
is increased
Auxiliary motors Aux Start 0.0–3600.0
53 0h1A35 60.0 O p.246
start delay time DT (sec)
Auxiliary motors Aux Stop 0.0–3600.0
54 0h1A36 60.0 O p.246
stop delay time DT (sec)
0 None
AUX 1: AUX
Auto change Auto Ch 1
55 0h1A37 Exchange Exchang Δ p.246
mode selection Mode
e
Main
2
Exchange
Auto Ch
56 0h1A38 Auto change time 00: 00–99: 00 72: 00 O p.246
Time
Auto change Auto Ch Low Freq–

57 0h1A39 20.00 O p.246
frequency Level High Freq
Auto change Auto Op

58 0h1A3A - - X p.246
operation time Time
Auxiliary motor
Aux Stop
59 0h1A3B pressure 0~100 2
Diff
difference
Target frequency
of Aux motor Follower Low Freq ~
60 0h1A3C 50.00
during Multi Freq High Freq
Master
456 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Freq Low
#1 auxiliary motor Start
61 0h1A3D Limit–Freq High 45.00 O p.246
start frequency Freq 1
limit (Hz)
#2 auxiliary motor Start Low Freq–
62 0h1A3E 45.00 O p.246
start frequency Freq 2 High Freq

63 0h1A3F 45.00 O p.246

64 0h1A40 45.00 O p.246

65 0h1A41 45.00 O p.246
#1 auxiliary motor Stop Low Freq–

70 0h1A46 20.00 O p.246
stop frequency Freq 1 High Freq
71 0h1A47 20.00 O p.246
72 0h1A48 20.00 O p.246
73 0h1A49 20.00 O p.246

74 0h1A4A 20.00 O p.246
#1 auxiliary Aux1
80 0h1A50 motor’s reference Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.246
compensation Comp
#2 auxiliary motor Aux2

81 0h1A51 reference Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.246
compensation Comp

compensation Comp
Hx2000 AC Drive 457

Table of Functions


compensation Comp

compensation Comp
0 NO
90 0h1A5A Interlock selection Interlock 0: No O p.267
1 YES
Delay time before

next motor
operates when an
Interlock 0.1–360.0
91 0h1A5B interlock or an 5.0 O p.267
DT (Sec)
auto change on
the main motor
occurs.
0 Aux 1
Selection of 1 Aux 2
Auxiliary motor to AuxRun
9585 0h1A5F 2 Aux 3 0: Aux1 O
display [AP1-96] Time Sel
[AP1-97] 3 Aux 4
4 Aux 5
85
AP1-95~98 is available when MMC and Master Follower functions are perfomed.
458 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Operation
time(Day) of AuxRun
96 0h1A60 Auxiliary motor Time 0 – 65535 0 O
selected in [AP1- Day
95]
Operation time of
Auxiliary motor
AuxRun
97 0h1A61 selected in [AP1- 00:00 - 23:59 00:00 O
Time Min
95]
(Hour:Minute)
0 None
1 All
2 Aux 1
Deleting operation
AuxRun
98 0h1A62 time of Auxiliary 3 Aux 2 0: None O
Time Clr
motor
4 Aux 3
5 Aux 4
6 Aux 5
Hx2000 AC Drive 459

Table of Functions

Jump
00 - Jump Code 1–99 40 O p.61
Code
Load curve 0 No
0186 0h1B01 Load Tune No Δ p.191
Tuning 1 Yes
Base
Low Freq load Load Fit
02 0h1B02 Freq*15%–Load 25.00 Δ p.191
curve Lfreq
Fit HFreq
Low Freq Load Fit

03 0h1B03 0.0–80.0 (%) 40.0 Δ p.191
current LCurr
Low Freq Load Fit

04 0h1B04 0.0–80.0 (%) 30.0 Δ p.191
power total LPwr
High Freq load Load Fit Load Fit LFreq–

08 0h1B08 42.50 Δ p.191
curve Hfreq HighFreq
High Freq Load Fit Load Fit LCurr –

09 0h1B09 80.0 Δ p.191
current. HCurr 200.0 (%)
High Freq total Load Fit Load Fit LPwr –

10 0h1B0A 80.0 Δ p.191
power HPwr 200.0 (%)
Current load Load

11 0h1B0B - - X p.191
curve Curve Cur
Power load Load

12 0h1B0C - - X p.191
curve Curve Pwr
15 0h1B0F Pump clean Pump 0 None 0: None O p.183
86
Set the operation mode to AUTO to configure AP2-01.
460 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions

setting1 Clean DI
1
Mode1 Dependent
Output
2
Power
Output
3
Current
0 None
Pump 1 Start
Pump clean
16 0h1B10 Clean 2 Stop 0: None Δ p.183
setting2
Mode2
Start and
3
Stop
Pump clean PC Curve
17 0h1B11 0.1–200.0 (%) 100.0 O p.183
load setting Rate
Pump clean PC Curve

18 0h1B12 0.0–100.0 (%) 5.0 O p.183
reference band Band
Pump clean
PC Curve
19 0h1B13 operation 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.183
DT
delay time
Pump clean PC Start
20 0h1B14 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.183
start delay time DT
0 speed
operating time PC Step
21 0h1B15 0.1–6000.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.183
at Fx/Rx DT
switching
Pump clean PC Acc
22 0h1B16 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.183
Acc time Time
Pump clean PC Dec
23 0h1B17 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.183
Dec time Time
Forward step
FwdStead
24 0h1B18 maintaining 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.183
yTime
time
Forward step
FwdStead 0.00, Low Freq–
25 0h1B19 maintaining 30.00 O p.183
yFreq High Freq
frequency
Hx2000 AC Drive 461

Table of Functions

Rev
Reverse step
26 0h1B1A SteadyTi 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.183
running time
me
Reverse step Rev
0.00, Low Freq–
27 0h1B1B running SteadyFre 30.00 O p.183
High Freq
frequency q
Pump clean
PC Num
28 0h1B1C number of 1–10 2 O p.183
of Steps
Fx/Rx steps
Pump clean
Repeat
29 0h1B1D function cycle - - X p.183
Num Mon
monitoring
Number of
Repeat
30 0h1B1E pump clean 0–10 2 O p.183
Num Set
repetitions
Operation after 0 Stop

PC End
31 0h1B1F pump clean 0:Stop Δ p.183
Mode 1 Run
end
Pump clean
PC Limit
32 0h1B20 continuous 6–60 (min) 10 O p.183
Time
limit time
Pump clean
PC Limit
33 0h1B21 continuous 0–10 3 O p.183
Num
limit numbers
Dec Valve
Dec Valve Low Freq–
38 0h1B26 operation 40.00 O p.189
Freq High Freq
frequency
Dev Valve Dec Dev Valve

39 0h1B27 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 0.0 O p.189
time Time
0 No
Start and End Start&End
40 0h1B28 0: No Δ p.187
ramp settings Ramp 1 Yes
Start Ramp Start
41 0h1B29 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.187
Acc time Ramp Acc
462 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

End
End Ramp
42 0h1B2A Ramp 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.187
Dec time
Dec
Damper check Damper

45 0h1B2D 0.0 – 600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.175
time DT
Lubrication Lub Op
46 0h1B2E 0.0–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.178
operation time Time
Pre Heat
4887 0h1B30 Pre heat level 1–100 (%) 20 O p.198
Level
Pre-Heat
49 0h1B31 Pre-heat duty 1–100 (%) 30 O p.198
Duty
DC input delay DC Inj

50 0h1B32 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.198
time Delay T
#1 Motor M1 AVG
87 0h1B57 0.1–90.0 (kW) - O p.181
average power PWR
#2 Motor M2 AVG
88 0h1B58 0.1–90.0 (kW) - O p.181
average power PWR
Cost per
89 0h1B59 Cost per kWh 0.0–1000.0 0.0 O p.181
kWh
Saved
90 0h1B5A Saved kWh - 0.0 X p.181
kWh
Saved
91 0h1B5B Saved MWh - 0 X p.181
MWh
Saved Cost
Saved
92 0h1B5C below 1000 - 0.0 X p.181
Cost1
unit
Saved Cost Saved

93 0h1B5D - 0 X p.181
over 1000 unit Cost2
87
AP2-48–49 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Pre-Heat’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 463

Table of Functions

Saved CO2
CO2
94 0h1B5E conversion 0.0–5.0 0.0 O p.181
Factor
Factor
Saved CO2 Saved

95 0h1B5F - 0.0 X p.181
(Ton) CO2 – 1
Saved CO2 Saved

96 0h1B60 - 0 X p.181
(kTon) CO2 – 2
Saved energy Reset 0 No

97 0h1B61 0.No Δ p.181
reset Energy 1 Yes

*O/X: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code Comm. LCD Prop-
Name Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
AP3 Address Display erty*
Jump
00 - Jump code 1–99 70 O p.61
Code
01/01/2000 ~
Now
01 0h1C01 Current date 12/31/2099 01/01/2000 O p.203
Date
(Date)
Now 0: 00–23: 59
02 0h1C02 Current time 0: 00 O p.203
Time (min)
Now 0000000–
03 0h1C03 Current day 0000001 O p.203
Weekday 1111111 (Bit)
Summer Time Summer 01/01 ~ Summer

04 0h1C04 04/01 O p.203
Start date T Start T Stop
464 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Summer T Start
Summer Time Summer ~
05 0h1C05 11/31 O p.203
Finish date T Stop 12/31(Date
)
0 YYYY/MM/D
Date display Date D
0688 0h1C06 1 MM/DD/YYY Date Format O p.203
format Format
Y
2 DD/MM/YYY
Y
Period
Period
10 0h1C0A connection - - X p.203
Status
status
Time Period 1
Period1 0: 00–24: 00
11 0h1C0B Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period 1
Period1 Period1 Start T –
12 0h1C0C End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period 1
Day of the Period1 0000000–
13 0h1C0D 0000000 p.203
week Day 1111111 (Bit)
configuration
Time Period 2
Period2 0: 00–24: 00
14 0h1C0E Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period 2
15 0h1C0F End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period 2
16 0h1C10 00000000 O p.203
configuration
Time Period 3
Period3 0: 00–24: 00
17 0h1C11 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
88
The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.
Hx2000 AC Drive 465

Table of Functions

Time Period 3
18 0h1C12 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period 3
19 0h1C13 0000000 O p.203
configuration
Time Period 4
Period4 0: 00–24: 00
20 0h1C14 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period 4
21 0h1C15 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period 4
22 0h1C16 0000000 O p.203
configuration
Except1 Date
Except1 0: 00–24: 00
30 0h1C1E Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except1 Date
Except1 Except1 StartT –
31 0h1C1F End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Except1 Date Except1 01/01–12/31
32 0h1C20 01/01 O p.203
configuration Date (Date)
Except2 Date
Except2 0: 00–24: 00
33 0h1C21 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except2 Date
34 0h1C22 Stop time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
35 0h1C23 01/01 O p.203
Except3 Date
Except3 0: 00–24: 00
36 0h1C24 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
466 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Except3 Date
37 0h1C25 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Except3Date Except3 01/01–12/31

38 0h1C26 01/01 O p.203
Except4 Date
Except4 0: 00–24: 00
39 0h1C27 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except4 Date
40 0h1C28 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Except4Date Except4 01/01–12/31

41 0h1C29 01/01 O p.203
Except5 Date
Except5 0: 00–24: 00
42 0h1C2A Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except5 Date
43 0h1C2B End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
44 0h1C2C 01/01 O p.203
Except6 Date
Except6 0: 00–24: 00
45 0h1C2D Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except6 Date
46 0h1C2E End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration

47 0h1C2F 01/01 O p.203
Except7 Date
Except7 0: 00–24: 00
48 0h1C30 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Hx2000 AC Drive 467

Table of Functions

Except7 Date
49 0h1C31 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration

50 0h1C32 01/01 O p.203
Except8 Date
Except8 0: 00–24: 00
51 0h1C33 Start time 24: 00 O p.203
Start T (min)
configuration
Except8 Date
52 0h1C34 End time 24: 00 O p.203
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
53 0h1C35 01/01 O p.203
Time Event 0 No
Time
70 0h1C46 function 0: NO Δ p.203
Event En 1 Yes
configuration
Time Event
T-Event
71 0h1C47 configuration - - X p.203
Status
status
Time Event 1
T-Event1 000000000000 – 0000000000
72 0h1C48 connection Δ p.203
Period 111111111111 00
status
0 None
1 Fx
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
Time Event 1 T-Event1 5 Speed-H
73 0h1C49 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define 7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
10 Xcel Stop
Run
11
Enable
468 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
Analog
14
Hold
I-Term
15
Clear
PID
16
Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
PID Ref
18
Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
Dias Aux
21
Ref
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1
23
ITermClr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 Run
EPID2
26
ITermClr
Sleep
27
Wake Chg
28 PID Step
Ref L
PID Step
29
Ref M
PID Step
30
Ref H
31 EPID3 Run
Hx2000 AC Drive 469

Table of Functions

EPID3
32
ITermClr
Time Event 2
T-Event2 000000000000 – 0000000000
74 0h1C4A connection Δ p.203
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Identical to the
Time Event 2 T-Event2
75 0h1C4B setting range for 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event 3
T-Event2 000000000000 – 0000000000
76 0h1C4C connection Δ p.203
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Identical to the
77 0h1C4D setting range for 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event 4
T-Event4 000000000000 – 0000000000
78 0h1C4E connection Δ p.203
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Identical to the
79 0h1C4F setting range for 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event 5
T-Event5 000000000000 – 0000000000
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Identical to the
81 0h1C51 setting range for 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event 6
T-Event6 000000000000 – 0000000000
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Identical to the
83 0h1C53 setting range for 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
AP3-73
470 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Time Event 7
T-Event7 000000000000 – 0000000000
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Same setting
85 0h1C55 range as r AP3- 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define
73
Time Event 8
T-Event8 000000000000 – 0000000000
Period 111111111111 00
configuration
Time Event 8 T-Event8 Same setting

87 0h1C57 0: None Δ p.203
functions Define range as AP3-73
8.13 Protection Function Group (PRT)

O : Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when stopped, X: Write disabled
PRT Address Display Value *
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1–99 40 O p.61
Code
Bit 00–11
Input/output Output
Phase Bit0
05 0h1D05 open-phase open phase 00 Δ p.314
Loss Chk
protection
Input open
Bit1
phase
Input voltage
IPO V
06 0h1D06 range during 1–100 (V) 15 O p.314
Band
open-phase
Hx2000 AC Drive 471

Table of Functions

Deceleration
Trip Dec
07 0h1D07 time at fault 0.0–600.0 (sec) 3.0 O -
Time
trip
Bit 00–11
Selection of Fault trips

RST Bit0 other than LV
08 0h1D08 startup on trip 00 O p.226
Restart trip
reset
Bit1 LV Trip
Number of
Retry
09 0h1D09 automatic 0–10 0 O p.226
Number
restarts
Automatic
Retry
10 0h1D0A restart delay 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.226
Delay
time
0 None
Keypad 1 Warning
command Lost KPD
11 0h1D0B 2 Free-Run O p.316
loss operation Mode 0:
mode None
3 Dec
0 None
1 Free-Run
Speed 2 Dec
command Lost Cmd 0:
12 0h1D0C 3 Hold Input O p.316
loss operation Mode None
mode
4 Hold Output
5 Lost Preset
Time to
determine
Lost Cmd
1389 0h1D0D speed 0.1–120.0 (sec) 1.0 O p.316
Time
command
loss
PRT-13–15 are displayed when PRT-12 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.

89
472 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Operation
frequency at
Lost 0.00, Low Freq–
14 0h1D0E speed 0.00 O p.316
Preset F High Freq
command
loss
Analog input 0 Half of x1
AI Lost 0: Half
15 0h1D0F loss decision O p.316
Level 1 Below x1 of x1
level
Overload 0 No
OL Warn
17 0h1D11 warning 0: No O p.306
Select 1 Yes
selection
Overload OL Warn
18 0h1D12 30–OL Trip Level(%) 110 O p.306
warning level Level
Overload OL Warn
19 0h1D13 0.0–30.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.306
warning time Time
0 None
1:
Motion at OL Trip
20 0h1D14 1 Free-Run Free- O p.306
overload trip Select
Run
2 Dec
Overload trip OL Trip

21 0h1D15 30–150 (%) 120 O p.306
level Level
Overload trip OL Trip
22 0h1D16 0.0–60.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.306
time Time
Output
Under load 0 0:
Current
23 0h1D17 detection UL Source Output Δ p.322
Source 1 Output Power Current
Under load
24 0h1D18 detection UL Band 0.0–100.0 (%) 10.0 Δ p.322
band
Hx2000 AC Drive 473

Table of Functions

Under load 0 No
UL Warn
25 0h1D19 warning 0: No O p.322
Sel 1 Yes
selection
Under load UL Warn
26 0h1D1A 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.322
warning time Time
0 None
Under load 0:
27 0h1D1B UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run O p.322
trip selection None
2 Dec
Under load UL Trip
28 0h1D1C 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.322
trip timer Time
0 None
Operation on No Motor 0:
31 0h1D1F O p.327
no motor trip Trip 1 Free-Run None
No motor trip No Motor

32 0h1D20 1–100 (%) 5 O p.327
current level Level
No motor No Motor
33 0h1D21 0.1–10.0 (sec) 3.0 O p.327
detection time Time
0 None
Operation at
motor Thermal-T 0:
34 0h1D22 1 Free-Run O p.306
overheat Sel None
detection
2 Dec
0 Thermal In 0:
Thermal Thermal In
35 0h1D23 Therm O p.306
sensor input Src
1 V2 al In
Thermal
Thermal-T
36 0h1D24 sensor fault 0.0–100.0 (%) 50.0 O p.306
Lev
level
Thermal 0 Low
37 0h1D25 sensor fault Thermal-T 0: Low O p.306
range 1 High
Motor
Thermal
3890 0h1D26 overheat - - X p.306
Monitor
detection
PRT-38 is displayed when PRT-34 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.

90
474 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

sensor
0 None
Electronic
thermal 1 Free-Run
ETH Trip 0:
40 0h1D28 prevention O p.304
Sel None
fault trip
selection 2 Dec
0 Self-cool
Motor cooling Motor 0: Self-
41 0h1D29 O p.304
fan type Cooling 1 Forced-cool cool
Electronic
42 0h1D2A thermal one ETH 1 min ETH Cont–150 (%) 120 O p.304
minute rating
Electronic
thermal
43 0h1D2B prevention ETH Cont 50–120 (%) 100 O p.304
continuous
rating
Fire mode Fire Mode

44 0h1D2C 0~9999 3473 O p.219
password PW
0 None
Fire mode Fire Mode 0:
4591 0h1D2D 1 Fire Mode O p.316
setting Sel None
2 Test Mode
Fire mode 0 Reverse 1:

Fire Mode
4692 0h1D2E direction Forwar O p.316
Dir
setting d
1 Forward
Fire mode
Fire Mode
4793 0h1D2F frequency 0.00–max Freq 50.00 O p.316
Freq
setting
91
PRT-45 can only be set when PRT-44 is in Fire mode. To change the mode in PRT-44,
create a new password for PRT-44.
92
PRT-46–47 are displayed when PRT-45 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 475

Table of Functions

Number of
Fire Mode
48 0h1D30 fire mode - 0 X p.316
Cnt
operations
bit 0000–1111
At
Bit 0
acceleration
Stall
prevention Stall At constant
50 0h1D32 Bit 1 0100 Δ p.310
and flux Prevent speed
braking At
Bit 2
deceleration
Bit 3 Flux braking
Stall Stall Freq Start frequency-Stall

51 0h1D33 50.00 O p.310
frequency 1 1 frequency2 (Hz)
Stall Level
52 0h1D34 Stall level 1 30-150 (%) 130 Δ p.310
1
Stall frequency1-
Stall Stall Freq
53 0h1D35 Stall frequency3 50.00 O p.310
frequency 2 2
(Hz)
Stall Level
54 0h1D36 Stall level 2 30-150 (%) 130 Δ p.310
2
Stall frequency2-
Stall Stall Freq
55 0h1D37 Stall frequency 4 50.00 O p.310
frequency 3 3
(Hz)
Stall Level
56 0h1D38 Stall level 3 30–150 (%) 130 Δ p.310
3
Stall frequency3-
Stall Stall Freq
57 0h1D39 Maximum frequency 50.00 O p.310
frequency 4 4
(Hz)
93
When Fire mode is set at PRT-45, PRT-46 is automatically set to forward, and the
frequency set at PRT-47 cannot be edited. When PRT-45 is set to Test mode, PRT-46 and
PRT-47 settings are editable.
476 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions

Stall Level
58 0h1D3A Stall level 4 30–150 (%) 130 Δ p.310
4
Flux braking Flux Brake

59 0h1D3B 0–150 (%) 0 O
gain Kp
0 None
Pipe break 1 Warning
PipeBroke 0:
60 0h1D3C detection O p.196
nSel 2 Free-Run None
setting
3 Dec
Pipe break
PipeBroke
61 0h1D3D detection 0.0–100.0 (%) 97.5 O p.196
n Lev
variation
Pipe break PipeBroke

62 0h1D3E 0.0–6000.0 (Sec) 10.0 O p.196
detection time n DT
Braking
DB
66 0h1D42 resistor 0–30 (%) 0 O p.320
Warn %ED
configuration
0 None
Level detect 1 Warning 0:
70 0h1D46 mode LDT Sel O p.193
2 Free-Run None
selection
3 Dec
0 Below Level
0:
Level detect LDT Area
71 0h1D47 Below O p.193
range setting Sel
1 Above Level Level
0 Output Current
0:
Level detect LDT
72 0h1D48 Output O p.193
source Source DC Link
1 Current
Voltage
Hx2000 AC Drive 477

Table of Functions

2 Output Voltage
3 kW
4 HP
5 V1
6 V2
7 I2
8 PID Ref Value
9 PID Fdb Value
10 PID Output
11 EPID1 Fdb Val

12 EPID2 Fdb Val
13 EPID3 Fdb Val
14 V3
15 I3
16 V4
17 I4
18 V5
19 I5
Level detect LDT

73 0h1D49 0–9999 (sec) 2 O p.193
delay time DlyTime
Level detect
Source
74 0h1D4A standard set LDT Level Source setting O p.193
setting
value
Level detect LDT Band Source

75 0h1D4B Source setting O p.193
band width width setting
Level detect
76 0h1D4C LDT Freq 0.00–High Freq (Hz) 20.00 O p.193
frequency
478 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

Level detect
LDT
77 0h1D4D trip restart 0.0–3000.0 (Min) 60.0 O p.193
Restart DT
time
0 Trip
Cooling fan Fan Trip
79 0h1D4F 0: Trip O p.323
fault selection Mode 1 Warning
Operation 0 None
1:
mode on Opt Trip
80 0h1D50 1 Free-Run Free- O p.326
optional card Mode
Run
trip 2 Dec
Low voltage
81 0h1D51 trip decision LVT Delay 0.0–60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.324
delay time
Low voltage 0 No
trip decision LV2 Trip
82 0h1D52 0: No Δ p.324
during Sel 1 Yes
operation
Remaining
capacitor life CAP.DiagP
83 0h1D53 10–100 (%) 0 O p.327
diagnosis erc
level
0 None
Capacitor life 1 Cap.Diag 1 0:

8494 - diagnosis CAP.Diag Δ p.327
None
mode 2 Cap.Diag 2
3 Cap.Init
Capacitor life
CAP.Level
85 0h1D55 diagnosis 50.0–95.0 (%) 0.0 Δ p.327
1
level 1
94
PRT-84 is displayed when PRT-83 is set to more than ‘0(%)’. PRT- 84 can only be set in
Auto-State.
Hx2000 AC Drive 479

Table of Functions

Capacitor life
CAP.Level
8695 0h1D56 diagnosis - 0.0 X p.327
2
level 2
Fan
accumulated
Fan Time
87 0h1D57 operating - 0 X p.330
Perc
time
operation %
Fan
Fan
88 0h1D58 replacement 0.0–100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.330
Exchange
alarm level
Low battery 0 None

Low
90 0h1D5A voltage 0:None O p.321
Battery
setting 1 Warning
91 0h1D5B Setting the BrokenBelt 0 None 0:None Δ
function of Sel
Broken belt 1 Warning
2 Free-Run
92 0h1D5C Operating the BrokenBelt 15.00 Δ

frequency of Freq
Broken belt 15.00~MzxFreq
93 0h1D5D Motor torque Current - X

current Trq -
94 0h1D5E Torque BrokenBelt 10.0 Δ

current of Trq
operating
Broken belt 0.0~100.0%
95
PRT-86 is read only.
480 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions

95 0 h1D5F Delay of BrokenBelt 10.0 Δ
operating Dly
Broken belt
0~600.0[sec]
8.14 2nd Motor Function Group (M2)

The second motor function group is displayed when one or more of the IN-65–71 codes is
set to ‘28 (2nd MOTOR)’. Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related
code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when stopped, X: Write disabled
Code Comm. LCD Initial Prope-
M2 Address Display Value rty*
00 - Jump code Jump Code 1–99 14 O p.61
Acceleratio- M2-Acc
04 0h1E04 0.0–600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.230
n time Time
Deceleratio- M2-Dec
05 0h1E05 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.230
n time Time
0 0.2 kW(0.3HP)
1 0.4 kW((0.5HP)
2 0.75 kW(1.0HP)
3 1.1 kW(1.5HP)
Motor M2- 4 1.5 kW(2.0HP)

06 0h1E06 - Δ p.230
capacity Capacity 5 2.2 kW(3.0HP)
6 3.0 kW(4.0HP)
7 3.7 kW(5.0HP)
8 4.0 kW(5.5HP)
9 5.5 kW(7.5HP)
Hx2000 AC Drive 481

Table of Functions

10 7.5 kW(10.0HP)
11 11.0 kW(15.0HP)
15.0
12
kW(20.0HP)
18.5
13
kW(25.0HP)
22.0
14
kW(30.0HP)
30.0
15
kW(40.0HP)
16 37.0
kW(50.0HP)
17 45.0
kW(60.0HP)
18 55.0
kW(75.0HP)
19 75.0kW(100.0HP
)
20 90.0kW(120.0HP
)
Base M2-Base
07 0h1E07 30.00–400.00 (Hz) 50.00 Δ p.230
frequency Freq
Control M2-Ctrl 0 V/F

08 0h1E08 0: V/F Δ p.230
mode Mode 2 Slip Compen
Number of M2-Pole
10 0h1E0A 2–48 Δ p.230
motor poles Num
Depe
Rated slip M2-Rated ndent Δ
11 0h1E0B 0–3000 (RPM) p.230
speed Slip on
Motor rated M2-Rated motor
12 0h1E0C
current Curr
1.0–1000.0 (A) settin Δ p.230
gs
Motor no- M2-Noload
13 0h1E0D 0.0–1000.0 (A) Δ p.230
load current Curr
14 0h1E0E Motor rated M2-Rated 170–480 (V) 230 Δ p.230
482 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions

voltage Volt or
415V
96
Motor M2-
15 0h1E0F 70–100 (%) Depe Δ p.230
efficiency Efficiency
ndent
Stator on
17 - M2-Rs 0.000–9.999 () Δ p.230
resistor motor
settin
Leakage
18 0h1E12 M2-Lsigma 0.00–99.99 (mH) gs Δ p.230
inductance
0 Linear
0:
M2-V/F
25 0h1E19 V/F pattern 1 Square Linea Δ p.230
Patt
r
2 User V/F
Forward M2-Fwd
26 0h1E1A 0.0–15.0 (%) Δ p.230
torque boost Boost
2.0
Reverse M2-Rev
27 0h1E1B 0.0–15.0 (%) Δ p.230
torque boost Boost
Stall
M2-Stall
28 0h1E1C prevention 30–150 (%) 130 Δ p.230
Lev
level
Electronic
thermal 1 M2-ETH 1
29 0h1E1D 100–150 (%) 120 Δ p.230
minute min
rating
Electronic
thermal M2-ETH
30 0h1E1E 50–120 (%) 100 Δ p.230
continuous Cont
rating
96
Refer to <4.15 Output Voltage Setting>
Hx2000 AC Drive 483

Table of Functions
8.15 Trip (TRIP Last-x) and Config (CNF) Mode
8.15.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
00 Trip type display Trip Name(x) - - -
Frequency reference at
01 Output Freq - - -
trip
02 Output current at trip Output Current - - -
Acceleration/Decelerat-
03 Inverter State - - -
ion state at trip
04 DC section state DCLink Voltage - - -
05 NTC temperature Temperature - - -
06 Input terminal state DI State - 0000 0000 -
07 Output terminal state DO State - 000 -
Trip time after Power

08 Trip On Time - 00/00/00 00: 00 -
on
09
Trip time after operation
Trip Run Time - 00/00/00 00: 00 -
start
0 No
10 Delete trip history Trip Delete? -
1 Yes
484 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
8.15.2 Config Mode (CNF)

Code
Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
CNF
00 Jump code Jump Code 1–99 42 p.61
Keypad language
01 Language Sel 0: English 0: English
selection
LCD contrast
02 LCD Contrast - - p.243
adjustment
Inverter S/W
10 Inv S/W Ver - - p.243
version
Keypad S/W
11 KeypadS/W Ver - - p.243
version
Keypad title
12 KPD Title Ver - - p.243
version
Display item
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency p.299
condition
display window
Monitor mode
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency p.299
display 1
2:
Monitor mode
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current OutputCurren p.299
display 2
t
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
Monitor mode 3:
23 Monitor Line-3 7 DI State p.299
display 3 OutputVoltage
8 DO State
9 V1 Monitor(V)
10 V1 Monitor (%)
13 V2 Monitor(V)
Hx2000 AC Drive 485

Table of Functions
Code
CNF
14 V2 Monitor (%)
15 I2 Monitor(mA)
16 I2 Monitor (%)
17 PID Output
18 PID Ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 EPID1 Out
21 EPID1 Ref Val
22 EPID1 Fdb Val
23 EPID2 Out
24 EPID2 Ref Val
25 EPID2Fdb Val
Monitor mode 0 No
24 Mon Mode Init 0: No p.299
initialize 1 Yes
Option slot 1 type

3097 Option-1 Type - - p.243
display
Option slot 2 type

31 Option-2 Type - - p.243
display
Option slot 3 type

32 Option-3 Type - - p.243
display
0 No
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
Parameter 3 BAS Grp

40 Parameter Init 0: No p.236
initialization 4 ADV Grp
5 CON Grp
6 IN Grp
7 OUT Grp
97
Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
486 Hx2000 AC Drive
Table of Functions
Code
CNF
8 COM Grp
9 PID Grp
10 EPI Grp
11 AP1 Grp
12 AP2 Grp
13 AP3 Grp
14 PRT Grp
15 M2 Grp
Display changed 0 View All

41 Changed Para 0: View All p.239
Parameter 1 View Changed
0 None
42 Multi key item Multi Key Sel 0: None p.239
1 UserGrpSelKey
0 Basic
1 Compressor
2 Supply Fan
3 Exhaust Fan
Macro function
43 Macro Select 4 Cooling Tower 0: Basic p.244
item
5 Circul. Pump
6 Vacuum Pump
Constant
7
Torque
0 No
Trip history
44 Erase All Trip 0: No p.243
deletion 1 Yes
User registration 0 No
45 UserGrpAllDel 0: No p.240
code deletion 1 Yes
0 No
46 Read parameters Parameter Read 0: No p.235
1 Yes
47 Write parameters Parameter 0 No 0: No p.235
Hx2000 AC Drive 487

Table of Functions
Code
CNF
Write 1 Yes
0 No
48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0: No p.235
1 Yes
Hide parameter
50 View Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.237
mode
Password
51 protection (hide View Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.237
parameters)
Lock parameter
52 Key Lock Set 0–9999 Un-locked p.237
edit
Password for
53 locking parameter Key Lock Pw 0–9999 Password p.237
edit
0 No
Additional title
60 Add Title Up 0: No p.243
update 1 Yes
Simple parameter 0 No
61 Easy Start On 1: Yes p.242
setting 1 Yes
0 No
Power
62 consumption WHCount Reset 0: No p.242
initialization 1 Yes
Accumulated
7098 inverter motion On-time Date-Format - p.302
time
Accumulated
7199 inverter operation Run-time Date-Format - p.302
time
72 Accumulated Time Reset 0 No 0: No p.302
98
99
488 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code
CNF
inverter operation
1 Yes
time initialization
73100 Real Time Real Time Date-Format
Accumulated
74 cooling fan Fan Time Date-Format - p.302
operation time시간
Reset of 0 No
101 accumulated
75 Fan Time Rst 0: No p.302
cooling fan 1 Yes
operation time
100
101
Hx2000 AC Drive 489

Table of Functions
8.16 Macro Groups

The following table lists detailed parameter settings for each macro configuration.
8.16.1 Compressor (MC1) Group
Macro Code LCD Display Initial Value Macro Code LCD Display Initial Value
Code Code
0 - Jump Code 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 10.0
2 DRV-4 Dec Time 20.0 3 DRV-7 Freq Ref Src 1: Keypad-

2
4 DRV-9 Control 1: Slip 5 DRV-11 JOG 20.00
Mode Compen Frequency
6 DRV-12 JOG Acc 13.0 7 DRV-13 JOG Dec 20.0
Time Time
8 DRV-15 Torque 1: Auto1 9 BAS-70 Acc Time-1 10.0
Boost
10 BAS-71 Dec Time-1 20.0 11 ADV-10 Power-on 1: Yes
Run
12 ADV-65 U/D Save 1: Yes 13 CON-4 Carrier Freq 3.0
Mode
14 CON-70 SS Mode 0: Flying 15 CON-77 KEB Select 1: Yes
Start-1
16 OUT-32 Relay 2 14: Run 17 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes
18 PID-3 PID Output 0.00 19 PID-4 PID Ref -

Value
20 PID-5 PID Fdb - 21 PID-10 PID Ref 1 4: I2
Value Src
22 PID-11 PID Ref 1 0.5000 23 PID-25 PID P-Gain 70.00
Set 1
24 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 5.0 25 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 5: inWC
26 PID-51 PID Unit 4: x0.01 27 AP-1 8 PID 5.00

Scale Sleep1Freq
28 AP1-21 Pre-PID 30.00 29 AP1-22 Pre-PID 120.0
Freq Delay
490 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
30 PRT-8 RST Restart 11 31 PRT-9 Retry 3
Number
32 PRT-10 Retry Delay 4.0 33 PRT-11 Lost KPD 3: Dec
Mode
34 PRT-12 Lost Cmd 2: Dec 35 PRT-13 Lost Cmd 4.0
Mode Time
36 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free Run 37 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120
38 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130 39 PRT-66 DB 10

Warn %ED
40 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning 41 PRT-72 LDT Source 0: Output
Current
42 PRT-75 LDT Band LDT 43 PRT-76 LDT Freq 20.00
Width Source/10%
of the Max.
value
44 M2-4 M2-Acc 10.0 45 M2-5 M2-Dec 20.0
Time Time
46 M2-8 M2-Ctrl 1: Slip 47 M2-28 M2-Stall Lev 125
Mode Compen
48 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 120
min
Hx2000 AC Drive 491

Table of Functions
8.16.2 Supply Fan (MC2) Group

Code Code
2 DRV-4 Dec Time 30.0 3 DRV-7 Freq Ref Src 1:

Keypad-2
4 DRV-11 JOG 15.00 5 BAS-7 V/F Pattern 1: Square
Frequency
6 BAS-70 Acc Time-1 20.0 7 BAS-71 Dec Time-1 30.0
8 ADV-10 Power-on 1: Yes 9 ADV-50 E-Save 2: Auto

Run Mode
10 ADV-64 FAN Control 2: Temp 11 ADV-65 U/D Save 1: Yes
Control Mode
12 CON-4 Carrier Freq 3.0 13 CON-70 SS Mode 1: Flying
Start-2
14 CON-77 KEB Select 1: Yes 15 OUT-32 Relay 2 10: Over
Voltage
16 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes 17 PID-3 PID Output -
18 PID-4 PID Ref - 19 PID-5 PID Fdb -

Value Value
20 PID-10 PID Ref 1 4: I2 21 PID-11 PID Ref 1 0.5000
Src Set
22 PID-25 PID P-Gain 40.00 23 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 20.0
1
24 PID-36 PID Out Inv 1: Yes 25 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 5: inWC
26 PID-51 PID Unit 4: x0.01 27 AP- 21 Pre-PID 30.00

Scale Freq
28 AP1-22 Pre-PID 120.0 29 PRT- 8 RST Restart 11
Delay
30 PRT-9 Retry 0 31 PRT-10 Retry Delay 20.0
Number
32 PRT-11 Lost KPD 3: Dec 33 PRT-12 Lost Cmd 3: Hold
Mode Mode Input
34 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free 35 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120
Run
492 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
36 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130 37 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning
38 PRT-72 LDT Source 0: Output 39 PRT-75 LDT Band LDT

Current Width Source/10%
of the Max.
value
40 PRT-76 LDT Freq 10.00 41 PRT-77 LDT Restart 500.0
DT
42 M2-25 M2-V/F Patt 1: Square 43 M2-28 M2-Stall Lev 110
44 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 110

min
Hx2000 AC Drive 493

Table of Functions
8.16.3 Exhaust Fan (MC3) Group

Code Code
2 DRV-4 Dec Time 30.0 3 DRV-7 Freq Ref Src 1: Keypad-2

Frequency
14 BAS-78 Acc Time-5 30.0 15 BAS-80 Acc Time-6 32.5
16 BAS-81 Dec Time-6 42.5 17 BAS-82 Acc Time-7 35.0

Run
20 ADV-50 E-Save 2: Auto 21 ADV-64 FAN Control 2: Temp
Mode Control
Mode
Start-2
26 OUT-32 Relay 2 10: Over 27 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes
Voltage
28 PID-3 PID Output - 29 PID-4 PID Ref -
Value

Value Src
Set 1
34 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 15.0 35 PID-36 PID Out Inv 1: Yes
36 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 5: inWC 37 PID-51 PID Unit 4: x0.01

Scale
494 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
38 AP1-21 Pre-PID 30.00 39 PRT-8 RST Restart 11
Freq
Number
Mode Mode Input
44 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1:Free-Run 45 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120
46 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130 47 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning

of the Max.
value
DT
52 M2-4 M2-Acc 10.0 53 M2-5 M2-Dec 20.0
Time Time
56 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 110

min
Hx2000 AC Drive 495

Table of Functions
8.16.4 Cooling Tower (MC4) Group

Code Code

2
Frequency
14 BAS-78 Acc Time-5 30.0 15 BAS-80 Acc Time-6 32.5
16 BAS-81 Dec Time-6 42.5 17 BAS-82 Acc Time-7 35.0

Run
Mode Control
Mode
Start-2
26 OUT-32 Relay 2 10: Over 27 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes
Voltage
Value
30 PID -5 PID Fdb - 31 PID-10 PID Ref 1 4: I2
Value Src
Set 1
34 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 15.0 35 PID-36 PID Out Inv 1: Yes
36 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 3: °F 37 PID-51 PID Unit 2: x1

Scale
496 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
Freq Delay
Number
Mode
44 PRT-12 Lost Cmd 3: Hold 45 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free
Mode Input Run
46 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120 47 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130
48 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning 49 PRT-72 LDT Source 0: Output

Current
50 PRT-75 LDT Band LDT 51 PRT-76 LDT Freq 10.00
Width Source/10%
of the Max.
value
52 PRT 77 LDT Restart 300.0 53 M2-25 M2-V/F Patt 1: Square
DT
54 M2 28 M2-Stall Lev 110 55 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 110
min
8.16.5 Circululation Pump (MC5) Group
Hx2000 AC Drive 497

Table of Functions
Code Code
0 - Jump Code 1:CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 30.0

Time Time
8 DRV-15 Torque 1: Auto1 9 BAS-7 V/F Pattern 1: Square
Boost
24 ADV-10 Power-on 1: Yes 25 ADV-25 Freq Limit 20.00

Run Lo
Mode Control
Mode
30 CON-70 SS Mode 0: Flying 31 CON- KEB Select 1: Yes
Start-1 77
32 OUT-32 Relay 2 14: Run 33 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes

Value
Value Src
Set 1
498 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
40 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 5.0 41 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 2: PSI
42 PID-51 PID Unit 3: x0.1 43 AP1-8 PID 10.00

Scale Sleep1Freq
Freq Delay
Number
Mode
50 PRT-12 Lost Cmd 3: Hold 51 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free Run
Mode Input
52 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120 53 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130
54 PRT-60 PipeBroken 1: Warning 55 PRT-61 PipeBroken 90.0

Sel Lev
56 PRT-62 Pipe Broken 22.0 57 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning
DT
of the Max.
value
DT
62 M2-4 M2-Acc 10.0 63 M2-5 M2-Dec 20.0
Time Time
66 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 120

min
8.16.6 Vacuum Pump (MC6) Group

Hx2000 AC Drive 499
Table of Functions
Code Code

2
Time Time
8 DRV-15 Torque 1: Auto1 9 BAS-7 V/F Pattern 1: Square
Boost
24 ADV-10 Power-on 1: Yes 25 ADV-25 Freq Limit 40.00

Run Lo
26 ADV-64 FAN Control 2: Temp 27 ADV-65 U/D Save 1: Yes
Control Mode
Start-1
30 CON-77 KEB Select 1: Yes 31 OUT-32 Relay 2 14: Run
32 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes 33 PID-3 PID Output -
34 PID-4 PID Ref - 35 PID-5 PID Fdb -

Value Value
36 PID-10 PID Ref 1 4: I2 37 PID-11 PID Ref 1 5.000
Src Set
38 PID-25 PID P-Gain 50.00 39 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 2.5
1
500 Hx2000 AC Drive

Table of Functions
Code Code
40 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 5: inWC 41 PID-51 PID Unit 3: x0.1
Scale
42 AP1-21 Pre-PID 30.00 43 PRT-8 RST Restart 11
Freq
Number
Mode Mode Input
48 PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free 49 PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120
Run
50 PRT-52 Stall Level 1 130 51 PRT-60 PipeBroken 1: Warning
Sel
52 PRT-61 PipeBroken 90.0 53 PRT-62 Pipe Broken 22.0
Lev DT
54 PRT-66 DB 10 55 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning
Warn %ED
Current Width Source
/10% of the
Max. value
DT
60 M2-4 M2-Acc 10.0 61 M2-5 M2-Dec 20.0
Time Time
62 M2-8 M2-Ctrl 1: Slip 63 M2-25 M2-V/F Patt 1: Square
Mode Compen
64 M2-28 M2-Stall Lev 125 65 M2-29 M2-ETH 1 120
min
8.16.7 Constant Torque (MC7) Group
Hx2000 AC Drive 501

Table of Functions
Code Code
0 - Jump Code 1:CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 30.0
4 DRV-9 Control 1: Slip 5 DRV-12 JOG Acc 10.0

Mode Compen Time
6 DRV-13 JOG Dec 20.0 7 DRV-15 Torque 1: Auto1
Time Boost
22 ADV-1 Acc Pattern 1: S-curve 23 ADV-2 Dec Pattern 1: S-curve
24 ADV-25 Freq Limit 20.00 25 ADV-74 RegenAvd 1: Yes

Lo Sel
Start-1
28 CON-77 KEB Select 1: Yes 29 OUT-32 Relay 2 14: Run

Freq Delay
32 PRT-12 Lost Cmd 2: Dec 33 PRT-40 ETH-Trip 2:Dec
Mode Sel
34 PRT-66 DB 10 35 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning
Warn %ED
36 PRT-72 LDT Source 0:Output 37 PRT-75 LDT Band LDT

of the Max.
value
502 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
Code Code
DT
40 M2-4 M2-Acc 10.0 41 M2-5 M2-Dec 20.0
Time Time
42 M2-8 M2-Ctrl 1: Slip
Mode Compen
9 Troubleshooting
Hx2000 AC Drive 503

Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions,
fault trips, warning signals, or faults occur. If the inverter does not work normally after
following the suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the L&T E&A customer
service center.
9.1 Trip and Warning

When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operation (trips) or sends out a warning signal.
When a trip or warning occurs, the keypad displays the information briefly.Detailed
information is shown on the LCD display. Users can read the warning message at PRT-90.
When more than 2 trips occur at roughly the same time, the keypad displays the higher
priority fault information. In the keypad, fault trips with higher priority are displayed first. Use
the [Up], [Down], [Left] or [Right] cursor key on the keypad to view the fault trip
information.The fault conditions can be categorized as follows
• Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is
not saved in the fault history.
• Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or
warning signal disappears.
• Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after
the user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns
the inverter on again. If the the inverter is still in a fault condition after powering it on
again, please contact the supplier or the L&T E&A customer service center.
504 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
9.1.1 Fault Trips

Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage
LCD Display Type Description

Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated and
Over Load Latch the actual load level exceeds the set level. Operates
when PRT-20 is set to a value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated
Under Load Latch and the actual load level is less than the set level.
Operates when PRT-27 is set to a value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 180%
Over Current1 Latch
of the rated current.
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the
Over Voltage Latch
specified value.
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
Low Voltage Level
the specified value.
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
Low Voltage2 Latch
the specified value during inverter operation.
Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output
side of the inverter and causes the current to exceed
Ground Trip Latch
the specified value. The specified value varies
depending on inverter capacity.
Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal
E-Thermal Latch characteristics to prevent motor overheating. Operates
when PRT-40 is set to a value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or
Out Phase Open Latch more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates
when bit 1 of PRT-05 is set to ‘1’.
Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or
In Phase Open Latch more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates
only when bit 2 of PRT-05 is set to ‘1’.
Displayed when the inverter has been protected from
overload and resultant overheating, based on inverse
Inverter OLT Latch time-limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload
rates for the inverter are 120% for 1 min and 140% for
5 sec.
Displayed when the motor is not connected during
No Motor Trip Latch
inverter operation. Operates when PRT-31 is set to ‘1’.
Hx2000 AC Drive 505

Troubleshooting
Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External

Signals

Displayed when the tempertature of the inverter
Over Heat Latch
heat sink exceeds the specified value.
Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter
Over Current2 Latch detects a specified level of excessive, short circuit
current.
Displayed when an external fault signal is provided
by the multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-
External Trip Latch
function input terminals at IN-65-71 to ‘4 (External
Trip)’ to enable external trip.
Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a
signal provided from the multi-function terminal.
BX Level
Set one of the multi-function input terminals at IN-
65-71 to ‘5 (BX)’ to enable input block function.
Displayed when an error is detected in the
memory (EEPRom), analog-digital converter
output (ADC Off Set) or CPU watchdog (Watch
Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).
H/W-Diag Fatal
EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters
due to keypad or memory (EEPRom) fault.
ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit

(U/V/W terminal, current sensor, etc.).
Displayed when an error is detected in the
NTC Open Latch temperature sensor of the Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT).
Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling
Fan Trip Latch fan. Set PRT-79 to ‘0’ to activate fan trip (for
models below 22 kW capacity).
Triggered when the input temperature is higher
Thermal Trip Latch
than the temperature set by the user.
Triggered when a communication error occurs
between the keypad and the inverter, when the
Lost KeyPad Latch
keypad is the command source, and PRT-11 (Lost
KPD Mode) is set to any other value than ‘0’.
506 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
General Fault Trips

Triggered when the damper open signal or run
Damper Err Latch command signal is longer than the value set at AP2-45
(Damper Check T) during a fan operation.
Triggered when AP1-55 is set to ‘2’ and all auxiliary

MMC Interlock Latch
motors are interlocked during an MMC operation.
Triggered when the pump clean operation is operated

CleanRPTErr Latch frequently. The conditions may be modified with
theAP2-36–AP2-37 settings.
Triggered when a pipe is broken during the pump
Pipe Broken Latch
operation. Set PRT-60.
Triggered when the inverter output current or power is
Level Detect Latch lower or higher than the values set by the user. Set the
values at PRT-71–PRT-77.
Broken Belt Latch Triggered when PRT-91 is set to Free Run
Option Protection

Displayed when a frequency or operation command
error is detected during inverter operation by controllers
Lost Command Level other than the keypad (e.g., using a terminal block and
a communication mode). Activate by setting PRT-12 to
any value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when the I/O board or external

IO Board Trip Latch communication card is not connected to the inverter or
there is a bad connection.
Displayed when communication fails during parameter

ParaWrite Trip Latch writing. Occurs due to a control cable fault or a bad
connection.
Displayed when a communication error is detected
between the inverter and the communication board.
Option Trip-1 Latch
Occurs when the communication option card is
installed.
Hx2000 AC Drive 507

Troubleshooting
9.1.2 Warning Message

LCD Display Description
Displayed when a motor is overloaded. Set PRT-17 to ‘1’ to enable.
Over Load Set OUT-31–35 or OUT-36 to ‘5 (Over Load)’ to receive the overload
warning output signals.
Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Set PRT-25 is to ‘1’. Set
Under Load the digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to’ 7
(Under Load)’ to receive the underload warning output signals.
Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the inverter
overheat protection (inverter IOLT) level, is accumulated. Set the
INV Over Load
digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘6 (IOL)’
to receive the inverter overload warning output signals.
Lost command warning alarm occurs even with PRT-12 set to ‘0’.
The warning alarm occurs based on the condition set at PRT-13-15.
Lost Command Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to
‘13 (Lost Command)’ to receive the lost command warning output
signals.
Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while PRT-
79 is set to’1’. Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or
Fan Warning
OUT-36) to ‘8 (Fan Warning)’ to receive the fan warning output
signals.
Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value.
DB Warn %ED
Set the detection level at PRT-66.
When there is a fire, Fire Mode forces the inverter to ignore certain
fault trips and continue to operate. Set the digital output terminals or
Fire Mode
relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘27 (Fire Mode)’ to receive the fire
mode warning output signals.
Displayed when a pipe is broken during pump operation. Set the
Pipe Broken digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘28 (Pipe
Broken)’ to receive the pipe break warning output signals.
Displayed when a communication error occurs between the keypad
and the inverter, when PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) is set to any other
Lost Keypad value than ‘0’, and a run command is given from the keypad. Set the
digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘24 (Lost
KPD)’ to receive the lost keypad warning output signals.
Displayed during a level detect state. Set PRT-70 to ‘1 (warning)’ to
Level Detect
enable.
Displayed when capacitor life expectancy level goes below the level
CAP. Warning set by the user. Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35
or OUT-36) to ‘34 (CAPWarning)’ to receive the capacitor life
508 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
LCD Display Description

warning output signals.
Displayed when the cooling fans need replacing. Set the digital
output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘35
Fan ExChange
(FanExChange)’ to receive the fan replacement warning output
signals.
Displayed when the RTC battery voltage drops to or below 2 V. To
Low Battery
receive a warning output signal, set PRT-90 (Low Battery) to ‘Yes’.
Displayed when PRT-91 is set to warning and the inverter becomes
Broken Belt
on the condition of broken belt.
Displayed when the values of ‘AP2-03 and AP2-04’ are more than
Load Tune the values of ‘AP2-09 and AP2-10’ and the function of load tunning
is not normal.
PareWrite Fail Displayed when the function of smart copier is not normal.
Displayed when the function of Rs tunning is not normal. For
Rs Tune Err
example, auto tunning is performed without wiring the motor.
Displayed when the function of Lsigma tunning is not normal. For
Lsig Tune Err
example, auto tunning is performed without wiring the motor.
Hx2000 AC Drive 509

Troubleshooting
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips

When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table
for possible causes and remedies.
Type Cause Remedy

The load is greater than the motor’s Ensure that the motor and inverter
rated capacity. have appropriate capacity ratings.
Over Load
The set value for the overload trip level Increase the set value for the
(PRT-21) is too low. overload trip level.
There is a motor-load connection Replace the motor and inverter with
problem. models with lower capacity.
Under Load The set value for underload level (PRT-
Reduce the set value for the
24) is less than the system’s minimum
underload level.
load.
Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to
Increase Acc/Dec time.
load inertia (GD2).
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model
rated capacity. that has increased capacity.
Over
Current1 Operate the inverter after the motor
The inverter supplied an output while
has stopped or use the speed search
the motor was idling.
function (CON-70).
The mechanical brake of the motor is
Check the mechanical brake.
operating too fast.
Deceleration time is too short for the
Increase the acceleration time.
load inertia (GD2).
Over A generative load occurs at the inverter
Use the braking unit.
Voltage output.
Determine if the input voltage is
The input voltage is too high.
above the specified value.
Determine if the input voltage is
The input voltage is too low.
below the specificed value.
A load greater than the power capacity
is connected to the system (a welder, Increase the power capacity.
Low Voltage direct motor connection, etc.)
The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty
Replace the magnetic contactor.
connection.
510 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

The input voltage has decreased during Determine if the input voltage is
the operation. above the specified value.
Low
An input phase-loss has occurred. Check the input wiring.
Voltage2
The power supply magnetic contactor is
Replace the magnetic contractor.
faulty.
A ground fault has occurred in the
Check the output wiring.
Ground Trip inverter output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
Reduce the load or operation
The motor has overheated.
frequency.
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model
rated capacity. that has increased capacity.
E-Thermal The set value for electronic thermal Set an appropriate electronic thermal
protection is too low. level.
Replace the motor with a model that
The inverter has been operated at low
supplies extra power to the cooling
speed for an extended duration.
fan.
The magnetic contactor on the output Check the magnetic contactor on the
Out Phase side has a connection fault. output side.
Open
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
The magnetic contactor on the input Check the magnetic contactor on the
side has a connection fault. input side.
In Phase The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.
Open
Replace the DC link capacitor.
The DC link capacitor needs to be
Contact the retailer or the L&T E&A
replaced.
customer service center.
The load is greater than the rated motor Replace the motor and inverter with
Inverter OLT capacity. models that have increased capacity.
The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
Determine if a foreign object is
There is a problem with the cooling
obstructing the air inlet, outlet, or
system.
vent.
Over Heat The inverter cooling fan has been
Replace the cooling fan.
operated for an extended period.
Keep the ambient temperature below
The ambient temperature is too high.
50 ℃.
Hx2000 AC Drive 511

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Output wiring is short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
Over Do not operate the inverter. Contact
Current2 There is a fault with the electronic
the retailer or the L&T E&A customer
semiconductor (IGBT).
service center.
Keep the ambient temperature
The ambient temperature is too low.
above -10 ℃.
NTC Open
There is a fault with the internal Contact the retailer or the L&T E&A
temperature sensor. customer service center.
A foreign object is obstructing the fan’s Remove the foreign object from the
Fan Lock air vent. air inlet or outlet.
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults

When a fault other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occurs, refer to the
following table for possible causes and remedies.
Type Cause Remedy

Stop the inverter to change to
The inverter is in operation (driving
program mode and set the
mode).
parameter.
Check the correct parameter
The parameter access is incorrect.
access level and set the parameter.
Parameters
cannot be set. Check the password, disable the
The password is incorrect. parameter lock and set the
parameter.
Check the power input to resolve
Low voltage is detected. the low voltage and set the
parameter.
The frequency command source is Check the frequency command
set incorrectly. source setting.
The operation command source is set Check the operation command
The motor does incorrectly. source setting.
not rotate.
Power is not supplied to the terminal Check the terminal connections
R/S/T. R/S/T and U/V/W.
The charge lamp is turned off. Turn on the inverter.
512 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Turn on the operation command.
The operation command is off.
(RUN).
Unlock the motor or lower the load
The motor is locked.
level.
The load is too high. Operate the motor independently.
An emergency stop signal is input. Reset the emergency stop signal.
The wiring for the control circuit Check the wiring for the control
terminal is incorrect. circuit terminal.
The input option for the frequency Check the input option for the
command is incorrect. frequency command.
The input voltage or current for the Check the input voltage or current
frequency command is incorrect. for the frequency command.
The PNP/NPN mode is selected
Check the PNP/NPN mode setting.
incorrectly.
Check the frequency command
The frequency command value is too
and input a value above the
low.
minimum frequency.
Check that the stop state is normal,
The [OFF] key is pressed.
if so resume operation normally.
Increase the volume of the torque
boost. If the fault remains, replace
Motor torque is too low.
the inverter with a model with
increased capacity.
Determine if the cable on the output
The wiring for the motor output cable
side is wired correctly to the phase
is incorrect.
The motor (U/V/W) of the motor.
rotates in the The signal connection between the
opposite control circuit terminal
direction to the (forward/reverse rotation) of the Check the forward/reverse rotation
command. inverter and the forward/reverse wiring.
rotation signal on the control panel
side is incorrect.
Reverse rotation prevention is Remove the reverse rotation
The motor only selected. prevention.
rotates in one The reverse rotation signal is not Check the input signal associated
direction. provided, even when a 3-wire with the 3-wire operation and adjust
sequence is selected. as necessary.
Hx2000 AC Drive 513

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Reduce the load.
Increase the Acc/Dec time.
Check the motor parameters and
The load is too heavy. set the correct values.
Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with appropriate
capacity for the load.
The ambient temperature of the motor Lower the ambient temperature of
is too high. the motor.
The motor is Use a motor that can withstand
overheating. phase-to-phase voltages surges
greater than the maximum surge
voltage.
The phase-to-phase voltage of the
Only use motors suitable for
motor is insufficient.
apllications with inverters.
Connect the AC reactor to the
inverter output (set the carrier
frequency to 3 kHz).
The motor fan has stopped or the fan Check the motor fan and remove
is obstructed with debris. any foreign objects.
Reduce the load.
Increase the volume of the torque
boost.
The load is too high.
The motor Replace the motor and the inverter
stops during with models with capacity
acceleration. appropriate for the load.
If the output current exceeds the
The current is too big. rated load, decrease the torque
boost.
The motor Reduce the load.

stops when Replace the motor and the inverter
The load is too high.
connected to with models with capacity
load. appropriate for the load.
The motor does The frequency command value is low. Set an appropriate value.
not accelerate. Reduce the load and increase the
/The The load is too high. acceleration time. Check the
acceleration mechanical brake status.
514 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

time is too long. The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time.
The combined values of the motor
Change the motor related
properties and the inverter parameter
parameters.
are incorrect.
The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
acceleration is low.
The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
operation is low.
Replace the motor and inverter with
There is a high variance in load.
models with increased capacity.
Motor speed
varies during The input voltage varies. Reduce input voltage variation.
operation.
Motor speed variations occur at a Adjust the output frequency to
specific frequency. avoid a resonance area.
The motor
rotation is Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for
The V/F pattern is set incorrectly.
different from the motor specification.
the setting.
The deceleration time is set too long. Change the setting accordingly.
The motor
deceleration If motor parameters are normal, it is
time is too long likely to be a motor capacity fault.
The motor torque is insufficient.
even with Replace the motor with a model
Dynamic with increased capacity.
Braking (DB)
The load is higher than the internal
resistor Replace the inverter with a model
torque limit determined by the rated
connected. with increased capacity.
current of the inverter.
While the
inverter is in Change the carrier frequency to the
operation, a Noise occurs due to switching inside minimum value.
control unit the inverter.
malfunctions or Install a micro surge filter in the
noise occurs. inverter output.
Connect the inverter to a ground
When the terminal.
inverter is
An earth leakage breaker will interrupt Check that the ground resistance is
operating, the
the supply if current flows to ground less than 100Ω for 200 V inverters
earth leakage
during inverter operation. and less than 10Ω for 400 V
breaker is
activated. inverters.
Hx2000 AC Drive 515

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Check the capacity of the earth
leakage breaker and make the
appropriate connection, based on
the rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.
The motor Check the input voltage and
vibrates balance the voltage.
Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase
severely and
power source is not balanced. Check and test the motor’s
does not rotate
normally. insulation.
Resonance occurs between the

Slightly increase or decrease the
motor's natural frequency and the
carrier frequency.
carrier frequency.
The motor
makes Slightly increase or decrease the
humming, or Resonance occurs between the carrier frequency.
loud noises. motor's natural frequency and the Use the frequency jump function to
inverter’s output frequency. avoid the frequency band where
resonance occurs.
In situations of noise inflow on the
The frequency input command is an analog input side that results in
external, analog command. command interference, change the
The motor input filter time constant (IN-07).
vibrates/hunts. Ensure that the total cable length
The wiring length between the between the inverter and the motor
inverter and the motor is too long. is less than 200 m (50 m for motors
rated 3.7 kW or lower).
The motor does Adjust the DC braking parameter.
not come to a
It is difficult to decelerate sufficiently, Increase the set value for the DC
complete stop
because DC braking is not operating braking current.
when the
normally.
inverter output Increase the set value for the DC
stops. braking stopping time.
The output The frequency reference is within the Set the frequency reference higher
frequency does jump frequency range. than the jump frequency range.
not increase to The frequency reference is exceeding Set the upper limit of the frequency
the frequency the upper limit of the frequency command higher than the
reference. command. frequency reference.
516 Hx2000 AC Drive

Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Because the load is too heavy, the Replace the inverter with a model
stall prevention function is working. with increased capacity.
The cooling fan The control parameter for the cooling Check the control parameter
does not rotate. fan is set incorrectly. setting for the cooling fan.
Hx2000 AC Drive 517

Maintenance
STYLEREF Chapter \* MERGE

10 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to complete,
and how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental
conditions and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns,
please follow the maintenance recommendations in this section.
• Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual.
• Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off.
• Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or detergents
may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists
10.1.1 Daily Inspection

Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection
area item details method standard equipment
Is the ambient No icing
temperature and (ambient
humidity within Refer to 1.3 temperature: -10 Thermome-
Ambient the design Installation - +50) and no ter,
environment range, and is Considerations condensation hygrometer,
there any dust on page 5 (ambient recorder
or foreign humidity below
objects present? 90%)
Is there any
All
abnormal Visual
Inverter No abnormality
vibration or inspection
noise?
Measure
Are the input voltages Refer to 11.1
Digital
Power and output between R/ S/ Input and Output
multimeter
voltage voltages T-phases in. Specifications on
tester
normal? the inverter page 526
terminal block.
518 Hx2000 AC Drive

Maintenance
Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection

area item details method standard equipment
Is there any
leakage from Visual
Input/Out- Smoothing the inside? inspection No abnormality -
put circuit capacitor
Is the capacitor
swollen?
Turn off the
Is there any system and
Cooling abnormal check Fan rotates
Cooling fan -
system vibration or operation by smoothly
noise? rotating the fan
manually.
Voltmeter,
Check the Check and
Measuring Is the display ammeter,
Display display value manage
device value normal? etc.
on the panel. specified values.
Is there any
abnormal Visual
vibration or inspection
Motor All noise? No abnormality -
Check for
Is there any
overheating or
abnormal smell?
damage.
10.1.2 Annual Inspection

Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
Inspection details
area item method standard equipment
Disconnect
inverter and
short
Megger test R/S/T/U/V/W
(between terminals,
Input/ DC 500 V
input/output and then Must be
Output All Megger
terminals and measure above 5 MΩ
circuit
and earth from each
terminal) terminal to
the ground
terminal
using a
Hx2000 AC Drive 519

Maintenance
STYLEREF
Inspection Chapter \* MERGE Inspection
Inspection Judgment Inspection
Inspection details
Megger.
Is there anything
Tighten all
loose in the
screws.
device? No
Is there any abnormality
Visual
evidence of parts
inspection
overheating?
Are there any
corroded
cables? Visual
Cable No
inspection -
connections Is there any abnormality
damage to cable
insulation?
Visual
Terminal Is there any No
inspection -
block damage? abnormality
Measure Measure with

Rated
Smoothing electrostatic capacity Capacity
capacity over
condenser capacity. meter. meter
85%
Is there any
Visual
chattering noise
inspection
during
operation? No
Relay -
abnormality
Is there any Visual
damage to the inspection
contacts?
Is there any Visual
No
damage from inspection
abnormality
resistance? Digital
Braking
resistor Disconnect Must be within multimeter /
Check for one side and ±10% of the anaog tester
disconnection. measure with rated value of
a tester. the resistor.
Check for output Measure Balance the
Control
voltage voltage voltage Digital
circuit Operation
imbalance while between the between multimeter or
Protection check
the inverter is in inverter phases: within DC voltmeter
circuit
operation. output 4 V for 200 V
520 Hx2000 AC Drive

Maintenance

Inspection details
terminal U/ V/ series and
W. within 8 V for
400 V series.
Test the
inverter
Is there an error
output The circuit
in the display
protection in must work
circuit after the
both short according to
sequence
and open the sequence.
protection test?
circuit
conditions.
Check all
connected
Cooling Are any of the No
Cooling fan parts and -
system fan parts loose? abnormality
tighten all
screws.
Check the
Specified and
command
Display Is the display managed Voltmeter,
Display value on the
device value normal? values must Ammeter, etc.
display
match.
device.
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspection

Inspection details
Disconnect
Megger test the cables for
Insulation (between the terminals Must be DC 500 V
Motor
resistance input, output and U/V/ W and above 5 MΩ Megger
earth terminals) test the
wiring.
Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in
damage to the product.
Hx2000 AC Drive 521

Maintenance

10.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement
A CR2032 Lithium-Manganese battery to power the inverter’s built-in RTC (real time clock)
is installed on the main PCB. When the battery charge is low, a low battery voltage level
warning is given on the keypad display.
The RTC feature and any other features related to the RTC feature, such as the time event
control, do not work properly when the battery runs out. Refer to the following battery
specifications when a battery replacement is required.
RTC Battery Specifications
Model type: CR 2032 (lithium-manganese)
Nominal voltage: 3 V
Nominal capacity: 220 mAh
Operating temperature range: -20–80 degrees C
Life span (approximately): 53,300 hrs (inverter on) / 25,800 hrs (inverter off)
Follow the instructions below to replace the RTC battery.
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic
components on the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the
components on the PCB with bare hands while you work on the main PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge
any electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a
metal object.
522 Hx2000 AC Drive

Maintenance
1 Turn off the inverter and make sure that DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level.
2 Loosen the screw on the power cover then remove the power cover.
3 Remove the keypad from the inverter body.
Hx2000 AC Drive 523

Maintenance

4 Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The
main PCB is exposed.
5 Locate the RTC battery holder on the main PCB, and replace the battery.
0.75–90 kW Models
6 Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body
Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before
opening the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.
524 Hx2000 AC Drive

Maintenance
10.3 Storage and Disposal
10.3.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation
(Refer to 1.3 Installation Considerationson page 5).
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between -10 ˚C
and 30 ˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
• Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture
level below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.
• Do not allow the inverter to be exposed to dusty or humid environments. If the inverter
is installed in such environments (for example, a construction site) and the inverter will
be unused for an extended period, remove the inverter and store it in a safe place.
10.3.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable
materials are included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing
materials and all metal parts can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can
be incinerated under contolled conditions in some regions.
If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging
characteristics and are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and allow
the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.
Hx2000 AC Drive 525

Technical Specification
11 Technical Specification
11.1 Input and Output Specifications

Three Phase 200 V (0.75–3.7 kW)
Model LTVF-H2□□□□BAA 0005 0008 0012 0016
Applied Motor HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0

kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Rated Rated Capacity (kVA) 1.9 3.0 4.5 6.1
output
Rated Three-Phase 5 8 12 16
Current (A)
Single- 2.9 4.4 6.4 8.4
Phase
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 200–240 V
Rated Working Three- 3-Phase 200–240 VAC (-15%–+10%)
input Voltage (V) Phase
Single- 1-Phase 240 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Phase
Input Three- 50–60 Hz (5%)
Frequency Phase
Single- 50–60 Hz (5%)
Phase
Rated Current (A) 4.9 8.4 12.9 17.5
Weight (kg) 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V
inverters are based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
526 Hx2000 AC Drive

Model LTVF-H2□□□□BAA 0022 0030 0042 0056 0069
Applied Motor HP 7.5 10 15 20 25
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Rated Rated Capacity (kVA) 8.4 11.4 16.0 21.3 26.3

output
Rated Three-Phase 22 30 42 56 69
Current
(A) Single-Phase 11 16 23 30 37
Rated Working Three-Phase 3-Phase 200–240 VAC (-15%–+10%)

input Voltage (V)
Single-Phase 1-Phase 240 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Input Three-Phase 50–60 Hz (5%)
Frequency
Single-Phase 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated Current (A) 23.7 32.7 46.4 62.3 77.2
Weight (kg) 3.3 3.3 3.3 4.6 7.1

Hx2000 AC Drive 527

Model LTVF-H4□□□□BAA 0002 0004 0006 0008
Applied Motor HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0

kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Rated Rated Capacity (kVA) 1.9 3.0 4.5 6.1
output
Rated Three-Phase 2.5 4 6 8
Current (A)
Single- 1.6 2.4 3.5 4.6
Phase
input Voltage (V) Phase
Phase
Frequency Phase
Single- 50–60 Hz (5%)
Phase
Rated Current (A) 2.4 4.2 6.5 8.7
Weight (kg) 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
528 Hx2000 AC Drive

Three Phase 400 V (5.5–22 kW)
Model LTVF-H4□□□□BAA 0012 0016 0024 0030 0038 0045
Applied Motor HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Rated Rated Capacity(kVA) 9.1 12.2 18.3 23.0 29.0 34.3
output
Rated Three-Phase 12 16 24 30 38 45
Current(A)
Single- 6.8 9.2 14 17 22 26
Phase
Output Voltage(V) 3-Phase 380–480 V
input Voltage(V) Phase
Phase
Frequency Phase
Single- 50–60 Hz (5%)
Phase
Rated Current(A) 12.2 17.5 26.5 33.4 42.5 50.7
Weight(kg) 3.3 3.3 3.4 4.6 4.8 7.5
Hx2000 AC Drive 529

Model LTVF-H4□□□□BAA 0061 0075 0091 0107 0142 0169
Applied Motor HP 40 50 60 75 100 120
kW 30 37 45 55 75 90
Rated Rated Capacity (kVA) 46.5 57.1 69.4 82.0 108.2 128.8
output
Rated Three-Phase 61 75 91 107 142 169
Current (A)
Single-Phase 36 39 47 55 73 86
Rated Working Three-Phase 3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)

input Voltage (V)
Single-Phase 1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Input Three-Phase 50–60 Hz (5%)

Frequency
Single-Phase 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated Current (A) 69.1 69.3 84.6 100.1 133.6 160.0
Weight (kg) 7.5 26 35 35 43 43

530 Hx2000 AC Drive

11.2 Product Specification Details

Items Description
Control Control method V/F control, Slip compensation.
Frequency Digital command: 0.01 Hz

settings power Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)
resolution
Frequency 1% of maximum output frequency.
accuracy
V/F pattern Linear, square reduction, user V/F.
Overload capacity Rated current: 120% 1 min.
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost.
Operation Operation type Select key pad, terminal strip, or communication

operation.
Frequency Analog type: -10–10 V, 0–10 V, 0–20 mA
settings Digital type: key pad, pulse train input
Operation function PID control Up-down operation
3-wire operation DC braking
Frequency limit Frequency jump
Second function Slip compensation
Anti-forward and reverse Automatic restart
direction rotation Automatic tuning
Commercial transition Energy buffering
Speed search Flux braking
Power braking Energy Saving
Leakage reduction
Input Multi Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode. Functions can
function be set according to IN-65- IN-71 codes and parameter
terminal settings.
(7EA)
P1-P7 Forward direction Reverse direction operation
operation External trip
Reset Jog operation
Emergency stop Multi step acc/dec-
Multi step speed high/med/low
frequency-high/med/low Second motor selection
DC braking during stop Frequency reduction
Frequency increase Fix analog command
3-wire frequency
Select acc/dec/stop Transtion from PID to
Hx2000 AC Drive 531

Items Description
MMC Interlock general operation Pre Heat
Pump Cleaning
RTC(Time Event)
Pulse 0–32 kHz, Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V

train
Output Multi Fault output and inverter Less than DC 26 V, 50 mA
function operation status output
open
collector
terminal
Fault N.O.: Less than AC 250 V
signal 2A, DC 30 V, 3A
relay N.C.: Less than AC 250 V
terminal 1A, DC 30 V 1A
Multi Less than AC 250 V, 5 A
function Less than DC 30 V, 5 A
relay
terminal
Analog 0–12 Vdc (0–20 mA): Select frequency, output current,
output output voltage, DC terminal voltage, and others.
Pulse Maximum 32 kHz, 0–12 V
train
Protection Trip Over current trip Over voltage trip
function External signal trip Temperature sensor trip
ARM short circuit current Inverter over heat
trip Option trip
Over heat trip Output imaging trip
Input imaging trip Inverter overload trip
Ground trip Fan trip
Motor over heat trip Low voltage trip during
I/O board link trip operation
No motor trip Low voltage trip
Parameter writing trip Analog input error
Emergency stop trip Motor overload trip
Command loss trip Pipe broken trip
External memory error Keypad command lost trip
CPU watchdog trip Damper trip
Motor under load trip Level Detect trip
MMC Interlock trip
PumpCleannig trip
532 Hx2000 AC Drive

Items Description
Alarm Command loss trip alarm, overload alarm, normal load
alarm, inverter overload alarm, fan operation alarm,
resistance braking rate alarm, Capacitor life alarm, Pump
Clean alarm, Fire Mode Alarm, LDT Alarm.
Instantaneous Less than 8 ms: Continue Operation (must be within the
blackout rated input voltage and rated output range)
More than 8 ms: Auto restart operation
Structure/ Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure
working
Protection IP 20, UL Open & Enclosed Type 1 (option)
environment
structure (UL Enclosed Type 1 is satisfied by conduit installation
option.)
Ambient -10 ℃–50 ℃ (2.5% current derating is applied above
temperature 40 ℃)
No ice or frost should be present.
Working under normal load at 50 ℃ (122 F), it is
recommended that less than 75% load is applied.
Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to avoid
condensation forming)
Storage -20 C-65 C (-4–149 F)
temperature.
Surrounding Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable
environment gases, oil stains, dust, and other pollutants (Pollution
Degree 3 Environment).
Operation No higher than 3,280 ft (1,000 m). Less than 9.8 m/sec2
altitude/oscillation (1.0 G).
Pressure 70-106 kPa
Hx2000 AC Drive 533

11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type)

0.75–30 kW (3-phase)
37–90 kW (3-phase)
534 Hx2000 AC Drive

nits: mm
Items W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
H20005BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H20008BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H20012BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H20016BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
3-
phase H20022BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
200 V
H20030BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H20042BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H20056BAA 180 157 290 273.7 11.3 205.3 5 5 -
H20069BAA 220 193.8 350 331 13 223.2 6 6 -
H40002BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H40004BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H40006BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H40008BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H40012BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -

H40016BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
H40024BAA 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
3-
phase H40030BAA 180 157 290 273.7 11.3 205.3 5 5 -
400 V H40038BAA 180 157 290 273.7 11.3 205.3 5 5 -
H40045BAA 220 193.8 350 331 13 223.2 6 6 -
H40061BAA 220 193.8 350 331 13 223.2 6 6 -
H40075BAA 275 232 450 428.5 14 284 7 7 -
H40091BAA 325 282 510 486.5 16 284 7 7 -
H40107BAA 325 282 510 486.5 16 284 7 7 -
H40142BAA 325 275 550 524.5 16 309 9 9 -
H40169BAA 325 275 550 524.5 16 309 9 9 -
Hx2000 AC Drive 535

Units : inches
Items W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
H20005BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H20008BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H20012BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
3- H20016BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -

phase H20022BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
200 V
H20030BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H20042BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H20056BAA 7.09 6.18 11.42 10.78 0.45 8.08 0.20 0.20 -
H20069BAA 8.66 7.63 13.78 13.03 0.51 8.79 0.24 0.24 -
H40002BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H40004BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H40006BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H40008BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H40012BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -

H40016BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
H40024BAA 6.30 5.39 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
3-
Phase H40030BAA 7.09 6.18 11.42 10.78 0.45 8.08 0.20 0.20 -
400 V H40038BAA 7.09 6.18 11.42 10.78 0.45 8.08 0.20 0.20 -
H40045BAA 8.66 7.63 13.78 13.03 0.51 8.79 0.24 0.24 -
H40061BAA 8.66 7.63 13.78 13.03 0.51 8.79 0.24 0.24 -
H40075BAA 10.83 9.13 17.72 168.70 0.55 11.18 0.28 0.28 -
H40091BAA 12.80 11.10 20.08 191.54 0.63 11.18 0.28 0.28 -
H40107BAA 12.80 11.10 20.08 191.54 0.63 11.18 0.28 0.28 -
H40142BAA 12.80 10.83 21.65 206.50 0.63 12.17 0.35 0.35 -
H40169BAA 12.80 10.83 21.65 206.50 0.63 12.17 0.35 0.35 -
536 Hx2000 AC Drive

11.4 Peripheral Devices

Compatible Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models.
Circuit Breaker
Magnetic Contactor
Product (kW) MPCB/MCCB
Model Rated Current(A) Model Rated Current(A)
0.75 MOG-S1/ MOG-H1 20 9
1.5 11 - 16 18
2.2 MOG-H1 14 - 20 18
3.7 24 - 32 25
3-Phase
5.5 28 - 40 MNX 40
200 V MOG-H2
7.5 35 - 50 45
11 80 70
DN0-100M
15 100 80
18.5 DN1-160M 125 110
0.75 4 – 6.3 9
1.5 MOG-S1/ MOG-H1 6.3 - 10 9
2.2 6.3 - 10 9
3.7 11 - 16 18
5.5 MOG-H1 14 - 20 18
7.5 24 - 32 25
11 28 - 40 40
15 MOG-H2 35 - 50 45
3-Phase
18.5 45 - 63 MNX 50
400 V
22 80 70
DN0-100M
30 100 80
37 125 110
DN1-160M
45 160 140
200
55 185
DN2-250M
75 250 225
90 DN3-400M 320 265
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined
in IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LTVF-Hx2000 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering
not more than 100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the
selected MCCB.
Hx2000 AC Drive 537

11.5 Fuse and Reactors Specifications

AC Input Fuse AC reactor DC Reactor
Products (kW) Current Voltage Inductance Current Inductance Current
(A) (V) (mH) (A) (mH) (A)
0.75 10 2.02 5 4.04 5
1.5 10 1.26 8 2.53 8
2.2 15 0.78 12 1.68 12
3.7 20 0.59 16 1.26 16
3-Phase
5.5 50 0.43 24 0.93 25
200 V
7.5 63 0.31 33 0.73 32
11 80 0.22 46 0.53 50
15 100 0.16 62 0.32 62
18.5 125 0.13 77 0.29 80
0.75 10 8.09 2.5 16.17 3
1.5 10 5.05 4 10.11 4
2.2 15 3.37 6 6.74 6
3.7 20 600[V] 2.25 9 5.05 8
5.5 32 1.56 13 3.56 13
7.5 35 1.16 17 2.53 18
11 50 0.76 27 1.64 26
3-Phase 15 63 0.61 33 1.42 33
400 V 18.5 70 0.48 43 0.98 42
22 100 0.40 51 0.88 50
30 0.29 69 0.59 68
125
37 0.29 69
45 160 0.24 85
55 200 0.20 100 Built-In
75 250 0.15 134
90 350 0.13 160
Use Class H or RK5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only. See the table above for
the Voltage and Current rating of the fuse and the breaker.
538 Hx2000 AC Drive

11.6 Terminal Screw Specifications

Input/Output Termianl Screw Specification
Product (kW) Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Kgfc m/Nm)

0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7 M4 7.1–12.2/0.7–1.2
3-Phase
5.5
200 V
7.5
11
15
M5 24.5~31.8/2.4~3.1
18.5
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
M4 7.1–12.2/0.7–1.2
5.5
7.5
11
3-Phase 15
400 V 18.5
M5 24.5~31.8/2.4~3.1
22
30
37
45
55 M8 61.2–91.8/6–9
75
90
Hx2000 AC Drive 539

Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification
Terminal Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque(Kgfcm/Nm)

P1–
P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/AO/Q1/EG/
M2 2.2–2.5/0.22–0.25
24/TI/TO/SA,SB,SC/S+,S-
,SG
A1/B1/C1 M2.6 4.0/0.4
Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short circuits
and malfuctions. Use copper wires only with 600 V, 90 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring,
and 300 V, 75 ℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
540 Hx2000 AC Drive

11.7 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating

Derating by carrier frequency
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency. Refer
to the following graph.
<200[V], 0.75[kW]–18.5[kW], 400[V] 0.75–30[kW] Current Derating Rate>
<400[V] 37–90[kW] Current Derating Rate >
Hx2000 AC Drive 541

200 V 400 V
Item Unit
0.75–18.5 kW 0.75–18.5 kW 22–30 kW 37–55 kW 75–90 kW
fs,def kHz 3 3 3 3 3
fs,c kHz 8 8 8 - -
fs,max kHz 15 15 15 10 7
DR1 % % 70 65 65 - -
DR2 % % 60 55 50 60 55
*fs, def: Switching frequency for continued operation
fs, c: Switching frequency where the first current derating ends.
fs.max: The maximum switching frequency (where the second current derating begins)
542 Hx2000 AC Drive

Derating by Input Voltage
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage. Refer to
the following graph.
Derating by Ambient Temperature and Installation Type
Ambient temperature and installation type determine the constant-rated current of the
inverter. Refer to the following graph. A 2.5% current derating is applied during operation
when the ambient temperature is above 40℃. The inverter must be operated at less than
75% of its rated capacity when the ambient temperature is above 50℃.
Hx2000 AC Drive 543

Applying Drives to Single-
phase Input Application
12 Applying Drives to Single-phase Input

Application
12.1 Introduction
LTVF-Hx2000 is a three-phase standard variable frequency drive(VFD). When applying
single-phase power to a three-phase VFD, there are several constraints that need to be
considered. Standard Pulse-Width-Modulated (PWM) VFDs use a 6-pulse diode rectifier.
The 6-pulse rectification results in 360 Hz DC bus ripple when used with a three-phase 50-
60 Hz supply.
However, under single-phase use, the DC bus ripple becomes 120 Hz and the VFDs DC
bus circuit is subject to higher stress in order to deliver equivalent power.
Additionally, input currents and harmonics increase beyond those encountered with three-
phase input.
Input current distortion of 90% THD and greater can be expected under single-phase input,
compared to approximately 40% with three-phase input as indicated in Figure 2.
Therefore, single-phase use requires the three-phase VFD power rating be reduced
(derated) to avoid over stressing the rectifier and DC link components.
Figure-1 Typical Three-Phase Configuration
544 Hx2000 AC Drive

Figure-2 Typical Single-Phase Configuration
12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current

When using a three-phase VFD with single-phase input, derating the drive’s output current
and horsepower will be necessary because of the increase in DC bus ripple voltage and
current.
In addition, the input current through the remaining two phases on the diode bridge
converter will approximately double, creating another derating consideration for the VFD.
Input current harmonic distortion will increase beyond that with a three-phase supply
making the overall input power factor low. Input current distortion over 100% is likely under
single-phase conditions without a reactor.
Therefore, the reactor is always required. When using a motor that is selected by the three-
phase drive rating criteria when using single-phase input, it may result in poor performance,
premature drive failure. The selected drive of single-phase current ratings must meet or
exceed the motor current rating.
Hx2000 AC Drive 545

12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance

The single-phase current ratings are valid for 60Hz input only.
The AC supply voltage must be within the required voltage range of 240/480Vac +10% to –
5% to maximize motor power production. Standard product with three-phase voltage input
has an allowable range of +10% to –15%. Therefore, a stricter input voltage tolerance of
+10 to –5% applies when using the drive with a single-phase supply. The average bus
voltage with single-phase input is lower than the equivalent of a three-phase input.
Therefore, the maximum output voltage (motor voltage) will be lower with a single-phase
input. The minimum input voltage must be no less than 228Vac for 240 volt models and
456Vac for 480 volt models, to ensure motor voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac,
respectively.
Thus, if full motor torque must be developed near base speed (full power) it will be
necessary to maintain a rigid incoming line voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be
produced. Operating a motor at reduced speed (reduced power), or using a motor with a
base voltage that is lower than the incoming AC supply rating (ex. 208Vac motor with a
240Vac supply), will also minimize the effect of voltage deprivation. (240VAC Input 208V
motor, 480VAC Input 400V motor)
546 Hx2000 AC Drive

12.4 Wiring
Please connect single-phase input to R (L1) and T(L3).
Figure-3 Terminal Wiring Diagram
12.5 Precautions for 1–phase input to 3-phase drive

• Please connect single-phase input to R (L1) and T (L3).
• AC or DC reactor is necessary to reduce DC ripple. Please select built-in reactor type
for 37~90kW. For 0.75~30kW, external AC or DC reactor should be installed.
• Same peripheral devices (including a fuse and reactor) as 3 phases can be used for
single phase as well.
• If phase open trip occurs, please turn off the input phase open protection (PRT-05).
• Protection for output current like OCT or IOLT is based on 3-phase input ratings which
is larger than single-phase input. User should set the parameters that are relative to
motor information (BAS-11~16), overload trip (PRT-17~22) and E-thermal functions
(PRT-40~43).
• The minimum input voltage must be larger than 228Vac for 240Vac supply and 456Vac for
480Vac supply to ensure motor voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac, respectively.
• To minimize the effect of voltage deprivation, please choose 208Vac motor for 240Vac
supply and 400Vac motor for 480Vac supply.
Hx2000 AC Drive 547

UL mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that
UL has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL
standards for product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all
components inside the product had been certified for UL standards as well.
Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handing Conditioned Air
CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety
and environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for
machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the
EMC guidelines for safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive
We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-
1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment
used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers
requirements stated for drives.
EAC mark
The EAC (EurAsian Conformity) mark is applied to the products before they are placed on
the market of the Eurasian Customs Union member states.
It indicates the compliance of the products with the following technical regulations and
requirements of the Eurasian Customs Union:
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 004/2011 “On safety of low voltage
equipment”
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 020/2011 “On electromagnetic compatibility of
technical products”
548 Hx2000 AC Drive

Hx2000 AC Drive 549
Index
S-curve pattern ................................................. 109
[ Acc/Dec reference .................................................................... 105
[AUTO] key ........................................................................................ 46 Delta Freq.......................................................... 104

Max Freq ........................................................... 104
[DOWN] key ..................................................................................... 46
Acc/Dec reference frequency ........................................... 103
[ESC] key............................................................................................ 46 Ramp T Mode ................................................... 103
[HAND] key ....................................................................................... 46 Acc/Dec stop ........................................................................ 72, 111
[LEFT] key.......................................................................................... 46 Acc/Dec time ................................................................................. 103
[Mode] key ......................................................................................... 46 Acc/Dec time switch frequency ....................... 107
[MULTI] key ....................................................................................... 46 configuration via multi-function terminal ......... 106
maximum frequency ........................................ 103
[MULTI] key configuration ....................................................... 48
operation frequency ......................................... 105
[OFF] key ............................................................................................ 46 Acc/Dec time configuration .................................................... 72
[PROG / Ent] key .......................................................................... 46 accelerating start ........................................................................... 73
[RIGHT] key ...................................................................................... 46 add User group
[UP] key ............................................................................................... 46 UserGrp SelKey ............................................... 240
ADV (advanced) ............................................................................ 53
２ ADV (Expanded funtction group) ................................... 395
advanced features group ........................................................ 53
24 terminal ................................................................................ 34, 36
Advanced function group .. Refer to ADV (advanced)
2nd motor operation................................................................... 230 function group
2nd operation mode ................................................................... 127 analog frequency hold............................................................... 93
2nd command source ........................................ 127 analog hold...........................................................93
Shared command (Main Source) .................... 128 analog hold .....................Refer to analog frequency hold
Shared command (Main Source))................... 128 analog input ............................................................................. 33, 53
I2 current input .....................................................87
３ I2 voltage input.....................................................89
TI pulse input........................................................90
3-wire operation .......................................................................... 143 V1 voltage input ...................................................81
analog input selection switch (SW2) ............................... 89
４ analog input selection switch (SW4) ............................... 31
4-pole standard motor .............526, 527, 528, 529, 530 analog output ....................................................................... 34, 285
AO terminal ..........................................................34
pulse output....................................................... 289
Ａ
voltage and current output ............................... 285
A terminal (Normally Open) ................................................ 129 analog output selection switch (SW5)................ 31, 285
A1/C1/B1 terminal ........................................................................ 35 anti-hunting regulation ............................................................ 218
AC power input terminal ..........Refer to R/S/T terminal AO terminal ........................................................................... 34, 285
Acc/Dec pattern ................................................................. 72, 109 analog output selection switch (SW5) ...............31
linear pattern...................................................... 109 AP1 (Application 1 function group)................................ 453
550 Hx2000 AC Drive

AP1 (Application1 function group) .................................... 53 MAC ID/Sevice object Instance ...................... 370
Max Master Property........................................ 370
AP2 (Application 2 function group)....................... 53, 460
multi-state input object ..................................... 378
AP3 (Application 3 function group)....................... 53, 464 multi-state object............................................... 373
ARM short current fault trip ....Refer to Over Current2 object map ........................................................... 371
asymmetric ground power...................................................... 37 parameter setup ............................................... 368
asymmetric ground structure protocol .............................................................. 367
protocol implement ........................................... 370
disabling the EMC filter....................................... 37
quick start .......................................................... 368
asynchronous communications system .................... 334
BACnet object
auto restart...................................................................................... 226 analog ................................................................ 372
auto restart settings .......................................... 226 analog input....................................................... 374
auto torque boost ....................................................................... 117 binary ................................................................. 373
auto torque boost 1 ........................................... 117 binary input........................................................ 376
auto torque boost 2 ........................................... 117 error message................................................... 378
auto tuning ......................................................... 200 multi-state .......................................................... 373
multi-state input................................................. 378
auto tuning .......................................................................... 200, 393
BAS (Basic group) ....................................................................... 53
All (rotating)........................................................ 202
All (static) ........................................................... 202 basic configuration diagram............................................ 14
default parameter setting ................................. 201 Basic group ........ Refer to BAS (Basic function group)
automatic reset after a trip ...................................................... 72 basic operation ............................................................................... 45
automatic start-up at power-on ........................................... 72 battery replacement ................................................................. 522
automatic torque boost ............................................................. 73 bipolar........................................................................................... 34, 84
auto-tuning ...................................................................................... 200 bit 129
auxiliary command source ..................................................... 74 bit (Off) ............................................................... 129
bit (On) ............................................................... 129
auxiliary frequency .................................................................... 134
bit setting ........................................................... 129
auxiliary frequency reference configuration.... 135 multi-function input setting .......................129, 130
auxiliary reference............................................. 134 multi-function output setting............................. 297
auxiliary reference gain .................................... 135 Reset Restart configuration ......................... 227
final command frequency calculation.............. 136 speed search configuration ............................. 224
main reference .................................................. 134 stall prevention ...................................................311
auxiliary motor PID compensation..................... 274, 276 brake unit ......................................................................................... 284
braking resistor ............................................................................... 28
Ｂ braking resistors............................................................................. 14
B terminal (Normally Closed) ............................................ 129 built-in communication ............................. Refer to RS-485
BACnet .................................................................................. 336, 367 BX ............................................................................................. 332, 506
analog input object............................................ 374
analog value object ........................................... 372 Ｃ
binary input object ............................................. 376
binary object ...................................................... 373 cable....................................................................10, 24, 25, 26, 31
communication standard.................................. 367 ground cable specifications ................................10
data link layer .................................................... 370 power cable specifications..................................10
defining............................................................... 367 selection ..................................... 10, 24, 25, 26, 31
error message ................................................... 378 shielded twisted pair ............................................42
Hx2000 AC Drive
551
목차
cable tie ................................................................................................ 35 keypad S/W version ....................................... 243
keypad title update......................................... 243
CAP. Warning ............................................................................... 508
LCD contrast ................................................... 243
carrier frequency......................................................................... 229 reset cumulative power consuption .......... 243
derating .............................................................. 541 Config mode .................................................................................. 484
factory default ................................................. 230
Config mode (CNF).................................................................. 485
charge indicator...................................................... 22, 504, 512
configuration mode ...................................................................... 52
charge lamp ...................................................................................... 22
considerations for installation
Circululation Pump (MC5) ................................................... 497 air pressure ............................................................5
cleaning ............................................................................................ 518 considerations for installation ............................................... 5
CleanRPTErr ................................................................................ 507 altitude/vibration .....................................................5
CM terminal.............................................................................. 33, 36 ambient humidity ...................................................5
ambient temperature .............................................5
COM (Communication function group) ......................... 53
environmental factors............................................5
command............................................................................................ 96 storing temperature ...............................................5
Cmd Source ........................................................ 96 Control group Refer to CON (control function group)
configuration ........................................................ 96 control terminal board wiring................................................. 31
command source cooling fan
fwd/rev command terminal................................. 97 cumulated fan operation time .......................... 302
keypad ................................................................. 96 fan control.......................................................... 233
RS-485 ................................................................. 99 fan malfunctions................................................ 323
commercial power source transition ............................ 232 initialize cumulated fan operation time ........... 302
common terminal ............................. Refer to EG terminal Cooling Tower (MC4) .............................................................. 496
communication ............................................................................ 334 cursor keys ........................................................................................ 46
BACnet............................................................... 367 [DOWN] key .........................................................46
command loss protective operation ................ 339 [LEFT] key ............................................................46
communication address ................................... 344 [RIGHT] key .........................................................46
communication line connection ....................... 335 [UP] key ................................................................46
communication parameters ............................. 336
communication speed ...................................... 336
communication standards ................................ 334
Ｄ
memory map ..................................................... 341 damper .............................................................................................. 176
parameter group for data transmission........... 342
Damper Err Trip ...................... Refer to Damper Err Trip
PLC .................................................................... 334
damper operation ...................................................................... 176
saving parameters defined by communication
....................................................................... 340 damper open delay time .................................. 177
setting virtual multi-function input .................... 340 DB resistor
Communication function group................Refer to COM braking resistor circuit ...................................... 320
(communication function group) DB Warn %ED.................................................. 320
communication system configuration .......................... 335 DB Warn %ED................................................................. 320, 508
compatible common area parameter .......................... 348 DC braking after start .............................................................. 119
Compressor (MC1)................................................................... 490 DC braking after stop .............................................................. 121
CON (Control function group) .................................. 53, 402 DC braking frequency............................................................. 121
Config (CNF) mode .................................................................. 243 DC link voltage............................................................................. 132

inverter S/W version....................................... 243 Dec valve ramping .................................................................... 189
552 Hx2000 AC Drive

deceleration stop ........................................................................... 73 EPID control
external PID ...................................................... 168
delta wiring......................................................................................... 37
EPID control group ...................................................................... 53
derating ............................................................................... 230, 541
ETH................... Refer to electronic thermal overheating
digital output................................................................................... 292 protection (ETH)
display ................................................................................................... 47 E-Thermal ....................................................................................... 505
command source ................................................ 47 Exception Date ............................................................................ 203
display mode table .............................................. 52
Exhaust Fan (MC3).................................................................. 494
display modes ..................................................... 51
frequency reference............................................ 47 external 24V power terminal ........ Refer to 24 terminal
operation mode ................................................... 47 External Trip................................................................................... 506
rotational direction ............................................... 47 external trip signal...................................................................... 315
disposal ................................................................................. 518, 525
draw operation ............................................................................. 132 Ｆ
Drive group ..............................Refer to DRV (Drive group)
falut trips ........................................................................................... 505
DRV (Drive function group) ................................................... 53
fan life estimation ....................................................................... 330
DRV (Drive group)..................................................................... 386
fan replacement level ....................................... 331
dwell operation............................................................................. 145
fan time .............................................................. 331
Acc/Dec dewel frequency ................................ 145
fan operation warning ............................................................. 333
acceleration dwell ............................................. 145
deceleration dwell ............................................. 145 fan replacement warning ...................................................... 509
dynamic braking (DB) resistor configuration .......... 320 Fan Trip ................................................................................. 323, 506
Fan Warning ...................................................................... 323, 508
Ｅ fatal....................................................................................................... 504
fault....................................................................................................... 331
earth leakage breaker............................................................. 515
fatal .................................................................... 504
Easy Start On ............................................................................... 242
latch.................................................................... 504
EEP Rom Empty ........................................................................ 235 level .................................................................... 504
EG terminal ....................................................................................... 34 major fault.......................................................... 331
electronic thermal overheating protection (ETH) 304 fault monitoring ............................................................................... 67
multiple fault trips .................................................68
EMC filter ............................................................................................ 37
fault signal output terminal.............. Refer to A1/C1/B1
asymmetric power source .................................. 37
terminal
disabling .................................................. 37, 38, 39
fault trip mode .................................................................................. 52
enable .................................................................. 38
enabling .........................................................38, 39 fault/warning list........................................................................... 331
emergency stop fault trip ................................... Refer to BX braking resistor braking rate warning ............. 333
Enclosed Type 1 ......................................................................... 533 capacitor lifetime warning ................................ 333
CleanRPTErr Trip ............................................. 332
energy saving ............................................................................... 181
CPU Watch Dog fault trip................................. 333
energy saving operation ....................................................... 221 Damper Err Trip ................................................ 332
automatic energy saving operation ................. 222 E-Thermal ......................................................... 332
manual energy saving operation ..................... 221 External Trip ...................................................... 331
EPID (EPID control) group..................................................... 53 fan replacement warning ................................. 333
EPID (External PID function group).............................. 439 Fan Trip ............................................................. 332
Hx2000 AC Drive
553
목차
Fan Warning ...................................................... 333 frequency reference for 0–10V input .............................. 81
Fire mode Warning ........................................... 333
frequency reference for -10–10V Input ......................... 84
Ground Trip........................................................ 332
In Phase Open .................................................. 332 frequency reference source configuration .................. 71
IO Board Trip ..................................................... 332 frequency setting ........................................................................... 79
Level Detect trip ................................................ 332 I2 current input .....................................................87
Level Detect Warning ....................................... 333 I2 voltage input.....................................................89
Lost Command ................................................. 332 keypad ..................................................................80
Low Battery Warning ........................................ 333 RS-485 .................................................................92
Low Voltage ....................................................... 332 TI pulse input........................................................90
Low Voltage2 ..................................................... 332 V1 voltage input ...................................................81
No Motor Trip..................................................... 332 frequency setting (Pulse train) terminal...... Refer to TI
NTC Open ......................................................... 332 terminal
Option Trip-x ...................................................... 332 frequency setting(voltage) terminal............. Refer to V1
Out Phase Open ............................................... 332 terminal
Over Current1 ................................................... 331 frequency upper and lower limit value
Over Current2 ................................................... 332 Frequency lower limit value ............................. 124
Over Heat .......................................................... 332 Frequency upper limit value ............................ 124
Over Load Trip .................................................. 332 fuse specifications ..................................................................... 538
Over Voltage...................................................... 331
ParaWrite Trip ................................................... 332
Pipe Broken Trip................................................ 332 Ｇ
Pipe Broken Warning........................................ 333
ground................................................................................................... 25
Under Load Trip ................................................ 332
class 3 ground .....................................................26
ferrite ...................................................................................................... 35
ground cable specifications ................................10
fieldbus ........................................................................................ 79, 96 ground fault trip.................................... Refer to Ground Trip
communication option ...................................... 127 Ground Trip .................................................................................... 505
FIFO/FILO....................................................................................... 251
filter time constant......................................................................... 81 Ｈ
filter time constant number.................................................. 128
H100 expansion common area parameter ............. 352
Fire mode ........................................................................................ 219
control area parameter (Read/Write).............. 362
Fire Mode Warning ........................................... 508
memory control area parameter (Read/Write)
flow compensation .................................................................... 179 ....................................................................... 365
maximum compensation value ....................... 179 monitor area parameter (read only)................ 352
flux braking ..................................................................................... 310 half duplex system .................................................................... 334
forward or reverse run prevention..................................... 99
free-run stop ......................................................................... 73, 122 Ｉ
frequency hold by analog input........................................... 93
I/O point map ................................................................................ 380
frequency jump ................................................................... 74, 126
I2 34
frequency limit ..................................................................... 74, 124 analog input selection switch (SW4) .................34
frequency jump.................................................. 126 frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal.......34
frequency upper and lower limit value ............ 124 I2 Terminal ......................................................................................... 87
maximum/start frequency................................. 124
IN (Input terminal function group) .......................... 53, 405
frequency reference ........................................................ 80, 119
In Phase Open............................................................................. 505
554 Hx2000 AC Drive
initializing accumulated electric energy count ....... 243 Ｊ
input and output specifications ......526, 544, 545, 546
Jog operation ................................................................................ 139
input open-phase fault trip ....Refer to In Phase Open
FWD Jog ........................................................... 139
input phase open
Jog frequency ................................................... 139
input open-phase protection ............................ 314
Jog operation 2 by terminal input .................... 140
input power frequency ............................................................ 234
Jog operation 2-Rev Jog by terminal input.............. 140
input power voltage .................................................................. 235
jump frequency ............................................................................ 126
input power voltage settings .............................................. 234
input terminal........................................................................ 33, 129
Ｋ
A (NO) or B (NC) terminal configuration ......... 129
bit setting ............................................................ 129 keypad .................................................................................................. 45
CM terminal ......................................................... 33 [AUTO] key...........................................................46
I2 terminal ............................................................ 34 [ESC] key .............................................................46
NO/NC configuration ........................................ 129 [HAND] key ..........................................................46
P1–P7 terminal.................................................... 33 [Mode] key............................................................46
TI terminal ............................................................ 34 [MULTI] key ................................................... 46, 49
V1 terminal........................................................... 33 [OFF] key..............................................................46
VR terminal .......................................................... 33 [PROG / Ent] key .................................................46
input terminal contact code information ..................................................50
A contact ............................................................ 315 Config mode (CNF) .......................................... 485
B contact ............................................................ 315 configuration mode..............................................52
Input terminal function group ............. Refer to IN (Input cursor keys ........................................................46
terminal function group) display............................................................ 45, 47
inspection display item ..........................................................50
annual inspection .............................................. 519 display mode........................................................51
bi-annual inspection .......................................... 521 LCD brightness/contrast .................................. 243
daily inspection .................................................. 518 monitor mode .......................................................52
installation........................................................................................... 13 monitor mode cursor ...........................................48
basic configuration diagram .......................... 14 monitor mode item ..............................................48
installation flowchart............................................ 13 navigating between groups ................................51
location ................................................................... 6 operating status ............................................ 48, 50
mounting the Inverter.......................................... 16 operation keys .....................................................45
side-by-side installation ........................................ 8 operation mode....................................................49
wiring .................................................................... 22 parameter group ..................................................49
parameter mode ..................................................52
installation conditions .................................................................... 5
parameter value...................................................50
INV Over Load rotational direction ...............................................49
Inv Over Load Warning .................................... 508 S/W version....................................................... 243
Inverter OLT ................................................................................... 505 set value ...............................................................50
inverter overload protection (IOLT)................................ 316 setting range ........................................................50
status bar configuration.......................................48
Inverter overload warning .................................................... 333
trip mode...............................................................52
IO Board connection fault trip. Refer to IO Board Trip
User & Macro mode ............................................52
IO Board Trip................................................................................. 507 wiring length .........................................................35
IP 20 .................................................................................................... 533 keypad display ................................................................................ 47
IP 20 Type external dimensions ...................................... 534 keypad features
Hx2000 AC Drive
555
목차
fault monitoring .................................................... 67 low voltage ...................................................................................... 324
navigating directly to different codes ................. 61 low voltage fault trip ..................................324, 332
navigating through the codes ............................ 59
Low Voltage ................................................................................... 505
operation modes ................................................. 55
Low voltage fault trip during operation ...Refer to Low
parameter settings .............................................. 63
Voltage2 Trip
selecting a display mode .................................... 54
selecting the status bar display item ................. 65 Low Voltage2 ................................................................................ 505
setting the monitor display items ....................... 64 LowLeakage PWM ................................................................... 229
switching between groups in Parameter Display LS INV 485 communication ............................................... 340
mode ............................................................... 57
lubrication ........................................................................................ 178
switching between groups in User & Macro
mode ............................................................... 58 lubrication operation................................................................. 178
keypad title update .................................................................... 243
keypad trip mode ....................................................................... 484 Ｍ
kinetic energy buffering.......................................................... 216
M2 (Secondary Motor function group)........................ 481
M2 (secondary motor-related features) group ......... 53
Ｌ Macro
latch ..................................................................................................... 504 Circulation Pump (MC5) .................................. 497
Compressor (MC1) .......................................... 490
LCD display....................................................................................... 47 Constant Torque (MC7) ................................... 501
learning basic features .............................................................. 71 Cooling Tower (MC4) ....................................... 496
level...................................................................................................... 504 Exhaust Fan (MC3) .......................................... 494
Supply Fan (MC2) ............................................ 492
level dectectiontrip restart time......................................... 194
Vacuum Pump (MC6) ...................................... 499
Level Detect ................................................................................... 507 Macro function group .............................................................. 490
Level Detect Warning ....................................... 508
Macro group .................................................................................. 490
Level Detect Trip......................................................................... 332
Macro mode ..................................................................................... 54
level detection control ............................................................. 193
macro selection ........................................................................... 244
lift-type load ........................................................................ 109, 116
Macro selection
linear pattern.................................................................................. 109 Basic .................................................................. 244
linear V/F operation ..................................................................... 72 Circulation Pump .............................................. 245
Compressor ...................................................... 244
linear V/F pattern operation ................................................ 112
Constant Torque ............................................... 245
base frequency.................................................. 112
Coolong Tower.................................................. 244
start frequency................................................... 112
Supply Fan ........................................................ 244
load tuning ...................................................................................... 191 Vacuum Pump .................................................. 245
Lost Command............................................................................ 507 magnetic contactor ...................................................................... 30
command loss fault trip warning ...................... 333 main capacitor life estimation ............................................ 329
command loss trip............................................. 332
CAP Level 1 ...................................................... 330
Lost Command Warning .................................. 508
CAP Level 2 ...................................................... 330
Lost KeyPad .................................................................................. 506
maintenance ................................................................................. 518
Lost KeyPad Warning....................................... 508
manual torque boost....................................................... 73, 116
Low Battery
low battery warning ........................................... 509 master ................................................................................................ 335
low battery warning................................................................... 321 maximum allowed prospective short-circuit currentiii
556 Hx2000 AC Drive

megger test ........................................................................ 519, 521 rotation control .....................................................72
thermal protection(ETH)
Metasys-N2.................................................................................... 336
E-Thermal ......................................................................... 304
analog input ....................................................... 381
analog output..................................................... 380 verifying rotational direction ................................43
binary input ........................................................ 383 Motor overheat fault trip ........................................................ 332
binary output ...................................................... 381 motor thermal protection(ETH)
communication standard.................................. 379 ETH trip ............................................................. 304
error code .......................................................... 384 mounting bolt ................................................................................... 16
I/O point map ..................................................... 380 Multi Key
protocol .............................................................. 379 Multi key item .................................................... 487
metasys-N2 communication .............................................. 379 Multi Key Sel ..................................................... 487
Metasys-N2 I/O map multi-drop link system ............................................................. 334
analog input ....................................................... 381
multi-function input terminal................................................... 33
analog output..................................................... 380
factory default.......................................................33
binary input ........................................................ 383
IN 65–71 ............................................................ 408
binary output ...................................................... 381
multi-function input terminal Off filter............... 128
MMC ................................................................................................... 246
multi-function input terminal On filter .............. 128
auto cahnge............................. 257, 258, 271, 272 P1–P7 ...................................................................33
auto change aux ............................................... 263 Px Define ........................................................... 408
basic sequence ................................................. 253 Px terminal configuration ................................. 408
interlock .............................................................. 267
multi-function input terminal control .................. 128, 130
레귤러 바이패스 ..................... 277, 279, 280, 281
multi-function input terminals
MMC Interlock .............................................................................. 507
factory default.......................................................33
Modbus-RTU ................................................................................ 336 multi-function output terminal
Modbus-RTU communication........................................... 340 multi-function output category (Q1 Define) .... 417
multi-function output on/off control ........... 283
Modbus-RTU function code and protocol ................ 344
multi-function output terminal and relay settings
Modbus-RTU protocol
....................................................................... 292
exception code................................................ 346
multi-function output terminal delay time settings
read holding resister ......................................... 344
....................................................................... 298
read input resister ............................................. 344
multi-function relay1 category (Relay 1)......... 415
momentary power interruption ............................. 224, 225 multi-function relay2 category (Relay 2)......... 417
monitoring multi-function relay3category (Relay 3).......... 417
monitor mode ...................................................... 52 multi-function relay4 category (Relay 4)......... 417
monitor mode cursor........................................... 48 multi-function relay5 category (Relay 5)......... 417
monitor mode display ......................................... 47 trip output by multi-function output terminal and relay
monitor mode item .............................................. 48 ....................................................................... 297
operation state monitoring................................ 299 multi-function terminal configuration................................ 74
operation time monitoring................................. 302
multiple motor control.............................................................. 246
motor features
capacity .............................................................. 147 multi-step frequency.................................................................... 94
efficiency ............................................................ 147 setting ...................................................................94
no-load current .................................................. 147 Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H ..............................95
operation display options ................................... 71 multi-step speed (frequency) ................................................ 71
output voltage adjustment ................................ 118
overheat sensor ................................................ 306
protection ........................................................... 304
Hx2000 AC Drive
557
목차
Ｎ Over Current2............................................................................... 506
Over Heat ........................................................................................ 506
N- terminal (- DC link terminal)................................... 27, 29
over heat fault trip .................................. Refer to Over Heat
no motor trip................................................................................... 327
Over Load ....................................................................................... 505
No Motor Trip ................................................................................ 505 Over Load Warning .......................................... 508
noise.............................................................................................. 37, 83 overload fault trip .............................................. 332
Normal PWM ................................................................................ 229 overload warning .............................................. 333
Over Voltage.................................................................................. 505
NPN mode (Sink).......................................................................... 36
over voltage trip .................................Refer to Over Voltage
NTC Open....................................................................................... 506 overload ....................................................... Refer to Over Load
number of motor poles ........................................................... 147 overload trip....................................................... 308
overload warning .............................................. 308
Ｏ overload rate ................................................................................. 230
overload trip .............................................. Refer to Over Load
open-phase protection ........................................................... 314
operation frequency ............. Refer to frequency setting Ｐ
operation mode selection........................................................ 71
P/I gain............................................................................................... 225
operation noise ............................................................................ 229
carrier frequency ............................................... 229 P1+ terminal (+ DC link terminal) ...................................... 27
frequency jump.................................................. 126 P2+ terminal (+ DC link terminal) ............................. 27, 29
operation time............................................................................... 302 P2+/B terminal ................................................................................ 28
cumulated operation time................................. 302 P3+ terminals (+ DC link terminal).................................... 29
initialize cumulated operation time .................. 302
parameter ........................................................................................... 63
inverter power-on time...................................... 302
option trip ................................... 326, Refer to Option Trip-x display changed parameter ............................. 239
hide parameter mode....................................... 237
Option Trip-1.................................................................................. 507 initializing the parameters ...................................69
Option Trip-x parameter initialization.................................. 236
option trip ........................................................... 332 parameter lock .................................................. 238
OUT (Output terminal function group) ............... 53, 413 parameter settings...............................................63
Out Phase Open ........................................................................ 505 password ...................................................237, 238
Parameter Initialization........................................................... 236
output block by multi-function terminal ....................... 325
output open-phase fault trip........... Refer to Out Phase parameter mode ............................................................................ 52
Open parameter setting mode ........................................................... 53
output terminal ................................Refer to R/S/T terminal ParaWrite Trip............................................................................... 507
Output terminal function group.................. Refer to OUT
parmeter
(Output terminal function group)
read/write/save ................................................. 235
output/communication terminal........................................... 34
part names............................................................................................ 3
24 terminal.......................................................... 34
A1/C1/B1 terminal ............................................. 35 parts illustrated................................................................................... 3
AO terminal ........................................................ 34 parts life............................................................................................. 329
EG terminal ........................................................ 34 capacitor life estimation.................................... 329
S+/S-/SG terminal ............................................. 35 fan life ................................................................ 330
over current trip ..............................Refer to Over Current1 password ................................................................. 237, 238, 366
Over Current1............................................................................... 505
payback counter ......................................................................... 181
558 Hx2000 AC Drive
phase-to-phase voltage......................................................... 514 pre-heating...................................................................................... 198
PID preparing the installation............................................................. 1
flow control......................................................... 149
press regeneration prevention.......................................... 284
pressure control ................................................ 149
P gain/I gain ...................................................... 284
speed control ..................................................... 149
temperature control........................................... 149 product identification ...................................................................... 1
PID (Advanced function group) ....................................... 427 product specification details ............................................... 531
PID (PID control) group ............................................................ 53 protocol
BACnet protocol ............................................... 367
PID control
Metasys-N2 protocol ........................................ 379
PID openloop .................................................... 167
PRT (protection features) group......................................... 53
PID operation sleep mode ............................... 165
PID operation switching.................................... 167 PRT (Protection function group)...................................... 471
PID reference .................................................... 160 Pulse output terminal .................... Refer to TO terminal
PID control group .. Refer to PID (PID control) group) pump clean..................................................................................... 183
pipe break........................................................................................ 196 Pump clean trip ..................... Refer to Pump Clean Trip
pipe break dectection control PWM ................................................................................................... 229
Pipe Broken ....................................................... 196 frequency modulation....................................... 229
pipe break detection control
Pipe Broken ....................................................... 507
Ｑ
Pipe Broken Warning........................................ 508
Pipe Broken fault trip ..............Refer to PipeBroken Trip quantizing ........................................................................................... 83
PNP mode (Source) ................................................................... 36 Quantizing
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2)..................... 31 noise .....................................................................83
NPN mode (Sink)................................................ 36 quick reference ................................................................................. iv
PNP mode (Source) ........................................... 36
post-installation checklist ......................................................... 41 Ｒ
potentiometer................................................................................... 33
R/S/T terminals .......................................................... 27, 29, 512
power braking .................................................................................. 74
R/S/T terminals ............................................................................... 30
power consumption ...................................................... 300, 301
rating
power input terminal....................Refer to R/S/T terminal
derating.............................................................. 541
power output terminal ................Refer to R/S/T terminal
rated motor current ........................................... 147
power terminal board wiring .................................................. 26 rated motor voltage .......................................... 200
power terminals.............................................................................. 29 rated slip frequency .......................................... 148
N- terminal .....................................................27, 29 rated slip speed ................................................ 147
P1+ terminal ........................................................ 27 rating plate ............................................................................................ 1
P2+ terminal ..................................................27, 29 reactor .......................................................................................... 14, 15
P2+/B terminal..................................................... 28
reactors specifications ............................................................ 538
P3+ terminal ........................................................ 29
R/S/T terminals..............................................27, 29 real-time clock ................................................................................. 19
U/V/W terminal ..............................................28, 29 regenerated energy.................................................................. 123
PowerOn Resume .................................................................... 303 Reset Restart................................................................................ 102
PowerOn Resume by serial communication ......... 303 settings ............................................................. 227
Power-on Run .............................................................................. 100 resonance frequency
carrier frequency ............................................... 229
Hx2000 AC Drive
559
목차
restarting after a trip Power-on Run/PowerOn Resume in each mode
Reset Restart .................................................... 102 ..........................................................................78
retry number .................................................................................. 102 switching between the modes ............................77
sequence common terminal ......Refer to CM terminal
ripple....................................................................................................... 84
side-by-side installation ............................................................... 8
RS-232 .............................................................................................. 335
slave .................................................................................................... 335
communication .................................................. 335
RS-485 .............................................................................................. 334 slip......................................................................................................... 147
communication .................................................. 335 slip compensation operation .............................................. 147
converter ............................................................ 335 soft fill control
integrated communication.................................. 92 soft fill operation ................................................ 163
setting command and frequency ..................... 338 speed command loss.............................................................. 316
signal terminal ...............................................35, 92
speed search operation......................................................... 222
RS-485 signal input terminal......... Refer to S+/S-/SG
Flying Start-1 ..................................................... 223
terminal
Flying Start-2 ..................................................... 223
RTC battery........................................................................... 19, 522
options ............................................................... 224
enabling ............................................................... 19 P/I gain............................................................... 225
replacing ............................................................ 522
speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm)...................................... 94
specifications ..................................................... 522
run prevention square reduction............................................................................ 73
Fwd..................................................................... 100 square reduction load .......................................113
Rev ..................................................................... 100 V/F pattern operation ........................................113
stall ....................................................................................................... 310
Ｓ bit On/Off ............................................................311
stall prevention .................................................. 310
S/W version.................................................................................... 243 start after DC braking ................................................................. 73
inverter ............................................................... 243 start at power-on
keypad ............................................................... 243 PowerOn Resume............................................ 101
S+/S-/SG terminal ........................................................................ 35 Power-on Run................................................... 100
safe operation mode................................................................ 144 start mode ....................................................................................... 119
safety information..............................................................................ii acceleration start ...............................................119
start after DC braking ........................................119
screw specification
Start&End Ramp operation ................................................ 187
control circuit terminal screw ............................ 540
input/output terminal screw .............................. 539 Station ID ......................................................................................... 344
screw size .......................................................... 539 stop mode ....................................................................................... 120
screw torque ...................................................... 539 DC braking after stop ....................................... 121
S-curve pattern ............................................................................ 109 deceleration stop .............................................. 120
actual Acc/Dec time .......................................... 111 free run stop ...................................................... 122
secondary motor-related features group Refer to M2 power braking ................................................... 123
(the secondary motor-related features) group storage............................................................................................... 525
selecting operation modes ............................................ 55, 74 Supply Fan (MC2)..................................................................... 492
auto mode operation .......................................... 75
surge killer ................................................................................. 30, 41
basic operation .................................................... 76
SW1 Refer to Terminating Resistor selection switch
function codes ..................................................... 77
(SW1)
hand mode operation ......................................... 74
SW2............Refer to PNP/NPN mode selection switch
mode keys and indicators .................................. 75
560 Hx2000 AC Drive
(SW2) TO terminal..................................................................................... 289
SW3......Refer to V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch
torque .................................................................................................... 22
(SW3)
SW4..... Refer to analog input selection switch (SW4) torque boost................................................................................... 116
SW5 Refer to analog output selection switch (SW5) auto torque boost...............................................117
switch manual torque boost .........................................116
analog input selection switch (SW4) ................. 31 overexcitation .....................................................116
analog output selection switch (SW5)............... 31 trip ......................................................................................................... 504
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2).......... 31 erasing trip history ............................................ 243
Terminating Resistor selection switch (SW1)... 31 fault/waring list .................................................. 331
V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3) ..... 31 trip no motor trip ................................................ 327
Switches .............................................................................................. 31 trip status reset.................................................. 326
troubleshooting ................................................. 510
Ｔ Trip mode............................................................................................ 52
Trip mode......................................................................................... 484
target frequency
Cmd frequency.................................................. 386 troubleshooting ............................................................................ 503
Temperature sensor fault trip............................ NTC Open fault trips ............................................................ 510
terminal other faults......................................................... 512
A terminal .................................................. 129, 298
B terminal.................................................. 129, 298 Ｕ
terminal for frequency reference setting . Refer to VR
terminal U&M mode ......................................................................... 241, 343
terminal screw specifications............................................. 539 U/V/W terminals ............................................... 28, 29, 30, 512
Terminating Resistor selection switch (SW1) ........... 31 Under Load
test run .................................................................................................. 43 Under Load Trip ........................................322, 505
Under Load Warning ................................322, 508
Thermal Trip................................................................................... 506 underload fault trip ............................................ 332
TI terminal ................................................................................. 34, 90 underload warning............................................ 333
Time Event...................................................................................... 203 underload fault trip............................. Refer to Under Load
Unipolar................................................................................................ 34
time event scheduling ............................................................. 203
Exception Date.................................................. 203 up-down operation .................................................................... 141
module types ..................................................... 203 User & Macro mode.................................................. 51, 52, 54
parameters ........................................................ 203 User group ...................................................................................... 240
RTC battery ....................................................... 203
delete parameters ............................................ 241
RTC clock .......................................................... 203
parameter registration ...................................... 240
Time Event......................................................... 203
User mode ......................................................................................... 54
Time Period Module ......................................... 203
Time Period Module................................................................. 203 user V/F pattern operation................................................... 114
time scale setting........................................................................ 103 User/Macro group

parameter group ............................................... 343
0.01sec .............................................................. 104
U&M mode ........................................................ 343
0.1sec................................................................. 104
using the keypad ........................................................................... 54
1sec .................................................................... 104
timer ................................................................................................... 245
protection features group .. PRT (protection features) Ｖ
group
V/F control ....................................................................................... 112
Hx2000 AC Drive
561
목차
linear V/F pattern operation ............................. 112 fault/warning list ................................................ 331
square reductionV/F pattern operation ........... 113 warning message ............................................. 508
user V/F pattern operation ............................... 114 Warning............................................................................................. 333
V/F pattern configuration .................................... 73
wiring............................................................................................. 10, 22
V1 terminal................................................................................ 33, 81
control terminal board wiring ..............................31
V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3)............... 31 copper cable ........................................................22
V2 disassembling the cover .....................................23
analog input selection switch (SW4) ................. 34 ferrite .....................................................................35
V2 input ................................................................................................ 89 ground ..................................................................25
I2 voltage input .................................................... 89 power terminal board ..........................................26
re-assembling the cover .....................................40
Vacuum Pump (MC6)............................................................. 499
wiring length .........................................................35
variable torque load.................................................................. 113 Write parameter fault trip .........Refer to ParaWrite Trip
vent cover .............................................................................................. 8
virtual multi-function input..................................................... 340 ㄷ
voltage/current output terminal..Refer to AO terminal 다기능 입력 단자
VR terminal........................................................................................ 33 다기능 입력 단자 오프 필터.......................... 130
다기능 입력 단자 온 필터.............................. 130
Ｗ
warning.................................................................................. 331, 504
562 Hx2000 AC Drive

Untitled

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Untitled

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Untitled

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and electric

Safety symbols in this manual

• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

Hx2000 AC Drive iii

Quick Reference Table

4.2.3 V1 Terminal as the Source ......................................................... 81

4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking .............................................................. 121

Hx2000 AC Drive vii

5.20 Pre-heating Function ............................................................................. 198

viii Hx2000 AC Drive

5.47.2 Analog Pulse Output................................................................. 289

7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ..................................... 339

8.16.2 Supply Fan (MC2) Group ......................................................... 492

xii Hx2000 AC Drive

1 Preparing the Installation

1.1 Product Identification

1.2 Part Names

1.3 Installation Considerations

1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation

• The vent covers must be removed for side-by-side installations.

1.5 Cable Selection

Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications

Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Load (kW) Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

Terminals Wire thickness 1)

2 Installing the Inverter

Product Identification (p.1)

Select the Installation Location (p.5)

Mounting the Inverter (p.16)

Wiring the Ground Connection (p.25)

Power and Signal Wiring (p.26)

Post-Installation Checks (p.41)

Turning on the Inverter

Parameter Configuration (p.53)

Basic configuration diagram

Compatible Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models.

18.5 DN1-160M 125 110

1.5 MOG-S1/ MOG-H1 6.3 - 10 9

90 DN3-400M 320 265

2.1 Mounting the Inverter

2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery

0.75–30 kW Models 37–90 kW Models

3 Remove the keypad from the inverter body.

0.75–30 kW Models 37–90 kW Models

0.75–30 kW Models 37–90 kW Models

2.3 Cable Wiring

• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

Step 1 Terminal Cover and Cable Guide

0.75–30 kW / 35–90 kW (3-Phase)

Step 2 Ground Connection

• 200 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 100 Ω.

Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

Terminal Labels Name Description

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring